7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-1
983209 SAP AG
R
TABC40TABC40
Application DevelopmentApplication Development
ABAPABAP WorkbenchWorkbench
n
System R3 Application Development ABAP Workbenchn Release 40A
n June 1999
n 50027284
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-2
983209 SAP AG
R
Copyright
Copyright 1998 SAP AG All rights reserved
Neither this training manual nor any part thereof may
be copied or reproduced in any form or by any means
or translated into another language without the prior
consent of SAP AG The information contained in this
document is subject to change and supplement
without prior notice
All rights reserved
Trademarksbull SAP and the SAP logo are registered trademarks of SAP AG
bull MS-DOS and EXCEL are registered trademarks of Microsoft
bull OS2 CICS MVS ACFVTAM VSE AIX OS400 and AS400 are registered trademarks of
IBM
bull X Window System is a registered trademark of MIT University
bull SINIX UTM and BS2000 are registered trademarks of Siemens
bull UNIX is a registered trademark of ATampT
bull HP-UX is a registered trademark of Hewlett Packard
bull DECnet DECstation DECsystem VAXstation and VMS are registered trademarks of DEC
bull Ethernet is a registered trademark of the Xerox Corporation
bull ORACLE SQLnet SQL+ PROC are registered trademarks of the ORACLE Corporation
bull INFORMIX-OnLine and INFORMIX-ESQLC are registered trademarks of the INFORMIX
Corporation
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-3
983209 SAP AG
R
Week overview
Week 3 Transaction Programming
Week 4 Interfaces for Data Transfer
Enhancements andModifications
Week 1 Basis Technology - Overview
ABAP Workbench Basics
Week 2 ABAP Dictionary
Techniques of List Processing
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 434
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-4
983209 SAP AG
R
R3 Integration Model
R3R3ClientServer
ABAP
ClientServer
ABAP
COControlling
COControlling
AAAsset
Accounting
AAAsset
Accounting
PSProjectSystem
PSProjectSystem
WFWorkflow
WFWorkflow
ISIndustry
Solutions
ISIndustry
Solutions
MMMaterials
Mgmt
MMMaterials
Mgmt
HRHuman
Resources
HRHuman
Resources
SDSales amp
Distribution
SDSales amp
Distribution
PPProduction
Planning
PPProduction
Planning
QMQualityMgmt
QMQualityMgmt
FIFinancial
Accounting
FIFinancial
Accounting
PMPlant
Maintenance
PMPlant
Maintenance
bull The SAP R3 System continues to set new standards for universal standard software Based on progressive development techniques the SAP R3 System allows comprehensive integration of
business administration and data processing
bull The SAP R3 System components are characterized by comprehensive business functions with the
most modern technology The integration of the applications ensures that all the functions are
directly available in the system and thus in the enterprise
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 534
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-5
TABC40 40 Application Development - ABAP Workbench
Preface Unit 0
CopyrightWeek Overview
The R3 Integration Model
B a s i s ndash T e c h n o l o g y ndash Overview
Basis Technology - Overview Unit 1
Content
Basis System and the System Environment
Basis System - Objectives
R3 Integration Diagram
R3 in the Business Framework
Business Framework Components
R3 as an Open System
Client Server - Scalability of the R3 System
Client Server Principles
R3 System Client Server Configurations
Three-Tier Hierarchy
R3 Basis Middleware
R3 Basis System Overview
System Platforms for the R3 SystemBasis System - Summary
Navigation Unit 2
Objectives
Logging On
Clients in the R3 System
R3 Menu Structure
Screen
Selecting Functions
Field Help
R3 Online HelpSystem Functions - Services
System Functions - User Profile
Favorites List
Session Manager
Navigation - Summary
Exercise for Unit NavigationSolutions to Unit Navigation
System Kernel Unit 3
System Kernel - Objectives
R3 Presentation InterfaceRelational Database Management Systems
R3 Database Interface
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 634
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-6
Processing User Requests
Dialog Work Processes
R3 Application Services
SAP Transactions and Screens
LUW (Logical Unit of Work)
Requesting a Lock SAP Lock Objects
Writing Log Records
Updating Log Records
Removing Locks
Background Processing
Workload Balancing
R3 Printer Services
R3 Instance
System Kernel - Summary
Exercise for Unit System Kernel Solutions to Unit System Kernel
Administration and Remote Services Unit 4
Administration - Objectives
Security Aspects in the R3 System
The Authorization Concept
The Profile Generator
System Administration
System Administration Terminations
R3 Computing Center Management System
Workload Alert Monitor
R3 Service amp Support Virtual Infrastructure
SAP Remote ServicesR3 Online Service System (OSS)
Administration - Summary
Exercise for Unit AdministrationSolutions to Unit Administration
A B A P W o r k b e n c h B a s i c s
ABAP Workbench Basics Unit 5
ContentABAP Workbench Overview
Objectives
R3 ClientServer Architecture
R3 ClientServer Architecture
R3 ClientServer Architecture
R3 ClientServer Architecture
ABAP
R3 Repository and Repository Objects
ABAP Workbench Tools
Repository Browser
Repository Browser Object ListTransporting Repository Objects
Development Projects in the WBO
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 734
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-7
Finishing Projects
Creating Development Classes
Assigning Change Requests
Programs with User and Database Dialog
Overview Creating Programs
Program AttributesImportant Editor Functions
Global Role of the ABAP Dictionary
1 User Dialog Selection Screens
1 User Dialog Selection Screen II
2 User Dialog Screens
Creating Screens
Database Dialog Open SQL
3 User Dialog Messages
4 User Dialog Lists
General ABAP Syntax
General ABAP Syntax and Chained Statements
Comments
ABAP Program Operations
Summary
Exercises for Unit ABAP Workbench Solutions for Unit ABAP Workbench
ABAP Dictionary Contents Unit 6
ABAP Dictionary Objectives
Data Modeling
Flight Data Model for ABAP Training Courses
Data Model
Realization in the ABAP DictionaryIntegration into ABAP Workbench (Active)
Basic Dictionary Objects
Dual Level Domain Concept
Transparent Tables
Creating Transparent Tables
Structures
Creating Structures
ABAP Dictionary Views
Advanced Techniques Search Help
ABAP Dictionary Summary
Exercises for Unit ABAP Dictionary Solutions for Unit ABAP Dictionary
ABAP Open SQL - Contents Unit 7
ABAP Open SQL Unit Objectives
The R3 ClientServer Architecture
The Database Interface
Open SQL Statements Overview
SELECT Statement Overview
Using the SELECT Statement for a Single Line
Using the SELECT Statement for Several Lines
Using the SELECT Statement for an Internal TableWHERE Clauses
ABAP Open SQL Summary
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 834
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-8
Exercises for Unit ABAP Open SQL Solutions for Unit ABAP Open SQL
ABAP Data and Statements Contents Unit 8
Objectives
The R3 ClientServer ArchitectureThe ABAP Type Concept
Defining Data Objects Overview
Data Types
Predefined Data Types
Elementary Data Objects
Structures
Internal Tables
Referring to ABAP Dictionary Objects
Type Groups in the ABAP Dictionary
PARAMETERS and TABLES
Literals and Constants
Text Symbols
Summary of Declarative Statements
Initializing Data Objects
Assigning Values
Assigning Values Field for Field
Type Conversion
Conversion Rules for Elementary Types
Conversion Rules for Structure Types
Calculating Values
Sub-fields
Calculating Dates
Control Statements OverviewLogical Expressions
Case Distinctions
DO and WHILE Loops
CHECK and EXIT
Summary
Summary (2)
Exercises for Unit ABAP Data and Statements Solutions for Unit ABAP Data and Statements
Test Tools Contents Unit 9
Test Tools Unit ObjectivesTest Tools
Debugging
Important Debugging Functions I
Important Debugging Functions II
Debugger Overview
Breakpoints
Advanced Techniques Runtime Analysis
Advanced Techniques SQL Trace
Advanced Techniques Computer Aided Test Tool
Summary
Internal Tables Contents Unit 10
Internal Tables Objectives
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 934
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-9
The R3 ClientServer Architecture
Internal Tables
Dynamic Table Expansion
Table Attributes Line Type
Keys
Data Access QuantitiesData Access Types
Table Types
Internal Table Work Areas
Defining Internal Tables
Filling Internal Tables
Array Fetch
Sorting an Internal Table
Loop Processing in Internal Tables
Accessing Individual Internal Table Entries
Changing an Internal Table with the Index
Changing an Internal Table with Keys
Deleting an Internal Table
Internal Tables withwithout Header Lines
Control Level Processing
Internal Tables Summary 1
Internal Tables Summary 2
Exercises for Unit Internal Tables Solutions for Unit Internal Tables
Modularization and Program Structure Unit 11
Objectives
Modularization and Program Structure
Structure of an ABAP ProgramStructure of Earlier Programs from the Course
Processing Block Types
Modularization and Program Structure
Event Blocks
Events in Executable Programs (Type 1)
Syntax Event Blocks
Modularization and Program Structure
Subroutines
Defining Subroutines
Defining the Interface
Data VisibilityCalling Subroutines
Calling Subroutines Syntax
Interface Parameters Structures
Interface Parameters Internal Tables
Modularization and Program Structure
Function Modules as Processing Blocks
Calling Function Modules
Creating a Function Group
Creating a Function Module
Elements of a Function Module
Interface Import ParametersException Handling
Function Module Source Code
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1034
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-10
Documentation and Testing
Calling Function Modules
Catching Exceptions
Central Role of Function Modules
Modularization and Program Structure
Includes Type I ProgramsTOP Includes
Standard Includes for Function Groups
Function Modules Summary
Exercises for Unit Modularization and Structure Solutions for Unit Modularization and Program Structure
Dialogs Contents Unit 12
Dialogs Unit Objectives
Dialogs
The R3 ClientServer Architecture
Overview
User Dialogs
Dialogs - Lists
Lists
List Operations
Page Headers
Multilingual Capability
ColorsIconsSymbols in Lists
Lists in Executable Programs
Details Lists
Example A Simple Details List
Syntax A Simple Details List
Details List ExampleHIDE Areas
Line Selection
Line Selection Syntax
Advanced Techniques Lists as Input Tools and Details Lists
Dialogs - Selection Screens
Selection Screens
The Selection Screen
Entering Selections
Search Help
Variants
Selection TextsRecap PARAMETERS
Using Parameters in the SELECT Statement
SELECT-OPTIONS
Using Select-Options in the SELECT Statement
Standard Selection Screens in Executable Programs
Standard Selection Screen Processing
Additional Input Checks
AT SELECTION-SCREEN
Example User-defined Selection Screens
User-defined Selection Screens
Syntax Defining and Calling Selection ScreensDialogs - User Messages
User Messages Overview
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-11
Syntax MESSAGE Statements
Dialog Message Types
Dialogs - Screens
Screens Strengths
Using Screens
Screens an ExampleParts of a Screen
Step 1 Creating a Screen
Creating a Screen Screen Attributes
Layout and Field Attributes 1
Layout and Field Attributes 2
Field Attributes The Field List
Check Tables
Step 2 Displaying Data
Screen Interfaces
Screen Processing Logic PBO and PAI
Screen Processing Blocks
PBO and PAI Processing Logic
Data Transport between Screens and Programs
Flow Logic
Step 3 Defining Pushbuttons
Defining Function Codes
Assigning a Field Name to the OK_CODE Field
Program Logic
Static Screen Sequencing
Dynamic Screen Sequencing
Database Updates
Advanced Techniques Screens
Dialogs - InterfacesOverview Interface Objects
Example Program Interface
Basic Interface Elements
Statuses Interface Views
Creating GUI Statuses for Lists
Creating Statuses Key Settings
Creating Statuses Menu Bars
Example Program Interface
Creating GUI Titles for a Screen
Creating GUI Statuses for a Screen
Title and StatusSummary Interfaces
Summary
Exercises for Unit Dialogs Solutions for Unit Dialogs
Authorization Checks Contents Unit 13
Objectives
Basic Authorization Concepts
Authorization Cehcks in Programs
AUTHORITY-CHECK Syntax
SummaryAuthorization Checks Summary
Exercises for Unit Authorization Checks
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-12
Solutions for Unit Authorization Checks
Software Logistics and Software Modifications Contents Unit 14
Software Logistics and Software Modifications Unit Object
Software Logistics and Software Modification
Workbench Organizer and Transport SystemManaging Development Projects in the WBO
Completing a Project
Functions of a Change Request
Local Objects
Originals and Copies
SAP Objects as Copies
Task Attributes
Changing Customer Copies
Changing SAP Copies (Modifications)
Software Logistics and Software Modification
Change Levels
Functional Enhancements
Enhancing User Dialogs
Enhancements Examples
Registering Developers in the SSCR
Software Logistics and Software Modification Summary
Software Logistics and Software Modifications Summary (II)
Exercises for Unit Software Logistics and Modification
Appendix Unit 15
Repository-Infosystem
Objectives
R3 Repository and Repository-ObjectsTypical Information System Requests
The Repository Information System
The SAP Application Hierarchy
Summary
Summary 2
Foreign Data Transfer
External Data Transfer
R3 Communication Interfaces I
R3 Communication Interfaces II
Termination Conditions 2
Advanced Techniques Dynamic Screen SequencingAdvanced Techniques Update
Appendix 1
Appendix 2
A B A P D i c t i o n a r y
ABAP Dictionary Unit 16
Content
IntroductionObjectives
Functions of the ABAP Dictionary
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-13
Linking to the ABAP Workbench (Active)
Access from ABAP Program
Summary
Tables in the ABAP Dictionary Unit 17
Objectives-Tables in the ABAP DictionaryTables and Fields
Basic Objects of the ABAP Dictionary
Two-Level Domain Concept Example
Transparent Tables
Structures
Technical Settings
Data Class
Size Category
Buffering Tables
Logging
Consistency between ABAP Dictionary and DB
Summary - Tables in the ABAP Dictionary
Exercises on Unit Tables in the ABAP Dictionary nSolutions to Unit Tables in the ABAP Dictionary
Performance during Table Access Unit 18
Objectives - Performance during Table Access
Indexes
Primary Index
Secondary Indexes
Data Access using the Buffer
Table Buffering
Full BufferingGeneric Buffering
Single-Record Buffering
Buffer Synchronization 1
Buffer Synchronization 2
Buffer Synchronization 3
Buffer Synchronization 4
Buffer Synchronization 5
Buffer Synchronization 6
Summary - Performance during Table Access
Exercises on Unit Performance during Table Access
Solutions to Unit Performance during Table Access
Relationships between Tables in the ABAP Dictionary Unit 19
Objectives - Relationships between Tables in the ABAP Dict
Definition of a Foreign Key
Foreign Key Fields Check Fields
Inserting a Data Record
Violation of the Foreign Key Check
Foreign Key Definitions in the Check Field
Requirements for the Field Assignment
Domains Value Tables Fixed Values
Check Table not Equal to Value TableField Assignment is not Unique
Semantic Attributes
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1434
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-14
Text Tables
Generic and Constant Foreign Keys
INCLUDE
Summary (1)
Summary (2)
Exercises on Unit Relationships between Tables nnSolutions to Unit Relationships between Tables m
R3 Repository Info System as seen by ABAP Dictionary Unit 20
Objectives - R3 Repository Information System
Typical Queries Made of the Information System
Selection Options
Functions
Summary (1) - R3 Repository Information System
Exercises on Unit The R3 Repository Information SystemSolutions to Unit The R3 Repository Information System
Changes to Tables Unit 21
Objectives - Changes to Tables
Active and Revised Versions
Runtime Objects
Handling Dependent Objects
Changing Database Tables
How is the Structure Adjusted
Conversion Process 1
Conversion Process 2
Conversion Process 3
Conversion Process 4
Conversion Process 5What to Do when a Conversion Terminates
Append Structures 1
Append Structures 2
Append Structures 3
Summary Changes to Tables
Exercises on Unit Changes to TablesSolutions to Unit Changes to Tables m
Views Unit 22
Objectives - Views
Why do you Need ViewsStructure of a View - Starting Situation
Structure of a View - Join Condition
Structure of a View - Field Selection (Projection)
Structure of a View - Selection Condition
How are Tables Linked to Views
Structure of the View
Data Selection with Views
Database Views
Buffering Database Views
Includes in Database Views
Maintenance ViewsInner and Outer Joins
Summary - Views
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1534
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-15
Exercises on Unit Views mmSolutions to Unit Views
Search Helps Unit 23
Objectives - Search Helps
R3 Standard Function Input HelpDescription of an Input Help
Interface of a Search Help
Description of the Dialog Behavior
Selection Method of a Serach Help
View as Selection Method
Performance of the Input Help
Input Help from the Data Element
Check Table Help
Attaching a Search Help to a Field
Input Help from Dictionary or Screen
Overview Mechanisms for the Input Help
Alternative Search Paths
Collective Search Helps and Elementary Search Helps
Further Options for Search Helps
Non-Standard Search Help Exit
Migration of Existing Input Helps
Summary - Search Helps
Exercises on Unit Search Helps nSolutions to Unit Search Helps nn
Appendix Unit 24
Important Menu Paths and Transactions
Decision Tree for Buffering TablesAppendix
T e c h n i q u e s o f L i s t P r o c e s s i n g
Techniques of List Processing Unit 25
Contents 12
Contents 22
Introduction
Course GoalsCourse Objectives
Course Overview Diagram
Business Scenario
Demo Programs Templates and Solutions
Overview of Exercises
Finding and Executing Programs Unit 26
Objectives
How to Find Existing Programs
SAP Anwendungshierarchie
The Repository Information SystemReport Trees Organization
Finding Report Trees
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1634
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-16
Summary
Creating Lists with ABAP Query Unit 27
Objectives
Creating Lists with ABAP Query
Programs and ABAP QueryABAP Query Organization
Creating Queries
Creating Lists with ABAP Query
Defining Queries
Choosing a Query Area and a Functional Area
Choosing Fields
Assigning Short Descriptions
Defining Local Fields
Basic Lists
Lists with Control Levels
Statistics
Ranked Lists
Interactive Functions - Single-Line Lists
Interactive Functions - Multiple-Line Lists
Saving Lists
Summary
Creating Lists with ABAP Query
Outputting Data to Lists Unit 28
Objectives
List Design Options
Generating a List
Setting the List FormatModifying and Suppressing Headers
Open Page Design TOP-OF-PAGE
Setting Fixed Lead Columns
The FORMAT Statement
Outputting Lines
The WRITE Statement General Syntax
The WRITE Statement Icons and Symbols
The WRITE Statement Checkboxes
Additional Statements for Output Design
Multilingual List Elements
System Fields and List GenerationStandard Functions in Lists
Summary Lists
Exercises for Outputting Data to Lists Solutions for Outputting Data to Lists
Selection Screens Unit 29
Objectives
Selection Screen Overivew
Declaration of Fields with PARAMETERS
Selections with SELECT-OPTIONS
Selection Options and Multiple SelectionsSyntax of the SELECT-OPTIONS Statement
Designing the Selection Screen I
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1734
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-17
Designing the Selection Screen II
Initializing the Selection Screen
General Help and Possible Entries Help (F1 and F4)
Input Checks AT SELECTION-SCREEN
CALL SELECTION-SCREEN I
CALL SELECTION-SCREEN IISelektionsbild Varianten I
Selection Screen Variants II
Summary
Exercises for Selection Screens Solutions for Selection Screens
Logical Databases Unit 30
Objectives
Generating Lists
Advantages of a Logical Database
Logical Databases Overview
LDB F1S Nodes
Sample Program for a Logical Database
LDB Sub-Objects Structure
LDB Sub-Objects Selections
Selection Screen for the Logical Database
Logical Database Dynamic Selections
LDB Sub-Objects Database Programs
Interaction Between LDBs and Programs
Events in Logical Databases
Program Flow and Termination Alternatives
Checking Internal Program Selections I
Checking Internal Program Selections IISummary
Exercises for Logical Databases Solutions for Logical Databases
Programming Data Retrieval Unit 31
Objectives
Programming Data Retrieval
Reading Multiple Database Tables
Reading Multiple Database Tables I
Reading Multiple Database Tables IIa
Reading Multiple Database Tables IIbReading Multiple Database Tables III
Reading Multiple Database Tables IV
Summary
Exercises for Programming Data Retrieval Solutions for Programming Data Retrieval
ABAP Query Administration Unit 32
Objectives
ABAP Query Administration
Maintaining User Groups
Authorizations and ABAP QueryABAP Query Administration
Defining Functional Areas
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1834
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-18
Overview Creating Functional Areas
Example Defining a Functional Area
Defining Functional Areas
Allocating Fields
Additional Information
Allocating Additional TablesAllocating Additional Fields
Selection Options
Allocating ABAP Statements
Summary
Exercises for ABAP Query Administration
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing Unit 33
Unit Objectives Control Level Processing
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Motivation
Control Level Processing
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Creating an Internal Table
Filling an Internal Table
Sorting and Editing an Internal Table
Control Level Processing for Internal Tables
Control Level Processing Schema for Internal Tables
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Generating an Extract Steps
Example Generating an Extract
Sorting and Processing an Extract
Example Control Level Processing
Schema for Control Level Processing of ExtractsData Formatting and Control Level Processing
Comparing Internal Tables and Extracts
Summary Control Level Processing
Exercises for Data Formatting and Control Level Processing Solutions for Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Storing Lists and Background Processing Unit 34
Objectives
Storing Lists and Background Processing
Saving Lists Possibilities
Saving Lists in SAPofficeSaving Lists as PC Files
Saving Lists in a Report Tree
Customizing Report Trees
Functions in Report Trees
Storing Lists and Background Processing
Options for Printing a List
Print Parameters
Program-Controlled Printing
Program-Controlled Printing with GET_PRINT_PARAMETERS
Storing Lists and Background Processing
Background Processing PhasesDefining Steps
Defining Start Times and Releasing Jobs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1934
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-19
Summary
Exercises for Storing Lists and Background Processing Solutions for Storing Lists and Background Processing
Interactive Lists Basics Unit 35
Unit Objectives Interactive ListsInteractive Lists Basics
User Interactions with Lists
Navigating Between Lists
Events Overview
Flow Control in Detail Lists
Creating Detail Lists I
Creating Detail Lists II
Interactive Lists Basics
Questions
HIDE Areas
HIDE Technique Line Selection
Data Buffering in a List System
Valid Line Selection
Field Selection
Interactive Lists Basics
Page Headers in Detail Lists
Interactive Lists Basics
Creating Lists in Modal Dialog Boxes
Summary Interactive Lists
Exercises for Interactive Lists Solutions for Interactive Lists
Creating User Interfaces Unit 36Objectives User Interfaces
User Interfaces Overview
Status Technical View I
Status Technical View II
Creating a GUI Status
Creating a GUI Status Assigning F Keys I
Creating a GUI Status Assigning F Keys II
Creating a GUI Status Menu Bars
Activating Title and Status
Event AT USER-COMMAND
Summary User Interfaces
Special Techniques for Interactive Lists Unit 37
Objectives
Scrolling in Lists
Reading Lists
Modifying Lists
List Navigation
Interactive List Messages
System Fields in Interactive Lists
Summary
Exercises for Creating User Interfaces Solutions for Creating User Interfaces
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2034
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-20
Linking Programs Unit 38
Objectives
Linking Programs
Data Visibility
Data Transfer Using SAP Memory
SETGET ParametersSUBMIT Statement Syntax
Example SUBMIT WITH
Datatransfer Using ABAP Memory
Returning from a Called Program
Summary
Exercises for Linking Programs Solutions for Linking Programs
Lists on the Internet Unit 39
Unit Objectives Special Application
Lists on the Internet
Motivation
The World Wide Web
HTTP Hypertext Transport Protocol
URL Uniform Resource Locator
HTML Hypertext Markup Language
R3 ClientServer Architecture
R3 ClientServer Architecture with ITS
Lists on the Internet
Web Reporting - Overview
Web Reporting Flow
Creating a List Using a URL
Parameters for WWW_GET_REPORTInteractive Lists
Access Authorization
Creating HTML Hyperlinks in Lists
Lists on the Internet
Web Reporting Browser
Releasing Report Trees for the Internet
Summary Special Application
Appendix Unit 40
Menu Data
T r a n s a c t i o n P ro g r a m m i n g
Transaction Programming Unit 41
Content
Introduction Contents
Couse Goal
Course Objectives
Overview Diagram
Main Business Scenario
About the Course Material
Basic Transaction Programming Unit 42
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-21
Objectives - Basics
Components of a Transaction
Writing a Transaction Process
Analyzing the Problem
User Dialogs in the R3 System
Advantages of ScreensComponents of a Screen
Static Screen Sequence
Creating a Screen Attributes
Creating a Screen Layout
Creating a Screen Field List
Writing the Flow Logic
Communictaion Between Screen and ABAP Program
Creating a Transaction Code
Summary Basic Dialog Programming
Screen Objects - List Unit 43
Screen Objects - Objectives
Screen Objects
Screen Objects General Attributes
Attributes of Screen Objects (Key)
Dynamically Modifiable Static Attributes
The System Table SCREEN
Modifying Attributes Dynamically Example
Object Attributes Modification Group
Modifying Attributes Dynamically Program
Screen Objects - Screen
Screen Object Screen
Defining and Managing ScreensScreen Attributes
Dynamic Next Screen Overview
Setting the Next Screen Dynamically
Inserting a Sequence of Screens Dynamically
Calling a Dialog Box Dynamically
Window Coordinates
Setting the Cursor Position Dynamically
Screen Objects - Title Bar
Screen Object Title Bar
Creating and Using Title Bars
Screen Objects - Text FieldScreen Object Text Field
Text Fields Attributes
Creating Text Fields
Hiding Texts Dynamically
Dynamically Modifiable Attributes Text Field
Dynamic Screen Modifications Program
Screen Objects - InputOutput Field
Screen Object InputOutput Field
InputOutput Fields Attributes
Creating InputOutput Fields
InputOutput Fields Automatic Field ChecksInputOutput Fields Default Values in SAP Memory
Defining SETGET Parameter Attributes
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-22
Programming Field Input Checks with an Error Dialog
Checking Groups of Fields
Controlling Error Dialogs
Dialog Message Categories
The FIELD Statement and Data Transport
Calling Modules Conditionally (1)Calling Modules Conditionally (2)
Screen Objects Status icon
Screen Objects Status Icons
Status Icons Attributes
Creating Status Icon Fields
Filling Status Icon Fields
Group Box
Screen Objects Group Boxes
Group Boxes Attributes
Screen Objects Radio Buttons
Screen Objects Radio Buttons and Checkboxes
Radio ButtonsCheckboxes Attributes
Creating a Radio Button Group
Creating a Checkbox
Screen Objects - Pushbutton
Screen Objects Pushbuttons
Pushbuttons Attributes
Creating Pushbuttons
Pushbuttons with Function Type E
Screen Objects - Subscreen
Screen Objects Subscreen (1)
Screen Objects Subscreen (2)
Subscreen AttributesCreating a Subscreen Area
Calling a Subscreen
Subscreens from External Programs
Subscreens Encapsulation in Function Groups
Subscreens in Function Groups Call Sequence
Subscreens in Function Groups Data Transport
Screen Objects - Tabstrip Control
Screen Object Tabstrip Control
Tabstrip Elements
Tab Page Technical View
Tabstrip Controls AttributesCreating a Tabstrip Control
Creating a Tabstrip Control Tabstrip Area
Creating a Tabstip Control Tab Title
Creating a Tabstrip Control Subscreens
Scrolling Locally in a Tabstrip Control
Scrolling Locally in a Tabstrip Control Coding
Scrolling in a Tabstrip Control
Scrolling in a Tabstrip Control Coding
Screen Objects - Table Control
Screen Object Table Control
ABAP Table Control (Functions)Table Control Table Settings
Actions in Table Controls
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-23
Creating Table Control Elements
Table Control Attributes
Creating a Table Control
Creating a Table Control Table Control Area
Creating a Table Control TC Fields (1)
Create Table Control TC Fields (2) Section ColumnTable Control Attributes at Runtime
Table Control Attributes (Structure)
Table Control Elements - Processing
Processing a Table Control (Principle 1)
Filling a Table Control
Changing the Contents of a Table Control
Table Control Applications (Principle)
Filling a Table Control Coding
Changing the Contents of a Table Control 4 Coding
Table Controls Field Transport in the PBO
Table Controls Field Transport in the PAI
Table Control Elements Further Techniques
Changing a Table Control
Changing the Attributes of a Table Control (1)
Changing the Attributes of a Table Control (2)
Table Control Modifying Field Attributes Temporarily
Sorting a Table Control (Example)
Scrolling Page by Page in a Table Control (Example)
Table Control Cursor Position (Example)
Screen Objects - GUI Status
Screen Object GUI Status
Status Technical View (1)
Status Technical View (2)Attributes of Functions
Function Key Settings
Menus and Menu Bars Attributes
Status Attributes
Standard Toolbar Functions and their Reserved function Keys
Creating a Status
Navigation - Targets
Navigation - Dialogs
Screen Objects - List
Screen Objects Lists
Displaying a List Within a TransactionLists in a Modal Dialog Box
Screen Objects - Selection Screen
Screen Object Selection Screen
Entering Value Ranges
Defining and Calling a Selection Screen
Summary Screen Objects
Uumlbung zu Kapitel Screen Objects Solutions Screen Objects Unit
Programming Database Changes Unit 44
Unit ObjectivesProgramming Database Changes
Statements for Database Dialogs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2434
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-24
SAP LUW
Database LUW
SAP R3 System 3-tier Architecture
System Architecture Implicit DB COMMIT
Objective Bundling the DB Changes in an SAP LUW
Programming Database ChangesBundling Techniques Overview
Bunding Using Delayed Inline Changes
Bundling Using Subroutines
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundline Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Techniques
Update Function modules
V1 and V2 Update Function Modules
Logging Records for Update
Deleting Update Entries Rollback in the Dialog Program
Rollback in the Update Program
Asynchronous Update
What Happens in a Commit Work
Comparison of Bundling Techniques
Programming Database Updates
Why Set Locks
Database Locks
SAP Locking Concept
Setting Logical Locks
SAP Lock ObjectsENQUEUE and DEQUEUE Function Modules
Calling the Function Modules
The Lock Table
Validity of Locks Scope = 2
Programming Database Updates
SAP Authorization Concept
Authorization Checks
User Master Record Authorizations
Authorization Checks for Transactions
Summary
Exercises Programming Database Updates Unit Solutions Programming Database Updates Unit
Complex Transactions Unit 45
Unit Objectives
Complex Transactions
Synchronous Calls Overview
Calling a Report Program
Calling a Transaction
Encapsulating Dialogs in Function Modules
Synchronous Program Calls Main Memory Contents
Complex TransactionsAsynchronous Calls
Calling Programs Asynchronously
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2534
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-25
Complex Transactions
Passing Data Overview
Passing Data Using the Interface of ABAP Programs
The WITH Addition in the SUBMIT Statement
Memory Areas Logical Model
ABAP MemoryPassing Parameters using the SAP Memory
Passing Parameters (SAP Memory)
Complex Transactions
Synchronous Program Calls SAP LUWs
Asynchronous Program Calls SAP LUWs
Program Calls Visible Data and LUWs
Complex Transactions
RFC Scenario R3 - R3
Enabling Function Modules for RFC
RFC Using ABAP Function Modules
Program Context of a Remote Function
RFC Calls System Exceptions
Complex Transactions
Remote Function Call Overview
Process Diagram Synchronous RFC
Process Diagram Asynchronous RFC
Process Diagram Transactional RFC
Transactional RFC (tRFC) Introduction
tRFC Properties
Complex Transactions
Lock Entries for Local Program Calls
Lock Entries for RFC Calls
Summary Exercises Complex Transactions Unit Solutions Complex Transactions Unit
Static Attributes in the Screen Painter Unit 46
Screen Attributes (1)
Screen Attributes (2)
General Attributes
Dictionary Attributes
Program Attributes
Display Attributes
Special Attributes for Subscreens and Tabstrip ControlsSpecial Attributes for Table Controls
Database Updates Further Information Unit 47
Objectives
Database Updates Further Information
Asynchronous Update
Synchronous Update
Local Update
SAP LUW Timescale of Updates
Database Updates Further Information
V1 and V2 Update Function ModulesV1 Update
V2 Update
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2634
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-26
Database Updates Further Information
Validity of Locks Scope = 1
Validity of Locks Scope = 2
Validity of Locks Scope = 3
ENQUEUE Function Modules Interface Parameters
Summary
Complex Transactions Further Information Unit 48
CALL TRANSACTION lsquoTA01rsquo and SUBMIT lsquoREP01rsquo AND RETURN
Implicit End of a Program or LEAVE PROGRAM
LEAVE TO TRANSACTION lsquoTA01rsquo
SUBMIT lsquoREP01rsquo
CALL FUNCTION lsquoFUNC1rsquoPERFORM form1 IN PROGRAM program
Help Functions Unit 49
Overview Standard F1 and F4 Functions
The Search Help Concept
Dialog for an Immediate Hit List
Dialog with Preselection
Dialog for Selecting a Search Help
Search Help Concepts
Search Helps
Defining the Dialog Fields
Defining the Data Selection
Collective Search Helps
Search Help Concepts
Linking Search Helps to Screen Fields
Search Help Concepts
Programmed Help Functions OverviewProgrammed F1 and F4 Help
The POH and POV Events Process
Function Modules for Data Transport
Field Transport to and from the Screen
Determining the Contents of Screen Fields ( POV POH )
Placing Values in Screen Fields ( POV )
Special F1 Functions
Displaying Input Values for a Table Field (POV)
Search Help Concepts
Overview Input Help Mechanisms
Migrating Existing Input Help
Assigning Number Range Numbers Unit 50
Objectives
Overview
Number Range Objects
Number Range Intervals
Sub-objects
Assigning Internal Numbers
Checking External Numbers
Number Range Information
Accessing Table NRIV 1 Without a Buffer Accessing Table NRIV 2 Without a Buffer
Buffering Number Ranges
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2734
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-27
Using Function Groups to Administer Number Ranges
Summary 1
Summary 2
Creating Change Documents Unit 51
ObjectivesOverview
Change Document Structure
Change Relevance
Change Document Objects
Generating Update Programs
INCLUDE Program Structure
Application Program
Change Document Objects and Internal Tables
Reading Change Documents
Using Function Groups to Edit Change Documents
Summary (1)
Summary (2)
Appendix Unit 52
Documentation ReferencesGlossary Index
I n t e r f a c e s f o r D a t a T r a n s f e r
Interfaces for Data Transfer Unit 53
Content
Data Transfer
Objectives
Data Transfer
Transferring Data Into the R3 System
Direct Data Transfer
Data Transfer Using Interfaces
Data Transfer Workbench
Data Analysis
Data Transfer
Analyzing the SAP Transaction
Assigning DataFormat Conversion
Transferring Legacy Data into the R3 System
Data Transfer Methods
Knowledge Tools
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer
Data Analysis and Formatting Unit 54
Data Analysis - Objectives
Data Analysis and Formatting
Standard Transfer Interfaces for Standard Transfer
Standard Transfer - Tasks
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2834
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-28
IMG Documentation
Data Transfer Workbench (DTW)
Documentation in the DTW
Data Analysis and Formatting
Record Layout Types
FB01 Record Layout StructureSample Data for Record Layouts
Generating Test Data in the DTW
Data Analysis and Formatting
Translating Data
Translating Data in the Legacy System
Generating SAP Structures in the DTW
Translating Data in the R3 System
Translating Data Types
Translating Data for Transaction FB01
Translating Data - Example
Translating Data Using EXCEL
Data Analysis and Formatting
Initializing Record Layouts
Initializing Record Layouts - Example
Filling Record Layouts
Structure of Transaction FB01
Mapping Data in Transaction FB01
Filling Record Layout BGR00 - Example
Data Analysis and Formatting
Additional Tasks
Converting Data
Converting Legacy System R3 System Data
Structure of a Conversion ProgramData Analysis - Summary
Exercises for Unit Data AnalysisSolutions to Unit Data Analysis
Files in the R3 System Unit 55
Objectives
Files in the R3 System
R3 Client Server Architecture
Transferring Files
Files in the R3 System
Processing FilesOpening Files
Opening Files - Options
Binary Mode and Text Mode
Transferring Data Records
Reading Data Records
Closing Deleting a Sequential File
Filling Record Layouts for Transaction FB01 (1)
Filling Record Layouts for Transaction FB01 (2)
Sequential Files - Summary
Files in the R3 System
DOWNLOAD and UPLOADFunction Module rsquoDOWNLOADrsquo
Example Program DOWNLOAD
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2934
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-29
Function Module rsquoUPLOADrsquo
Example Program UPLOAD
Summary
Exercises for Unit Files in the R3 SystemSolutions to Unit Files in the R3 System
Data Transfer Workbench Unit 56
Data Transfer - Objectives
Data Transfer Workbench
Preparing the Data Transfer
Testing and Executing the Data Transfer
Direct Input Management
Scheduling Direct Input
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer WorkbenchSolutions to Unit Data Transfer Workbench
Batch Input Sessions Unit 57
Objectives
Batch Input Sessions
Batch Input Processing
Batch Input Program
Format of a Batch Input Session
Creating Batch Input Sessions
Function Modules for Batch Input Programs
Structure of the BDC Table
Batch Input Processing
Batch Input Sessions
Batch Input Monitor - FunctionsSession Status
Processing Modes
Entering Data into Screens
Batch Input Processing
Session Statistics
Session Log
Summary
Exercises for Unit Batch Input SessionsSolutions to Unit Batch Input Sessions
Data Transfer Programs Unit 58Objectives
Data Transfer Programs
Customer Transfer Programs
Customer Transfer Program - Tasks
Data Transfer Programs
Batch Input Program Elements
Defining BDC Tables
Structure of the BDC Table
Determining Field Names
Determining Field Names with the Screen Painter
Structure DefinitionFunction Modules for a Batch Input Program
Function Module BDC_OPEN_GROUP
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3034
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-30
Function Module BDC_INSERT
Function Module BDC_CLOSE_GROUP
Structure of a Batch Input Program
Batch Input Program - Overview (I)
Batch Input Program - Overview (II)
Subroutine generate_bdc_dataProgram BDCRECXX (I)
Program BDCRECXX (II)
Program BDCRECXX (III)
Data Transfer Programs
Batch Input Recorder
Batch Input Recording
Recording the First Screen
Recording the Second Screen
Additional Screens Saving
Ending the Recording
Generating Sessions and Programs
Generating Batch Input Sessions
Structure of the Generated Program
Enhancing the Generated Program
Data Transfer Programs
Overview
Call Transaction Program
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (I)
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (II)
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (III)
Displaying the Messtab
Technical Implementation
Return Codes and System FieldsSystem Field Message Output
Generating Sessions When Errors Occur
Summary
Overview
Structure of a Data Transfer Program
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer ProgramSolutions to Unit Data Transfer Program
Additional Techniques Unit 59
ObjectivesAdditional Techniques - Overview
Changing Customers - Payment Transactions
Step Loop Field Names
Structure of the BDC Table
Filling BDC Tables in ABAP
Additional Techniques
Overview - Special Fields
Setting the Cursor in the Batch Input Session
Setting the Cursor in the ABAP Program
Additional Techniques
Successful Transaction EndAdditional Techniques
Processing Batch Input Sessions
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-31
Batch Input Flow
Additional Techniques
Program RSBDCSUB
Batch Input Authorizations
Service Programs
Summary Exercises for Unit Additional TechniquesSolutions for Unit Additional Techniques
Tips amp Tricks Unit 60
Tips and Tricks - Objectives
OSS Notes
Parallel Processing
Resetting Rollback Segments
Additional Tips and Information
Summary
Appendix Unit 61
Job Structure
Scheduling Jobs
Job Distribution
SAP-LUW Chronological Update
Update Principles
Asynchronous Update
Synchronous Update
Local Update
E n h a n c e m e n t s a n d M o d i f i c a t i o n s
Enhancements and Modifications Unit 62
Content
Introduction Contents
Course Overview Diagram
Main Business Scenario
Modifications Unit 63
Objectives
Modifications
What are modifications
Modifications and Upgrades
Modifications
Copying SAP Objects
Making Changes to SAP Copies (Modifications)
Registering Modifications in SSCR
Carrying Out a Registered Modification
Versions
Naming Conventions for Repository Objects
Modifications
Modifications Critical Success Factors (1)
Modifications Critical Success Factors (2)Modifications Critical Success Factors (3)
Documenting Modifications in Programs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-32
Modification Logs An Example
Modifications
Modification Adjustment SPDD and SPAU
Modification Adjustment Objects
Transaction SPAU (Process After Upgrade)
Transporting Adjustments between SystemsThe amount of work necessary at upgrade increases
Modifications Critical Repository Objects
Avoiding Adjustments
Modifications
User Exits
User Exits An Example
Using User Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Modifications
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Unit 64
Objectives
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Table Enhancements Overview
Append Structures
Append Structures at Upgrade
Customizing Includes
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Global Enhancements
Field Exits
Global and Local Field Exits
Creating Field Exits
Enhancements to Dictionary ElementsText Enhancements
Editing Text Enhancements
Keywords
Keyword Change Requirements
Keyword Changes and Release Upgrades
Restoring SAP Keywords
Enhanced Documentation for Data Elements
Customer Documentation
Summary Text Enhancements
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Solutions for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Enhancements using Customer Exits Unit 65
Objectives
Enhancements using Customer Exits
SAP Application Enhancements
Customer Enhancement Projects
SAP Enhancements and Customer Enhancement Projects
Enhancements using Customer Exits
The SAP Enhancement Creation Procedure
Implementing Enhancements in Customer SystemsCreating Customer Enhancement Projects
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-33
Editing Components
Activating Enhancement Projects
Transporting Projects
Summary Enhancement Management
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Function Module ExitsCalling and Creating Function Modules
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Organization of an X Function Group
Customer Source Code
Global Data SAP and the Customer
Subroutines Modules SAP and the Customer
Customer Screens
Customer Screens Modules
Summary Function Module Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Menu Exits
Menu Exit Requirements
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Menu Exits and Function Module Exits
Summary Menu Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Screen Exits
Subscreens in the R3 System
Calling Subscreens
Defining Screen Exits
Calling Customer Subscreens
Transporting Data to Subscreens
Transporting Data from SubscreensEditing Subscreens (1)
Editing Subscreens (2)
Summary Screen Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits Solutions for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits
Business Transaction Events Unit 66
Objectives
Business Transaction Events (BTE)
BTE Possible Scenarios (1)BTE Possible Scenarios (2)
Publish amp Subscribe vs Process Interfaces
Business Transaction Events SAP and the Customer
Finding Business Transaction Events
Creating a Publish amp Subscribe Interface
Differences between Customer Exits and BTEs
Summary
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3434
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-2
983209 SAP AG
R
Copyright
Copyright 1998 SAP AG All rights reserved
Neither this training manual nor any part thereof may
be copied or reproduced in any form or by any means
or translated into another language without the prior
consent of SAP AG The information contained in this
document is subject to change and supplement
without prior notice
All rights reserved
Trademarksbull SAP and the SAP logo are registered trademarks of SAP AG
bull MS-DOS and EXCEL are registered trademarks of Microsoft
bull OS2 CICS MVS ACFVTAM VSE AIX OS400 and AS400 are registered trademarks of
IBM
bull X Window System is a registered trademark of MIT University
bull SINIX UTM and BS2000 are registered trademarks of Siemens
bull UNIX is a registered trademark of ATampT
bull HP-UX is a registered trademark of Hewlett Packard
bull DECnet DECstation DECsystem VAXstation and VMS are registered trademarks of DEC
bull Ethernet is a registered trademark of the Xerox Corporation
bull ORACLE SQLnet SQL+ PROC are registered trademarks of the ORACLE Corporation
bull INFORMIX-OnLine and INFORMIX-ESQLC are registered trademarks of the INFORMIX
Corporation
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-3
983209 SAP AG
R
Week overview
Week 3 Transaction Programming
Week 4 Interfaces for Data Transfer
Enhancements andModifications
Week 1 Basis Technology - Overview
ABAP Workbench Basics
Week 2 ABAP Dictionary
Techniques of List Processing
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 434
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-4
983209 SAP AG
R
R3 Integration Model
R3R3ClientServer
ABAP
ClientServer
ABAP
COControlling
COControlling
AAAsset
Accounting
AAAsset
Accounting
PSProjectSystem
PSProjectSystem
WFWorkflow
WFWorkflow
ISIndustry
Solutions
ISIndustry
Solutions
MMMaterials
Mgmt
MMMaterials
Mgmt
HRHuman
Resources
HRHuman
Resources
SDSales amp
Distribution
SDSales amp
Distribution
PPProduction
Planning
PPProduction
Planning
QMQualityMgmt
QMQualityMgmt
FIFinancial
Accounting
FIFinancial
Accounting
PMPlant
Maintenance
PMPlant
Maintenance
bull The SAP R3 System continues to set new standards for universal standard software Based on progressive development techniques the SAP R3 System allows comprehensive integration of
business administration and data processing
bull The SAP R3 System components are characterized by comprehensive business functions with the
most modern technology The integration of the applications ensures that all the functions are
directly available in the system and thus in the enterprise
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 534
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-5
TABC40 40 Application Development - ABAP Workbench
Preface Unit 0
CopyrightWeek Overview
The R3 Integration Model
B a s i s ndash T e c h n o l o g y ndash Overview
Basis Technology - Overview Unit 1
Content
Basis System and the System Environment
Basis System - Objectives
R3 Integration Diagram
R3 in the Business Framework
Business Framework Components
R3 as an Open System
Client Server - Scalability of the R3 System
Client Server Principles
R3 System Client Server Configurations
Three-Tier Hierarchy
R3 Basis Middleware
R3 Basis System Overview
System Platforms for the R3 SystemBasis System - Summary
Navigation Unit 2
Objectives
Logging On
Clients in the R3 System
R3 Menu Structure
Screen
Selecting Functions
Field Help
R3 Online HelpSystem Functions - Services
System Functions - User Profile
Favorites List
Session Manager
Navigation - Summary
Exercise for Unit NavigationSolutions to Unit Navigation
System Kernel Unit 3
System Kernel - Objectives
R3 Presentation InterfaceRelational Database Management Systems
R3 Database Interface
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 634
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-6
Processing User Requests
Dialog Work Processes
R3 Application Services
SAP Transactions and Screens
LUW (Logical Unit of Work)
Requesting a Lock SAP Lock Objects
Writing Log Records
Updating Log Records
Removing Locks
Background Processing
Workload Balancing
R3 Printer Services
R3 Instance
System Kernel - Summary
Exercise for Unit System Kernel Solutions to Unit System Kernel
Administration and Remote Services Unit 4
Administration - Objectives
Security Aspects in the R3 System
The Authorization Concept
The Profile Generator
System Administration
System Administration Terminations
R3 Computing Center Management System
Workload Alert Monitor
R3 Service amp Support Virtual Infrastructure
SAP Remote ServicesR3 Online Service System (OSS)
Administration - Summary
Exercise for Unit AdministrationSolutions to Unit Administration
A B A P W o r k b e n c h B a s i c s
ABAP Workbench Basics Unit 5
ContentABAP Workbench Overview
Objectives
R3 ClientServer Architecture
R3 ClientServer Architecture
R3 ClientServer Architecture
R3 ClientServer Architecture
ABAP
R3 Repository and Repository Objects
ABAP Workbench Tools
Repository Browser
Repository Browser Object ListTransporting Repository Objects
Development Projects in the WBO
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 734
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-7
Finishing Projects
Creating Development Classes
Assigning Change Requests
Programs with User and Database Dialog
Overview Creating Programs
Program AttributesImportant Editor Functions
Global Role of the ABAP Dictionary
1 User Dialog Selection Screens
1 User Dialog Selection Screen II
2 User Dialog Screens
Creating Screens
Database Dialog Open SQL
3 User Dialog Messages
4 User Dialog Lists
General ABAP Syntax
General ABAP Syntax and Chained Statements
Comments
ABAP Program Operations
Summary
Exercises for Unit ABAP Workbench Solutions for Unit ABAP Workbench
ABAP Dictionary Contents Unit 6
ABAP Dictionary Objectives
Data Modeling
Flight Data Model for ABAP Training Courses
Data Model
Realization in the ABAP DictionaryIntegration into ABAP Workbench (Active)
Basic Dictionary Objects
Dual Level Domain Concept
Transparent Tables
Creating Transparent Tables
Structures
Creating Structures
ABAP Dictionary Views
Advanced Techniques Search Help
ABAP Dictionary Summary
Exercises for Unit ABAP Dictionary Solutions for Unit ABAP Dictionary
ABAP Open SQL - Contents Unit 7
ABAP Open SQL Unit Objectives
The R3 ClientServer Architecture
The Database Interface
Open SQL Statements Overview
SELECT Statement Overview
Using the SELECT Statement for a Single Line
Using the SELECT Statement for Several Lines
Using the SELECT Statement for an Internal TableWHERE Clauses
ABAP Open SQL Summary
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 834
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-8
Exercises for Unit ABAP Open SQL Solutions for Unit ABAP Open SQL
ABAP Data and Statements Contents Unit 8
Objectives
The R3 ClientServer ArchitectureThe ABAP Type Concept
Defining Data Objects Overview
Data Types
Predefined Data Types
Elementary Data Objects
Structures
Internal Tables
Referring to ABAP Dictionary Objects
Type Groups in the ABAP Dictionary
PARAMETERS and TABLES
Literals and Constants
Text Symbols
Summary of Declarative Statements
Initializing Data Objects
Assigning Values
Assigning Values Field for Field
Type Conversion
Conversion Rules for Elementary Types
Conversion Rules for Structure Types
Calculating Values
Sub-fields
Calculating Dates
Control Statements OverviewLogical Expressions
Case Distinctions
DO and WHILE Loops
CHECK and EXIT
Summary
Summary (2)
Exercises for Unit ABAP Data and Statements Solutions for Unit ABAP Data and Statements
Test Tools Contents Unit 9
Test Tools Unit ObjectivesTest Tools
Debugging
Important Debugging Functions I
Important Debugging Functions II
Debugger Overview
Breakpoints
Advanced Techniques Runtime Analysis
Advanced Techniques SQL Trace
Advanced Techniques Computer Aided Test Tool
Summary
Internal Tables Contents Unit 10
Internal Tables Objectives
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 934
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-9
The R3 ClientServer Architecture
Internal Tables
Dynamic Table Expansion
Table Attributes Line Type
Keys
Data Access QuantitiesData Access Types
Table Types
Internal Table Work Areas
Defining Internal Tables
Filling Internal Tables
Array Fetch
Sorting an Internal Table
Loop Processing in Internal Tables
Accessing Individual Internal Table Entries
Changing an Internal Table with the Index
Changing an Internal Table with Keys
Deleting an Internal Table
Internal Tables withwithout Header Lines
Control Level Processing
Internal Tables Summary 1
Internal Tables Summary 2
Exercises for Unit Internal Tables Solutions for Unit Internal Tables
Modularization and Program Structure Unit 11
Objectives
Modularization and Program Structure
Structure of an ABAP ProgramStructure of Earlier Programs from the Course
Processing Block Types
Modularization and Program Structure
Event Blocks
Events in Executable Programs (Type 1)
Syntax Event Blocks
Modularization and Program Structure
Subroutines
Defining Subroutines
Defining the Interface
Data VisibilityCalling Subroutines
Calling Subroutines Syntax
Interface Parameters Structures
Interface Parameters Internal Tables
Modularization and Program Structure
Function Modules as Processing Blocks
Calling Function Modules
Creating a Function Group
Creating a Function Module
Elements of a Function Module
Interface Import ParametersException Handling
Function Module Source Code
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1034
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-10
Documentation and Testing
Calling Function Modules
Catching Exceptions
Central Role of Function Modules
Modularization and Program Structure
Includes Type I ProgramsTOP Includes
Standard Includes for Function Groups
Function Modules Summary
Exercises for Unit Modularization and Structure Solutions for Unit Modularization and Program Structure
Dialogs Contents Unit 12
Dialogs Unit Objectives
Dialogs
The R3 ClientServer Architecture
Overview
User Dialogs
Dialogs - Lists
Lists
List Operations
Page Headers
Multilingual Capability
ColorsIconsSymbols in Lists
Lists in Executable Programs
Details Lists
Example A Simple Details List
Syntax A Simple Details List
Details List ExampleHIDE Areas
Line Selection
Line Selection Syntax
Advanced Techniques Lists as Input Tools and Details Lists
Dialogs - Selection Screens
Selection Screens
The Selection Screen
Entering Selections
Search Help
Variants
Selection TextsRecap PARAMETERS
Using Parameters in the SELECT Statement
SELECT-OPTIONS
Using Select-Options in the SELECT Statement
Standard Selection Screens in Executable Programs
Standard Selection Screen Processing
Additional Input Checks
AT SELECTION-SCREEN
Example User-defined Selection Screens
User-defined Selection Screens
Syntax Defining and Calling Selection ScreensDialogs - User Messages
User Messages Overview
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-11
Syntax MESSAGE Statements
Dialog Message Types
Dialogs - Screens
Screens Strengths
Using Screens
Screens an ExampleParts of a Screen
Step 1 Creating a Screen
Creating a Screen Screen Attributes
Layout and Field Attributes 1
Layout and Field Attributes 2
Field Attributes The Field List
Check Tables
Step 2 Displaying Data
Screen Interfaces
Screen Processing Logic PBO and PAI
Screen Processing Blocks
PBO and PAI Processing Logic
Data Transport between Screens and Programs
Flow Logic
Step 3 Defining Pushbuttons
Defining Function Codes
Assigning a Field Name to the OK_CODE Field
Program Logic
Static Screen Sequencing
Dynamic Screen Sequencing
Database Updates
Advanced Techniques Screens
Dialogs - InterfacesOverview Interface Objects
Example Program Interface
Basic Interface Elements
Statuses Interface Views
Creating GUI Statuses for Lists
Creating Statuses Key Settings
Creating Statuses Menu Bars
Example Program Interface
Creating GUI Titles for a Screen
Creating GUI Statuses for a Screen
Title and StatusSummary Interfaces
Summary
Exercises for Unit Dialogs Solutions for Unit Dialogs
Authorization Checks Contents Unit 13
Objectives
Basic Authorization Concepts
Authorization Cehcks in Programs
AUTHORITY-CHECK Syntax
SummaryAuthorization Checks Summary
Exercises for Unit Authorization Checks
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-12
Solutions for Unit Authorization Checks
Software Logistics and Software Modifications Contents Unit 14
Software Logistics and Software Modifications Unit Object
Software Logistics and Software Modification
Workbench Organizer and Transport SystemManaging Development Projects in the WBO
Completing a Project
Functions of a Change Request
Local Objects
Originals and Copies
SAP Objects as Copies
Task Attributes
Changing Customer Copies
Changing SAP Copies (Modifications)
Software Logistics and Software Modification
Change Levels
Functional Enhancements
Enhancing User Dialogs
Enhancements Examples
Registering Developers in the SSCR
Software Logistics and Software Modification Summary
Software Logistics and Software Modifications Summary (II)
Exercises for Unit Software Logistics and Modification
Appendix Unit 15
Repository-Infosystem
Objectives
R3 Repository and Repository-ObjectsTypical Information System Requests
The Repository Information System
The SAP Application Hierarchy
Summary
Summary 2
Foreign Data Transfer
External Data Transfer
R3 Communication Interfaces I
R3 Communication Interfaces II
Termination Conditions 2
Advanced Techniques Dynamic Screen SequencingAdvanced Techniques Update
Appendix 1
Appendix 2
A B A P D i c t i o n a r y
ABAP Dictionary Unit 16
Content
IntroductionObjectives
Functions of the ABAP Dictionary
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-13
Linking to the ABAP Workbench (Active)
Access from ABAP Program
Summary
Tables in the ABAP Dictionary Unit 17
Objectives-Tables in the ABAP DictionaryTables and Fields
Basic Objects of the ABAP Dictionary
Two-Level Domain Concept Example
Transparent Tables
Structures
Technical Settings
Data Class
Size Category
Buffering Tables
Logging
Consistency between ABAP Dictionary and DB
Summary - Tables in the ABAP Dictionary
Exercises on Unit Tables in the ABAP Dictionary nSolutions to Unit Tables in the ABAP Dictionary
Performance during Table Access Unit 18
Objectives - Performance during Table Access
Indexes
Primary Index
Secondary Indexes
Data Access using the Buffer
Table Buffering
Full BufferingGeneric Buffering
Single-Record Buffering
Buffer Synchronization 1
Buffer Synchronization 2
Buffer Synchronization 3
Buffer Synchronization 4
Buffer Synchronization 5
Buffer Synchronization 6
Summary - Performance during Table Access
Exercises on Unit Performance during Table Access
Solutions to Unit Performance during Table Access
Relationships between Tables in the ABAP Dictionary Unit 19
Objectives - Relationships between Tables in the ABAP Dict
Definition of a Foreign Key
Foreign Key Fields Check Fields
Inserting a Data Record
Violation of the Foreign Key Check
Foreign Key Definitions in the Check Field
Requirements for the Field Assignment
Domains Value Tables Fixed Values
Check Table not Equal to Value TableField Assignment is not Unique
Semantic Attributes
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1434
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-14
Text Tables
Generic and Constant Foreign Keys
INCLUDE
Summary (1)
Summary (2)
Exercises on Unit Relationships between Tables nnSolutions to Unit Relationships between Tables m
R3 Repository Info System as seen by ABAP Dictionary Unit 20
Objectives - R3 Repository Information System
Typical Queries Made of the Information System
Selection Options
Functions
Summary (1) - R3 Repository Information System
Exercises on Unit The R3 Repository Information SystemSolutions to Unit The R3 Repository Information System
Changes to Tables Unit 21
Objectives - Changes to Tables
Active and Revised Versions
Runtime Objects
Handling Dependent Objects
Changing Database Tables
How is the Structure Adjusted
Conversion Process 1
Conversion Process 2
Conversion Process 3
Conversion Process 4
Conversion Process 5What to Do when a Conversion Terminates
Append Structures 1
Append Structures 2
Append Structures 3
Summary Changes to Tables
Exercises on Unit Changes to TablesSolutions to Unit Changes to Tables m
Views Unit 22
Objectives - Views
Why do you Need ViewsStructure of a View - Starting Situation
Structure of a View - Join Condition
Structure of a View - Field Selection (Projection)
Structure of a View - Selection Condition
How are Tables Linked to Views
Structure of the View
Data Selection with Views
Database Views
Buffering Database Views
Includes in Database Views
Maintenance ViewsInner and Outer Joins
Summary - Views
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1534
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-15
Exercises on Unit Views mmSolutions to Unit Views
Search Helps Unit 23
Objectives - Search Helps
R3 Standard Function Input HelpDescription of an Input Help
Interface of a Search Help
Description of the Dialog Behavior
Selection Method of a Serach Help
View as Selection Method
Performance of the Input Help
Input Help from the Data Element
Check Table Help
Attaching a Search Help to a Field
Input Help from Dictionary or Screen
Overview Mechanisms for the Input Help
Alternative Search Paths
Collective Search Helps and Elementary Search Helps
Further Options for Search Helps
Non-Standard Search Help Exit
Migration of Existing Input Helps
Summary - Search Helps
Exercises on Unit Search Helps nSolutions to Unit Search Helps nn
Appendix Unit 24
Important Menu Paths and Transactions
Decision Tree for Buffering TablesAppendix
T e c h n i q u e s o f L i s t P r o c e s s i n g
Techniques of List Processing Unit 25
Contents 12
Contents 22
Introduction
Course GoalsCourse Objectives
Course Overview Diagram
Business Scenario
Demo Programs Templates and Solutions
Overview of Exercises
Finding and Executing Programs Unit 26
Objectives
How to Find Existing Programs
SAP Anwendungshierarchie
The Repository Information SystemReport Trees Organization
Finding Report Trees
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1634
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-16
Summary
Creating Lists with ABAP Query Unit 27
Objectives
Creating Lists with ABAP Query
Programs and ABAP QueryABAP Query Organization
Creating Queries
Creating Lists with ABAP Query
Defining Queries
Choosing a Query Area and a Functional Area
Choosing Fields
Assigning Short Descriptions
Defining Local Fields
Basic Lists
Lists with Control Levels
Statistics
Ranked Lists
Interactive Functions - Single-Line Lists
Interactive Functions - Multiple-Line Lists
Saving Lists
Summary
Creating Lists with ABAP Query
Outputting Data to Lists Unit 28
Objectives
List Design Options
Generating a List
Setting the List FormatModifying and Suppressing Headers
Open Page Design TOP-OF-PAGE
Setting Fixed Lead Columns
The FORMAT Statement
Outputting Lines
The WRITE Statement General Syntax
The WRITE Statement Icons and Symbols
The WRITE Statement Checkboxes
Additional Statements for Output Design
Multilingual List Elements
System Fields and List GenerationStandard Functions in Lists
Summary Lists
Exercises for Outputting Data to Lists Solutions for Outputting Data to Lists
Selection Screens Unit 29
Objectives
Selection Screen Overivew
Declaration of Fields with PARAMETERS
Selections with SELECT-OPTIONS
Selection Options and Multiple SelectionsSyntax of the SELECT-OPTIONS Statement
Designing the Selection Screen I
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1734
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-17
Designing the Selection Screen II
Initializing the Selection Screen
General Help and Possible Entries Help (F1 and F4)
Input Checks AT SELECTION-SCREEN
CALL SELECTION-SCREEN I
CALL SELECTION-SCREEN IISelektionsbild Varianten I
Selection Screen Variants II
Summary
Exercises for Selection Screens Solutions for Selection Screens
Logical Databases Unit 30
Objectives
Generating Lists
Advantages of a Logical Database
Logical Databases Overview
LDB F1S Nodes
Sample Program for a Logical Database
LDB Sub-Objects Structure
LDB Sub-Objects Selections
Selection Screen for the Logical Database
Logical Database Dynamic Selections
LDB Sub-Objects Database Programs
Interaction Between LDBs and Programs
Events in Logical Databases
Program Flow and Termination Alternatives
Checking Internal Program Selections I
Checking Internal Program Selections IISummary
Exercises for Logical Databases Solutions for Logical Databases
Programming Data Retrieval Unit 31
Objectives
Programming Data Retrieval
Reading Multiple Database Tables
Reading Multiple Database Tables I
Reading Multiple Database Tables IIa
Reading Multiple Database Tables IIbReading Multiple Database Tables III
Reading Multiple Database Tables IV
Summary
Exercises for Programming Data Retrieval Solutions for Programming Data Retrieval
ABAP Query Administration Unit 32
Objectives
ABAP Query Administration
Maintaining User Groups
Authorizations and ABAP QueryABAP Query Administration
Defining Functional Areas
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1834
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-18
Overview Creating Functional Areas
Example Defining a Functional Area
Defining Functional Areas
Allocating Fields
Additional Information
Allocating Additional TablesAllocating Additional Fields
Selection Options
Allocating ABAP Statements
Summary
Exercises for ABAP Query Administration
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing Unit 33
Unit Objectives Control Level Processing
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Motivation
Control Level Processing
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Creating an Internal Table
Filling an Internal Table
Sorting and Editing an Internal Table
Control Level Processing for Internal Tables
Control Level Processing Schema for Internal Tables
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Generating an Extract Steps
Example Generating an Extract
Sorting and Processing an Extract
Example Control Level Processing
Schema for Control Level Processing of ExtractsData Formatting and Control Level Processing
Comparing Internal Tables and Extracts
Summary Control Level Processing
Exercises for Data Formatting and Control Level Processing Solutions for Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Storing Lists and Background Processing Unit 34
Objectives
Storing Lists and Background Processing
Saving Lists Possibilities
Saving Lists in SAPofficeSaving Lists as PC Files
Saving Lists in a Report Tree
Customizing Report Trees
Functions in Report Trees
Storing Lists and Background Processing
Options for Printing a List
Print Parameters
Program-Controlled Printing
Program-Controlled Printing with GET_PRINT_PARAMETERS
Storing Lists and Background Processing
Background Processing PhasesDefining Steps
Defining Start Times and Releasing Jobs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1934
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-19
Summary
Exercises for Storing Lists and Background Processing Solutions for Storing Lists and Background Processing
Interactive Lists Basics Unit 35
Unit Objectives Interactive ListsInteractive Lists Basics
User Interactions with Lists
Navigating Between Lists
Events Overview
Flow Control in Detail Lists
Creating Detail Lists I
Creating Detail Lists II
Interactive Lists Basics
Questions
HIDE Areas
HIDE Technique Line Selection
Data Buffering in a List System
Valid Line Selection
Field Selection
Interactive Lists Basics
Page Headers in Detail Lists
Interactive Lists Basics
Creating Lists in Modal Dialog Boxes
Summary Interactive Lists
Exercises for Interactive Lists Solutions for Interactive Lists
Creating User Interfaces Unit 36Objectives User Interfaces
User Interfaces Overview
Status Technical View I
Status Technical View II
Creating a GUI Status
Creating a GUI Status Assigning F Keys I
Creating a GUI Status Assigning F Keys II
Creating a GUI Status Menu Bars
Activating Title and Status
Event AT USER-COMMAND
Summary User Interfaces
Special Techniques for Interactive Lists Unit 37
Objectives
Scrolling in Lists
Reading Lists
Modifying Lists
List Navigation
Interactive List Messages
System Fields in Interactive Lists
Summary
Exercises for Creating User Interfaces Solutions for Creating User Interfaces
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2034
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-20
Linking Programs Unit 38
Objectives
Linking Programs
Data Visibility
Data Transfer Using SAP Memory
SETGET ParametersSUBMIT Statement Syntax
Example SUBMIT WITH
Datatransfer Using ABAP Memory
Returning from a Called Program
Summary
Exercises for Linking Programs Solutions for Linking Programs
Lists on the Internet Unit 39
Unit Objectives Special Application
Lists on the Internet
Motivation
The World Wide Web
HTTP Hypertext Transport Protocol
URL Uniform Resource Locator
HTML Hypertext Markup Language
R3 ClientServer Architecture
R3 ClientServer Architecture with ITS
Lists on the Internet
Web Reporting - Overview
Web Reporting Flow
Creating a List Using a URL
Parameters for WWW_GET_REPORTInteractive Lists
Access Authorization
Creating HTML Hyperlinks in Lists
Lists on the Internet
Web Reporting Browser
Releasing Report Trees for the Internet
Summary Special Application
Appendix Unit 40
Menu Data
T r a n s a c t i o n P ro g r a m m i n g
Transaction Programming Unit 41
Content
Introduction Contents
Couse Goal
Course Objectives
Overview Diagram
Main Business Scenario
About the Course Material
Basic Transaction Programming Unit 42
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-21
Objectives - Basics
Components of a Transaction
Writing a Transaction Process
Analyzing the Problem
User Dialogs in the R3 System
Advantages of ScreensComponents of a Screen
Static Screen Sequence
Creating a Screen Attributes
Creating a Screen Layout
Creating a Screen Field List
Writing the Flow Logic
Communictaion Between Screen and ABAP Program
Creating a Transaction Code
Summary Basic Dialog Programming
Screen Objects - List Unit 43
Screen Objects - Objectives
Screen Objects
Screen Objects General Attributes
Attributes of Screen Objects (Key)
Dynamically Modifiable Static Attributes
The System Table SCREEN
Modifying Attributes Dynamically Example
Object Attributes Modification Group
Modifying Attributes Dynamically Program
Screen Objects - Screen
Screen Object Screen
Defining and Managing ScreensScreen Attributes
Dynamic Next Screen Overview
Setting the Next Screen Dynamically
Inserting a Sequence of Screens Dynamically
Calling a Dialog Box Dynamically
Window Coordinates
Setting the Cursor Position Dynamically
Screen Objects - Title Bar
Screen Object Title Bar
Creating and Using Title Bars
Screen Objects - Text FieldScreen Object Text Field
Text Fields Attributes
Creating Text Fields
Hiding Texts Dynamically
Dynamically Modifiable Attributes Text Field
Dynamic Screen Modifications Program
Screen Objects - InputOutput Field
Screen Object InputOutput Field
InputOutput Fields Attributes
Creating InputOutput Fields
InputOutput Fields Automatic Field ChecksInputOutput Fields Default Values in SAP Memory
Defining SETGET Parameter Attributes
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-22
Programming Field Input Checks with an Error Dialog
Checking Groups of Fields
Controlling Error Dialogs
Dialog Message Categories
The FIELD Statement and Data Transport
Calling Modules Conditionally (1)Calling Modules Conditionally (2)
Screen Objects Status icon
Screen Objects Status Icons
Status Icons Attributes
Creating Status Icon Fields
Filling Status Icon Fields
Group Box
Screen Objects Group Boxes
Group Boxes Attributes
Screen Objects Radio Buttons
Screen Objects Radio Buttons and Checkboxes
Radio ButtonsCheckboxes Attributes
Creating a Radio Button Group
Creating a Checkbox
Screen Objects - Pushbutton
Screen Objects Pushbuttons
Pushbuttons Attributes
Creating Pushbuttons
Pushbuttons with Function Type E
Screen Objects - Subscreen
Screen Objects Subscreen (1)
Screen Objects Subscreen (2)
Subscreen AttributesCreating a Subscreen Area
Calling a Subscreen
Subscreens from External Programs
Subscreens Encapsulation in Function Groups
Subscreens in Function Groups Call Sequence
Subscreens in Function Groups Data Transport
Screen Objects - Tabstrip Control
Screen Object Tabstrip Control
Tabstrip Elements
Tab Page Technical View
Tabstrip Controls AttributesCreating a Tabstrip Control
Creating a Tabstrip Control Tabstrip Area
Creating a Tabstip Control Tab Title
Creating a Tabstrip Control Subscreens
Scrolling Locally in a Tabstrip Control
Scrolling Locally in a Tabstrip Control Coding
Scrolling in a Tabstrip Control
Scrolling in a Tabstrip Control Coding
Screen Objects - Table Control
Screen Object Table Control
ABAP Table Control (Functions)Table Control Table Settings
Actions in Table Controls
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-23
Creating Table Control Elements
Table Control Attributes
Creating a Table Control
Creating a Table Control Table Control Area
Creating a Table Control TC Fields (1)
Create Table Control TC Fields (2) Section ColumnTable Control Attributes at Runtime
Table Control Attributes (Structure)
Table Control Elements - Processing
Processing a Table Control (Principle 1)
Filling a Table Control
Changing the Contents of a Table Control
Table Control Applications (Principle)
Filling a Table Control Coding
Changing the Contents of a Table Control 4 Coding
Table Controls Field Transport in the PBO
Table Controls Field Transport in the PAI
Table Control Elements Further Techniques
Changing a Table Control
Changing the Attributes of a Table Control (1)
Changing the Attributes of a Table Control (2)
Table Control Modifying Field Attributes Temporarily
Sorting a Table Control (Example)
Scrolling Page by Page in a Table Control (Example)
Table Control Cursor Position (Example)
Screen Objects - GUI Status
Screen Object GUI Status
Status Technical View (1)
Status Technical View (2)Attributes of Functions
Function Key Settings
Menus and Menu Bars Attributes
Status Attributes
Standard Toolbar Functions and their Reserved function Keys
Creating a Status
Navigation - Targets
Navigation - Dialogs
Screen Objects - List
Screen Objects Lists
Displaying a List Within a TransactionLists in a Modal Dialog Box
Screen Objects - Selection Screen
Screen Object Selection Screen
Entering Value Ranges
Defining and Calling a Selection Screen
Summary Screen Objects
Uumlbung zu Kapitel Screen Objects Solutions Screen Objects Unit
Programming Database Changes Unit 44
Unit ObjectivesProgramming Database Changes
Statements for Database Dialogs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2434
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-24
SAP LUW
Database LUW
SAP R3 System 3-tier Architecture
System Architecture Implicit DB COMMIT
Objective Bundling the DB Changes in an SAP LUW
Programming Database ChangesBundling Techniques Overview
Bunding Using Delayed Inline Changes
Bundling Using Subroutines
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundline Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Techniques
Update Function modules
V1 and V2 Update Function Modules
Logging Records for Update
Deleting Update Entries Rollback in the Dialog Program
Rollback in the Update Program
Asynchronous Update
What Happens in a Commit Work
Comparison of Bundling Techniques
Programming Database Updates
Why Set Locks
Database Locks
SAP Locking Concept
Setting Logical Locks
SAP Lock ObjectsENQUEUE and DEQUEUE Function Modules
Calling the Function Modules
The Lock Table
Validity of Locks Scope = 2
Programming Database Updates
SAP Authorization Concept
Authorization Checks
User Master Record Authorizations
Authorization Checks for Transactions
Summary
Exercises Programming Database Updates Unit Solutions Programming Database Updates Unit
Complex Transactions Unit 45
Unit Objectives
Complex Transactions
Synchronous Calls Overview
Calling a Report Program
Calling a Transaction
Encapsulating Dialogs in Function Modules
Synchronous Program Calls Main Memory Contents
Complex TransactionsAsynchronous Calls
Calling Programs Asynchronously
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2534
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-25
Complex Transactions
Passing Data Overview
Passing Data Using the Interface of ABAP Programs
The WITH Addition in the SUBMIT Statement
Memory Areas Logical Model
ABAP MemoryPassing Parameters using the SAP Memory
Passing Parameters (SAP Memory)
Complex Transactions
Synchronous Program Calls SAP LUWs
Asynchronous Program Calls SAP LUWs
Program Calls Visible Data and LUWs
Complex Transactions
RFC Scenario R3 - R3
Enabling Function Modules for RFC
RFC Using ABAP Function Modules
Program Context of a Remote Function
RFC Calls System Exceptions
Complex Transactions
Remote Function Call Overview
Process Diagram Synchronous RFC
Process Diagram Asynchronous RFC
Process Diagram Transactional RFC
Transactional RFC (tRFC) Introduction
tRFC Properties
Complex Transactions
Lock Entries for Local Program Calls
Lock Entries for RFC Calls
Summary Exercises Complex Transactions Unit Solutions Complex Transactions Unit
Static Attributes in the Screen Painter Unit 46
Screen Attributes (1)
Screen Attributes (2)
General Attributes
Dictionary Attributes
Program Attributes
Display Attributes
Special Attributes for Subscreens and Tabstrip ControlsSpecial Attributes for Table Controls
Database Updates Further Information Unit 47
Objectives
Database Updates Further Information
Asynchronous Update
Synchronous Update
Local Update
SAP LUW Timescale of Updates
Database Updates Further Information
V1 and V2 Update Function ModulesV1 Update
V2 Update
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2634
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-26
Database Updates Further Information
Validity of Locks Scope = 1
Validity of Locks Scope = 2
Validity of Locks Scope = 3
ENQUEUE Function Modules Interface Parameters
Summary
Complex Transactions Further Information Unit 48
CALL TRANSACTION lsquoTA01rsquo and SUBMIT lsquoREP01rsquo AND RETURN
Implicit End of a Program or LEAVE PROGRAM
LEAVE TO TRANSACTION lsquoTA01rsquo
SUBMIT lsquoREP01rsquo
CALL FUNCTION lsquoFUNC1rsquoPERFORM form1 IN PROGRAM program
Help Functions Unit 49
Overview Standard F1 and F4 Functions
The Search Help Concept
Dialog for an Immediate Hit List
Dialog with Preselection
Dialog for Selecting a Search Help
Search Help Concepts
Search Helps
Defining the Dialog Fields
Defining the Data Selection
Collective Search Helps
Search Help Concepts
Linking Search Helps to Screen Fields
Search Help Concepts
Programmed Help Functions OverviewProgrammed F1 and F4 Help
The POH and POV Events Process
Function Modules for Data Transport
Field Transport to and from the Screen
Determining the Contents of Screen Fields ( POV POH )
Placing Values in Screen Fields ( POV )
Special F1 Functions
Displaying Input Values for a Table Field (POV)
Search Help Concepts
Overview Input Help Mechanisms
Migrating Existing Input Help
Assigning Number Range Numbers Unit 50
Objectives
Overview
Number Range Objects
Number Range Intervals
Sub-objects
Assigning Internal Numbers
Checking External Numbers
Number Range Information
Accessing Table NRIV 1 Without a Buffer Accessing Table NRIV 2 Without a Buffer
Buffering Number Ranges
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2734
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-27
Using Function Groups to Administer Number Ranges
Summary 1
Summary 2
Creating Change Documents Unit 51
ObjectivesOverview
Change Document Structure
Change Relevance
Change Document Objects
Generating Update Programs
INCLUDE Program Structure
Application Program
Change Document Objects and Internal Tables
Reading Change Documents
Using Function Groups to Edit Change Documents
Summary (1)
Summary (2)
Appendix Unit 52
Documentation ReferencesGlossary Index
I n t e r f a c e s f o r D a t a T r a n s f e r
Interfaces for Data Transfer Unit 53
Content
Data Transfer
Objectives
Data Transfer
Transferring Data Into the R3 System
Direct Data Transfer
Data Transfer Using Interfaces
Data Transfer Workbench
Data Analysis
Data Transfer
Analyzing the SAP Transaction
Assigning DataFormat Conversion
Transferring Legacy Data into the R3 System
Data Transfer Methods
Knowledge Tools
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer
Data Analysis and Formatting Unit 54
Data Analysis - Objectives
Data Analysis and Formatting
Standard Transfer Interfaces for Standard Transfer
Standard Transfer - Tasks
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2834
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-28
IMG Documentation
Data Transfer Workbench (DTW)
Documentation in the DTW
Data Analysis and Formatting
Record Layout Types
FB01 Record Layout StructureSample Data for Record Layouts
Generating Test Data in the DTW
Data Analysis and Formatting
Translating Data
Translating Data in the Legacy System
Generating SAP Structures in the DTW
Translating Data in the R3 System
Translating Data Types
Translating Data for Transaction FB01
Translating Data - Example
Translating Data Using EXCEL
Data Analysis and Formatting
Initializing Record Layouts
Initializing Record Layouts - Example
Filling Record Layouts
Structure of Transaction FB01
Mapping Data in Transaction FB01
Filling Record Layout BGR00 - Example
Data Analysis and Formatting
Additional Tasks
Converting Data
Converting Legacy System R3 System Data
Structure of a Conversion ProgramData Analysis - Summary
Exercises for Unit Data AnalysisSolutions to Unit Data Analysis
Files in the R3 System Unit 55
Objectives
Files in the R3 System
R3 Client Server Architecture
Transferring Files
Files in the R3 System
Processing FilesOpening Files
Opening Files - Options
Binary Mode and Text Mode
Transferring Data Records
Reading Data Records
Closing Deleting a Sequential File
Filling Record Layouts for Transaction FB01 (1)
Filling Record Layouts for Transaction FB01 (2)
Sequential Files - Summary
Files in the R3 System
DOWNLOAD and UPLOADFunction Module rsquoDOWNLOADrsquo
Example Program DOWNLOAD
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2934
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-29
Function Module rsquoUPLOADrsquo
Example Program UPLOAD
Summary
Exercises for Unit Files in the R3 SystemSolutions to Unit Files in the R3 System
Data Transfer Workbench Unit 56
Data Transfer - Objectives
Data Transfer Workbench
Preparing the Data Transfer
Testing and Executing the Data Transfer
Direct Input Management
Scheduling Direct Input
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer WorkbenchSolutions to Unit Data Transfer Workbench
Batch Input Sessions Unit 57
Objectives
Batch Input Sessions
Batch Input Processing
Batch Input Program
Format of a Batch Input Session
Creating Batch Input Sessions
Function Modules for Batch Input Programs
Structure of the BDC Table
Batch Input Processing
Batch Input Sessions
Batch Input Monitor - FunctionsSession Status
Processing Modes
Entering Data into Screens
Batch Input Processing
Session Statistics
Session Log
Summary
Exercises for Unit Batch Input SessionsSolutions to Unit Batch Input Sessions
Data Transfer Programs Unit 58Objectives
Data Transfer Programs
Customer Transfer Programs
Customer Transfer Program - Tasks
Data Transfer Programs
Batch Input Program Elements
Defining BDC Tables
Structure of the BDC Table
Determining Field Names
Determining Field Names with the Screen Painter
Structure DefinitionFunction Modules for a Batch Input Program
Function Module BDC_OPEN_GROUP
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3034
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-30
Function Module BDC_INSERT
Function Module BDC_CLOSE_GROUP
Structure of a Batch Input Program
Batch Input Program - Overview (I)
Batch Input Program - Overview (II)
Subroutine generate_bdc_dataProgram BDCRECXX (I)
Program BDCRECXX (II)
Program BDCRECXX (III)
Data Transfer Programs
Batch Input Recorder
Batch Input Recording
Recording the First Screen
Recording the Second Screen
Additional Screens Saving
Ending the Recording
Generating Sessions and Programs
Generating Batch Input Sessions
Structure of the Generated Program
Enhancing the Generated Program
Data Transfer Programs
Overview
Call Transaction Program
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (I)
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (II)
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (III)
Displaying the Messtab
Technical Implementation
Return Codes and System FieldsSystem Field Message Output
Generating Sessions When Errors Occur
Summary
Overview
Structure of a Data Transfer Program
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer ProgramSolutions to Unit Data Transfer Program
Additional Techniques Unit 59
ObjectivesAdditional Techniques - Overview
Changing Customers - Payment Transactions
Step Loop Field Names
Structure of the BDC Table
Filling BDC Tables in ABAP
Additional Techniques
Overview - Special Fields
Setting the Cursor in the Batch Input Session
Setting the Cursor in the ABAP Program
Additional Techniques
Successful Transaction EndAdditional Techniques
Processing Batch Input Sessions
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-31
Batch Input Flow
Additional Techniques
Program RSBDCSUB
Batch Input Authorizations
Service Programs
Summary Exercises for Unit Additional TechniquesSolutions for Unit Additional Techniques
Tips amp Tricks Unit 60
Tips and Tricks - Objectives
OSS Notes
Parallel Processing
Resetting Rollback Segments
Additional Tips and Information
Summary
Appendix Unit 61
Job Structure
Scheduling Jobs
Job Distribution
SAP-LUW Chronological Update
Update Principles
Asynchronous Update
Synchronous Update
Local Update
E n h a n c e m e n t s a n d M o d i f i c a t i o n s
Enhancements and Modifications Unit 62
Content
Introduction Contents
Course Overview Diagram
Main Business Scenario
Modifications Unit 63
Objectives
Modifications
What are modifications
Modifications and Upgrades
Modifications
Copying SAP Objects
Making Changes to SAP Copies (Modifications)
Registering Modifications in SSCR
Carrying Out a Registered Modification
Versions
Naming Conventions for Repository Objects
Modifications
Modifications Critical Success Factors (1)
Modifications Critical Success Factors (2)Modifications Critical Success Factors (3)
Documenting Modifications in Programs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-32
Modification Logs An Example
Modifications
Modification Adjustment SPDD and SPAU
Modification Adjustment Objects
Transaction SPAU (Process After Upgrade)
Transporting Adjustments between SystemsThe amount of work necessary at upgrade increases
Modifications Critical Repository Objects
Avoiding Adjustments
Modifications
User Exits
User Exits An Example
Using User Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Modifications
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Unit 64
Objectives
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Table Enhancements Overview
Append Structures
Append Structures at Upgrade
Customizing Includes
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Global Enhancements
Field Exits
Global and Local Field Exits
Creating Field Exits
Enhancements to Dictionary ElementsText Enhancements
Editing Text Enhancements
Keywords
Keyword Change Requirements
Keyword Changes and Release Upgrades
Restoring SAP Keywords
Enhanced Documentation for Data Elements
Customer Documentation
Summary Text Enhancements
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Solutions for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Enhancements using Customer Exits Unit 65
Objectives
Enhancements using Customer Exits
SAP Application Enhancements
Customer Enhancement Projects
SAP Enhancements and Customer Enhancement Projects
Enhancements using Customer Exits
The SAP Enhancement Creation Procedure
Implementing Enhancements in Customer SystemsCreating Customer Enhancement Projects
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-33
Editing Components
Activating Enhancement Projects
Transporting Projects
Summary Enhancement Management
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Function Module ExitsCalling and Creating Function Modules
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Organization of an X Function Group
Customer Source Code
Global Data SAP and the Customer
Subroutines Modules SAP and the Customer
Customer Screens
Customer Screens Modules
Summary Function Module Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Menu Exits
Menu Exit Requirements
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Menu Exits and Function Module Exits
Summary Menu Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Screen Exits
Subscreens in the R3 System
Calling Subscreens
Defining Screen Exits
Calling Customer Subscreens
Transporting Data to Subscreens
Transporting Data from SubscreensEditing Subscreens (1)
Editing Subscreens (2)
Summary Screen Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits Solutions for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits
Business Transaction Events Unit 66
Objectives
Business Transaction Events (BTE)
BTE Possible Scenarios (1)BTE Possible Scenarios (2)
Publish amp Subscribe vs Process Interfaces
Business Transaction Events SAP and the Customer
Finding Business Transaction Events
Creating a Publish amp Subscribe Interface
Differences between Customer Exits and BTEs
Summary
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3434
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-3
983209 SAP AG
R
Week overview
Week 3 Transaction Programming
Week 4 Interfaces for Data Transfer
Enhancements andModifications
Week 1 Basis Technology - Overview
ABAP Workbench Basics
Week 2 ABAP Dictionary
Techniques of List Processing
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 434
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-4
983209 SAP AG
R
R3 Integration Model
R3R3ClientServer
ABAP
ClientServer
ABAP
COControlling
COControlling
AAAsset
Accounting
AAAsset
Accounting
PSProjectSystem
PSProjectSystem
WFWorkflow
WFWorkflow
ISIndustry
Solutions
ISIndustry
Solutions
MMMaterials
Mgmt
MMMaterials
Mgmt
HRHuman
Resources
HRHuman
Resources
SDSales amp
Distribution
SDSales amp
Distribution
PPProduction
Planning
PPProduction
Planning
QMQualityMgmt
QMQualityMgmt
FIFinancial
Accounting
FIFinancial
Accounting
PMPlant
Maintenance
PMPlant
Maintenance
bull The SAP R3 System continues to set new standards for universal standard software Based on progressive development techniques the SAP R3 System allows comprehensive integration of
business administration and data processing
bull The SAP R3 System components are characterized by comprehensive business functions with the
most modern technology The integration of the applications ensures that all the functions are
directly available in the system and thus in the enterprise
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 534
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-5
TABC40 40 Application Development - ABAP Workbench
Preface Unit 0
CopyrightWeek Overview
The R3 Integration Model
B a s i s ndash T e c h n o l o g y ndash Overview
Basis Technology - Overview Unit 1
Content
Basis System and the System Environment
Basis System - Objectives
R3 Integration Diagram
R3 in the Business Framework
Business Framework Components
R3 as an Open System
Client Server - Scalability of the R3 System
Client Server Principles
R3 System Client Server Configurations
Three-Tier Hierarchy
R3 Basis Middleware
R3 Basis System Overview
System Platforms for the R3 SystemBasis System - Summary
Navigation Unit 2
Objectives
Logging On
Clients in the R3 System
R3 Menu Structure
Screen
Selecting Functions
Field Help
R3 Online HelpSystem Functions - Services
System Functions - User Profile
Favorites List
Session Manager
Navigation - Summary
Exercise for Unit NavigationSolutions to Unit Navigation
System Kernel Unit 3
System Kernel - Objectives
R3 Presentation InterfaceRelational Database Management Systems
R3 Database Interface
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 634
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-6
Processing User Requests
Dialog Work Processes
R3 Application Services
SAP Transactions and Screens
LUW (Logical Unit of Work)
Requesting a Lock SAP Lock Objects
Writing Log Records
Updating Log Records
Removing Locks
Background Processing
Workload Balancing
R3 Printer Services
R3 Instance
System Kernel - Summary
Exercise for Unit System Kernel Solutions to Unit System Kernel
Administration and Remote Services Unit 4
Administration - Objectives
Security Aspects in the R3 System
The Authorization Concept
The Profile Generator
System Administration
System Administration Terminations
R3 Computing Center Management System
Workload Alert Monitor
R3 Service amp Support Virtual Infrastructure
SAP Remote ServicesR3 Online Service System (OSS)
Administration - Summary
Exercise for Unit AdministrationSolutions to Unit Administration
A B A P W o r k b e n c h B a s i c s
ABAP Workbench Basics Unit 5
ContentABAP Workbench Overview
Objectives
R3 ClientServer Architecture
R3 ClientServer Architecture
R3 ClientServer Architecture
R3 ClientServer Architecture
ABAP
R3 Repository and Repository Objects
ABAP Workbench Tools
Repository Browser
Repository Browser Object ListTransporting Repository Objects
Development Projects in the WBO
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 734
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-7
Finishing Projects
Creating Development Classes
Assigning Change Requests
Programs with User and Database Dialog
Overview Creating Programs
Program AttributesImportant Editor Functions
Global Role of the ABAP Dictionary
1 User Dialog Selection Screens
1 User Dialog Selection Screen II
2 User Dialog Screens
Creating Screens
Database Dialog Open SQL
3 User Dialog Messages
4 User Dialog Lists
General ABAP Syntax
General ABAP Syntax and Chained Statements
Comments
ABAP Program Operations
Summary
Exercises for Unit ABAP Workbench Solutions for Unit ABAP Workbench
ABAP Dictionary Contents Unit 6
ABAP Dictionary Objectives
Data Modeling
Flight Data Model for ABAP Training Courses
Data Model
Realization in the ABAP DictionaryIntegration into ABAP Workbench (Active)
Basic Dictionary Objects
Dual Level Domain Concept
Transparent Tables
Creating Transparent Tables
Structures
Creating Structures
ABAP Dictionary Views
Advanced Techniques Search Help
ABAP Dictionary Summary
Exercises for Unit ABAP Dictionary Solutions for Unit ABAP Dictionary
ABAP Open SQL - Contents Unit 7
ABAP Open SQL Unit Objectives
The R3 ClientServer Architecture
The Database Interface
Open SQL Statements Overview
SELECT Statement Overview
Using the SELECT Statement for a Single Line
Using the SELECT Statement for Several Lines
Using the SELECT Statement for an Internal TableWHERE Clauses
ABAP Open SQL Summary
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 834
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-8
Exercises for Unit ABAP Open SQL Solutions for Unit ABAP Open SQL
ABAP Data and Statements Contents Unit 8
Objectives
The R3 ClientServer ArchitectureThe ABAP Type Concept
Defining Data Objects Overview
Data Types
Predefined Data Types
Elementary Data Objects
Structures
Internal Tables
Referring to ABAP Dictionary Objects
Type Groups in the ABAP Dictionary
PARAMETERS and TABLES
Literals and Constants
Text Symbols
Summary of Declarative Statements
Initializing Data Objects
Assigning Values
Assigning Values Field for Field
Type Conversion
Conversion Rules for Elementary Types
Conversion Rules for Structure Types
Calculating Values
Sub-fields
Calculating Dates
Control Statements OverviewLogical Expressions
Case Distinctions
DO and WHILE Loops
CHECK and EXIT
Summary
Summary (2)
Exercises for Unit ABAP Data and Statements Solutions for Unit ABAP Data and Statements
Test Tools Contents Unit 9
Test Tools Unit ObjectivesTest Tools
Debugging
Important Debugging Functions I
Important Debugging Functions II
Debugger Overview
Breakpoints
Advanced Techniques Runtime Analysis
Advanced Techniques SQL Trace
Advanced Techniques Computer Aided Test Tool
Summary
Internal Tables Contents Unit 10
Internal Tables Objectives
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 934
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-9
The R3 ClientServer Architecture
Internal Tables
Dynamic Table Expansion
Table Attributes Line Type
Keys
Data Access QuantitiesData Access Types
Table Types
Internal Table Work Areas
Defining Internal Tables
Filling Internal Tables
Array Fetch
Sorting an Internal Table
Loop Processing in Internal Tables
Accessing Individual Internal Table Entries
Changing an Internal Table with the Index
Changing an Internal Table with Keys
Deleting an Internal Table
Internal Tables withwithout Header Lines
Control Level Processing
Internal Tables Summary 1
Internal Tables Summary 2
Exercises for Unit Internal Tables Solutions for Unit Internal Tables
Modularization and Program Structure Unit 11
Objectives
Modularization and Program Structure
Structure of an ABAP ProgramStructure of Earlier Programs from the Course
Processing Block Types
Modularization and Program Structure
Event Blocks
Events in Executable Programs (Type 1)
Syntax Event Blocks
Modularization and Program Structure
Subroutines
Defining Subroutines
Defining the Interface
Data VisibilityCalling Subroutines
Calling Subroutines Syntax
Interface Parameters Structures
Interface Parameters Internal Tables
Modularization and Program Structure
Function Modules as Processing Blocks
Calling Function Modules
Creating a Function Group
Creating a Function Module
Elements of a Function Module
Interface Import ParametersException Handling
Function Module Source Code
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1034
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-10
Documentation and Testing
Calling Function Modules
Catching Exceptions
Central Role of Function Modules
Modularization and Program Structure
Includes Type I ProgramsTOP Includes
Standard Includes for Function Groups
Function Modules Summary
Exercises for Unit Modularization and Structure Solutions for Unit Modularization and Program Structure
Dialogs Contents Unit 12
Dialogs Unit Objectives
Dialogs
The R3 ClientServer Architecture
Overview
User Dialogs
Dialogs - Lists
Lists
List Operations
Page Headers
Multilingual Capability
ColorsIconsSymbols in Lists
Lists in Executable Programs
Details Lists
Example A Simple Details List
Syntax A Simple Details List
Details List ExampleHIDE Areas
Line Selection
Line Selection Syntax
Advanced Techniques Lists as Input Tools and Details Lists
Dialogs - Selection Screens
Selection Screens
The Selection Screen
Entering Selections
Search Help
Variants
Selection TextsRecap PARAMETERS
Using Parameters in the SELECT Statement
SELECT-OPTIONS
Using Select-Options in the SELECT Statement
Standard Selection Screens in Executable Programs
Standard Selection Screen Processing
Additional Input Checks
AT SELECTION-SCREEN
Example User-defined Selection Screens
User-defined Selection Screens
Syntax Defining and Calling Selection ScreensDialogs - User Messages
User Messages Overview
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-11
Syntax MESSAGE Statements
Dialog Message Types
Dialogs - Screens
Screens Strengths
Using Screens
Screens an ExampleParts of a Screen
Step 1 Creating a Screen
Creating a Screen Screen Attributes
Layout and Field Attributes 1
Layout and Field Attributes 2
Field Attributes The Field List
Check Tables
Step 2 Displaying Data
Screen Interfaces
Screen Processing Logic PBO and PAI
Screen Processing Blocks
PBO and PAI Processing Logic
Data Transport between Screens and Programs
Flow Logic
Step 3 Defining Pushbuttons
Defining Function Codes
Assigning a Field Name to the OK_CODE Field
Program Logic
Static Screen Sequencing
Dynamic Screen Sequencing
Database Updates
Advanced Techniques Screens
Dialogs - InterfacesOverview Interface Objects
Example Program Interface
Basic Interface Elements
Statuses Interface Views
Creating GUI Statuses for Lists
Creating Statuses Key Settings
Creating Statuses Menu Bars
Example Program Interface
Creating GUI Titles for a Screen
Creating GUI Statuses for a Screen
Title and StatusSummary Interfaces
Summary
Exercises for Unit Dialogs Solutions for Unit Dialogs
Authorization Checks Contents Unit 13
Objectives
Basic Authorization Concepts
Authorization Cehcks in Programs
AUTHORITY-CHECK Syntax
SummaryAuthorization Checks Summary
Exercises for Unit Authorization Checks
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-12
Solutions for Unit Authorization Checks
Software Logistics and Software Modifications Contents Unit 14
Software Logistics and Software Modifications Unit Object
Software Logistics and Software Modification
Workbench Organizer and Transport SystemManaging Development Projects in the WBO
Completing a Project
Functions of a Change Request
Local Objects
Originals and Copies
SAP Objects as Copies
Task Attributes
Changing Customer Copies
Changing SAP Copies (Modifications)
Software Logistics and Software Modification
Change Levels
Functional Enhancements
Enhancing User Dialogs
Enhancements Examples
Registering Developers in the SSCR
Software Logistics and Software Modification Summary
Software Logistics and Software Modifications Summary (II)
Exercises for Unit Software Logistics and Modification
Appendix Unit 15
Repository-Infosystem
Objectives
R3 Repository and Repository-ObjectsTypical Information System Requests
The Repository Information System
The SAP Application Hierarchy
Summary
Summary 2
Foreign Data Transfer
External Data Transfer
R3 Communication Interfaces I
R3 Communication Interfaces II
Termination Conditions 2
Advanced Techniques Dynamic Screen SequencingAdvanced Techniques Update
Appendix 1
Appendix 2
A B A P D i c t i o n a r y
ABAP Dictionary Unit 16
Content
IntroductionObjectives
Functions of the ABAP Dictionary
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-13
Linking to the ABAP Workbench (Active)
Access from ABAP Program
Summary
Tables in the ABAP Dictionary Unit 17
Objectives-Tables in the ABAP DictionaryTables and Fields
Basic Objects of the ABAP Dictionary
Two-Level Domain Concept Example
Transparent Tables
Structures
Technical Settings
Data Class
Size Category
Buffering Tables
Logging
Consistency between ABAP Dictionary and DB
Summary - Tables in the ABAP Dictionary
Exercises on Unit Tables in the ABAP Dictionary nSolutions to Unit Tables in the ABAP Dictionary
Performance during Table Access Unit 18
Objectives - Performance during Table Access
Indexes
Primary Index
Secondary Indexes
Data Access using the Buffer
Table Buffering
Full BufferingGeneric Buffering
Single-Record Buffering
Buffer Synchronization 1
Buffer Synchronization 2
Buffer Synchronization 3
Buffer Synchronization 4
Buffer Synchronization 5
Buffer Synchronization 6
Summary - Performance during Table Access
Exercises on Unit Performance during Table Access
Solutions to Unit Performance during Table Access
Relationships between Tables in the ABAP Dictionary Unit 19
Objectives - Relationships between Tables in the ABAP Dict
Definition of a Foreign Key
Foreign Key Fields Check Fields
Inserting a Data Record
Violation of the Foreign Key Check
Foreign Key Definitions in the Check Field
Requirements for the Field Assignment
Domains Value Tables Fixed Values
Check Table not Equal to Value TableField Assignment is not Unique
Semantic Attributes
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1434
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-14
Text Tables
Generic and Constant Foreign Keys
INCLUDE
Summary (1)
Summary (2)
Exercises on Unit Relationships between Tables nnSolutions to Unit Relationships between Tables m
R3 Repository Info System as seen by ABAP Dictionary Unit 20
Objectives - R3 Repository Information System
Typical Queries Made of the Information System
Selection Options
Functions
Summary (1) - R3 Repository Information System
Exercises on Unit The R3 Repository Information SystemSolutions to Unit The R3 Repository Information System
Changes to Tables Unit 21
Objectives - Changes to Tables
Active and Revised Versions
Runtime Objects
Handling Dependent Objects
Changing Database Tables
How is the Structure Adjusted
Conversion Process 1
Conversion Process 2
Conversion Process 3
Conversion Process 4
Conversion Process 5What to Do when a Conversion Terminates
Append Structures 1
Append Structures 2
Append Structures 3
Summary Changes to Tables
Exercises on Unit Changes to TablesSolutions to Unit Changes to Tables m
Views Unit 22
Objectives - Views
Why do you Need ViewsStructure of a View - Starting Situation
Structure of a View - Join Condition
Structure of a View - Field Selection (Projection)
Structure of a View - Selection Condition
How are Tables Linked to Views
Structure of the View
Data Selection with Views
Database Views
Buffering Database Views
Includes in Database Views
Maintenance ViewsInner and Outer Joins
Summary - Views
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1534
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-15
Exercises on Unit Views mmSolutions to Unit Views
Search Helps Unit 23
Objectives - Search Helps
R3 Standard Function Input HelpDescription of an Input Help
Interface of a Search Help
Description of the Dialog Behavior
Selection Method of a Serach Help
View as Selection Method
Performance of the Input Help
Input Help from the Data Element
Check Table Help
Attaching a Search Help to a Field
Input Help from Dictionary or Screen
Overview Mechanisms for the Input Help
Alternative Search Paths
Collective Search Helps and Elementary Search Helps
Further Options for Search Helps
Non-Standard Search Help Exit
Migration of Existing Input Helps
Summary - Search Helps
Exercises on Unit Search Helps nSolutions to Unit Search Helps nn
Appendix Unit 24
Important Menu Paths and Transactions
Decision Tree for Buffering TablesAppendix
T e c h n i q u e s o f L i s t P r o c e s s i n g
Techniques of List Processing Unit 25
Contents 12
Contents 22
Introduction
Course GoalsCourse Objectives
Course Overview Diagram
Business Scenario
Demo Programs Templates and Solutions
Overview of Exercises
Finding and Executing Programs Unit 26
Objectives
How to Find Existing Programs
SAP Anwendungshierarchie
The Repository Information SystemReport Trees Organization
Finding Report Trees
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1634
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-16
Summary
Creating Lists with ABAP Query Unit 27
Objectives
Creating Lists with ABAP Query
Programs and ABAP QueryABAP Query Organization
Creating Queries
Creating Lists with ABAP Query
Defining Queries
Choosing a Query Area and a Functional Area
Choosing Fields
Assigning Short Descriptions
Defining Local Fields
Basic Lists
Lists with Control Levels
Statistics
Ranked Lists
Interactive Functions - Single-Line Lists
Interactive Functions - Multiple-Line Lists
Saving Lists
Summary
Creating Lists with ABAP Query
Outputting Data to Lists Unit 28
Objectives
List Design Options
Generating a List
Setting the List FormatModifying and Suppressing Headers
Open Page Design TOP-OF-PAGE
Setting Fixed Lead Columns
The FORMAT Statement
Outputting Lines
The WRITE Statement General Syntax
The WRITE Statement Icons and Symbols
The WRITE Statement Checkboxes
Additional Statements for Output Design
Multilingual List Elements
System Fields and List GenerationStandard Functions in Lists
Summary Lists
Exercises for Outputting Data to Lists Solutions for Outputting Data to Lists
Selection Screens Unit 29
Objectives
Selection Screen Overivew
Declaration of Fields with PARAMETERS
Selections with SELECT-OPTIONS
Selection Options and Multiple SelectionsSyntax of the SELECT-OPTIONS Statement
Designing the Selection Screen I
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1734
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-17
Designing the Selection Screen II
Initializing the Selection Screen
General Help and Possible Entries Help (F1 and F4)
Input Checks AT SELECTION-SCREEN
CALL SELECTION-SCREEN I
CALL SELECTION-SCREEN IISelektionsbild Varianten I
Selection Screen Variants II
Summary
Exercises for Selection Screens Solutions for Selection Screens
Logical Databases Unit 30
Objectives
Generating Lists
Advantages of a Logical Database
Logical Databases Overview
LDB F1S Nodes
Sample Program for a Logical Database
LDB Sub-Objects Structure
LDB Sub-Objects Selections
Selection Screen for the Logical Database
Logical Database Dynamic Selections
LDB Sub-Objects Database Programs
Interaction Between LDBs and Programs
Events in Logical Databases
Program Flow and Termination Alternatives
Checking Internal Program Selections I
Checking Internal Program Selections IISummary
Exercises for Logical Databases Solutions for Logical Databases
Programming Data Retrieval Unit 31
Objectives
Programming Data Retrieval
Reading Multiple Database Tables
Reading Multiple Database Tables I
Reading Multiple Database Tables IIa
Reading Multiple Database Tables IIbReading Multiple Database Tables III
Reading Multiple Database Tables IV
Summary
Exercises for Programming Data Retrieval Solutions for Programming Data Retrieval
ABAP Query Administration Unit 32
Objectives
ABAP Query Administration
Maintaining User Groups
Authorizations and ABAP QueryABAP Query Administration
Defining Functional Areas
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1834
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-18
Overview Creating Functional Areas
Example Defining a Functional Area
Defining Functional Areas
Allocating Fields
Additional Information
Allocating Additional TablesAllocating Additional Fields
Selection Options
Allocating ABAP Statements
Summary
Exercises for ABAP Query Administration
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing Unit 33
Unit Objectives Control Level Processing
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Motivation
Control Level Processing
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Creating an Internal Table
Filling an Internal Table
Sorting and Editing an Internal Table
Control Level Processing for Internal Tables
Control Level Processing Schema for Internal Tables
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Generating an Extract Steps
Example Generating an Extract
Sorting and Processing an Extract
Example Control Level Processing
Schema for Control Level Processing of ExtractsData Formatting and Control Level Processing
Comparing Internal Tables and Extracts
Summary Control Level Processing
Exercises for Data Formatting and Control Level Processing Solutions for Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Storing Lists and Background Processing Unit 34
Objectives
Storing Lists and Background Processing
Saving Lists Possibilities
Saving Lists in SAPofficeSaving Lists as PC Files
Saving Lists in a Report Tree
Customizing Report Trees
Functions in Report Trees
Storing Lists and Background Processing
Options for Printing a List
Print Parameters
Program-Controlled Printing
Program-Controlled Printing with GET_PRINT_PARAMETERS
Storing Lists and Background Processing
Background Processing PhasesDefining Steps
Defining Start Times and Releasing Jobs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1934
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-19
Summary
Exercises for Storing Lists and Background Processing Solutions for Storing Lists and Background Processing
Interactive Lists Basics Unit 35
Unit Objectives Interactive ListsInteractive Lists Basics
User Interactions with Lists
Navigating Between Lists
Events Overview
Flow Control in Detail Lists
Creating Detail Lists I
Creating Detail Lists II
Interactive Lists Basics
Questions
HIDE Areas
HIDE Technique Line Selection
Data Buffering in a List System
Valid Line Selection
Field Selection
Interactive Lists Basics
Page Headers in Detail Lists
Interactive Lists Basics
Creating Lists in Modal Dialog Boxes
Summary Interactive Lists
Exercises for Interactive Lists Solutions for Interactive Lists
Creating User Interfaces Unit 36Objectives User Interfaces
User Interfaces Overview
Status Technical View I
Status Technical View II
Creating a GUI Status
Creating a GUI Status Assigning F Keys I
Creating a GUI Status Assigning F Keys II
Creating a GUI Status Menu Bars
Activating Title and Status
Event AT USER-COMMAND
Summary User Interfaces
Special Techniques for Interactive Lists Unit 37
Objectives
Scrolling in Lists
Reading Lists
Modifying Lists
List Navigation
Interactive List Messages
System Fields in Interactive Lists
Summary
Exercises for Creating User Interfaces Solutions for Creating User Interfaces
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2034
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-20
Linking Programs Unit 38
Objectives
Linking Programs
Data Visibility
Data Transfer Using SAP Memory
SETGET ParametersSUBMIT Statement Syntax
Example SUBMIT WITH
Datatransfer Using ABAP Memory
Returning from a Called Program
Summary
Exercises for Linking Programs Solutions for Linking Programs
Lists on the Internet Unit 39
Unit Objectives Special Application
Lists on the Internet
Motivation
The World Wide Web
HTTP Hypertext Transport Protocol
URL Uniform Resource Locator
HTML Hypertext Markup Language
R3 ClientServer Architecture
R3 ClientServer Architecture with ITS
Lists on the Internet
Web Reporting - Overview
Web Reporting Flow
Creating a List Using a URL
Parameters for WWW_GET_REPORTInteractive Lists
Access Authorization
Creating HTML Hyperlinks in Lists
Lists on the Internet
Web Reporting Browser
Releasing Report Trees for the Internet
Summary Special Application
Appendix Unit 40
Menu Data
T r a n s a c t i o n P ro g r a m m i n g
Transaction Programming Unit 41
Content
Introduction Contents
Couse Goal
Course Objectives
Overview Diagram
Main Business Scenario
About the Course Material
Basic Transaction Programming Unit 42
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-21
Objectives - Basics
Components of a Transaction
Writing a Transaction Process
Analyzing the Problem
User Dialogs in the R3 System
Advantages of ScreensComponents of a Screen
Static Screen Sequence
Creating a Screen Attributes
Creating a Screen Layout
Creating a Screen Field List
Writing the Flow Logic
Communictaion Between Screen and ABAP Program
Creating a Transaction Code
Summary Basic Dialog Programming
Screen Objects - List Unit 43
Screen Objects - Objectives
Screen Objects
Screen Objects General Attributes
Attributes of Screen Objects (Key)
Dynamically Modifiable Static Attributes
The System Table SCREEN
Modifying Attributes Dynamically Example
Object Attributes Modification Group
Modifying Attributes Dynamically Program
Screen Objects - Screen
Screen Object Screen
Defining and Managing ScreensScreen Attributes
Dynamic Next Screen Overview
Setting the Next Screen Dynamically
Inserting a Sequence of Screens Dynamically
Calling a Dialog Box Dynamically
Window Coordinates
Setting the Cursor Position Dynamically
Screen Objects - Title Bar
Screen Object Title Bar
Creating and Using Title Bars
Screen Objects - Text FieldScreen Object Text Field
Text Fields Attributes
Creating Text Fields
Hiding Texts Dynamically
Dynamically Modifiable Attributes Text Field
Dynamic Screen Modifications Program
Screen Objects - InputOutput Field
Screen Object InputOutput Field
InputOutput Fields Attributes
Creating InputOutput Fields
InputOutput Fields Automatic Field ChecksInputOutput Fields Default Values in SAP Memory
Defining SETGET Parameter Attributes
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-22
Programming Field Input Checks with an Error Dialog
Checking Groups of Fields
Controlling Error Dialogs
Dialog Message Categories
The FIELD Statement and Data Transport
Calling Modules Conditionally (1)Calling Modules Conditionally (2)
Screen Objects Status icon
Screen Objects Status Icons
Status Icons Attributes
Creating Status Icon Fields
Filling Status Icon Fields
Group Box
Screen Objects Group Boxes
Group Boxes Attributes
Screen Objects Radio Buttons
Screen Objects Radio Buttons and Checkboxes
Radio ButtonsCheckboxes Attributes
Creating a Radio Button Group
Creating a Checkbox
Screen Objects - Pushbutton
Screen Objects Pushbuttons
Pushbuttons Attributes
Creating Pushbuttons
Pushbuttons with Function Type E
Screen Objects - Subscreen
Screen Objects Subscreen (1)
Screen Objects Subscreen (2)
Subscreen AttributesCreating a Subscreen Area
Calling a Subscreen
Subscreens from External Programs
Subscreens Encapsulation in Function Groups
Subscreens in Function Groups Call Sequence
Subscreens in Function Groups Data Transport
Screen Objects - Tabstrip Control
Screen Object Tabstrip Control
Tabstrip Elements
Tab Page Technical View
Tabstrip Controls AttributesCreating a Tabstrip Control
Creating a Tabstrip Control Tabstrip Area
Creating a Tabstip Control Tab Title
Creating a Tabstrip Control Subscreens
Scrolling Locally in a Tabstrip Control
Scrolling Locally in a Tabstrip Control Coding
Scrolling in a Tabstrip Control
Scrolling in a Tabstrip Control Coding
Screen Objects - Table Control
Screen Object Table Control
ABAP Table Control (Functions)Table Control Table Settings
Actions in Table Controls
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-23
Creating Table Control Elements
Table Control Attributes
Creating a Table Control
Creating a Table Control Table Control Area
Creating a Table Control TC Fields (1)
Create Table Control TC Fields (2) Section ColumnTable Control Attributes at Runtime
Table Control Attributes (Structure)
Table Control Elements - Processing
Processing a Table Control (Principle 1)
Filling a Table Control
Changing the Contents of a Table Control
Table Control Applications (Principle)
Filling a Table Control Coding
Changing the Contents of a Table Control 4 Coding
Table Controls Field Transport in the PBO
Table Controls Field Transport in the PAI
Table Control Elements Further Techniques
Changing a Table Control
Changing the Attributes of a Table Control (1)
Changing the Attributes of a Table Control (2)
Table Control Modifying Field Attributes Temporarily
Sorting a Table Control (Example)
Scrolling Page by Page in a Table Control (Example)
Table Control Cursor Position (Example)
Screen Objects - GUI Status
Screen Object GUI Status
Status Technical View (1)
Status Technical View (2)Attributes of Functions
Function Key Settings
Menus and Menu Bars Attributes
Status Attributes
Standard Toolbar Functions and their Reserved function Keys
Creating a Status
Navigation - Targets
Navigation - Dialogs
Screen Objects - List
Screen Objects Lists
Displaying a List Within a TransactionLists in a Modal Dialog Box
Screen Objects - Selection Screen
Screen Object Selection Screen
Entering Value Ranges
Defining and Calling a Selection Screen
Summary Screen Objects
Uumlbung zu Kapitel Screen Objects Solutions Screen Objects Unit
Programming Database Changes Unit 44
Unit ObjectivesProgramming Database Changes
Statements for Database Dialogs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2434
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-24
SAP LUW
Database LUW
SAP R3 System 3-tier Architecture
System Architecture Implicit DB COMMIT
Objective Bundling the DB Changes in an SAP LUW
Programming Database ChangesBundling Techniques Overview
Bunding Using Delayed Inline Changes
Bundling Using Subroutines
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundline Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Techniques
Update Function modules
V1 and V2 Update Function Modules
Logging Records for Update
Deleting Update Entries Rollback in the Dialog Program
Rollback in the Update Program
Asynchronous Update
What Happens in a Commit Work
Comparison of Bundling Techniques
Programming Database Updates
Why Set Locks
Database Locks
SAP Locking Concept
Setting Logical Locks
SAP Lock ObjectsENQUEUE and DEQUEUE Function Modules
Calling the Function Modules
The Lock Table
Validity of Locks Scope = 2
Programming Database Updates
SAP Authorization Concept
Authorization Checks
User Master Record Authorizations
Authorization Checks for Transactions
Summary
Exercises Programming Database Updates Unit Solutions Programming Database Updates Unit
Complex Transactions Unit 45
Unit Objectives
Complex Transactions
Synchronous Calls Overview
Calling a Report Program
Calling a Transaction
Encapsulating Dialogs in Function Modules
Synchronous Program Calls Main Memory Contents
Complex TransactionsAsynchronous Calls
Calling Programs Asynchronously
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2534
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-25
Complex Transactions
Passing Data Overview
Passing Data Using the Interface of ABAP Programs
The WITH Addition in the SUBMIT Statement
Memory Areas Logical Model
ABAP MemoryPassing Parameters using the SAP Memory
Passing Parameters (SAP Memory)
Complex Transactions
Synchronous Program Calls SAP LUWs
Asynchronous Program Calls SAP LUWs
Program Calls Visible Data and LUWs
Complex Transactions
RFC Scenario R3 - R3
Enabling Function Modules for RFC
RFC Using ABAP Function Modules
Program Context of a Remote Function
RFC Calls System Exceptions
Complex Transactions
Remote Function Call Overview
Process Diagram Synchronous RFC
Process Diagram Asynchronous RFC
Process Diagram Transactional RFC
Transactional RFC (tRFC) Introduction
tRFC Properties
Complex Transactions
Lock Entries for Local Program Calls
Lock Entries for RFC Calls
Summary Exercises Complex Transactions Unit Solutions Complex Transactions Unit
Static Attributes in the Screen Painter Unit 46
Screen Attributes (1)
Screen Attributes (2)
General Attributes
Dictionary Attributes
Program Attributes
Display Attributes
Special Attributes for Subscreens and Tabstrip ControlsSpecial Attributes for Table Controls
Database Updates Further Information Unit 47
Objectives
Database Updates Further Information
Asynchronous Update
Synchronous Update
Local Update
SAP LUW Timescale of Updates
Database Updates Further Information
V1 and V2 Update Function ModulesV1 Update
V2 Update
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2634
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-26
Database Updates Further Information
Validity of Locks Scope = 1
Validity of Locks Scope = 2
Validity of Locks Scope = 3
ENQUEUE Function Modules Interface Parameters
Summary
Complex Transactions Further Information Unit 48
CALL TRANSACTION lsquoTA01rsquo and SUBMIT lsquoREP01rsquo AND RETURN
Implicit End of a Program or LEAVE PROGRAM
LEAVE TO TRANSACTION lsquoTA01rsquo
SUBMIT lsquoREP01rsquo
CALL FUNCTION lsquoFUNC1rsquoPERFORM form1 IN PROGRAM program
Help Functions Unit 49
Overview Standard F1 and F4 Functions
The Search Help Concept
Dialog for an Immediate Hit List
Dialog with Preselection
Dialog for Selecting a Search Help
Search Help Concepts
Search Helps
Defining the Dialog Fields
Defining the Data Selection
Collective Search Helps
Search Help Concepts
Linking Search Helps to Screen Fields
Search Help Concepts
Programmed Help Functions OverviewProgrammed F1 and F4 Help
The POH and POV Events Process
Function Modules for Data Transport
Field Transport to and from the Screen
Determining the Contents of Screen Fields ( POV POH )
Placing Values in Screen Fields ( POV )
Special F1 Functions
Displaying Input Values for a Table Field (POV)
Search Help Concepts
Overview Input Help Mechanisms
Migrating Existing Input Help
Assigning Number Range Numbers Unit 50
Objectives
Overview
Number Range Objects
Number Range Intervals
Sub-objects
Assigning Internal Numbers
Checking External Numbers
Number Range Information
Accessing Table NRIV 1 Without a Buffer Accessing Table NRIV 2 Without a Buffer
Buffering Number Ranges
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2734
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-27
Using Function Groups to Administer Number Ranges
Summary 1
Summary 2
Creating Change Documents Unit 51
ObjectivesOverview
Change Document Structure
Change Relevance
Change Document Objects
Generating Update Programs
INCLUDE Program Structure
Application Program
Change Document Objects and Internal Tables
Reading Change Documents
Using Function Groups to Edit Change Documents
Summary (1)
Summary (2)
Appendix Unit 52
Documentation ReferencesGlossary Index
I n t e r f a c e s f o r D a t a T r a n s f e r
Interfaces for Data Transfer Unit 53
Content
Data Transfer
Objectives
Data Transfer
Transferring Data Into the R3 System
Direct Data Transfer
Data Transfer Using Interfaces
Data Transfer Workbench
Data Analysis
Data Transfer
Analyzing the SAP Transaction
Assigning DataFormat Conversion
Transferring Legacy Data into the R3 System
Data Transfer Methods
Knowledge Tools
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer
Data Analysis and Formatting Unit 54
Data Analysis - Objectives
Data Analysis and Formatting
Standard Transfer Interfaces for Standard Transfer
Standard Transfer - Tasks
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2834
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-28
IMG Documentation
Data Transfer Workbench (DTW)
Documentation in the DTW
Data Analysis and Formatting
Record Layout Types
FB01 Record Layout StructureSample Data for Record Layouts
Generating Test Data in the DTW
Data Analysis and Formatting
Translating Data
Translating Data in the Legacy System
Generating SAP Structures in the DTW
Translating Data in the R3 System
Translating Data Types
Translating Data for Transaction FB01
Translating Data - Example
Translating Data Using EXCEL
Data Analysis and Formatting
Initializing Record Layouts
Initializing Record Layouts - Example
Filling Record Layouts
Structure of Transaction FB01
Mapping Data in Transaction FB01
Filling Record Layout BGR00 - Example
Data Analysis and Formatting
Additional Tasks
Converting Data
Converting Legacy System R3 System Data
Structure of a Conversion ProgramData Analysis - Summary
Exercises for Unit Data AnalysisSolutions to Unit Data Analysis
Files in the R3 System Unit 55
Objectives
Files in the R3 System
R3 Client Server Architecture
Transferring Files
Files in the R3 System
Processing FilesOpening Files
Opening Files - Options
Binary Mode and Text Mode
Transferring Data Records
Reading Data Records
Closing Deleting a Sequential File
Filling Record Layouts for Transaction FB01 (1)
Filling Record Layouts for Transaction FB01 (2)
Sequential Files - Summary
Files in the R3 System
DOWNLOAD and UPLOADFunction Module rsquoDOWNLOADrsquo
Example Program DOWNLOAD
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2934
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-29
Function Module rsquoUPLOADrsquo
Example Program UPLOAD
Summary
Exercises for Unit Files in the R3 SystemSolutions to Unit Files in the R3 System
Data Transfer Workbench Unit 56
Data Transfer - Objectives
Data Transfer Workbench
Preparing the Data Transfer
Testing and Executing the Data Transfer
Direct Input Management
Scheduling Direct Input
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer WorkbenchSolutions to Unit Data Transfer Workbench
Batch Input Sessions Unit 57
Objectives
Batch Input Sessions
Batch Input Processing
Batch Input Program
Format of a Batch Input Session
Creating Batch Input Sessions
Function Modules for Batch Input Programs
Structure of the BDC Table
Batch Input Processing
Batch Input Sessions
Batch Input Monitor - FunctionsSession Status
Processing Modes
Entering Data into Screens
Batch Input Processing
Session Statistics
Session Log
Summary
Exercises for Unit Batch Input SessionsSolutions to Unit Batch Input Sessions
Data Transfer Programs Unit 58Objectives
Data Transfer Programs
Customer Transfer Programs
Customer Transfer Program - Tasks
Data Transfer Programs
Batch Input Program Elements
Defining BDC Tables
Structure of the BDC Table
Determining Field Names
Determining Field Names with the Screen Painter
Structure DefinitionFunction Modules for a Batch Input Program
Function Module BDC_OPEN_GROUP
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3034
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-30
Function Module BDC_INSERT
Function Module BDC_CLOSE_GROUP
Structure of a Batch Input Program
Batch Input Program - Overview (I)
Batch Input Program - Overview (II)
Subroutine generate_bdc_dataProgram BDCRECXX (I)
Program BDCRECXX (II)
Program BDCRECXX (III)
Data Transfer Programs
Batch Input Recorder
Batch Input Recording
Recording the First Screen
Recording the Second Screen
Additional Screens Saving
Ending the Recording
Generating Sessions and Programs
Generating Batch Input Sessions
Structure of the Generated Program
Enhancing the Generated Program
Data Transfer Programs
Overview
Call Transaction Program
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (I)
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (II)
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (III)
Displaying the Messtab
Technical Implementation
Return Codes and System FieldsSystem Field Message Output
Generating Sessions When Errors Occur
Summary
Overview
Structure of a Data Transfer Program
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer ProgramSolutions to Unit Data Transfer Program
Additional Techniques Unit 59
ObjectivesAdditional Techniques - Overview
Changing Customers - Payment Transactions
Step Loop Field Names
Structure of the BDC Table
Filling BDC Tables in ABAP
Additional Techniques
Overview - Special Fields
Setting the Cursor in the Batch Input Session
Setting the Cursor in the ABAP Program
Additional Techniques
Successful Transaction EndAdditional Techniques
Processing Batch Input Sessions
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-31
Batch Input Flow
Additional Techniques
Program RSBDCSUB
Batch Input Authorizations
Service Programs
Summary Exercises for Unit Additional TechniquesSolutions for Unit Additional Techniques
Tips amp Tricks Unit 60
Tips and Tricks - Objectives
OSS Notes
Parallel Processing
Resetting Rollback Segments
Additional Tips and Information
Summary
Appendix Unit 61
Job Structure
Scheduling Jobs
Job Distribution
SAP-LUW Chronological Update
Update Principles
Asynchronous Update
Synchronous Update
Local Update
E n h a n c e m e n t s a n d M o d i f i c a t i o n s
Enhancements and Modifications Unit 62
Content
Introduction Contents
Course Overview Diagram
Main Business Scenario
Modifications Unit 63
Objectives
Modifications
What are modifications
Modifications and Upgrades
Modifications
Copying SAP Objects
Making Changes to SAP Copies (Modifications)
Registering Modifications in SSCR
Carrying Out a Registered Modification
Versions
Naming Conventions for Repository Objects
Modifications
Modifications Critical Success Factors (1)
Modifications Critical Success Factors (2)Modifications Critical Success Factors (3)
Documenting Modifications in Programs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-32
Modification Logs An Example
Modifications
Modification Adjustment SPDD and SPAU
Modification Adjustment Objects
Transaction SPAU (Process After Upgrade)
Transporting Adjustments between SystemsThe amount of work necessary at upgrade increases
Modifications Critical Repository Objects
Avoiding Adjustments
Modifications
User Exits
User Exits An Example
Using User Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Modifications
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Unit 64
Objectives
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Table Enhancements Overview
Append Structures
Append Structures at Upgrade
Customizing Includes
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Global Enhancements
Field Exits
Global and Local Field Exits
Creating Field Exits
Enhancements to Dictionary ElementsText Enhancements
Editing Text Enhancements
Keywords
Keyword Change Requirements
Keyword Changes and Release Upgrades
Restoring SAP Keywords
Enhanced Documentation for Data Elements
Customer Documentation
Summary Text Enhancements
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Solutions for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Enhancements using Customer Exits Unit 65
Objectives
Enhancements using Customer Exits
SAP Application Enhancements
Customer Enhancement Projects
SAP Enhancements and Customer Enhancement Projects
Enhancements using Customer Exits
The SAP Enhancement Creation Procedure
Implementing Enhancements in Customer SystemsCreating Customer Enhancement Projects
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-33
Editing Components
Activating Enhancement Projects
Transporting Projects
Summary Enhancement Management
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Function Module ExitsCalling and Creating Function Modules
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Organization of an X Function Group
Customer Source Code
Global Data SAP and the Customer
Subroutines Modules SAP and the Customer
Customer Screens
Customer Screens Modules
Summary Function Module Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Menu Exits
Menu Exit Requirements
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Menu Exits and Function Module Exits
Summary Menu Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Screen Exits
Subscreens in the R3 System
Calling Subscreens
Defining Screen Exits
Calling Customer Subscreens
Transporting Data to Subscreens
Transporting Data from SubscreensEditing Subscreens (1)
Editing Subscreens (2)
Summary Screen Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits Solutions for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits
Business Transaction Events Unit 66
Objectives
Business Transaction Events (BTE)
BTE Possible Scenarios (1)BTE Possible Scenarios (2)
Publish amp Subscribe vs Process Interfaces
Business Transaction Events SAP and the Customer
Finding Business Transaction Events
Creating a Publish amp Subscribe Interface
Differences between Customer Exits and BTEs
Summary
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3434
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 434
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-4
983209 SAP AG
R
R3 Integration Model
R3R3ClientServer
ABAP
ClientServer
ABAP
COControlling
COControlling
AAAsset
Accounting
AAAsset
Accounting
PSProjectSystem
PSProjectSystem
WFWorkflow
WFWorkflow
ISIndustry
Solutions
ISIndustry
Solutions
MMMaterials
Mgmt
MMMaterials
Mgmt
HRHuman
Resources
HRHuman
Resources
SDSales amp
Distribution
SDSales amp
Distribution
PPProduction
Planning
PPProduction
Planning
QMQualityMgmt
QMQualityMgmt
FIFinancial
Accounting
FIFinancial
Accounting
PMPlant
Maintenance
PMPlant
Maintenance
bull The SAP R3 System continues to set new standards for universal standard software Based on progressive development techniques the SAP R3 System allows comprehensive integration of
business administration and data processing
bull The SAP R3 System components are characterized by comprehensive business functions with the
most modern technology The integration of the applications ensures that all the functions are
directly available in the system and thus in the enterprise
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 534
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-5
TABC40 40 Application Development - ABAP Workbench
Preface Unit 0
CopyrightWeek Overview
The R3 Integration Model
B a s i s ndash T e c h n o l o g y ndash Overview
Basis Technology - Overview Unit 1
Content
Basis System and the System Environment
Basis System - Objectives
R3 Integration Diagram
R3 in the Business Framework
Business Framework Components
R3 as an Open System
Client Server - Scalability of the R3 System
Client Server Principles
R3 System Client Server Configurations
Three-Tier Hierarchy
R3 Basis Middleware
R3 Basis System Overview
System Platforms for the R3 SystemBasis System - Summary
Navigation Unit 2
Objectives
Logging On
Clients in the R3 System
R3 Menu Structure
Screen
Selecting Functions
Field Help
R3 Online HelpSystem Functions - Services
System Functions - User Profile
Favorites List
Session Manager
Navigation - Summary
Exercise for Unit NavigationSolutions to Unit Navigation
System Kernel Unit 3
System Kernel - Objectives
R3 Presentation InterfaceRelational Database Management Systems
R3 Database Interface
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 634
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-6
Processing User Requests
Dialog Work Processes
R3 Application Services
SAP Transactions and Screens
LUW (Logical Unit of Work)
Requesting a Lock SAP Lock Objects
Writing Log Records
Updating Log Records
Removing Locks
Background Processing
Workload Balancing
R3 Printer Services
R3 Instance
System Kernel - Summary
Exercise for Unit System Kernel Solutions to Unit System Kernel
Administration and Remote Services Unit 4
Administration - Objectives
Security Aspects in the R3 System
The Authorization Concept
The Profile Generator
System Administration
System Administration Terminations
R3 Computing Center Management System
Workload Alert Monitor
R3 Service amp Support Virtual Infrastructure
SAP Remote ServicesR3 Online Service System (OSS)
Administration - Summary
Exercise for Unit AdministrationSolutions to Unit Administration
A B A P W o r k b e n c h B a s i c s
ABAP Workbench Basics Unit 5
ContentABAP Workbench Overview
Objectives
R3 ClientServer Architecture
R3 ClientServer Architecture
R3 ClientServer Architecture
R3 ClientServer Architecture
ABAP
R3 Repository and Repository Objects
ABAP Workbench Tools
Repository Browser
Repository Browser Object ListTransporting Repository Objects
Development Projects in the WBO
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 734
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-7
Finishing Projects
Creating Development Classes
Assigning Change Requests
Programs with User and Database Dialog
Overview Creating Programs
Program AttributesImportant Editor Functions
Global Role of the ABAP Dictionary
1 User Dialog Selection Screens
1 User Dialog Selection Screen II
2 User Dialog Screens
Creating Screens
Database Dialog Open SQL
3 User Dialog Messages
4 User Dialog Lists
General ABAP Syntax
General ABAP Syntax and Chained Statements
Comments
ABAP Program Operations
Summary
Exercises for Unit ABAP Workbench Solutions for Unit ABAP Workbench
ABAP Dictionary Contents Unit 6
ABAP Dictionary Objectives
Data Modeling
Flight Data Model for ABAP Training Courses
Data Model
Realization in the ABAP DictionaryIntegration into ABAP Workbench (Active)
Basic Dictionary Objects
Dual Level Domain Concept
Transparent Tables
Creating Transparent Tables
Structures
Creating Structures
ABAP Dictionary Views
Advanced Techniques Search Help
ABAP Dictionary Summary
Exercises for Unit ABAP Dictionary Solutions for Unit ABAP Dictionary
ABAP Open SQL - Contents Unit 7
ABAP Open SQL Unit Objectives
The R3 ClientServer Architecture
The Database Interface
Open SQL Statements Overview
SELECT Statement Overview
Using the SELECT Statement for a Single Line
Using the SELECT Statement for Several Lines
Using the SELECT Statement for an Internal TableWHERE Clauses
ABAP Open SQL Summary
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 834
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-8
Exercises for Unit ABAP Open SQL Solutions for Unit ABAP Open SQL
ABAP Data and Statements Contents Unit 8
Objectives
The R3 ClientServer ArchitectureThe ABAP Type Concept
Defining Data Objects Overview
Data Types
Predefined Data Types
Elementary Data Objects
Structures
Internal Tables
Referring to ABAP Dictionary Objects
Type Groups in the ABAP Dictionary
PARAMETERS and TABLES
Literals and Constants
Text Symbols
Summary of Declarative Statements
Initializing Data Objects
Assigning Values
Assigning Values Field for Field
Type Conversion
Conversion Rules for Elementary Types
Conversion Rules for Structure Types
Calculating Values
Sub-fields
Calculating Dates
Control Statements OverviewLogical Expressions
Case Distinctions
DO and WHILE Loops
CHECK and EXIT
Summary
Summary (2)
Exercises for Unit ABAP Data and Statements Solutions for Unit ABAP Data and Statements
Test Tools Contents Unit 9
Test Tools Unit ObjectivesTest Tools
Debugging
Important Debugging Functions I
Important Debugging Functions II
Debugger Overview
Breakpoints
Advanced Techniques Runtime Analysis
Advanced Techniques SQL Trace
Advanced Techniques Computer Aided Test Tool
Summary
Internal Tables Contents Unit 10
Internal Tables Objectives
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 934
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-9
The R3 ClientServer Architecture
Internal Tables
Dynamic Table Expansion
Table Attributes Line Type
Keys
Data Access QuantitiesData Access Types
Table Types
Internal Table Work Areas
Defining Internal Tables
Filling Internal Tables
Array Fetch
Sorting an Internal Table
Loop Processing in Internal Tables
Accessing Individual Internal Table Entries
Changing an Internal Table with the Index
Changing an Internal Table with Keys
Deleting an Internal Table
Internal Tables withwithout Header Lines
Control Level Processing
Internal Tables Summary 1
Internal Tables Summary 2
Exercises for Unit Internal Tables Solutions for Unit Internal Tables
Modularization and Program Structure Unit 11
Objectives
Modularization and Program Structure
Structure of an ABAP ProgramStructure of Earlier Programs from the Course
Processing Block Types
Modularization and Program Structure
Event Blocks
Events in Executable Programs (Type 1)
Syntax Event Blocks
Modularization and Program Structure
Subroutines
Defining Subroutines
Defining the Interface
Data VisibilityCalling Subroutines
Calling Subroutines Syntax
Interface Parameters Structures
Interface Parameters Internal Tables
Modularization and Program Structure
Function Modules as Processing Blocks
Calling Function Modules
Creating a Function Group
Creating a Function Module
Elements of a Function Module
Interface Import ParametersException Handling
Function Module Source Code
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1034
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-10
Documentation and Testing
Calling Function Modules
Catching Exceptions
Central Role of Function Modules
Modularization and Program Structure
Includes Type I ProgramsTOP Includes
Standard Includes for Function Groups
Function Modules Summary
Exercises for Unit Modularization and Structure Solutions for Unit Modularization and Program Structure
Dialogs Contents Unit 12
Dialogs Unit Objectives
Dialogs
The R3 ClientServer Architecture
Overview
User Dialogs
Dialogs - Lists
Lists
List Operations
Page Headers
Multilingual Capability
ColorsIconsSymbols in Lists
Lists in Executable Programs
Details Lists
Example A Simple Details List
Syntax A Simple Details List
Details List ExampleHIDE Areas
Line Selection
Line Selection Syntax
Advanced Techniques Lists as Input Tools and Details Lists
Dialogs - Selection Screens
Selection Screens
The Selection Screen
Entering Selections
Search Help
Variants
Selection TextsRecap PARAMETERS
Using Parameters in the SELECT Statement
SELECT-OPTIONS
Using Select-Options in the SELECT Statement
Standard Selection Screens in Executable Programs
Standard Selection Screen Processing
Additional Input Checks
AT SELECTION-SCREEN
Example User-defined Selection Screens
User-defined Selection Screens
Syntax Defining and Calling Selection ScreensDialogs - User Messages
User Messages Overview
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-11
Syntax MESSAGE Statements
Dialog Message Types
Dialogs - Screens
Screens Strengths
Using Screens
Screens an ExampleParts of a Screen
Step 1 Creating a Screen
Creating a Screen Screen Attributes
Layout and Field Attributes 1
Layout and Field Attributes 2
Field Attributes The Field List
Check Tables
Step 2 Displaying Data
Screen Interfaces
Screen Processing Logic PBO and PAI
Screen Processing Blocks
PBO and PAI Processing Logic
Data Transport between Screens and Programs
Flow Logic
Step 3 Defining Pushbuttons
Defining Function Codes
Assigning a Field Name to the OK_CODE Field
Program Logic
Static Screen Sequencing
Dynamic Screen Sequencing
Database Updates
Advanced Techniques Screens
Dialogs - InterfacesOverview Interface Objects
Example Program Interface
Basic Interface Elements
Statuses Interface Views
Creating GUI Statuses for Lists
Creating Statuses Key Settings
Creating Statuses Menu Bars
Example Program Interface
Creating GUI Titles for a Screen
Creating GUI Statuses for a Screen
Title and StatusSummary Interfaces
Summary
Exercises for Unit Dialogs Solutions for Unit Dialogs
Authorization Checks Contents Unit 13
Objectives
Basic Authorization Concepts
Authorization Cehcks in Programs
AUTHORITY-CHECK Syntax
SummaryAuthorization Checks Summary
Exercises for Unit Authorization Checks
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-12
Solutions for Unit Authorization Checks
Software Logistics and Software Modifications Contents Unit 14
Software Logistics and Software Modifications Unit Object
Software Logistics and Software Modification
Workbench Organizer and Transport SystemManaging Development Projects in the WBO
Completing a Project
Functions of a Change Request
Local Objects
Originals and Copies
SAP Objects as Copies
Task Attributes
Changing Customer Copies
Changing SAP Copies (Modifications)
Software Logistics and Software Modification
Change Levels
Functional Enhancements
Enhancing User Dialogs
Enhancements Examples
Registering Developers in the SSCR
Software Logistics and Software Modification Summary
Software Logistics and Software Modifications Summary (II)
Exercises for Unit Software Logistics and Modification
Appendix Unit 15
Repository-Infosystem
Objectives
R3 Repository and Repository-ObjectsTypical Information System Requests
The Repository Information System
The SAP Application Hierarchy
Summary
Summary 2
Foreign Data Transfer
External Data Transfer
R3 Communication Interfaces I
R3 Communication Interfaces II
Termination Conditions 2
Advanced Techniques Dynamic Screen SequencingAdvanced Techniques Update
Appendix 1
Appendix 2
A B A P D i c t i o n a r y
ABAP Dictionary Unit 16
Content
IntroductionObjectives
Functions of the ABAP Dictionary
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-13
Linking to the ABAP Workbench (Active)
Access from ABAP Program
Summary
Tables in the ABAP Dictionary Unit 17
Objectives-Tables in the ABAP DictionaryTables and Fields
Basic Objects of the ABAP Dictionary
Two-Level Domain Concept Example
Transparent Tables
Structures
Technical Settings
Data Class
Size Category
Buffering Tables
Logging
Consistency between ABAP Dictionary and DB
Summary - Tables in the ABAP Dictionary
Exercises on Unit Tables in the ABAP Dictionary nSolutions to Unit Tables in the ABAP Dictionary
Performance during Table Access Unit 18
Objectives - Performance during Table Access
Indexes
Primary Index
Secondary Indexes
Data Access using the Buffer
Table Buffering
Full BufferingGeneric Buffering
Single-Record Buffering
Buffer Synchronization 1
Buffer Synchronization 2
Buffer Synchronization 3
Buffer Synchronization 4
Buffer Synchronization 5
Buffer Synchronization 6
Summary - Performance during Table Access
Exercises on Unit Performance during Table Access
Solutions to Unit Performance during Table Access
Relationships between Tables in the ABAP Dictionary Unit 19
Objectives - Relationships between Tables in the ABAP Dict
Definition of a Foreign Key
Foreign Key Fields Check Fields
Inserting a Data Record
Violation of the Foreign Key Check
Foreign Key Definitions in the Check Field
Requirements for the Field Assignment
Domains Value Tables Fixed Values
Check Table not Equal to Value TableField Assignment is not Unique
Semantic Attributes
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1434
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-14
Text Tables
Generic and Constant Foreign Keys
INCLUDE
Summary (1)
Summary (2)
Exercises on Unit Relationships between Tables nnSolutions to Unit Relationships between Tables m
R3 Repository Info System as seen by ABAP Dictionary Unit 20
Objectives - R3 Repository Information System
Typical Queries Made of the Information System
Selection Options
Functions
Summary (1) - R3 Repository Information System
Exercises on Unit The R3 Repository Information SystemSolutions to Unit The R3 Repository Information System
Changes to Tables Unit 21
Objectives - Changes to Tables
Active and Revised Versions
Runtime Objects
Handling Dependent Objects
Changing Database Tables
How is the Structure Adjusted
Conversion Process 1
Conversion Process 2
Conversion Process 3
Conversion Process 4
Conversion Process 5What to Do when a Conversion Terminates
Append Structures 1
Append Structures 2
Append Structures 3
Summary Changes to Tables
Exercises on Unit Changes to TablesSolutions to Unit Changes to Tables m
Views Unit 22
Objectives - Views
Why do you Need ViewsStructure of a View - Starting Situation
Structure of a View - Join Condition
Structure of a View - Field Selection (Projection)
Structure of a View - Selection Condition
How are Tables Linked to Views
Structure of the View
Data Selection with Views
Database Views
Buffering Database Views
Includes in Database Views
Maintenance ViewsInner and Outer Joins
Summary - Views
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1534
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-15
Exercises on Unit Views mmSolutions to Unit Views
Search Helps Unit 23
Objectives - Search Helps
R3 Standard Function Input HelpDescription of an Input Help
Interface of a Search Help
Description of the Dialog Behavior
Selection Method of a Serach Help
View as Selection Method
Performance of the Input Help
Input Help from the Data Element
Check Table Help
Attaching a Search Help to a Field
Input Help from Dictionary or Screen
Overview Mechanisms for the Input Help
Alternative Search Paths
Collective Search Helps and Elementary Search Helps
Further Options for Search Helps
Non-Standard Search Help Exit
Migration of Existing Input Helps
Summary - Search Helps
Exercises on Unit Search Helps nSolutions to Unit Search Helps nn
Appendix Unit 24
Important Menu Paths and Transactions
Decision Tree for Buffering TablesAppendix
T e c h n i q u e s o f L i s t P r o c e s s i n g
Techniques of List Processing Unit 25
Contents 12
Contents 22
Introduction
Course GoalsCourse Objectives
Course Overview Diagram
Business Scenario
Demo Programs Templates and Solutions
Overview of Exercises
Finding and Executing Programs Unit 26
Objectives
How to Find Existing Programs
SAP Anwendungshierarchie
The Repository Information SystemReport Trees Organization
Finding Report Trees
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1634
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-16
Summary
Creating Lists with ABAP Query Unit 27
Objectives
Creating Lists with ABAP Query
Programs and ABAP QueryABAP Query Organization
Creating Queries
Creating Lists with ABAP Query
Defining Queries
Choosing a Query Area and a Functional Area
Choosing Fields
Assigning Short Descriptions
Defining Local Fields
Basic Lists
Lists with Control Levels
Statistics
Ranked Lists
Interactive Functions - Single-Line Lists
Interactive Functions - Multiple-Line Lists
Saving Lists
Summary
Creating Lists with ABAP Query
Outputting Data to Lists Unit 28
Objectives
List Design Options
Generating a List
Setting the List FormatModifying and Suppressing Headers
Open Page Design TOP-OF-PAGE
Setting Fixed Lead Columns
The FORMAT Statement
Outputting Lines
The WRITE Statement General Syntax
The WRITE Statement Icons and Symbols
The WRITE Statement Checkboxes
Additional Statements for Output Design
Multilingual List Elements
System Fields and List GenerationStandard Functions in Lists
Summary Lists
Exercises for Outputting Data to Lists Solutions for Outputting Data to Lists
Selection Screens Unit 29
Objectives
Selection Screen Overivew
Declaration of Fields with PARAMETERS
Selections with SELECT-OPTIONS
Selection Options and Multiple SelectionsSyntax of the SELECT-OPTIONS Statement
Designing the Selection Screen I
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1734
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-17
Designing the Selection Screen II
Initializing the Selection Screen
General Help and Possible Entries Help (F1 and F4)
Input Checks AT SELECTION-SCREEN
CALL SELECTION-SCREEN I
CALL SELECTION-SCREEN IISelektionsbild Varianten I
Selection Screen Variants II
Summary
Exercises for Selection Screens Solutions for Selection Screens
Logical Databases Unit 30
Objectives
Generating Lists
Advantages of a Logical Database
Logical Databases Overview
LDB F1S Nodes
Sample Program for a Logical Database
LDB Sub-Objects Structure
LDB Sub-Objects Selections
Selection Screen for the Logical Database
Logical Database Dynamic Selections
LDB Sub-Objects Database Programs
Interaction Between LDBs and Programs
Events in Logical Databases
Program Flow and Termination Alternatives
Checking Internal Program Selections I
Checking Internal Program Selections IISummary
Exercises for Logical Databases Solutions for Logical Databases
Programming Data Retrieval Unit 31
Objectives
Programming Data Retrieval
Reading Multiple Database Tables
Reading Multiple Database Tables I
Reading Multiple Database Tables IIa
Reading Multiple Database Tables IIbReading Multiple Database Tables III
Reading Multiple Database Tables IV
Summary
Exercises for Programming Data Retrieval Solutions for Programming Data Retrieval
ABAP Query Administration Unit 32
Objectives
ABAP Query Administration
Maintaining User Groups
Authorizations and ABAP QueryABAP Query Administration
Defining Functional Areas
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1834
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-18
Overview Creating Functional Areas
Example Defining a Functional Area
Defining Functional Areas
Allocating Fields
Additional Information
Allocating Additional TablesAllocating Additional Fields
Selection Options
Allocating ABAP Statements
Summary
Exercises for ABAP Query Administration
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing Unit 33
Unit Objectives Control Level Processing
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Motivation
Control Level Processing
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Creating an Internal Table
Filling an Internal Table
Sorting and Editing an Internal Table
Control Level Processing for Internal Tables
Control Level Processing Schema for Internal Tables
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Generating an Extract Steps
Example Generating an Extract
Sorting and Processing an Extract
Example Control Level Processing
Schema for Control Level Processing of ExtractsData Formatting and Control Level Processing
Comparing Internal Tables and Extracts
Summary Control Level Processing
Exercises for Data Formatting and Control Level Processing Solutions for Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Storing Lists and Background Processing Unit 34
Objectives
Storing Lists and Background Processing
Saving Lists Possibilities
Saving Lists in SAPofficeSaving Lists as PC Files
Saving Lists in a Report Tree
Customizing Report Trees
Functions in Report Trees
Storing Lists and Background Processing
Options for Printing a List
Print Parameters
Program-Controlled Printing
Program-Controlled Printing with GET_PRINT_PARAMETERS
Storing Lists and Background Processing
Background Processing PhasesDefining Steps
Defining Start Times and Releasing Jobs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1934
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-19
Summary
Exercises for Storing Lists and Background Processing Solutions for Storing Lists and Background Processing
Interactive Lists Basics Unit 35
Unit Objectives Interactive ListsInteractive Lists Basics
User Interactions with Lists
Navigating Between Lists
Events Overview
Flow Control in Detail Lists
Creating Detail Lists I
Creating Detail Lists II
Interactive Lists Basics
Questions
HIDE Areas
HIDE Technique Line Selection
Data Buffering in a List System
Valid Line Selection
Field Selection
Interactive Lists Basics
Page Headers in Detail Lists
Interactive Lists Basics
Creating Lists in Modal Dialog Boxes
Summary Interactive Lists
Exercises for Interactive Lists Solutions for Interactive Lists
Creating User Interfaces Unit 36Objectives User Interfaces
User Interfaces Overview
Status Technical View I
Status Technical View II
Creating a GUI Status
Creating a GUI Status Assigning F Keys I
Creating a GUI Status Assigning F Keys II
Creating a GUI Status Menu Bars
Activating Title and Status
Event AT USER-COMMAND
Summary User Interfaces
Special Techniques for Interactive Lists Unit 37
Objectives
Scrolling in Lists
Reading Lists
Modifying Lists
List Navigation
Interactive List Messages
System Fields in Interactive Lists
Summary
Exercises for Creating User Interfaces Solutions for Creating User Interfaces
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2034
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-20
Linking Programs Unit 38
Objectives
Linking Programs
Data Visibility
Data Transfer Using SAP Memory
SETGET ParametersSUBMIT Statement Syntax
Example SUBMIT WITH
Datatransfer Using ABAP Memory
Returning from a Called Program
Summary
Exercises for Linking Programs Solutions for Linking Programs
Lists on the Internet Unit 39
Unit Objectives Special Application
Lists on the Internet
Motivation
The World Wide Web
HTTP Hypertext Transport Protocol
URL Uniform Resource Locator
HTML Hypertext Markup Language
R3 ClientServer Architecture
R3 ClientServer Architecture with ITS
Lists on the Internet
Web Reporting - Overview
Web Reporting Flow
Creating a List Using a URL
Parameters for WWW_GET_REPORTInteractive Lists
Access Authorization
Creating HTML Hyperlinks in Lists
Lists on the Internet
Web Reporting Browser
Releasing Report Trees for the Internet
Summary Special Application
Appendix Unit 40
Menu Data
T r a n s a c t i o n P ro g r a m m i n g
Transaction Programming Unit 41
Content
Introduction Contents
Couse Goal
Course Objectives
Overview Diagram
Main Business Scenario
About the Course Material
Basic Transaction Programming Unit 42
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-21
Objectives - Basics
Components of a Transaction
Writing a Transaction Process
Analyzing the Problem
User Dialogs in the R3 System
Advantages of ScreensComponents of a Screen
Static Screen Sequence
Creating a Screen Attributes
Creating a Screen Layout
Creating a Screen Field List
Writing the Flow Logic
Communictaion Between Screen and ABAP Program
Creating a Transaction Code
Summary Basic Dialog Programming
Screen Objects - List Unit 43
Screen Objects - Objectives
Screen Objects
Screen Objects General Attributes
Attributes of Screen Objects (Key)
Dynamically Modifiable Static Attributes
The System Table SCREEN
Modifying Attributes Dynamically Example
Object Attributes Modification Group
Modifying Attributes Dynamically Program
Screen Objects - Screen
Screen Object Screen
Defining and Managing ScreensScreen Attributes
Dynamic Next Screen Overview
Setting the Next Screen Dynamically
Inserting a Sequence of Screens Dynamically
Calling a Dialog Box Dynamically
Window Coordinates
Setting the Cursor Position Dynamically
Screen Objects - Title Bar
Screen Object Title Bar
Creating and Using Title Bars
Screen Objects - Text FieldScreen Object Text Field
Text Fields Attributes
Creating Text Fields
Hiding Texts Dynamically
Dynamically Modifiable Attributes Text Field
Dynamic Screen Modifications Program
Screen Objects - InputOutput Field
Screen Object InputOutput Field
InputOutput Fields Attributes
Creating InputOutput Fields
InputOutput Fields Automatic Field ChecksInputOutput Fields Default Values in SAP Memory
Defining SETGET Parameter Attributes
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-22
Programming Field Input Checks with an Error Dialog
Checking Groups of Fields
Controlling Error Dialogs
Dialog Message Categories
The FIELD Statement and Data Transport
Calling Modules Conditionally (1)Calling Modules Conditionally (2)
Screen Objects Status icon
Screen Objects Status Icons
Status Icons Attributes
Creating Status Icon Fields
Filling Status Icon Fields
Group Box
Screen Objects Group Boxes
Group Boxes Attributes
Screen Objects Radio Buttons
Screen Objects Radio Buttons and Checkboxes
Radio ButtonsCheckboxes Attributes
Creating a Radio Button Group
Creating a Checkbox
Screen Objects - Pushbutton
Screen Objects Pushbuttons
Pushbuttons Attributes
Creating Pushbuttons
Pushbuttons with Function Type E
Screen Objects - Subscreen
Screen Objects Subscreen (1)
Screen Objects Subscreen (2)
Subscreen AttributesCreating a Subscreen Area
Calling a Subscreen
Subscreens from External Programs
Subscreens Encapsulation in Function Groups
Subscreens in Function Groups Call Sequence
Subscreens in Function Groups Data Transport
Screen Objects - Tabstrip Control
Screen Object Tabstrip Control
Tabstrip Elements
Tab Page Technical View
Tabstrip Controls AttributesCreating a Tabstrip Control
Creating a Tabstrip Control Tabstrip Area
Creating a Tabstip Control Tab Title
Creating a Tabstrip Control Subscreens
Scrolling Locally in a Tabstrip Control
Scrolling Locally in a Tabstrip Control Coding
Scrolling in a Tabstrip Control
Scrolling in a Tabstrip Control Coding
Screen Objects - Table Control
Screen Object Table Control
ABAP Table Control (Functions)Table Control Table Settings
Actions in Table Controls
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-23
Creating Table Control Elements
Table Control Attributes
Creating a Table Control
Creating a Table Control Table Control Area
Creating a Table Control TC Fields (1)
Create Table Control TC Fields (2) Section ColumnTable Control Attributes at Runtime
Table Control Attributes (Structure)
Table Control Elements - Processing
Processing a Table Control (Principle 1)
Filling a Table Control
Changing the Contents of a Table Control
Table Control Applications (Principle)
Filling a Table Control Coding
Changing the Contents of a Table Control 4 Coding
Table Controls Field Transport in the PBO
Table Controls Field Transport in the PAI
Table Control Elements Further Techniques
Changing a Table Control
Changing the Attributes of a Table Control (1)
Changing the Attributes of a Table Control (2)
Table Control Modifying Field Attributes Temporarily
Sorting a Table Control (Example)
Scrolling Page by Page in a Table Control (Example)
Table Control Cursor Position (Example)
Screen Objects - GUI Status
Screen Object GUI Status
Status Technical View (1)
Status Technical View (2)Attributes of Functions
Function Key Settings
Menus and Menu Bars Attributes
Status Attributes
Standard Toolbar Functions and their Reserved function Keys
Creating a Status
Navigation - Targets
Navigation - Dialogs
Screen Objects - List
Screen Objects Lists
Displaying a List Within a TransactionLists in a Modal Dialog Box
Screen Objects - Selection Screen
Screen Object Selection Screen
Entering Value Ranges
Defining and Calling a Selection Screen
Summary Screen Objects
Uumlbung zu Kapitel Screen Objects Solutions Screen Objects Unit
Programming Database Changes Unit 44
Unit ObjectivesProgramming Database Changes
Statements for Database Dialogs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2434
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-24
SAP LUW
Database LUW
SAP R3 System 3-tier Architecture
System Architecture Implicit DB COMMIT
Objective Bundling the DB Changes in an SAP LUW
Programming Database ChangesBundling Techniques Overview
Bunding Using Delayed Inline Changes
Bundling Using Subroutines
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundline Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Techniques
Update Function modules
V1 and V2 Update Function Modules
Logging Records for Update
Deleting Update Entries Rollback in the Dialog Program
Rollback in the Update Program
Asynchronous Update
What Happens in a Commit Work
Comparison of Bundling Techniques
Programming Database Updates
Why Set Locks
Database Locks
SAP Locking Concept
Setting Logical Locks
SAP Lock ObjectsENQUEUE and DEQUEUE Function Modules
Calling the Function Modules
The Lock Table
Validity of Locks Scope = 2
Programming Database Updates
SAP Authorization Concept
Authorization Checks
User Master Record Authorizations
Authorization Checks for Transactions
Summary
Exercises Programming Database Updates Unit Solutions Programming Database Updates Unit
Complex Transactions Unit 45
Unit Objectives
Complex Transactions
Synchronous Calls Overview
Calling a Report Program
Calling a Transaction
Encapsulating Dialogs in Function Modules
Synchronous Program Calls Main Memory Contents
Complex TransactionsAsynchronous Calls
Calling Programs Asynchronously
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2534
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-25
Complex Transactions
Passing Data Overview
Passing Data Using the Interface of ABAP Programs
The WITH Addition in the SUBMIT Statement
Memory Areas Logical Model
ABAP MemoryPassing Parameters using the SAP Memory
Passing Parameters (SAP Memory)
Complex Transactions
Synchronous Program Calls SAP LUWs
Asynchronous Program Calls SAP LUWs
Program Calls Visible Data and LUWs
Complex Transactions
RFC Scenario R3 - R3
Enabling Function Modules for RFC
RFC Using ABAP Function Modules
Program Context of a Remote Function
RFC Calls System Exceptions
Complex Transactions
Remote Function Call Overview
Process Diagram Synchronous RFC
Process Diagram Asynchronous RFC
Process Diagram Transactional RFC
Transactional RFC (tRFC) Introduction
tRFC Properties
Complex Transactions
Lock Entries for Local Program Calls
Lock Entries for RFC Calls
Summary Exercises Complex Transactions Unit Solutions Complex Transactions Unit
Static Attributes in the Screen Painter Unit 46
Screen Attributes (1)
Screen Attributes (2)
General Attributes
Dictionary Attributes
Program Attributes
Display Attributes
Special Attributes for Subscreens and Tabstrip ControlsSpecial Attributes for Table Controls
Database Updates Further Information Unit 47
Objectives
Database Updates Further Information
Asynchronous Update
Synchronous Update
Local Update
SAP LUW Timescale of Updates
Database Updates Further Information
V1 and V2 Update Function ModulesV1 Update
V2 Update
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2634
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-26
Database Updates Further Information
Validity of Locks Scope = 1
Validity of Locks Scope = 2
Validity of Locks Scope = 3
ENQUEUE Function Modules Interface Parameters
Summary
Complex Transactions Further Information Unit 48
CALL TRANSACTION lsquoTA01rsquo and SUBMIT lsquoREP01rsquo AND RETURN
Implicit End of a Program or LEAVE PROGRAM
LEAVE TO TRANSACTION lsquoTA01rsquo
SUBMIT lsquoREP01rsquo
CALL FUNCTION lsquoFUNC1rsquoPERFORM form1 IN PROGRAM program
Help Functions Unit 49
Overview Standard F1 and F4 Functions
The Search Help Concept
Dialog for an Immediate Hit List
Dialog with Preselection
Dialog for Selecting a Search Help
Search Help Concepts
Search Helps
Defining the Dialog Fields
Defining the Data Selection
Collective Search Helps
Search Help Concepts
Linking Search Helps to Screen Fields
Search Help Concepts
Programmed Help Functions OverviewProgrammed F1 and F4 Help
The POH and POV Events Process
Function Modules for Data Transport
Field Transport to and from the Screen
Determining the Contents of Screen Fields ( POV POH )
Placing Values in Screen Fields ( POV )
Special F1 Functions
Displaying Input Values for a Table Field (POV)
Search Help Concepts
Overview Input Help Mechanisms
Migrating Existing Input Help
Assigning Number Range Numbers Unit 50
Objectives
Overview
Number Range Objects
Number Range Intervals
Sub-objects
Assigning Internal Numbers
Checking External Numbers
Number Range Information
Accessing Table NRIV 1 Without a Buffer Accessing Table NRIV 2 Without a Buffer
Buffering Number Ranges
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2734
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-27
Using Function Groups to Administer Number Ranges
Summary 1
Summary 2
Creating Change Documents Unit 51
ObjectivesOverview
Change Document Structure
Change Relevance
Change Document Objects
Generating Update Programs
INCLUDE Program Structure
Application Program
Change Document Objects and Internal Tables
Reading Change Documents
Using Function Groups to Edit Change Documents
Summary (1)
Summary (2)
Appendix Unit 52
Documentation ReferencesGlossary Index
I n t e r f a c e s f o r D a t a T r a n s f e r
Interfaces for Data Transfer Unit 53
Content
Data Transfer
Objectives
Data Transfer
Transferring Data Into the R3 System
Direct Data Transfer
Data Transfer Using Interfaces
Data Transfer Workbench
Data Analysis
Data Transfer
Analyzing the SAP Transaction
Assigning DataFormat Conversion
Transferring Legacy Data into the R3 System
Data Transfer Methods
Knowledge Tools
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer
Data Analysis and Formatting Unit 54
Data Analysis - Objectives
Data Analysis and Formatting
Standard Transfer Interfaces for Standard Transfer
Standard Transfer - Tasks
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2834
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-28
IMG Documentation
Data Transfer Workbench (DTW)
Documentation in the DTW
Data Analysis and Formatting
Record Layout Types
FB01 Record Layout StructureSample Data for Record Layouts
Generating Test Data in the DTW
Data Analysis and Formatting
Translating Data
Translating Data in the Legacy System
Generating SAP Structures in the DTW
Translating Data in the R3 System
Translating Data Types
Translating Data for Transaction FB01
Translating Data - Example
Translating Data Using EXCEL
Data Analysis and Formatting
Initializing Record Layouts
Initializing Record Layouts - Example
Filling Record Layouts
Structure of Transaction FB01
Mapping Data in Transaction FB01
Filling Record Layout BGR00 - Example
Data Analysis and Formatting
Additional Tasks
Converting Data
Converting Legacy System R3 System Data
Structure of a Conversion ProgramData Analysis - Summary
Exercises for Unit Data AnalysisSolutions to Unit Data Analysis
Files in the R3 System Unit 55
Objectives
Files in the R3 System
R3 Client Server Architecture
Transferring Files
Files in the R3 System
Processing FilesOpening Files
Opening Files - Options
Binary Mode and Text Mode
Transferring Data Records
Reading Data Records
Closing Deleting a Sequential File
Filling Record Layouts for Transaction FB01 (1)
Filling Record Layouts for Transaction FB01 (2)
Sequential Files - Summary
Files in the R3 System
DOWNLOAD and UPLOADFunction Module rsquoDOWNLOADrsquo
Example Program DOWNLOAD
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2934
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-29
Function Module rsquoUPLOADrsquo
Example Program UPLOAD
Summary
Exercises for Unit Files in the R3 SystemSolutions to Unit Files in the R3 System
Data Transfer Workbench Unit 56
Data Transfer - Objectives
Data Transfer Workbench
Preparing the Data Transfer
Testing and Executing the Data Transfer
Direct Input Management
Scheduling Direct Input
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer WorkbenchSolutions to Unit Data Transfer Workbench
Batch Input Sessions Unit 57
Objectives
Batch Input Sessions
Batch Input Processing
Batch Input Program
Format of a Batch Input Session
Creating Batch Input Sessions
Function Modules for Batch Input Programs
Structure of the BDC Table
Batch Input Processing
Batch Input Sessions
Batch Input Monitor - FunctionsSession Status
Processing Modes
Entering Data into Screens
Batch Input Processing
Session Statistics
Session Log
Summary
Exercises for Unit Batch Input SessionsSolutions to Unit Batch Input Sessions
Data Transfer Programs Unit 58Objectives
Data Transfer Programs
Customer Transfer Programs
Customer Transfer Program - Tasks
Data Transfer Programs
Batch Input Program Elements
Defining BDC Tables
Structure of the BDC Table
Determining Field Names
Determining Field Names with the Screen Painter
Structure DefinitionFunction Modules for a Batch Input Program
Function Module BDC_OPEN_GROUP
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3034
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-30
Function Module BDC_INSERT
Function Module BDC_CLOSE_GROUP
Structure of a Batch Input Program
Batch Input Program - Overview (I)
Batch Input Program - Overview (II)
Subroutine generate_bdc_dataProgram BDCRECXX (I)
Program BDCRECXX (II)
Program BDCRECXX (III)
Data Transfer Programs
Batch Input Recorder
Batch Input Recording
Recording the First Screen
Recording the Second Screen
Additional Screens Saving
Ending the Recording
Generating Sessions and Programs
Generating Batch Input Sessions
Structure of the Generated Program
Enhancing the Generated Program
Data Transfer Programs
Overview
Call Transaction Program
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (I)
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (II)
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (III)
Displaying the Messtab
Technical Implementation
Return Codes and System FieldsSystem Field Message Output
Generating Sessions When Errors Occur
Summary
Overview
Structure of a Data Transfer Program
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer ProgramSolutions to Unit Data Transfer Program
Additional Techniques Unit 59
ObjectivesAdditional Techniques - Overview
Changing Customers - Payment Transactions
Step Loop Field Names
Structure of the BDC Table
Filling BDC Tables in ABAP
Additional Techniques
Overview - Special Fields
Setting the Cursor in the Batch Input Session
Setting the Cursor in the ABAP Program
Additional Techniques
Successful Transaction EndAdditional Techniques
Processing Batch Input Sessions
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-31
Batch Input Flow
Additional Techniques
Program RSBDCSUB
Batch Input Authorizations
Service Programs
Summary Exercises for Unit Additional TechniquesSolutions for Unit Additional Techniques
Tips amp Tricks Unit 60
Tips and Tricks - Objectives
OSS Notes
Parallel Processing
Resetting Rollback Segments
Additional Tips and Information
Summary
Appendix Unit 61
Job Structure
Scheduling Jobs
Job Distribution
SAP-LUW Chronological Update
Update Principles
Asynchronous Update
Synchronous Update
Local Update
E n h a n c e m e n t s a n d M o d i f i c a t i o n s
Enhancements and Modifications Unit 62
Content
Introduction Contents
Course Overview Diagram
Main Business Scenario
Modifications Unit 63
Objectives
Modifications
What are modifications
Modifications and Upgrades
Modifications
Copying SAP Objects
Making Changes to SAP Copies (Modifications)
Registering Modifications in SSCR
Carrying Out a Registered Modification
Versions
Naming Conventions for Repository Objects
Modifications
Modifications Critical Success Factors (1)
Modifications Critical Success Factors (2)Modifications Critical Success Factors (3)
Documenting Modifications in Programs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-32
Modification Logs An Example
Modifications
Modification Adjustment SPDD and SPAU
Modification Adjustment Objects
Transaction SPAU (Process After Upgrade)
Transporting Adjustments between SystemsThe amount of work necessary at upgrade increases
Modifications Critical Repository Objects
Avoiding Adjustments
Modifications
User Exits
User Exits An Example
Using User Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Modifications
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Unit 64
Objectives
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Table Enhancements Overview
Append Structures
Append Structures at Upgrade
Customizing Includes
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Global Enhancements
Field Exits
Global and Local Field Exits
Creating Field Exits
Enhancements to Dictionary ElementsText Enhancements
Editing Text Enhancements
Keywords
Keyword Change Requirements
Keyword Changes and Release Upgrades
Restoring SAP Keywords
Enhanced Documentation for Data Elements
Customer Documentation
Summary Text Enhancements
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Solutions for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Enhancements using Customer Exits Unit 65
Objectives
Enhancements using Customer Exits
SAP Application Enhancements
Customer Enhancement Projects
SAP Enhancements and Customer Enhancement Projects
Enhancements using Customer Exits
The SAP Enhancement Creation Procedure
Implementing Enhancements in Customer SystemsCreating Customer Enhancement Projects
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-33
Editing Components
Activating Enhancement Projects
Transporting Projects
Summary Enhancement Management
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Function Module ExitsCalling and Creating Function Modules
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Organization of an X Function Group
Customer Source Code
Global Data SAP and the Customer
Subroutines Modules SAP and the Customer
Customer Screens
Customer Screens Modules
Summary Function Module Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Menu Exits
Menu Exit Requirements
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Menu Exits and Function Module Exits
Summary Menu Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Screen Exits
Subscreens in the R3 System
Calling Subscreens
Defining Screen Exits
Calling Customer Subscreens
Transporting Data to Subscreens
Transporting Data from SubscreensEditing Subscreens (1)
Editing Subscreens (2)
Summary Screen Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits Solutions for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits
Business Transaction Events Unit 66
Objectives
Business Transaction Events (BTE)
BTE Possible Scenarios (1)BTE Possible Scenarios (2)
Publish amp Subscribe vs Process Interfaces
Business Transaction Events SAP and the Customer
Finding Business Transaction Events
Creating a Publish amp Subscribe Interface
Differences between Customer Exits and BTEs
Summary
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3434
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 534
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-5
TABC40 40 Application Development - ABAP Workbench
Preface Unit 0
CopyrightWeek Overview
The R3 Integration Model
B a s i s ndash T e c h n o l o g y ndash Overview
Basis Technology - Overview Unit 1
Content
Basis System and the System Environment
Basis System - Objectives
R3 Integration Diagram
R3 in the Business Framework
Business Framework Components
R3 as an Open System
Client Server - Scalability of the R3 System
Client Server Principles
R3 System Client Server Configurations
Three-Tier Hierarchy
R3 Basis Middleware
R3 Basis System Overview
System Platforms for the R3 SystemBasis System - Summary
Navigation Unit 2
Objectives
Logging On
Clients in the R3 System
R3 Menu Structure
Screen
Selecting Functions
Field Help
R3 Online HelpSystem Functions - Services
System Functions - User Profile
Favorites List
Session Manager
Navigation - Summary
Exercise for Unit NavigationSolutions to Unit Navigation
System Kernel Unit 3
System Kernel - Objectives
R3 Presentation InterfaceRelational Database Management Systems
R3 Database Interface
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 634
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-6
Processing User Requests
Dialog Work Processes
R3 Application Services
SAP Transactions and Screens
LUW (Logical Unit of Work)
Requesting a Lock SAP Lock Objects
Writing Log Records
Updating Log Records
Removing Locks
Background Processing
Workload Balancing
R3 Printer Services
R3 Instance
System Kernel - Summary
Exercise for Unit System Kernel Solutions to Unit System Kernel
Administration and Remote Services Unit 4
Administration - Objectives
Security Aspects in the R3 System
The Authorization Concept
The Profile Generator
System Administration
System Administration Terminations
R3 Computing Center Management System
Workload Alert Monitor
R3 Service amp Support Virtual Infrastructure
SAP Remote ServicesR3 Online Service System (OSS)
Administration - Summary
Exercise for Unit AdministrationSolutions to Unit Administration
A B A P W o r k b e n c h B a s i c s
ABAP Workbench Basics Unit 5
ContentABAP Workbench Overview
Objectives
R3 ClientServer Architecture
R3 ClientServer Architecture
R3 ClientServer Architecture
R3 ClientServer Architecture
ABAP
R3 Repository and Repository Objects
ABAP Workbench Tools
Repository Browser
Repository Browser Object ListTransporting Repository Objects
Development Projects in the WBO
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 734
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-7
Finishing Projects
Creating Development Classes
Assigning Change Requests
Programs with User and Database Dialog
Overview Creating Programs
Program AttributesImportant Editor Functions
Global Role of the ABAP Dictionary
1 User Dialog Selection Screens
1 User Dialog Selection Screen II
2 User Dialog Screens
Creating Screens
Database Dialog Open SQL
3 User Dialog Messages
4 User Dialog Lists
General ABAP Syntax
General ABAP Syntax and Chained Statements
Comments
ABAP Program Operations
Summary
Exercises for Unit ABAP Workbench Solutions for Unit ABAP Workbench
ABAP Dictionary Contents Unit 6
ABAP Dictionary Objectives
Data Modeling
Flight Data Model for ABAP Training Courses
Data Model
Realization in the ABAP DictionaryIntegration into ABAP Workbench (Active)
Basic Dictionary Objects
Dual Level Domain Concept
Transparent Tables
Creating Transparent Tables
Structures
Creating Structures
ABAP Dictionary Views
Advanced Techniques Search Help
ABAP Dictionary Summary
Exercises for Unit ABAP Dictionary Solutions for Unit ABAP Dictionary
ABAP Open SQL - Contents Unit 7
ABAP Open SQL Unit Objectives
The R3 ClientServer Architecture
The Database Interface
Open SQL Statements Overview
SELECT Statement Overview
Using the SELECT Statement for a Single Line
Using the SELECT Statement for Several Lines
Using the SELECT Statement for an Internal TableWHERE Clauses
ABAP Open SQL Summary
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 834
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-8
Exercises for Unit ABAP Open SQL Solutions for Unit ABAP Open SQL
ABAP Data and Statements Contents Unit 8
Objectives
The R3 ClientServer ArchitectureThe ABAP Type Concept
Defining Data Objects Overview
Data Types
Predefined Data Types
Elementary Data Objects
Structures
Internal Tables
Referring to ABAP Dictionary Objects
Type Groups in the ABAP Dictionary
PARAMETERS and TABLES
Literals and Constants
Text Symbols
Summary of Declarative Statements
Initializing Data Objects
Assigning Values
Assigning Values Field for Field
Type Conversion
Conversion Rules for Elementary Types
Conversion Rules for Structure Types
Calculating Values
Sub-fields
Calculating Dates
Control Statements OverviewLogical Expressions
Case Distinctions
DO and WHILE Loops
CHECK and EXIT
Summary
Summary (2)
Exercises for Unit ABAP Data and Statements Solutions for Unit ABAP Data and Statements
Test Tools Contents Unit 9
Test Tools Unit ObjectivesTest Tools
Debugging
Important Debugging Functions I
Important Debugging Functions II
Debugger Overview
Breakpoints
Advanced Techniques Runtime Analysis
Advanced Techniques SQL Trace
Advanced Techniques Computer Aided Test Tool
Summary
Internal Tables Contents Unit 10
Internal Tables Objectives
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 934
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-9
The R3 ClientServer Architecture
Internal Tables
Dynamic Table Expansion
Table Attributes Line Type
Keys
Data Access QuantitiesData Access Types
Table Types
Internal Table Work Areas
Defining Internal Tables
Filling Internal Tables
Array Fetch
Sorting an Internal Table
Loop Processing in Internal Tables
Accessing Individual Internal Table Entries
Changing an Internal Table with the Index
Changing an Internal Table with Keys
Deleting an Internal Table
Internal Tables withwithout Header Lines
Control Level Processing
Internal Tables Summary 1
Internal Tables Summary 2
Exercises for Unit Internal Tables Solutions for Unit Internal Tables
Modularization and Program Structure Unit 11
Objectives
Modularization and Program Structure
Structure of an ABAP ProgramStructure of Earlier Programs from the Course
Processing Block Types
Modularization and Program Structure
Event Blocks
Events in Executable Programs (Type 1)
Syntax Event Blocks
Modularization and Program Structure
Subroutines
Defining Subroutines
Defining the Interface
Data VisibilityCalling Subroutines
Calling Subroutines Syntax
Interface Parameters Structures
Interface Parameters Internal Tables
Modularization and Program Structure
Function Modules as Processing Blocks
Calling Function Modules
Creating a Function Group
Creating a Function Module
Elements of a Function Module
Interface Import ParametersException Handling
Function Module Source Code
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1034
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-10
Documentation and Testing
Calling Function Modules
Catching Exceptions
Central Role of Function Modules
Modularization and Program Structure
Includes Type I ProgramsTOP Includes
Standard Includes for Function Groups
Function Modules Summary
Exercises for Unit Modularization and Structure Solutions for Unit Modularization and Program Structure
Dialogs Contents Unit 12
Dialogs Unit Objectives
Dialogs
The R3 ClientServer Architecture
Overview
User Dialogs
Dialogs - Lists
Lists
List Operations
Page Headers
Multilingual Capability
ColorsIconsSymbols in Lists
Lists in Executable Programs
Details Lists
Example A Simple Details List
Syntax A Simple Details List
Details List ExampleHIDE Areas
Line Selection
Line Selection Syntax
Advanced Techniques Lists as Input Tools and Details Lists
Dialogs - Selection Screens
Selection Screens
The Selection Screen
Entering Selections
Search Help
Variants
Selection TextsRecap PARAMETERS
Using Parameters in the SELECT Statement
SELECT-OPTIONS
Using Select-Options in the SELECT Statement
Standard Selection Screens in Executable Programs
Standard Selection Screen Processing
Additional Input Checks
AT SELECTION-SCREEN
Example User-defined Selection Screens
User-defined Selection Screens
Syntax Defining and Calling Selection ScreensDialogs - User Messages
User Messages Overview
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-11
Syntax MESSAGE Statements
Dialog Message Types
Dialogs - Screens
Screens Strengths
Using Screens
Screens an ExampleParts of a Screen
Step 1 Creating a Screen
Creating a Screen Screen Attributes
Layout and Field Attributes 1
Layout and Field Attributes 2
Field Attributes The Field List
Check Tables
Step 2 Displaying Data
Screen Interfaces
Screen Processing Logic PBO and PAI
Screen Processing Blocks
PBO and PAI Processing Logic
Data Transport between Screens and Programs
Flow Logic
Step 3 Defining Pushbuttons
Defining Function Codes
Assigning a Field Name to the OK_CODE Field
Program Logic
Static Screen Sequencing
Dynamic Screen Sequencing
Database Updates
Advanced Techniques Screens
Dialogs - InterfacesOverview Interface Objects
Example Program Interface
Basic Interface Elements
Statuses Interface Views
Creating GUI Statuses for Lists
Creating Statuses Key Settings
Creating Statuses Menu Bars
Example Program Interface
Creating GUI Titles for a Screen
Creating GUI Statuses for a Screen
Title and StatusSummary Interfaces
Summary
Exercises for Unit Dialogs Solutions for Unit Dialogs
Authorization Checks Contents Unit 13
Objectives
Basic Authorization Concepts
Authorization Cehcks in Programs
AUTHORITY-CHECK Syntax
SummaryAuthorization Checks Summary
Exercises for Unit Authorization Checks
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-12
Solutions for Unit Authorization Checks
Software Logistics and Software Modifications Contents Unit 14
Software Logistics and Software Modifications Unit Object
Software Logistics and Software Modification
Workbench Organizer and Transport SystemManaging Development Projects in the WBO
Completing a Project
Functions of a Change Request
Local Objects
Originals and Copies
SAP Objects as Copies
Task Attributes
Changing Customer Copies
Changing SAP Copies (Modifications)
Software Logistics and Software Modification
Change Levels
Functional Enhancements
Enhancing User Dialogs
Enhancements Examples
Registering Developers in the SSCR
Software Logistics and Software Modification Summary
Software Logistics and Software Modifications Summary (II)
Exercises for Unit Software Logistics and Modification
Appendix Unit 15
Repository-Infosystem
Objectives
R3 Repository and Repository-ObjectsTypical Information System Requests
The Repository Information System
The SAP Application Hierarchy
Summary
Summary 2
Foreign Data Transfer
External Data Transfer
R3 Communication Interfaces I
R3 Communication Interfaces II
Termination Conditions 2
Advanced Techniques Dynamic Screen SequencingAdvanced Techniques Update
Appendix 1
Appendix 2
A B A P D i c t i o n a r y
ABAP Dictionary Unit 16
Content
IntroductionObjectives
Functions of the ABAP Dictionary
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-13
Linking to the ABAP Workbench (Active)
Access from ABAP Program
Summary
Tables in the ABAP Dictionary Unit 17
Objectives-Tables in the ABAP DictionaryTables and Fields
Basic Objects of the ABAP Dictionary
Two-Level Domain Concept Example
Transparent Tables
Structures
Technical Settings
Data Class
Size Category
Buffering Tables
Logging
Consistency between ABAP Dictionary and DB
Summary - Tables in the ABAP Dictionary
Exercises on Unit Tables in the ABAP Dictionary nSolutions to Unit Tables in the ABAP Dictionary
Performance during Table Access Unit 18
Objectives - Performance during Table Access
Indexes
Primary Index
Secondary Indexes
Data Access using the Buffer
Table Buffering
Full BufferingGeneric Buffering
Single-Record Buffering
Buffer Synchronization 1
Buffer Synchronization 2
Buffer Synchronization 3
Buffer Synchronization 4
Buffer Synchronization 5
Buffer Synchronization 6
Summary - Performance during Table Access
Exercises on Unit Performance during Table Access
Solutions to Unit Performance during Table Access
Relationships between Tables in the ABAP Dictionary Unit 19
Objectives - Relationships between Tables in the ABAP Dict
Definition of a Foreign Key
Foreign Key Fields Check Fields
Inserting a Data Record
Violation of the Foreign Key Check
Foreign Key Definitions in the Check Field
Requirements for the Field Assignment
Domains Value Tables Fixed Values
Check Table not Equal to Value TableField Assignment is not Unique
Semantic Attributes
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1434
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-14
Text Tables
Generic and Constant Foreign Keys
INCLUDE
Summary (1)
Summary (2)
Exercises on Unit Relationships between Tables nnSolutions to Unit Relationships between Tables m
R3 Repository Info System as seen by ABAP Dictionary Unit 20
Objectives - R3 Repository Information System
Typical Queries Made of the Information System
Selection Options
Functions
Summary (1) - R3 Repository Information System
Exercises on Unit The R3 Repository Information SystemSolutions to Unit The R3 Repository Information System
Changes to Tables Unit 21
Objectives - Changes to Tables
Active and Revised Versions
Runtime Objects
Handling Dependent Objects
Changing Database Tables
How is the Structure Adjusted
Conversion Process 1
Conversion Process 2
Conversion Process 3
Conversion Process 4
Conversion Process 5What to Do when a Conversion Terminates
Append Structures 1
Append Structures 2
Append Structures 3
Summary Changes to Tables
Exercises on Unit Changes to TablesSolutions to Unit Changes to Tables m
Views Unit 22
Objectives - Views
Why do you Need ViewsStructure of a View - Starting Situation
Structure of a View - Join Condition
Structure of a View - Field Selection (Projection)
Structure of a View - Selection Condition
How are Tables Linked to Views
Structure of the View
Data Selection with Views
Database Views
Buffering Database Views
Includes in Database Views
Maintenance ViewsInner and Outer Joins
Summary - Views
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1534
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-15
Exercises on Unit Views mmSolutions to Unit Views
Search Helps Unit 23
Objectives - Search Helps
R3 Standard Function Input HelpDescription of an Input Help
Interface of a Search Help
Description of the Dialog Behavior
Selection Method of a Serach Help
View as Selection Method
Performance of the Input Help
Input Help from the Data Element
Check Table Help
Attaching a Search Help to a Field
Input Help from Dictionary or Screen
Overview Mechanisms for the Input Help
Alternative Search Paths
Collective Search Helps and Elementary Search Helps
Further Options for Search Helps
Non-Standard Search Help Exit
Migration of Existing Input Helps
Summary - Search Helps
Exercises on Unit Search Helps nSolutions to Unit Search Helps nn
Appendix Unit 24
Important Menu Paths and Transactions
Decision Tree for Buffering TablesAppendix
T e c h n i q u e s o f L i s t P r o c e s s i n g
Techniques of List Processing Unit 25
Contents 12
Contents 22
Introduction
Course GoalsCourse Objectives
Course Overview Diagram
Business Scenario
Demo Programs Templates and Solutions
Overview of Exercises
Finding and Executing Programs Unit 26
Objectives
How to Find Existing Programs
SAP Anwendungshierarchie
The Repository Information SystemReport Trees Organization
Finding Report Trees
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1634
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-16
Summary
Creating Lists with ABAP Query Unit 27
Objectives
Creating Lists with ABAP Query
Programs and ABAP QueryABAP Query Organization
Creating Queries
Creating Lists with ABAP Query
Defining Queries
Choosing a Query Area and a Functional Area
Choosing Fields
Assigning Short Descriptions
Defining Local Fields
Basic Lists
Lists with Control Levels
Statistics
Ranked Lists
Interactive Functions - Single-Line Lists
Interactive Functions - Multiple-Line Lists
Saving Lists
Summary
Creating Lists with ABAP Query
Outputting Data to Lists Unit 28
Objectives
List Design Options
Generating a List
Setting the List FormatModifying and Suppressing Headers
Open Page Design TOP-OF-PAGE
Setting Fixed Lead Columns
The FORMAT Statement
Outputting Lines
The WRITE Statement General Syntax
The WRITE Statement Icons and Symbols
The WRITE Statement Checkboxes
Additional Statements for Output Design
Multilingual List Elements
System Fields and List GenerationStandard Functions in Lists
Summary Lists
Exercises for Outputting Data to Lists Solutions for Outputting Data to Lists
Selection Screens Unit 29
Objectives
Selection Screen Overivew
Declaration of Fields with PARAMETERS
Selections with SELECT-OPTIONS
Selection Options and Multiple SelectionsSyntax of the SELECT-OPTIONS Statement
Designing the Selection Screen I
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1734
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-17
Designing the Selection Screen II
Initializing the Selection Screen
General Help and Possible Entries Help (F1 and F4)
Input Checks AT SELECTION-SCREEN
CALL SELECTION-SCREEN I
CALL SELECTION-SCREEN IISelektionsbild Varianten I
Selection Screen Variants II
Summary
Exercises for Selection Screens Solutions for Selection Screens
Logical Databases Unit 30
Objectives
Generating Lists
Advantages of a Logical Database
Logical Databases Overview
LDB F1S Nodes
Sample Program for a Logical Database
LDB Sub-Objects Structure
LDB Sub-Objects Selections
Selection Screen for the Logical Database
Logical Database Dynamic Selections
LDB Sub-Objects Database Programs
Interaction Between LDBs and Programs
Events in Logical Databases
Program Flow and Termination Alternatives
Checking Internal Program Selections I
Checking Internal Program Selections IISummary
Exercises for Logical Databases Solutions for Logical Databases
Programming Data Retrieval Unit 31
Objectives
Programming Data Retrieval
Reading Multiple Database Tables
Reading Multiple Database Tables I
Reading Multiple Database Tables IIa
Reading Multiple Database Tables IIbReading Multiple Database Tables III
Reading Multiple Database Tables IV
Summary
Exercises for Programming Data Retrieval Solutions for Programming Data Retrieval
ABAP Query Administration Unit 32
Objectives
ABAP Query Administration
Maintaining User Groups
Authorizations and ABAP QueryABAP Query Administration
Defining Functional Areas
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1834
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-18
Overview Creating Functional Areas
Example Defining a Functional Area
Defining Functional Areas
Allocating Fields
Additional Information
Allocating Additional TablesAllocating Additional Fields
Selection Options
Allocating ABAP Statements
Summary
Exercises for ABAP Query Administration
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing Unit 33
Unit Objectives Control Level Processing
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Motivation
Control Level Processing
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Creating an Internal Table
Filling an Internal Table
Sorting and Editing an Internal Table
Control Level Processing for Internal Tables
Control Level Processing Schema for Internal Tables
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Generating an Extract Steps
Example Generating an Extract
Sorting and Processing an Extract
Example Control Level Processing
Schema for Control Level Processing of ExtractsData Formatting and Control Level Processing
Comparing Internal Tables and Extracts
Summary Control Level Processing
Exercises for Data Formatting and Control Level Processing Solutions for Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Storing Lists and Background Processing Unit 34
Objectives
Storing Lists and Background Processing
Saving Lists Possibilities
Saving Lists in SAPofficeSaving Lists as PC Files
Saving Lists in a Report Tree
Customizing Report Trees
Functions in Report Trees
Storing Lists and Background Processing
Options for Printing a List
Print Parameters
Program-Controlled Printing
Program-Controlled Printing with GET_PRINT_PARAMETERS
Storing Lists and Background Processing
Background Processing PhasesDefining Steps
Defining Start Times and Releasing Jobs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1934
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-19
Summary
Exercises for Storing Lists and Background Processing Solutions for Storing Lists and Background Processing
Interactive Lists Basics Unit 35
Unit Objectives Interactive ListsInteractive Lists Basics
User Interactions with Lists
Navigating Between Lists
Events Overview
Flow Control in Detail Lists
Creating Detail Lists I
Creating Detail Lists II
Interactive Lists Basics
Questions
HIDE Areas
HIDE Technique Line Selection
Data Buffering in a List System
Valid Line Selection
Field Selection
Interactive Lists Basics
Page Headers in Detail Lists
Interactive Lists Basics
Creating Lists in Modal Dialog Boxes
Summary Interactive Lists
Exercises for Interactive Lists Solutions for Interactive Lists
Creating User Interfaces Unit 36Objectives User Interfaces
User Interfaces Overview
Status Technical View I
Status Technical View II
Creating a GUI Status
Creating a GUI Status Assigning F Keys I
Creating a GUI Status Assigning F Keys II
Creating a GUI Status Menu Bars
Activating Title and Status
Event AT USER-COMMAND
Summary User Interfaces
Special Techniques for Interactive Lists Unit 37
Objectives
Scrolling in Lists
Reading Lists
Modifying Lists
List Navigation
Interactive List Messages
System Fields in Interactive Lists
Summary
Exercises for Creating User Interfaces Solutions for Creating User Interfaces
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2034
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-20
Linking Programs Unit 38
Objectives
Linking Programs
Data Visibility
Data Transfer Using SAP Memory
SETGET ParametersSUBMIT Statement Syntax
Example SUBMIT WITH
Datatransfer Using ABAP Memory
Returning from a Called Program
Summary
Exercises for Linking Programs Solutions for Linking Programs
Lists on the Internet Unit 39
Unit Objectives Special Application
Lists on the Internet
Motivation
The World Wide Web
HTTP Hypertext Transport Protocol
URL Uniform Resource Locator
HTML Hypertext Markup Language
R3 ClientServer Architecture
R3 ClientServer Architecture with ITS
Lists on the Internet
Web Reporting - Overview
Web Reporting Flow
Creating a List Using a URL
Parameters for WWW_GET_REPORTInteractive Lists
Access Authorization
Creating HTML Hyperlinks in Lists
Lists on the Internet
Web Reporting Browser
Releasing Report Trees for the Internet
Summary Special Application
Appendix Unit 40
Menu Data
T r a n s a c t i o n P ro g r a m m i n g
Transaction Programming Unit 41
Content
Introduction Contents
Couse Goal
Course Objectives
Overview Diagram
Main Business Scenario
About the Course Material
Basic Transaction Programming Unit 42
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-21
Objectives - Basics
Components of a Transaction
Writing a Transaction Process
Analyzing the Problem
User Dialogs in the R3 System
Advantages of ScreensComponents of a Screen
Static Screen Sequence
Creating a Screen Attributes
Creating a Screen Layout
Creating a Screen Field List
Writing the Flow Logic
Communictaion Between Screen and ABAP Program
Creating a Transaction Code
Summary Basic Dialog Programming
Screen Objects - List Unit 43
Screen Objects - Objectives
Screen Objects
Screen Objects General Attributes
Attributes of Screen Objects (Key)
Dynamically Modifiable Static Attributes
The System Table SCREEN
Modifying Attributes Dynamically Example
Object Attributes Modification Group
Modifying Attributes Dynamically Program
Screen Objects - Screen
Screen Object Screen
Defining and Managing ScreensScreen Attributes
Dynamic Next Screen Overview
Setting the Next Screen Dynamically
Inserting a Sequence of Screens Dynamically
Calling a Dialog Box Dynamically
Window Coordinates
Setting the Cursor Position Dynamically
Screen Objects - Title Bar
Screen Object Title Bar
Creating and Using Title Bars
Screen Objects - Text FieldScreen Object Text Field
Text Fields Attributes
Creating Text Fields
Hiding Texts Dynamically
Dynamically Modifiable Attributes Text Field
Dynamic Screen Modifications Program
Screen Objects - InputOutput Field
Screen Object InputOutput Field
InputOutput Fields Attributes
Creating InputOutput Fields
InputOutput Fields Automatic Field ChecksInputOutput Fields Default Values in SAP Memory
Defining SETGET Parameter Attributes
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-22
Programming Field Input Checks with an Error Dialog
Checking Groups of Fields
Controlling Error Dialogs
Dialog Message Categories
The FIELD Statement and Data Transport
Calling Modules Conditionally (1)Calling Modules Conditionally (2)
Screen Objects Status icon
Screen Objects Status Icons
Status Icons Attributes
Creating Status Icon Fields
Filling Status Icon Fields
Group Box
Screen Objects Group Boxes
Group Boxes Attributes
Screen Objects Radio Buttons
Screen Objects Radio Buttons and Checkboxes
Radio ButtonsCheckboxes Attributes
Creating a Radio Button Group
Creating a Checkbox
Screen Objects - Pushbutton
Screen Objects Pushbuttons
Pushbuttons Attributes
Creating Pushbuttons
Pushbuttons with Function Type E
Screen Objects - Subscreen
Screen Objects Subscreen (1)
Screen Objects Subscreen (2)
Subscreen AttributesCreating a Subscreen Area
Calling a Subscreen
Subscreens from External Programs
Subscreens Encapsulation in Function Groups
Subscreens in Function Groups Call Sequence
Subscreens in Function Groups Data Transport
Screen Objects - Tabstrip Control
Screen Object Tabstrip Control
Tabstrip Elements
Tab Page Technical View
Tabstrip Controls AttributesCreating a Tabstrip Control
Creating a Tabstrip Control Tabstrip Area
Creating a Tabstip Control Tab Title
Creating a Tabstrip Control Subscreens
Scrolling Locally in a Tabstrip Control
Scrolling Locally in a Tabstrip Control Coding
Scrolling in a Tabstrip Control
Scrolling in a Tabstrip Control Coding
Screen Objects - Table Control
Screen Object Table Control
ABAP Table Control (Functions)Table Control Table Settings
Actions in Table Controls
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-23
Creating Table Control Elements
Table Control Attributes
Creating a Table Control
Creating a Table Control Table Control Area
Creating a Table Control TC Fields (1)
Create Table Control TC Fields (2) Section ColumnTable Control Attributes at Runtime
Table Control Attributes (Structure)
Table Control Elements - Processing
Processing a Table Control (Principle 1)
Filling a Table Control
Changing the Contents of a Table Control
Table Control Applications (Principle)
Filling a Table Control Coding
Changing the Contents of a Table Control 4 Coding
Table Controls Field Transport in the PBO
Table Controls Field Transport in the PAI
Table Control Elements Further Techniques
Changing a Table Control
Changing the Attributes of a Table Control (1)
Changing the Attributes of a Table Control (2)
Table Control Modifying Field Attributes Temporarily
Sorting a Table Control (Example)
Scrolling Page by Page in a Table Control (Example)
Table Control Cursor Position (Example)
Screen Objects - GUI Status
Screen Object GUI Status
Status Technical View (1)
Status Technical View (2)Attributes of Functions
Function Key Settings
Menus and Menu Bars Attributes
Status Attributes
Standard Toolbar Functions and their Reserved function Keys
Creating a Status
Navigation - Targets
Navigation - Dialogs
Screen Objects - List
Screen Objects Lists
Displaying a List Within a TransactionLists in a Modal Dialog Box
Screen Objects - Selection Screen
Screen Object Selection Screen
Entering Value Ranges
Defining and Calling a Selection Screen
Summary Screen Objects
Uumlbung zu Kapitel Screen Objects Solutions Screen Objects Unit
Programming Database Changes Unit 44
Unit ObjectivesProgramming Database Changes
Statements for Database Dialogs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2434
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-24
SAP LUW
Database LUW
SAP R3 System 3-tier Architecture
System Architecture Implicit DB COMMIT
Objective Bundling the DB Changes in an SAP LUW
Programming Database ChangesBundling Techniques Overview
Bunding Using Delayed Inline Changes
Bundling Using Subroutines
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundline Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Techniques
Update Function modules
V1 and V2 Update Function Modules
Logging Records for Update
Deleting Update Entries Rollback in the Dialog Program
Rollback in the Update Program
Asynchronous Update
What Happens in a Commit Work
Comparison of Bundling Techniques
Programming Database Updates
Why Set Locks
Database Locks
SAP Locking Concept
Setting Logical Locks
SAP Lock ObjectsENQUEUE and DEQUEUE Function Modules
Calling the Function Modules
The Lock Table
Validity of Locks Scope = 2
Programming Database Updates
SAP Authorization Concept
Authorization Checks
User Master Record Authorizations
Authorization Checks for Transactions
Summary
Exercises Programming Database Updates Unit Solutions Programming Database Updates Unit
Complex Transactions Unit 45
Unit Objectives
Complex Transactions
Synchronous Calls Overview
Calling a Report Program
Calling a Transaction
Encapsulating Dialogs in Function Modules
Synchronous Program Calls Main Memory Contents
Complex TransactionsAsynchronous Calls
Calling Programs Asynchronously
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2534
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-25
Complex Transactions
Passing Data Overview
Passing Data Using the Interface of ABAP Programs
The WITH Addition in the SUBMIT Statement
Memory Areas Logical Model
ABAP MemoryPassing Parameters using the SAP Memory
Passing Parameters (SAP Memory)
Complex Transactions
Synchronous Program Calls SAP LUWs
Asynchronous Program Calls SAP LUWs
Program Calls Visible Data and LUWs
Complex Transactions
RFC Scenario R3 - R3
Enabling Function Modules for RFC
RFC Using ABAP Function Modules
Program Context of a Remote Function
RFC Calls System Exceptions
Complex Transactions
Remote Function Call Overview
Process Diagram Synchronous RFC
Process Diagram Asynchronous RFC
Process Diagram Transactional RFC
Transactional RFC (tRFC) Introduction
tRFC Properties
Complex Transactions
Lock Entries for Local Program Calls
Lock Entries for RFC Calls
Summary Exercises Complex Transactions Unit Solutions Complex Transactions Unit
Static Attributes in the Screen Painter Unit 46
Screen Attributes (1)
Screen Attributes (2)
General Attributes
Dictionary Attributes
Program Attributes
Display Attributes
Special Attributes for Subscreens and Tabstrip ControlsSpecial Attributes for Table Controls
Database Updates Further Information Unit 47
Objectives
Database Updates Further Information
Asynchronous Update
Synchronous Update
Local Update
SAP LUW Timescale of Updates
Database Updates Further Information
V1 and V2 Update Function ModulesV1 Update
V2 Update
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2634
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-26
Database Updates Further Information
Validity of Locks Scope = 1
Validity of Locks Scope = 2
Validity of Locks Scope = 3
ENQUEUE Function Modules Interface Parameters
Summary
Complex Transactions Further Information Unit 48
CALL TRANSACTION lsquoTA01rsquo and SUBMIT lsquoREP01rsquo AND RETURN
Implicit End of a Program or LEAVE PROGRAM
LEAVE TO TRANSACTION lsquoTA01rsquo
SUBMIT lsquoREP01rsquo
CALL FUNCTION lsquoFUNC1rsquoPERFORM form1 IN PROGRAM program
Help Functions Unit 49
Overview Standard F1 and F4 Functions
The Search Help Concept
Dialog for an Immediate Hit List
Dialog with Preselection
Dialog for Selecting a Search Help
Search Help Concepts
Search Helps
Defining the Dialog Fields
Defining the Data Selection
Collective Search Helps
Search Help Concepts
Linking Search Helps to Screen Fields
Search Help Concepts
Programmed Help Functions OverviewProgrammed F1 and F4 Help
The POH and POV Events Process
Function Modules for Data Transport
Field Transport to and from the Screen
Determining the Contents of Screen Fields ( POV POH )
Placing Values in Screen Fields ( POV )
Special F1 Functions
Displaying Input Values for a Table Field (POV)
Search Help Concepts
Overview Input Help Mechanisms
Migrating Existing Input Help
Assigning Number Range Numbers Unit 50
Objectives
Overview
Number Range Objects
Number Range Intervals
Sub-objects
Assigning Internal Numbers
Checking External Numbers
Number Range Information
Accessing Table NRIV 1 Without a Buffer Accessing Table NRIV 2 Without a Buffer
Buffering Number Ranges
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2734
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-27
Using Function Groups to Administer Number Ranges
Summary 1
Summary 2
Creating Change Documents Unit 51
ObjectivesOverview
Change Document Structure
Change Relevance
Change Document Objects
Generating Update Programs
INCLUDE Program Structure
Application Program
Change Document Objects and Internal Tables
Reading Change Documents
Using Function Groups to Edit Change Documents
Summary (1)
Summary (2)
Appendix Unit 52
Documentation ReferencesGlossary Index
I n t e r f a c e s f o r D a t a T r a n s f e r
Interfaces for Data Transfer Unit 53
Content
Data Transfer
Objectives
Data Transfer
Transferring Data Into the R3 System
Direct Data Transfer
Data Transfer Using Interfaces
Data Transfer Workbench
Data Analysis
Data Transfer
Analyzing the SAP Transaction
Assigning DataFormat Conversion
Transferring Legacy Data into the R3 System
Data Transfer Methods
Knowledge Tools
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer
Data Analysis and Formatting Unit 54
Data Analysis - Objectives
Data Analysis and Formatting
Standard Transfer Interfaces for Standard Transfer
Standard Transfer - Tasks
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2834
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-28
IMG Documentation
Data Transfer Workbench (DTW)
Documentation in the DTW
Data Analysis and Formatting
Record Layout Types
FB01 Record Layout StructureSample Data for Record Layouts
Generating Test Data in the DTW
Data Analysis and Formatting
Translating Data
Translating Data in the Legacy System
Generating SAP Structures in the DTW
Translating Data in the R3 System
Translating Data Types
Translating Data for Transaction FB01
Translating Data - Example
Translating Data Using EXCEL
Data Analysis and Formatting
Initializing Record Layouts
Initializing Record Layouts - Example
Filling Record Layouts
Structure of Transaction FB01
Mapping Data in Transaction FB01
Filling Record Layout BGR00 - Example
Data Analysis and Formatting
Additional Tasks
Converting Data
Converting Legacy System R3 System Data
Structure of a Conversion ProgramData Analysis - Summary
Exercises for Unit Data AnalysisSolutions to Unit Data Analysis
Files in the R3 System Unit 55
Objectives
Files in the R3 System
R3 Client Server Architecture
Transferring Files
Files in the R3 System
Processing FilesOpening Files
Opening Files - Options
Binary Mode and Text Mode
Transferring Data Records
Reading Data Records
Closing Deleting a Sequential File
Filling Record Layouts for Transaction FB01 (1)
Filling Record Layouts for Transaction FB01 (2)
Sequential Files - Summary
Files in the R3 System
DOWNLOAD and UPLOADFunction Module rsquoDOWNLOADrsquo
Example Program DOWNLOAD
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2934
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-29
Function Module rsquoUPLOADrsquo
Example Program UPLOAD
Summary
Exercises for Unit Files in the R3 SystemSolutions to Unit Files in the R3 System
Data Transfer Workbench Unit 56
Data Transfer - Objectives
Data Transfer Workbench
Preparing the Data Transfer
Testing and Executing the Data Transfer
Direct Input Management
Scheduling Direct Input
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer WorkbenchSolutions to Unit Data Transfer Workbench
Batch Input Sessions Unit 57
Objectives
Batch Input Sessions
Batch Input Processing
Batch Input Program
Format of a Batch Input Session
Creating Batch Input Sessions
Function Modules for Batch Input Programs
Structure of the BDC Table
Batch Input Processing
Batch Input Sessions
Batch Input Monitor - FunctionsSession Status
Processing Modes
Entering Data into Screens
Batch Input Processing
Session Statistics
Session Log
Summary
Exercises for Unit Batch Input SessionsSolutions to Unit Batch Input Sessions
Data Transfer Programs Unit 58Objectives
Data Transfer Programs
Customer Transfer Programs
Customer Transfer Program - Tasks
Data Transfer Programs
Batch Input Program Elements
Defining BDC Tables
Structure of the BDC Table
Determining Field Names
Determining Field Names with the Screen Painter
Structure DefinitionFunction Modules for a Batch Input Program
Function Module BDC_OPEN_GROUP
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3034
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-30
Function Module BDC_INSERT
Function Module BDC_CLOSE_GROUP
Structure of a Batch Input Program
Batch Input Program - Overview (I)
Batch Input Program - Overview (II)
Subroutine generate_bdc_dataProgram BDCRECXX (I)
Program BDCRECXX (II)
Program BDCRECXX (III)
Data Transfer Programs
Batch Input Recorder
Batch Input Recording
Recording the First Screen
Recording the Second Screen
Additional Screens Saving
Ending the Recording
Generating Sessions and Programs
Generating Batch Input Sessions
Structure of the Generated Program
Enhancing the Generated Program
Data Transfer Programs
Overview
Call Transaction Program
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (I)
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (II)
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (III)
Displaying the Messtab
Technical Implementation
Return Codes and System FieldsSystem Field Message Output
Generating Sessions When Errors Occur
Summary
Overview
Structure of a Data Transfer Program
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer ProgramSolutions to Unit Data Transfer Program
Additional Techniques Unit 59
ObjectivesAdditional Techniques - Overview
Changing Customers - Payment Transactions
Step Loop Field Names
Structure of the BDC Table
Filling BDC Tables in ABAP
Additional Techniques
Overview - Special Fields
Setting the Cursor in the Batch Input Session
Setting the Cursor in the ABAP Program
Additional Techniques
Successful Transaction EndAdditional Techniques
Processing Batch Input Sessions
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-31
Batch Input Flow
Additional Techniques
Program RSBDCSUB
Batch Input Authorizations
Service Programs
Summary Exercises for Unit Additional TechniquesSolutions for Unit Additional Techniques
Tips amp Tricks Unit 60
Tips and Tricks - Objectives
OSS Notes
Parallel Processing
Resetting Rollback Segments
Additional Tips and Information
Summary
Appendix Unit 61
Job Structure
Scheduling Jobs
Job Distribution
SAP-LUW Chronological Update
Update Principles
Asynchronous Update
Synchronous Update
Local Update
E n h a n c e m e n t s a n d M o d i f i c a t i o n s
Enhancements and Modifications Unit 62
Content
Introduction Contents
Course Overview Diagram
Main Business Scenario
Modifications Unit 63
Objectives
Modifications
What are modifications
Modifications and Upgrades
Modifications
Copying SAP Objects
Making Changes to SAP Copies (Modifications)
Registering Modifications in SSCR
Carrying Out a Registered Modification
Versions
Naming Conventions for Repository Objects
Modifications
Modifications Critical Success Factors (1)
Modifications Critical Success Factors (2)Modifications Critical Success Factors (3)
Documenting Modifications in Programs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-32
Modification Logs An Example
Modifications
Modification Adjustment SPDD and SPAU
Modification Adjustment Objects
Transaction SPAU (Process After Upgrade)
Transporting Adjustments between SystemsThe amount of work necessary at upgrade increases
Modifications Critical Repository Objects
Avoiding Adjustments
Modifications
User Exits
User Exits An Example
Using User Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Modifications
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Unit 64
Objectives
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Table Enhancements Overview
Append Structures
Append Structures at Upgrade
Customizing Includes
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Global Enhancements
Field Exits
Global and Local Field Exits
Creating Field Exits
Enhancements to Dictionary ElementsText Enhancements
Editing Text Enhancements
Keywords
Keyword Change Requirements
Keyword Changes and Release Upgrades
Restoring SAP Keywords
Enhanced Documentation for Data Elements
Customer Documentation
Summary Text Enhancements
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Solutions for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Enhancements using Customer Exits Unit 65
Objectives
Enhancements using Customer Exits
SAP Application Enhancements
Customer Enhancement Projects
SAP Enhancements and Customer Enhancement Projects
Enhancements using Customer Exits
The SAP Enhancement Creation Procedure
Implementing Enhancements in Customer SystemsCreating Customer Enhancement Projects
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-33
Editing Components
Activating Enhancement Projects
Transporting Projects
Summary Enhancement Management
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Function Module ExitsCalling and Creating Function Modules
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Organization of an X Function Group
Customer Source Code
Global Data SAP and the Customer
Subroutines Modules SAP and the Customer
Customer Screens
Customer Screens Modules
Summary Function Module Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Menu Exits
Menu Exit Requirements
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Menu Exits and Function Module Exits
Summary Menu Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Screen Exits
Subscreens in the R3 System
Calling Subscreens
Defining Screen Exits
Calling Customer Subscreens
Transporting Data to Subscreens
Transporting Data from SubscreensEditing Subscreens (1)
Editing Subscreens (2)
Summary Screen Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits Solutions for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits
Business Transaction Events Unit 66
Objectives
Business Transaction Events (BTE)
BTE Possible Scenarios (1)BTE Possible Scenarios (2)
Publish amp Subscribe vs Process Interfaces
Business Transaction Events SAP and the Customer
Finding Business Transaction Events
Creating a Publish amp Subscribe Interface
Differences between Customer Exits and BTEs
Summary
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3434
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 634
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-6
Processing User Requests
Dialog Work Processes
R3 Application Services
SAP Transactions and Screens
LUW (Logical Unit of Work)
Requesting a Lock SAP Lock Objects
Writing Log Records
Updating Log Records
Removing Locks
Background Processing
Workload Balancing
R3 Printer Services
R3 Instance
System Kernel - Summary
Exercise for Unit System Kernel Solutions to Unit System Kernel
Administration and Remote Services Unit 4
Administration - Objectives
Security Aspects in the R3 System
The Authorization Concept
The Profile Generator
System Administration
System Administration Terminations
R3 Computing Center Management System
Workload Alert Monitor
R3 Service amp Support Virtual Infrastructure
SAP Remote ServicesR3 Online Service System (OSS)
Administration - Summary
Exercise for Unit AdministrationSolutions to Unit Administration
A B A P W o r k b e n c h B a s i c s
ABAP Workbench Basics Unit 5
ContentABAP Workbench Overview
Objectives
R3 ClientServer Architecture
R3 ClientServer Architecture
R3 ClientServer Architecture
R3 ClientServer Architecture
ABAP
R3 Repository and Repository Objects
ABAP Workbench Tools
Repository Browser
Repository Browser Object ListTransporting Repository Objects
Development Projects in the WBO
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 734
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-7
Finishing Projects
Creating Development Classes
Assigning Change Requests
Programs with User and Database Dialog
Overview Creating Programs
Program AttributesImportant Editor Functions
Global Role of the ABAP Dictionary
1 User Dialog Selection Screens
1 User Dialog Selection Screen II
2 User Dialog Screens
Creating Screens
Database Dialog Open SQL
3 User Dialog Messages
4 User Dialog Lists
General ABAP Syntax
General ABAP Syntax and Chained Statements
Comments
ABAP Program Operations
Summary
Exercises for Unit ABAP Workbench Solutions for Unit ABAP Workbench
ABAP Dictionary Contents Unit 6
ABAP Dictionary Objectives
Data Modeling
Flight Data Model for ABAP Training Courses
Data Model
Realization in the ABAP DictionaryIntegration into ABAP Workbench (Active)
Basic Dictionary Objects
Dual Level Domain Concept
Transparent Tables
Creating Transparent Tables
Structures
Creating Structures
ABAP Dictionary Views
Advanced Techniques Search Help
ABAP Dictionary Summary
Exercises for Unit ABAP Dictionary Solutions for Unit ABAP Dictionary
ABAP Open SQL - Contents Unit 7
ABAP Open SQL Unit Objectives
The R3 ClientServer Architecture
The Database Interface
Open SQL Statements Overview
SELECT Statement Overview
Using the SELECT Statement for a Single Line
Using the SELECT Statement for Several Lines
Using the SELECT Statement for an Internal TableWHERE Clauses
ABAP Open SQL Summary
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 834
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-8
Exercises for Unit ABAP Open SQL Solutions for Unit ABAP Open SQL
ABAP Data and Statements Contents Unit 8
Objectives
The R3 ClientServer ArchitectureThe ABAP Type Concept
Defining Data Objects Overview
Data Types
Predefined Data Types
Elementary Data Objects
Structures
Internal Tables
Referring to ABAP Dictionary Objects
Type Groups in the ABAP Dictionary
PARAMETERS and TABLES
Literals and Constants
Text Symbols
Summary of Declarative Statements
Initializing Data Objects
Assigning Values
Assigning Values Field for Field
Type Conversion
Conversion Rules for Elementary Types
Conversion Rules for Structure Types
Calculating Values
Sub-fields
Calculating Dates
Control Statements OverviewLogical Expressions
Case Distinctions
DO and WHILE Loops
CHECK and EXIT
Summary
Summary (2)
Exercises for Unit ABAP Data and Statements Solutions for Unit ABAP Data and Statements
Test Tools Contents Unit 9
Test Tools Unit ObjectivesTest Tools
Debugging
Important Debugging Functions I
Important Debugging Functions II
Debugger Overview
Breakpoints
Advanced Techniques Runtime Analysis
Advanced Techniques SQL Trace
Advanced Techniques Computer Aided Test Tool
Summary
Internal Tables Contents Unit 10
Internal Tables Objectives
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 934
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-9
The R3 ClientServer Architecture
Internal Tables
Dynamic Table Expansion
Table Attributes Line Type
Keys
Data Access QuantitiesData Access Types
Table Types
Internal Table Work Areas
Defining Internal Tables
Filling Internal Tables
Array Fetch
Sorting an Internal Table
Loop Processing in Internal Tables
Accessing Individual Internal Table Entries
Changing an Internal Table with the Index
Changing an Internal Table with Keys
Deleting an Internal Table
Internal Tables withwithout Header Lines
Control Level Processing
Internal Tables Summary 1
Internal Tables Summary 2
Exercises for Unit Internal Tables Solutions for Unit Internal Tables
Modularization and Program Structure Unit 11
Objectives
Modularization and Program Structure
Structure of an ABAP ProgramStructure of Earlier Programs from the Course
Processing Block Types
Modularization and Program Structure
Event Blocks
Events in Executable Programs (Type 1)
Syntax Event Blocks
Modularization and Program Structure
Subroutines
Defining Subroutines
Defining the Interface
Data VisibilityCalling Subroutines
Calling Subroutines Syntax
Interface Parameters Structures
Interface Parameters Internal Tables
Modularization and Program Structure
Function Modules as Processing Blocks
Calling Function Modules
Creating a Function Group
Creating a Function Module
Elements of a Function Module
Interface Import ParametersException Handling
Function Module Source Code
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1034
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-10
Documentation and Testing
Calling Function Modules
Catching Exceptions
Central Role of Function Modules
Modularization and Program Structure
Includes Type I ProgramsTOP Includes
Standard Includes for Function Groups
Function Modules Summary
Exercises for Unit Modularization and Structure Solutions for Unit Modularization and Program Structure
Dialogs Contents Unit 12
Dialogs Unit Objectives
Dialogs
The R3 ClientServer Architecture
Overview
User Dialogs
Dialogs - Lists
Lists
List Operations
Page Headers
Multilingual Capability
ColorsIconsSymbols in Lists
Lists in Executable Programs
Details Lists
Example A Simple Details List
Syntax A Simple Details List
Details List ExampleHIDE Areas
Line Selection
Line Selection Syntax
Advanced Techniques Lists as Input Tools and Details Lists
Dialogs - Selection Screens
Selection Screens
The Selection Screen
Entering Selections
Search Help
Variants
Selection TextsRecap PARAMETERS
Using Parameters in the SELECT Statement
SELECT-OPTIONS
Using Select-Options in the SELECT Statement
Standard Selection Screens in Executable Programs
Standard Selection Screen Processing
Additional Input Checks
AT SELECTION-SCREEN
Example User-defined Selection Screens
User-defined Selection Screens
Syntax Defining and Calling Selection ScreensDialogs - User Messages
User Messages Overview
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-11
Syntax MESSAGE Statements
Dialog Message Types
Dialogs - Screens
Screens Strengths
Using Screens
Screens an ExampleParts of a Screen
Step 1 Creating a Screen
Creating a Screen Screen Attributes
Layout and Field Attributes 1
Layout and Field Attributes 2
Field Attributes The Field List
Check Tables
Step 2 Displaying Data
Screen Interfaces
Screen Processing Logic PBO and PAI
Screen Processing Blocks
PBO and PAI Processing Logic
Data Transport between Screens and Programs
Flow Logic
Step 3 Defining Pushbuttons
Defining Function Codes
Assigning a Field Name to the OK_CODE Field
Program Logic
Static Screen Sequencing
Dynamic Screen Sequencing
Database Updates
Advanced Techniques Screens
Dialogs - InterfacesOverview Interface Objects
Example Program Interface
Basic Interface Elements
Statuses Interface Views
Creating GUI Statuses for Lists
Creating Statuses Key Settings
Creating Statuses Menu Bars
Example Program Interface
Creating GUI Titles for a Screen
Creating GUI Statuses for a Screen
Title and StatusSummary Interfaces
Summary
Exercises for Unit Dialogs Solutions for Unit Dialogs
Authorization Checks Contents Unit 13
Objectives
Basic Authorization Concepts
Authorization Cehcks in Programs
AUTHORITY-CHECK Syntax
SummaryAuthorization Checks Summary
Exercises for Unit Authorization Checks
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-12
Solutions for Unit Authorization Checks
Software Logistics and Software Modifications Contents Unit 14
Software Logistics and Software Modifications Unit Object
Software Logistics and Software Modification
Workbench Organizer and Transport SystemManaging Development Projects in the WBO
Completing a Project
Functions of a Change Request
Local Objects
Originals and Copies
SAP Objects as Copies
Task Attributes
Changing Customer Copies
Changing SAP Copies (Modifications)
Software Logistics and Software Modification
Change Levels
Functional Enhancements
Enhancing User Dialogs
Enhancements Examples
Registering Developers in the SSCR
Software Logistics and Software Modification Summary
Software Logistics and Software Modifications Summary (II)
Exercises for Unit Software Logistics and Modification
Appendix Unit 15
Repository-Infosystem
Objectives
R3 Repository and Repository-ObjectsTypical Information System Requests
The Repository Information System
The SAP Application Hierarchy
Summary
Summary 2
Foreign Data Transfer
External Data Transfer
R3 Communication Interfaces I
R3 Communication Interfaces II
Termination Conditions 2
Advanced Techniques Dynamic Screen SequencingAdvanced Techniques Update
Appendix 1
Appendix 2
A B A P D i c t i o n a r y
ABAP Dictionary Unit 16
Content
IntroductionObjectives
Functions of the ABAP Dictionary
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-13
Linking to the ABAP Workbench (Active)
Access from ABAP Program
Summary
Tables in the ABAP Dictionary Unit 17
Objectives-Tables in the ABAP DictionaryTables and Fields
Basic Objects of the ABAP Dictionary
Two-Level Domain Concept Example
Transparent Tables
Structures
Technical Settings
Data Class
Size Category
Buffering Tables
Logging
Consistency between ABAP Dictionary and DB
Summary - Tables in the ABAP Dictionary
Exercises on Unit Tables in the ABAP Dictionary nSolutions to Unit Tables in the ABAP Dictionary
Performance during Table Access Unit 18
Objectives - Performance during Table Access
Indexes
Primary Index
Secondary Indexes
Data Access using the Buffer
Table Buffering
Full BufferingGeneric Buffering
Single-Record Buffering
Buffer Synchronization 1
Buffer Synchronization 2
Buffer Synchronization 3
Buffer Synchronization 4
Buffer Synchronization 5
Buffer Synchronization 6
Summary - Performance during Table Access
Exercises on Unit Performance during Table Access
Solutions to Unit Performance during Table Access
Relationships between Tables in the ABAP Dictionary Unit 19
Objectives - Relationships between Tables in the ABAP Dict
Definition of a Foreign Key
Foreign Key Fields Check Fields
Inserting a Data Record
Violation of the Foreign Key Check
Foreign Key Definitions in the Check Field
Requirements for the Field Assignment
Domains Value Tables Fixed Values
Check Table not Equal to Value TableField Assignment is not Unique
Semantic Attributes
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1434
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-14
Text Tables
Generic and Constant Foreign Keys
INCLUDE
Summary (1)
Summary (2)
Exercises on Unit Relationships between Tables nnSolutions to Unit Relationships between Tables m
R3 Repository Info System as seen by ABAP Dictionary Unit 20
Objectives - R3 Repository Information System
Typical Queries Made of the Information System
Selection Options
Functions
Summary (1) - R3 Repository Information System
Exercises on Unit The R3 Repository Information SystemSolutions to Unit The R3 Repository Information System
Changes to Tables Unit 21
Objectives - Changes to Tables
Active and Revised Versions
Runtime Objects
Handling Dependent Objects
Changing Database Tables
How is the Structure Adjusted
Conversion Process 1
Conversion Process 2
Conversion Process 3
Conversion Process 4
Conversion Process 5What to Do when a Conversion Terminates
Append Structures 1
Append Structures 2
Append Structures 3
Summary Changes to Tables
Exercises on Unit Changes to TablesSolutions to Unit Changes to Tables m
Views Unit 22
Objectives - Views
Why do you Need ViewsStructure of a View - Starting Situation
Structure of a View - Join Condition
Structure of a View - Field Selection (Projection)
Structure of a View - Selection Condition
How are Tables Linked to Views
Structure of the View
Data Selection with Views
Database Views
Buffering Database Views
Includes in Database Views
Maintenance ViewsInner and Outer Joins
Summary - Views
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1534
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-15
Exercises on Unit Views mmSolutions to Unit Views
Search Helps Unit 23
Objectives - Search Helps
R3 Standard Function Input HelpDescription of an Input Help
Interface of a Search Help
Description of the Dialog Behavior
Selection Method of a Serach Help
View as Selection Method
Performance of the Input Help
Input Help from the Data Element
Check Table Help
Attaching a Search Help to a Field
Input Help from Dictionary or Screen
Overview Mechanisms for the Input Help
Alternative Search Paths
Collective Search Helps and Elementary Search Helps
Further Options for Search Helps
Non-Standard Search Help Exit
Migration of Existing Input Helps
Summary - Search Helps
Exercises on Unit Search Helps nSolutions to Unit Search Helps nn
Appendix Unit 24
Important Menu Paths and Transactions
Decision Tree for Buffering TablesAppendix
T e c h n i q u e s o f L i s t P r o c e s s i n g
Techniques of List Processing Unit 25
Contents 12
Contents 22
Introduction
Course GoalsCourse Objectives
Course Overview Diagram
Business Scenario
Demo Programs Templates and Solutions
Overview of Exercises
Finding and Executing Programs Unit 26
Objectives
How to Find Existing Programs
SAP Anwendungshierarchie
The Repository Information SystemReport Trees Organization
Finding Report Trees
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1634
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-16
Summary
Creating Lists with ABAP Query Unit 27
Objectives
Creating Lists with ABAP Query
Programs and ABAP QueryABAP Query Organization
Creating Queries
Creating Lists with ABAP Query
Defining Queries
Choosing a Query Area and a Functional Area
Choosing Fields
Assigning Short Descriptions
Defining Local Fields
Basic Lists
Lists with Control Levels
Statistics
Ranked Lists
Interactive Functions - Single-Line Lists
Interactive Functions - Multiple-Line Lists
Saving Lists
Summary
Creating Lists with ABAP Query
Outputting Data to Lists Unit 28
Objectives
List Design Options
Generating a List
Setting the List FormatModifying and Suppressing Headers
Open Page Design TOP-OF-PAGE
Setting Fixed Lead Columns
The FORMAT Statement
Outputting Lines
The WRITE Statement General Syntax
The WRITE Statement Icons and Symbols
The WRITE Statement Checkboxes
Additional Statements for Output Design
Multilingual List Elements
System Fields and List GenerationStandard Functions in Lists
Summary Lists
Exercises for Outputting Data to Lists Solutions for Outputting Data to Lists
Selection Screens Unit 29
Objectives
Selection Screen Overivew
Declaration of Fields with PARAMETERS
Selections with SELECT-OPTIONS
Selection Options and Multiple SelectionsSyntax of the SELECT-OPTIONS Statement
Designing the Selection Screen I
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1734
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-17
Designing the Selection Screen II
Initializing the Selection Screen
General Help and Possible Entries Help (F1 and F4)
Input Checks AT SELECTION-SCREEN
CALL SELECTION-SCREEN I
CALL SELECTION-SCREEN IISelektionsbild Varianten I
Selection Screen Variants II
Summary
Exercises for Selection Screens Solutions for Selection Screens
Logical Databases Unit 30
Objectives
Generating Lists
Advantages of a Logical Database
Logical Databases Overview
LDB F1S Nodes
Sample Program for a Logical Database
LDB Sub-Objects Structure
LDB Sub-Objects Selections
Selection Screen for the Logical Database
Logical Database Dynamic Selections
LDB Sub-Objects Database Programs
Interaction Between LDBs and Programs
Events in Logical Databases
Program Flow and Termination Alternatives
Checking Internal Program Selections I
Checking Internal Program Selections IISummary
Exercises for Logical Databases Solutions for Logical Databases
Programming Data Retrieval Unit 31
Objectives
Programming Data Retrieval
Reading Multiple Database Tables
Reading Multiple Database Tables I
Reading Multiple Database Tables IIa
Reading Multiple Database Tables IIbReading Multiple Database Tables III
Reading Multiple Database Tables IV
Summary
Exercises for Programming Data Retrieval Solutions for Programming Data Retrieval
ABAP Query Administration Unit 32
Objectives
ABAP Query Administration
Maintaining User Groups
Authorizations and ABAP QueryABAP Query Administration
Defining Functional Areas
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1834
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-18
Overview Creating Functional Areas
Example Defining a Functional Area
Defining Functional Areas
Allocating Fields
Additional Information
Allocating Additional TablesAllocating Additional Fields
Selection Options
Allocating ABAP Statements
Summary
Exercises for ABAP Query Administration
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing Unit 33
Unit Objectives Control Level Processing
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Motivation
Control Level Processing
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Creating an Internal Table
Filling an Internal Table
Sorting and Editing an Internal Table
Control Level Processing for Internal Tables
Control Level Processing Schema for Internal Tables
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Generating an Extract Steps
Example Generating an Extract
Sorting and Processing an Extract
Example Control Level Processing
Schema for Control Level Processing of ExtractsData Formatting and Control Level Processing
Comparing Internal Tables and Extracts
Summary Control Level Processing
Exercises for Data Formatting and Control Level Processing Solutions for Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Storing Lists and Background Processing Unit 34
Objectives
Storing Lists and Background Processing
Saving Lists Possibilities
Saving Lists in SAPofficeSaving Lists as PC Files
Saving Lists in a Report Tree
Customizing Report Trees
Functions in Report Trees
Storing Lists and Background Processing
Options for Printing a List
Print Parameters
Program-Controlled Printing
Program-Controlled Printing with GET_PRINT_PARAMETERS
Storing Lists and Background Processing
Background Processing PhasesDefining Steps
Defining Start Times and Releasing Jobs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1934
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-19
Summary
Exercises for Storing Lists and Background Processing Solutions for Storing Lists and Background Processing
Interactive Lists Basics Unit 35
Unit Objectives Interactive ListsInteractive Lists Basics
User Interactions with Lists
Navigating Between Lists
Events Overview
Flow Control in Detail Lists
Creating Detail Lists I
Creating Detail Lists II
Interactive Lists Basics
Questions
HIDE Areas
HIDE Technique Line Selection
Data Buffering in a List System
Valid Line Selection
Field Selection
Interactive Lists Basics
Page Headers in Detail Lists
Interactive Lists Basics
Creating Lists in Modal Dialog Boxes
Summary Interactive Lists
Exercises for Interactive Lists Solutions for Interactive Lists
Creating User Interfaces Unit 36Objectives User Interfaces
User Interfaces Overview
Status Technical View I
Status Technical View II
Creating a GUI Status
Creating a GUI Status Assigning F Keys I
Creating a GUI Status Assigning F Keys II
Creating a GUI Status Menu Bars
Activating Title and Status
Event AT USER-COMMAND
Summary User Interfaces
Special Techniques for Interactive Lists Unit 37
Objectives
Scrolling in Lists
Reading Lists
Modifying Lists
List Navigation
Interactive List Messages
System Fields in Interactive Lists
Summary
Exercises for Creating User Interfaces Solutions for Creating User Interfaces
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2034
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-20
Linking Programs Unit 38
Objectives
Linking Programs
Data Visibility
Data Transfer Using SAP Memory
SETGET ParametersSUBMIT Statement Syntax
Example SUBMIT WITH
Datatransfer Using ABAP Memory
Returning from a Called Program
Summary
Exercises for Linking Programs Solutions for Linking Programs
Lists on the Internet Unit 39
Unit Objectives Special Application
Lists on the Internet
Motivation
The World Wide Web
HTTP Hypertext Transport Protocol
URL Uniform Resource Locator
HTML Hypertext Markup Language
R3 ClientServer Architecture
R3 ClientServer Architecture with ITS
Lists on the Internet
Web Reporting - Overview
Web Reporting Flow
Creating a List Using a URL
Parameters for WWW_GET_REPORTInteractive Lists
Access Authorization
Creating HTML Hyperlinks in Lists
Lists on the Internet
Web Reporting Browser
Releasing Report Trees for the Internet
Summary Special Application
Appendix Unit 40
Menu Data
T r a n s a c t i o n P ro g r a m m i n g
Transaction Programming Unit 41
Content
Introduction Contents
Couse Goal
Course Objectives
Overview Diagram
Main Business Scenario
About the Course Material
Basic Transaction Programming Unit 42
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-21
Objectives - Basics
Components of a Transaction
Writing a Transaction Process
Analyzing the Problem
User Dialogs in the R3 System
Advantages of ScreensComponents of a Screen
Static Screen Sequence
Creating a Screen Attributes
Creating a Screen Layout
Creating a Screen Field List
Writing the Flow Logic
Communictaion Between Screen and ABAP Program
Creating a Transaction Code
Summary Basic Dialog Programming
Screen Objects - List Unit 43
Screen Objects - Objectives
Screen Objects
Screen Objects General Attributes
Attributes of Screen Objects (Key)
Dynamically Modifiable Static Attributes
The System Table SCREEN
Modifying Attributes Dynamically Example
Object Attributes Modification Group
Modifying Attributes Dynamically Program
Screen Objects - Screen
Screen Object Screen
Defining and Managing ScreensScreen Attributes
Dynamic Next Screen Overview
Setting the Next Screen Dynamically
Inserting a Sequence of Screens Dynamically
Calling a Dialog Box Dynamically
Window Coordinates
Setting the Cursor Position Dynamically
Screen Objects - Title Bar
Screen Object Title Bar
Creating and Using Title Bars
Screen Objects - Text FieldScreen Object Text Field
Text Fields Attributes
Creating Text Fields
Hiding Texts Dynamically
Dynamically Modifiable Attributes Text Field
Dynamic Screen Modifications Program
Screen Objects - InputOutput Field
Screen Object InputOutput Field
InputOutput Fields Attributes
Creating InputOutput Fields
InputOutput Fields Automatic Field ChecksInputOutput Fields Default Values in SAP Memory
Defining SETGET Parameter Attributes
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-22
Programming Field Input Checks with an Error Dialog
Checking Groups of Fields
Controlling Error Dialogs
Dialog Message Categories
The FIELD Statement and Data Transport
Calling Modules Conditionally (1)Calling Modules Conditionally (2)
Screen Objects Status icon
Screen Objects Status Icons
Status Icons Attributes
Creating Status Icon Fields
Filling Status Icon Fields
Group Box
Screen Objects Group Boxes
Group Boxes Attributes
Screen Objects Radio Buttons
Screen Objects Radio Buttons and Checkboxes
Radio ButtonsCheckboxes Attributes
Creating a Radio Button Group
Creating a Checkbox
Screen Objects - Pushbutton
Screen Objects Pushbuttons
Pushbuttons Attributes
Creating Pushbuttons
Pushbuttons with Function Type E
Screen Objects - Subscreen
Screen Objects Subscreen (1)
Screen Objects Subscreen (2)
Subscreen AttributesCreating a Subscreen Area
Calling a Subscreen
Subscreens from External Programs
Subscreens Encapsulation in Function Groups
Subscreens in Function Groups Call Sequence
Subscreens in Function Groups Data Transport
Screen Objects - Tabstrip Control
Screen Object Tabstrip Control
Tabstrip Elements
Tab Page Technical View
Tabstrip Controls AttributesCreating a Tabstrip Control
Creating a Tabstrip Control Tabstrip Area
Creating a Tabstip Control Tab Title
Creating a Tabstrip Control Subscreens
Scrolling Locally in a Tabstrip Control
Scrolling Locally in a Tabstrip Control Coding
Scrolling in a Tabstrip Control
Scrolling in a Tabstrip Control Coding
Screen Objects - Table Control
Screen Object Table Control
ABAP Table Control (Functions)Table Control Table Settings
Actions in Table Controls
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-23
Creating Table Control Elements
Table Control Attributes
Creating a Table Control
Creating a Table Control Table Control Area
Creating a Table Control TC Fields (1)
Create Table Control TC Fields (2) Section ColumnTable Control Attributes at Runtime
Table Control Attributes (Structure)
Table Control Elements - Processing
Processing a Table Control (Principle 1)
Filling a Table Control
Changing the Contents of a Table Control
Table Control Applications (Principle)
Filling a Table Control Coding
Changing the Contents of a Table Control 4 Coding
Table Controls Field Transport in the PBO
Table Controls Field Transport in the PAI
Table Control Elements Further Techniques
Changing a Table Control
Changing the Attributes of a Table Control (1)
Changing the Attributes of a Table Control (2)
Table Control Modifying Field Attributes Temporarily
Sorting a Table Control (Example)
Scrolling Page by Page in a Table Control (Example)
Table Control Cursor Position (Example)
Screen Objects - GUI Status
Screen Object GUI Status
Status Technical View (1)
Status Technical View (2)Attributes of Functions
Function Key Settings
Menus and Menu Bars Attributes
Status Attributes
Standard Toolbar Functions and their Reserved function Keys
Creating a Status
Navigation - Targets
Navigation - Dialogs
Screen Objects - List
Screen Objects Lists
Displaying a List Within a TransactionLists in a Modal Dialog Box
Screen Objects - Selection Screen
Screen Object Selection Screen
Entering Value Ranges
Defining and Calling a Selection Screen
Summary Screen Objects
Uumlbung zu Kapitel Screen Objects Solutions Screen Objects Unit
Programming Database Changes Unit 44
Unit ObjectivesProgramming Database Changes
Statements for Database Dialogs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2434
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-24
SAP LUW
Database LUW
SAP R3 System 3-tier Architecture
System Architecture Implicit DB COMMIT
Objective Bundling the DB Changes in an SAP LUW
Programming Database ChangesBundling Techniques Overview
Bunding Using Delayed Inline Changes
Bundling Using Subroutines
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundline Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Techniques
Update Function modules
V1 and V2 Update Function Modules
Logging Records for Update
Deleting Update Entries Rollback in the Dialog Program
Rollback in the Update Program
Asynchronous Update
What Happens in a Commit Work
Comparison of Bundling Techniques
Programming Database Updates
Why Set Locks
Database Locks
SAP Locking Concept
Setting Logical Locks
SAP Lock ObjectsENQUEUE and DEQUEUE Function Modules
Calling the Function Modules
The Lock Table
Validity of Locks Scope = 2
Programming Database Updates
SAP Authorization Concept
Authorization Checks
User Master Record Authorizations
Authorization Checks for Transactions
Summary
Exercises Programming Database Updates Unit Solutions Programming Database Updates Unit
Complex Transactions Unit 45
Unit Objectives
Complex Transactions
Synchronous Calls Overview
Calling a Report Program
Calling a Transaction
Encapsulating Dialogs in Function Modules
Synchronous Program Calls Main Memory Contents
Complex TransactionsAsynchronous Calls
Calling Programs Asynchronously
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2534
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-25
Complex Transactions
Passing Data Overview
Passing Data Using the Interface of ABAP Programs
The WITH Addition in the SUBMIT Statement
Memory Areas Logical Model
ABAP MemoryPassing Parameters using the SAP Memory
Passing Parameters (SAP Memory)
Complex Transactions
Synchronous Program Calls SAP LUWs
Asynchronous Program Calls SAP LUWs
Program Calls Visible Data and LUWs
Complex Transactions
RFC Scenario R3 - R3
Enabling Function Modules for RFC
RFC Using ABAP Function Modules
Program Context of a Remote Function
RFC Calls System Exceptions
Complex Transactions
Remote Function Call Overview
Process Diagram Synchronous RFC
Process Diagram Asynchronous RFC
Process Diagram Transactional RFC
Transactional RFC (tRFC) Introduction
tRFC Properties
Complex Transactions
Lock Entries for Local Program Calls
Lock Entries for RFC Calls
Summary Exercises Complex Transactions Unit Solutions Complex Transactions Unit
Static Attributes in the Screen Painter Unit 46
Screen Attributes (1)
Screen Attributes (2)
General Attributes
Dictionary Attributes
Program Attributes
Display Attributes
Special Attributes for Subscreens and Tabstrip ControlsSpecial Attributes for Table Controls
Database Updates Further Information Unit 47
Objectives
Database Updates Further Information
Asynchronous Update
Synchronous Update
Local Update
SAP LUW Timescale of Updates
Database Updates Further Information
V1 and V2 Update Function ModulesV1 Update
V2 Update
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2634
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-26
Database Updates Further Information
Validity of Locks Scope = 1
Validity of Locks Scope = 2
Validity of Locks Scope = 3
ENQUEUE Function Modules Interface Parameters
Summary
Complex Transactions Further Information Unit 48
CALL TRANSACTION lsquoTA01rsquo and SUBMIT lsquoREP01rsquo AND RETURN
Implicit End of a Program or LEAVE PROGRAM
LEAVE TO TRANSACTION lsquoTA01rsquo
SUBMIT lsquoREP01rsquo
CALL FUNCTION lsquoFUNC1rsquoPERFORM form1 IN PROGRAM program
Help Functions Unit 49
Overview Standard F1 and F4 Functions
The Search Help Concept
Dialog for an Immediate Hit List
Dialog with Preselection
Dialog for Selecting a Search Help
Search Help Concepts
Search Helps
Defining the Dialog Fields
Defining the Data Selection
Collective Search Helps
Search Help Concepts
Linking Search Helps to Screen Fields
Search Help Concepts
Programmed Help Functions OverviewProgrammed F1 and F4 Help
The POH and POV Events Process
Function Modules for Data Transport
Field Transport to and from the Screen
Determining the Contents of Screen Fields ( POV POH )
Placing Values in Screen Fields ( POV )
Special F1 Functions
Displaying Input Values for a Table Field (POV)
Search Help Concepts
Overview Input Help Mechanisms
Migrating Existing Input Help
Assigning Number Range Numbers Unit 50
Objectives
Overview
Number Range Objects
Number Range Intervals
Sub-objects
Assigning Internal Numbers
Checking External Numbers
Number Range Information
Accessing Table NRIV 1 Without a Buffer Accessing Table NRIV 2 Without a Buffer
Buffering Number Ranges
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2734
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-27
Using Function Groups to Administer Number Ranges
Summary 1
Summary 2
Creating Change Documents Unit 51
ObjectivesOverview
Change Document Structure
Change Relevance
Change Document Objects
Generating Update Programs
INCLUDE Program Structure
Application Program
Change Document Objects and Internal Tables
Reading Change Documents
Using Function Groups to Edit Change Documents
Summary (1)
Summary (2)
Appendix Unit 52
Documentation ReferencesGlossary Index
I n t e r f a c e s f o r D a t a T r a n s f e r
Interfaces for Data Transfer Unit 53
Content
Data Transfer
Objectives
Data Transfer
Transferring Data Into the R3 System
Direct Data Transfer
Data Transfer Using Interfaces
Data Transfer Workbench
Data Analysis
Data Transfer
Analyzing the SAP Transaction
Assigning DataFormat Conversion
Transferring Legacy Data into the R3 System
Data Transfer Methods
Knowledge Tools
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer
Data Analysis and Formatting Unit 54
Data Analysis - Objectives
Data Analysis and Formatting
Standard Transfer Interfaces for Standard Transfer
Standard Transfer - Tasks
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2834
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-28
IMG Documentation
Data Transfer Workbench (DTW)
Documentation in the DTW
Data Analysis and Formatting
Record Layout Types
FB01 Record Layout StructureSample Data for Record Layouts
Generating Test Data in the DTW
Data Analysis and Formatting
Translating Data
Translating Data in the Legacy System
Generating SAP Structures in the DTW
Translating Data in the R3 System
Translating Data Types
Translating Data for Transaction FB01
Translating Data - Example
Translating Data Using EXCEL
Data Analysis and Formatting
Initializing Record Layouts
Initializing Record Layouts - Example
Filling Record Layouts
Structure of Transaction FB01
Mapping Data in Transaction FB01
Filling Record Layout BGR00 - Example
Data Analysis and Formatting
Additional Tasks
Converting Data
Converting Legacy System R3 System Data
Structure of a Conversion ProgramData Analysis - Summary
Exercises for Unit Data AnalysisSolutions to Unit Data Analysis
Files in the R3 System Unit 55
Objectives
Files in the R3 System
R3 Client Server Architecture
Transferring Files
Files in the R3 System
Processing FilesOpening Files
Opening Files - Options
Binary Mode and Text Mode
Transferring Data Records
Reading Data Records
Closing Deleting a Sequential File
Filling Record Layouts for Transaction FB01 (1)
Filling Record Layouts for Transaction FB01 (2)
Sequential Files - Summary
Files in the R3 System
DOWNLOAD and UPLOADFunction Module rsquoDOWNLOADrsquo
Example Program DOWNLOAD
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2934
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-29
Function Module rsquoUPLOADrsquo
Example Program UPLOAD
Summary
Exercises for Unit Files in the R3 SystemSolutions to Unit Files in the R3 System
Data Transfer Workbench Unit 56
Data Transfer - Objectives
Data Transfer Workbench
Preparing the Data Transfer
Testing and Executing the Data Transfer
Direct Input Management
Scheduling Direct Input
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer WorkbenchSolutions to Unit Data Transfer Workbench
Batch Input Sessions Unit 57
Objectives
Batch Input Sessions
Batch Input Processing
Batch Input Program
Format of a Batch Input Session
Creating Batch Input Sessions
Function Modules for Batch Input Programs
Structure of the BDC Table
Batch Input Processing
Batch Input Sessions
Batch Input Monitor - FunctionsSession Status
Processing Modes
Entering Data into Screens
Batch Input Processing
Session Statistics
Session Log
Summary
Exercises for Unit Batch Input SessionsSolutions to Unit Batch Input Sessions
Data Transfer Programs Unit 58Objectives
Data Transfer Programs
Customer Transfer Programs
Customer Transfer Program - Tasks
Data Transfer Programs
Batch Input Program Elements
Defining BDC Tables
Structure of the BDC Table
Determining Field Names
Determining Field Names with the Screen Painter
Structure DefinitionFunction Modules for a Batch Input Program
Function Module BDC_OPEN_GROUP
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3034
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-30
Function Module BDC_INSERT
Function Module BDC_CLOSE_GROUP
Structure of a Batch Input Program
Batch Input Program - Overview (I)
Batch Input Program - Overview (II)
Subroutine generate_bdc_dataProgram BDCRECXX (I)
Program BDCRECXX (II)
Program BDCRECXX (III)
Data Transfer Programs
Batch Input Recorder
Batch Input Recording
Recording the First Screen
Recording the Second Screen
Additional Screens Saving
Ending the Recording
Generating Sessions and Programs
Generating Batch Input Sessions
Structure of the Generated Program
Enhancing the Generated Program
Data Transfer Programs
Overview
Call Transaction Program
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (I)
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (II)
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (III)
Displaying the Messtab
Technical Implementation
Return Codes and System FieldsSystem Field Message Output
Generating Sessions When Errors Occur
Summary
Overview
Structure of a Data Transfer Program
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer ProgramSolutions to Unit Data Transfer Program
Additional Techniques Unit 59
ObjectivesAdditional Techniques - Overview
Changing Customers - Payment Transactions
Step Loop Field Names
Structure of the BDC Table
Filling BDC Tables in ABAP
Additional Techniques
Overview - Special Fields
Setting the Cursor in the Batch Input Session
Setting the Cursor in the ABAP Program
Additional Techniques
Successful Transaction EndAdditional Techniques
Processing Batch Input Sessions
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-31
Batch Input Flow
Additional Techniques
Program RSBDCSUB
Batch Input Authorizations
Service Programs
Summary Exercises for Unit Additional TechniquesSolutions for Unit Additional Techniques
Tips amp Tricks Unit 60
Tips and Tricks - Objectives
OSS Notes
Parallel Processing
Resetting Rollback Segments
Additional Tips and Information
Summary
Appendix Unit 61
Job Structure
Scheduling Jobs
Job Distribution
SAP-LUW Chronological Update
Update Principles
Asynchronous Update
Synchronous Update
Local Update
E n h a n c e m e n t s a n d M o d i f i c a t i o n s
Enhancements and Modifications Unit 62
Content
Introduction Contents
Course Overview Diagram
Main Business Scenario
Modifications Unit 63
Objectives
Modifications
What are modifications
Modifications and Upgrades
Modifications
Copying SAP Objects
Making Changes to SAP Copies (Modifications)
Registering Modifications in SSCR
Carrying Out a Registered Modification
Versions
Naming Conventions for Repository Objects
Modifications
Modifications Critical Success Factors (1)
Modifications Critical Success Factors (2)Modifications Critical Success Factors (3)
Documenting Modifications in Programs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-32
Modification Logs An Example
Modifications
Modification Adjustment SPDD and SPAU
Modification Adjustment Objects
Transaction SPAU (Process After Upgrade)
Transporting Adjustments between SystemsThe amount of work necessary at upgrade increases
Modifications Critical Repository Objects
Avoiding Adjustments
Modifications
User Exits
User Exits An Example
Using User Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Modifications
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Unit 64
Objectives
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Table Enhancements Overview
Append Structures
Append Structures at Upgrade
Customizing Includes
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Global Enhancements
Field Exits
Global and Local Field Exits
Creating Field Exits
Enhancements to Dictionary ElementsText Enhancements
Editing Text Enhancements
Keywords
Keyword Change Requirements
Keyword Changes and Release Upgrades
Restoring SAP Keywords
Enhanced Documentation for Data Elements
Customer Documentation
Summary Text Enhancements
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Solutions for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Enhancements using Customer Exits Unit 65
Objectives
Enhancements using Customer Exits
SAP Application Enhancements
Customer Enhancement Projects
SAP Enhancements and Customer Enhancement Projects
Enhancements using Customer Exits
The SAP Enhancement Creation Procedure
Implementing Enhancements in Customer SystemsCreating Customer Enhancement Projects
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-33
Editing Components
Activating Enhancement Projects
Transporting Projects
Summary Enhancement Management
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Function Module ExitsCalling and Creating Function Modules
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Organization of an X Function Group
Customer Source Code
Global Data SAP and the Customer
Subroutines Modules SAP and the Customer
Customer Screens
Customer Screens Modules
Summary Function Module Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Menu Exits
Menu Exit Requirements
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Menu Exits and Function Module Exits
Summary Menu Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Screen Exits
Subscreens in the R3 System
Calling Subscreens
Defining Screen Exits
Calling Customer Subscreens
Transporting Data to Subscreens
Transporting Data from SubscreensEditing Subscreens (1)
Editing Subscreens (2)
Summary Screen Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits Solutions for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits
Business Transaction Events Unit 66
Objectives
Business Transaction Events (BTE)
BTE Possible Scenarios (1)BTE Possible Scenarios (2)
Publish amp Subscribe vs Process Interfaces
Business Transaction Events SAP and the Customer
Finding Business Transaction Events
Creating a Publish amp Subscribe Interface
Differences between Customer Exits and BTEs
Summary
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3434
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 734
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-7
Finishing Projects
Creating Development Classes
Assigning Change Requests
Programs with User and Database Dialog
Overview Creating Programs
Program AttributesImportant Editor Functions
Global Role of the ABAP Dictionary
1 User Dialog Selection Screens
1 User Dialog Selection Screen II
2 User Dialog Screens
Creating Screens
Database Dialog Open SQL
3 User Dialog Messages
4 User Dialog Lists
General ABAP Syntax
General ABAP Syntax and Chained Statements
Comments
ABAP Program Operations
Summary
Exercises for Unit ABAP Workbench Solutions for Unit ABAP Workbench
ABAP Dictionary Contents Unit 6
ABAP Dictionary Objectives
Data Modeling
Flight Data Model for ABAP Training Courses
Data Model
Realization in the ABAP DictionaryIntegration into ABAP Workbench (Active)
Basic Dictionary Objects
Dual Level Domain Concept
Transparent Tables
Creating Transparent Tables
Structures
Creating Structures
ABAP Dictionary Views
Advanced Techniques Search Help
ABAP Dictionary Summary
Exercises for Unit ABAP Dictionary Solutions for Unit ABAP Dictionary
ABAP Open SQL - Contents Unit 7
ABAP Open SQL Unit Objectives
The R3 ClientServer Architecture
The Database Interface
Open SQL Statements Overview
SELECT Statement Overview
Using the SELECT Statement for a Single Line
Using the SELECT Statement for Several Lines
Using the SELECT Statement for an Internal TableWHERE Clauses
ABAP Open SQL Summary
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 834
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-8
Exercises for Unit ABAP Open SQL Solutions for Unit ABAP Open SQL
ABAP Data and Statements Contents Unit 8
Objectives
The R3 ClientServer ArchitectureThe ABAP Type Concept
Defining Data Objects Overview
Data Types
Predefined Data Types
Elementary Data Objects
Structures
Internal Tables
Referring to ABAP Dictionary Objects
Type Groups in the ABAP Dictionary
PARAMETERS and TABLES
Literals and Constants
Text Symbols
Summary of Declarative Statements
Initializing Data Objects
Assigning Values
Assigning Values Field for Field
Type Conversion
Conversion Rules for Elementary Types
Conversion Rules for Structure Types
Calculating Values
Sub-fields
Calculating Dates
Control Statements OverviewLogical Expressions
Case Distinctions
DO and WHILE Loops
CHECK and EXIT
Summary
Summary (2)
Exercises for Unit ABAP Data and Statements Solutions for Unit ABAP Data and Statements
Test Tools Contents Unit 9
Test Tools Unit ObjectivesTest Tools
Debugging
Important Debugging Functions I
Important Debugging Functions II
Debugger Overview
Breakpoints
Advanced Techniques Runtime Analysis
Advanced Techniques SQL Trace
Advanced Techniques Computer Aided Test Tool
Summary
Internal Tables Contents Unit 10
Internal Tables Objectives
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 934
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-9
The R3 ClientServer Architecture
Internal Tables
Dynamic Table Expansion
Table Attributes Line Type
Keys
Data Access QuantitiesData Access Types
Table Types
Internal Table Work Areas
Defining Internal Tables
Filling Internal Tables
Array Fetch
Sorting an Internal Table
Loop Processing in Internal Tables
Accessing Individual Internal Table Entries
Changing an Internal Table with the Index
Changing an Internal Table with Keys
Deleting an Internal Table
Internal Tables withwithout Header Lines
Control Level Processing
Internal Tables Summary 1
Internal Tables Summary 2
Exercises for Unit Internal Tables Solutions for Unit Internal Tables
Modularization and Program Structure Unit 11
Objectives
Modularization and Program Structure
Structure of an ABAP ProgramStructure of Earlier Programs from the Course
Processing Block Types
Modularization and Program Structure
Event Blocks
Events in Executable Programs (Type 1)
Syntax Event Blocks
Modularization and Program Structure
Subroutines
Defining Subroutines
Defining the Interface
Data VisibilityCalling Subroutines
Calling Subroutines Syntax
Interface Parameters Structures
Interface Parameters Internal Tables
Modularization and Program Structure
Function Modules as Processing Blocks
Calling Function Modules
Creating a Function Group
Creating a Function Module
Elements of a Function Module
Interface Import ParametersException Handling
Function Module Source Code
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1034
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-10
Documentation and Testing
Calling Function Modules
Catching Exceptions
Central Role of Function Modules
Modularization and Program Structure
Includes Type I ProgramsTOP Includes
Standard Includes for Function Groups
Function Modules Summary
Exercises for Unit Modularization and Structure Solutions for Unit Modularization and Program Structure
Dialogs Contents Unit 12
Dialogs Unit Objectives
Dialogs
The R3 ClientServer Architecture
Overview
User Dialogs
Dialogs - Lists
Lists
List Operations
Page Headers
Multilingual Capability
ColorsIconsSymbols in Lists
Lists in Executable Programs
Details Lists
Example A Simple Details List
Syntax A Simple Details List
Details List ExampleHIDE Areas
Line Selection
Line Selection Syntax
Advanced Techniques Lists as Input Tools and Details Lists
Dialogs - Selection Screens
Selection Screens
The Selection Screen
Entering Selections
Search Help
Variants
Selection TextsRecap PARAMETERS
Using Parameters in the SELECT Statement
SELECT-OPTIONS
Using Select-Options in the SELECT Statement
Standard Selection Screens in Executable Programs
Standard Selection Screen Processing
Additional Input Checks
AT SELECTION-SCREEN
Example User-defined Selection Screens
User-defined Selection Screens
Syntax Defining and Calling Selection ScreensDialogs - User Messages
User Messages Overview
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-11
Syntax MESSAGE Statements
Dialog Message Types
Dialogs - Screens
Screens Strengths
Using Screens
Screens an ExampleParts of a Screen
Step 1 Creating a Screen
Creating a Screen Screen Attributes
Layout and Field Attributes 1
Layout and Field Attributes 2
Field Attributes The Field List
Check Tables
Step 2 Displaying Data
Screen Interfaces
Screen Processing Logic PBO and PAI
Screen Processing Blocks
PBO and PAI Processing Logic
Data Transport between Screens and Programs
Flow Logic
Step 3 Defining Pushbuttons
Defining Function Codes
Assigning a Field Name to the OK_CODE Field
Program Logic
Static Screen Sequencing
Dynamic Screen Sequencing
Database Updates
Advanced Techniques Screens
Dialogs - InterfacesOverview Interface Objects
Example Program Interface
Basic Interface Elements
Statuses Interface Views
Creating GUI Statuses for Lists
Creating Statuses Key Settings
Creating Statuses Menu Bars
Example Program Interface
Creating GUI Titles for a Screen
Creating GUI Statuses for a Screen
Title and StatusSummary Interfaces
Summary
Exercises for Unit Dialogs Solutions for Unit Dialogs
Authorization Checks Contents Unit 13
Objectives
Basic Authorization Concepts
Authorization Cehcks in Programs
AUTHORITY-CHECK Syntax
SummaryAuthorization Checks Summary
Exercises for Unit Authorization Checks
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-12
Solutions for Unit Authorization Checks
Software Logistics and Software Modifications Contents Unit 14
Software Logistics and Software Modifications Unit Object
Software Logistics and Software Modification
Workbench Organizer and Transport SystemManaging Development Projects in the WBO
Completing a Project
Functions of a Change Request
Local Objects
Originals and Copies
SAP Objects as Copies
Task Attributes
Changing Customer Copies
Changing SAP Copies (Modifications)
Software Logistics and Software Modification
Change Levels
Functional Enhancements
Enhancing User Dialogs
Enhancements Examples
Registering Developers in the SSCR
Software Logistics and Software Modification Summary
Software Logistics and Software Modifications Summary (II)
Exercises for Unit Software Logistics and Modification
Appendix Unit 15
Repository-Infosystem
Objectives
R3 Repository and Repository-ObjectsTypical Information System Requests
The Repository Information System
The SAP Application Hierarchy
Summary
Summary 2
Foreign Data Transfer
External Data Transfer
R3 Communication Interfaces I
R3 Communication Interfaces II
Termination Conditions 2
Advanced Techniques Dynamic Screen SequencingAdvanced Techniques Update
Appendix 1
Appendix 2
A B A P D i c t i o n a r y
ABAP Dictionary Unit 16
Content
IntroductionObjectives
Functions of the ABAP Dictionary
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-13
Linking to the ABAP Workbench (Active)
Access from ABAP Program
Summary
Tables in the ABAP Dictionary Unit 17
Objectives-Tables in the ABAP DictionaryTables and Fields
Basic Objects of the ABAP Dictionary
Two-Level Domain Concept Example
Transparent Tables
Structures
Technical Settings
Data Class
Size Category
Buffering Tables
Logging
Consistency between ABAP Dictionary and DB
Summary - Tables in the ABAP Dictionary
Exercises on Unit Tables in the ABAP Dictionary nSolutions to Unit Tables in the ABAP Dictionary
Performance during Table Access Unit 18
Objectives - Performance during Table Access
Indexes
Primary Index
Secondary Indexes
Data Access using the Buffer
Table Buffering
Full BufferingGeneric Buffering
Single-Record Buffering
Buffer Synchronization 1
Buffer Synchronization 2
Buffer Synchronization 3
Buffer Synchronization 4
Buffer Synchronization 5
Buffer Synchronization 6
Summary - Performance during Table Access
Exercises on Unit Performance during Table Access
Solutions to Unit Performance during Table Access
Relationships between Tables in the ABAP Dictionary Unit 19
Objectives - Relationships between Tables in the ABAP Dict
Definition of a Foreign Key
Foreign Key Fields Check Fields
Inserting a Data Record
Violation of the Foreign Key Check
Foreign Key Definitions in the Check Field
Requirements for the Field Assignment
Domains Value Tables Fixed Values
Check Table not Equal to Value TableField Assignment is not Unique
Semantic Attributes
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1434
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-14
Text Tables
Generic and Constant Foreign Keys
INCLUDE
Summary (1)
Summary (2)
Exercises on Unit Relationships between Tables nnSolutions to Unit Relationships between Tables m
R3 Repository Info System as seen by ABAP Dictionary Unit 20
Objectives - R3 Repository Information System
Typical Queries Made of the Information System
Selection Options
Functions
Summary (1) - R3 Repository Information System
Exercises on Unit The R3 Repository Information SystemSolutions to Unit The R3 Repository Information System
Changes to Tables Unit 21
Objectives - Changes to Tables
Active and Revised Versions
Runtime Objects
Handling Dependent Objects
Changing Database Tables
How is the Structure Adjusted
Conversion Process 1
Conversion Process 2
Conversion Process 3
Conversion Process 4
Conversion Process 5What to Do when a Conversion Terminates
Append Structures 1
Append Structures 2
Append Structures 3
Summary Changes to Tables
Exercises on Unit Changes to TablesSolutions to Unit Changes to Tables m
Views Unit 22
Objectives - Views
Why do you Need ViewsStructure of a View - Starting Situation
Structure of a View - Join Condition
Structure of a View - Field Selection (Projection)
Structure of a View - Selection Condition
How are Tables Linked to Views
Structure of the View
Data Selection with Views
Database Views
Buffering Database Views
Includes in Database Views
Maintenance ViewsInner and Outer Joins
Summary - Views
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1534
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-15
Exercises on Unit Views mmSolutions to Unit Views
Search Helps Unit 23
Objectives - Search Helps
R3 Standard Function Input HelpDescription of an Input Help
Interface of a Search Help
Description of the Dialog Behavior
Selection Method of a Serach Help
View as Selection Method
Performance of the Input Help
Input Help from the Data Element
Check Table Help
Attaching a Search Help to a Field
Input Help from Dictionary or Screen
Overview Mechanisms for the Input Help
Alternative Search Paths
Collective Search Helps and Elementary Search Helps
Further Options for Search Helps
Non-Standard Search Help Exit
Migration of Existing Input Helps
Summary - Search Helps
Exercises on Unit Search Helps nSolutions to Unit Search Helps nn
Appendix Unit 24
Important Menu Paths and Transactions
Decision Tree for Buffering TablesAppendix
T e c h n i q u e s o f L i s t P r o c e s s i n g
Techniques of List Processing Unit 25
Contents 12
Contents 22
Introduction
Course GoalsCourse Objectives
Course Overview Diagram
Business Scenario
Demo Programs Templates and Solutions
Overview of Exercises
Finding and Executing Programs Unit 26
Objectives
How to Find Existing Programs
SAP Anwendungshierarchie
The Repository Information SystemReport Trees Organization
Finding Report Trees
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1634
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-16
Summary
Creating Lists with ABAP Query Unit 27
Objectives
Creating Lists with ABAP Query
Programs and ABAP QueryABAP Query Organization
Creating Queries
Creating Lists with ABAP Query
Defining Queries
Choosing a Query Area and a Functional Area
Choosing Fields
Assigning Short Descriptions
Defining Local Fields
Basic Lists
Lists with Control Levels
Statistics
Ranked Lists
Interactive Functions - Single-Line Lists
Interactive Functions - Multiple-Line Lists
Saving Lists
Summary
Creating Lists with ABAP Query
Outputting Data to Lists Unit 28
Objectives
List Design Options
Generating a List
Setting the List FormatModifying and Suppressing Headers
Open Page Design TOP-OF-PAGE
Setting Fixed Lead Columns
The FORMAT Statement
Outputting Lines
The WRITE Statement General Syntax
The WRITE Statement Icons and Symbols
The WRITE Statement Checkboxes
Additional Statements for Output Design
Multilingual List Elements
System Fields and List GenerationStandard Functions in Lists
Summary Lists
Exercises for Outputting Data to Lists Solutions for Outputting Data to Lists
Selection Screens Unit 29
Objectives
Selection Screen Overivew
Declaration of Fields with PARAMETERS
Selections with SELECT-OPTIONS
Selection Options and Multiple SelectionsSyntax of the SELECT-OPTIONS Statement
Designing the Selection Screen I
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1734
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-17
Designing the Selection Screen II
Initializing the Selection Screen
General Help and Possible Entries Help (F1 and F4)
Input Checks AT SELECTION-SCREEN
CALL SELECTION-SCREEN I
CALL SELECTION-SCREEN IISelektionsbild Varianten I
Selection Screen Variants II
Summary
Exercises for Selection Screens Solutions for Selection Screens
Logical Databases Unit 30
Objectives
Generating Lists
Advantages of a Logical Database
Logical Databases Overview
LDB F1S Nodes
Sample Program for a Logical Database
LDB Sub-Objects Structure
LDB Sub-Objects Selections
Selection Screen for the Logical Database
Logical Database Dynamic Selections
LDB Sub-Objects Database Programs
Interaction Between LDBs and Programs
Events in Logical Databases
Program Flow and Termination Alternatives
Checking Internal Program Selections I
Checking Internal Program Selections IISummary
Exercises for Logical Databases Solutions for Logical Databases
Programming Data Retrieval Unit 31
Objectives
Programming Data Retrieval
Reading Multiple Database Tables
Reading Multiple Database Tables I
Reading Multiple Database Tables IIa
Reading Multiple Database Tables IIbReading Multiple Database Tables III
Reading Multiple Database Tables IV
Summary
Exercises for Programming Data Retrieval Solutions for Programming Data Retrieval
ABAP Query Administration Unit 32
Objectives
ABAP Query Administration
Maintaining User Groups
Authorizations and ABAP QueryABAP Query Administration
Defining Functional Areas
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1834
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-18
Overview Creating Functional Areas
Example Defining a Functional Area
Defining Functional Areas
Allocating Fields
Additional Information
Allocating Additional TablesAllocating Additional Fields
Selection Options
Allocating ABAP Statements
Summary
Exercises for ABAP Query Administration
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing Unit 33
Unit Objectives Control Level Processing
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Motivation
Control Level Processing
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Creating an Internal Table
Filling an Internal Table
Sorting and Editing an Internal Table
Control Level Processing for Internal Tables
Control Level Processing Schema for Internal Tables
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Generating an Extract Steps
Example Generating an Extract
Sorting and Processing an Extract
Example Control Level Processing
Schema for Control Level Processing of ExtractsData Formatting and Control Level Processing
Comparing Internal Tables and Extracts
Summary Control Level Processing
Exercises for Data Formatting and Control Level Processing Solutions for Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Storing Lists and Background Processing Unit 34
Objectives
Storing Lists and Background Processing
Saving Lists Possibilities
Saving Lists in SAPofficeSaving Lists as PC Files
Saving Lists in a Report Tree
Customizing Report Trees
Functions in Report Trees
Storing Lists and Background Processing
Options for Printing a List
Print Parameters
Program-Controlled Printing
Program-Controlled Printing with GET_PRINT_PARAMETERS
Storing Lists and Background Processing
Background Processing PhasesDefining Steps
Defining Start Times and Releasing Jobs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1934
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-19
Summary
Exercises for Storing Lists and Background Processing Solutions for Storing Lists and Background Processing
Interactive Lists Basics Unit 35
Unit Objectives Interactive ListsInteractive Lists Basics
User Interactions with Lists
Navigating Between Lists
Events Overview
Flow Control in Detail Lists
Creating Detail Lists I
Creating Detail Lists II
Interactive Lists Basics
Questions
HIDE Areas
HIDE Technique Line Selection
Data Buffering in a List System
Valid Line Selection
Field Selection
Interactive Lists Basics
Page Headers in Detail Lists
Interactive Lists Basics
Creating Lists in Modal Dialog Boxes
Summary Interactive Lists
Exercises for Interactive Lists Solutions for Interactive Lists
Creating User Interfaces Unit 36Objectives User Interfaces
User Interfaces Overview
Status Technical View I
Status Technical View II
Creating a GUI Status
Creating a GUI Status Assigning F Keys I
Creating a GUI Status Assigning F Keys II
Creating a GUI Status Menu Bars
Activating Title and Status
Event AT USER-COMMAND
Summary User Interfaces
Special Techniques for Interactive Lists Unit 37
Objectives
Scrolling in Lists
Reading Lists
Modifying Lists
List Navigation
Interactive List Messages
System Fields in Interactive Lists
Summary
Exercises for Creating User Interfaces Solutions for Creating User Interfaces
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2034
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-20
Linking Programs Unit 38
Objectives
Linking Programs
Data Visibility
Data Transfer Using SAP Memory
SETGET ParametersSUBMIT Statement Syntax
Example SUBMIT WITH
Datatransfer Using ABAP Memory
Returning from a Called Program
Summary
Exercises for Linking Programs Solutions for Linking Programs
Lists on the Internet Unit 39
Unit Objectives Special Application
Lists on the Internet
Motivation
The World Wide Web
HTTP Hypertext Transport Protocol
URL Uniform Resource Locator
HTML Hypertext Markup Language
R3 ClientServer Architecture
R3 ClientServer Architecture with ITS
Lists on the Internet
Web Reporting - Overview
Web Reporting Flow
Creating a List Using a URL
Parameters for WWW_GET_REPORTInteractive Lists
Access Authorization
Creating HTML Hyperlinks in Lists
Lists on the Internet
Web Reporting Browser
Releasing Report Trees for the Internet
Summary Special Application
Appendix Unit 40
Menu Data
T r a n s a c t i o n P ro g r a m m i n g
Transaction Programming Unit 41
Content
Introduction Contents
Couse Goal
Course Objectives
Overview Diagram
Main Business Scenario
About the Course Material
Basic Transaction Programming Unit 42
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-21
Objectives - Basics
Components of a Transaction
Writing a Transaction Process
Analyzing the Problem
User Dialogs in the R3 System
Advantages of ScreensComponents of a Screen
Static Screen Sequence
Creating a Screen Attributes
Creating a Screen Layout
Creating a Screen Field List
Writing the Flow Logic
Communictaion Between Screen and ABAP Program
Creating a Transaction Code
Summary Basic Dialog Programming
Screen Objects - List Unit 43
Screen Objects - Objectives
Screen Objects
Screen Objects General Attributes
Attributes of Screen Objects (Key)
Dynamically Modifiable Static Attributes
The System Table SCREEN
Modifying Attributes Dynamically Example
Object Attributes Modification Group
Modifying Attributes Dynamically Program
Screen Objects - Screen
Screen Object Screen
Defining and Managing ScreensScreen Attributes
Dynamic Next Screen Overview
Setting the Next Screen Dynamically
Inserting a Sequence of Screens Dynamically
Calling a Dialog Box Dynamically
Window Coordinates
Setting the Cursor Position Dynamically
Screen Objects - Title Bar
Screen Object Title Bar
Creating and Using Title Bars
Screen Objects - Text FieldScreen Object Text Field
Text Fields Attributes
Creating Text Fields
Hiding Texts Dynamically
Dynamically Modifiable Attributes Text Field
Dynamic Screen Modifications Program
Screen Objects - InputOutput Field
Screen Object InputOutput Field
InputOutput Fields Attributes
Creating InputOutput Fields
InputOutput Fields Automatic Field ChecksInputOutput Fields Default Values in SAP Memory
Defining SETGET Parameter Attributes
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-22
Programming Field Input Checks with an Error Dialog
Checking Groups of Fields
Controlling Error Dialogs
Dialog Message Categories
The FIELD Statement and Data Transport
Calling Modules Conditionally (1)Calling Modules Conditionally (2)
Screen Objects Status icon
Screen Objects Status Icons
Status Icons Attributes
Creating Status Icon Fields
Filling Status Icon Fields
Group Box
Screen Objects Group Boxes
Group Boxes Attributes
Screen Objects Radio Buttons
Screen Objects Radio Buttons and Checkboxes
Radio ButtonsCheckboxes Attributes
Creating a Radio Button Group
Creating a Checkbox
Screen Objects - Pushbutton
Screen Objects Pushbuttons
Pushbuttons Attributes
Creating Pushbuttons
Pushbuttons with Function Type E
Screen Objects - Subscreen
Screen Objects Subscreen (1)
Screen Objects Subscreen (2)
Subscreen AttributesCreating a Subscreen Area
Calling a Subscreen
Subscreens from External Programs
Subscreens Encapsulation in Function Groups
Subscreens in Function Groups Call Sequence
Subscreens in Function Groups Data Transport
Screen Objects - Tabstrip Control
Screen Object Tabstrip Control
Tabstrip Elements
Tab Page Technical View
Tabstrip Controls AttributesCreating a Tabstrip Control
Creating a Tabstrip Control Tabstrip Area
Creating a Tabstip Control Tab Title
Creating a Tabstrip Control Subscreens
Scrolling Locally in a Tabstrip Control
Scrolling Locally in a Tabstrip Control Coding
Scrolling in a Tabstrip Control
Scrolling in a Tabstrip Control Coding
Screen Objects - Table Control
Screen Object Table Control
ABAP Table Control (Functions)Table Control Table Settings
Actions in Table Controls
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-23
Creating Table Control Elements
Table Control Attributes
Creating a Table Control
Creating a Table Control Table Control Area
Creating a Table Control TC Fields (1)
Create Table Control TC Fields (2) Section ColumnTable Control Attributes at Runtime
Table Control Attributes (Structure)
Table Control Elements - Processing
Processing a Table Control (Principle 1)
Filling a Table Control
Changing the Contents of a Table Control
Table Control Applications (Principle)
Filling a Table Control Coding
Changing the Contents of a Table Control 4 Coding
Table Controls Field Transport in the PBO
Table Controls Field Transport in the PAI
Table Control Elements Further Techniques
Changing a Table Control
Changing the Attributes of a Table Control (1)
Changing the Attributes of a Table Control (2)
Table Control Modifying Field Attributes Temporarily
Sorting a Table Control (Example)
Scrolling Page by Page in a Table Control (Example)
Table Control Cursor Position (Example)
Screen Objects - GUI Status
Screen Object GUI Status
Status Technical View (1)
Status Technical View (2)Attributes of Functions
Function Key Settings
Menus and Menu Bars Attributes
Status Attributes
Standard Toolbar Functions and their Reserved function Keys
Creating a Status
Navigation - Targets
Navigation - Dialogs
Screen Objects - List
Screen Objects Lists
Displaying a List Within a TransactionLists in a Modal Dialog Box
Screen Objects - Selection Screen
Screen Object Selection Screen
Entering Value Ranges
Defining and Calling a Selection Screen
Summary Screen Objects
Uumlbung zu Kapitel Screen Objects Solutions Screen Objects Unit
Programming Database Changes Unit 44
Unit ObjectivesProgramming Database Changes
Statements for Database Dialogs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2434
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-24
SAP LUW
Database LUW
SAP R3 System 3-tier Architecture
System Architecture Implicit DB COMMIT
Objective Bundling the DB Changes in an SAP LUW
Programming Database ChangesBundling Techniques Overview
Bunding Using Delayed Inline Changes
Bundling Using Subroutines
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundline Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Techniques
Update Function modules
V1 and V2 Update Function Modules
Logging Records for Update
Deleting Update Entries Rollback in the Dialog Program
Rollback in the Update Program
Asynchronous Update
What Happens in a Commit Work
Comparison of Bundling Techniques
Programming Database Updates
Why Set Locks
Database Locks
SAP Locking Concept
Setting Logical Locks
SAP Lock ObjectsENQUEUE and DEQUEUE Function Modules
Calling the Function Modules
The Lock Table
Validity of Locks Scope = 2
Programming Database Updates
SAP Authorization Concept
Authorization Checks
User Master Record Authorizations
Authorization Checks for Transactions
Summary
Exercises Programming Database Updates Unit Solutions Programming Database Updates Unit
Complex Transactions Unit 45
Unit Objectives
Complex Transactions
Synchronous Calls Overview
Calling a Report Program
Calling a Transaction
Encapsulating Dialogs in Function Modules
Synchronous Program Calls Main Memory Contents
Complex TransactionsAsynchronous Calls
Calling Programs Asynchronously
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2534
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-25
Complex Transactions
Passing Data Overview
Passing Data Using the Interface of ABAP Programs
The WITH Addition in the SUBMIT Statement
Memory Areas Logical Model
ABAP MemoryPassing Parameters using the SAP Memory
Passing Parameters (SAP Memory)
Complex Transactions
Synchronous Program Calls SAP LUWs
Asynchronous Program Calls SAP LUWs
Program Calls Visible Data and LUWs
Complex Transactions
RFC Scenario R3 - R3
Enabling Function Modules for RFC
RFC Using ABAP Function Modules
Program Context of a Remote Function
RFC Calls System Exceptions
Complex Transactions
Remote Function Call Overview
Process Diagram Synchronous RFC
Process Diagram Asynchronous RFC
Process Diagram Transactional RFC
Transactional RFC (tRFC) Introduction
tRFC Properties
Complex Transactions
Lock Entries for Local Program Calls
Lock Entries for RFC Calls
Summary Exercises Complex Transactions Unit Solutions Complex Transactions Unit
Static Attributes in the Screen Painter Unit 46
Screen Attributes (1)
Screen Attributes (2)
General Attributes
Dictionary Attributes
Program Attributes
Display Attributes
Special Attributes for Subscreens and Tabstrip ControlsSpecial Attributes for Table Controls
Database Updates Further Information Unit 47
Objectives
Database Updates Further Information
Asynchronous Update
Synchronous Update
Local Update
SAP LUW Timescale of Updates
Database Updates Further Information
V1 and V2 Update Function ModulesV1 Update
V2 Update
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2634
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-26
Database Updates Further Information
Validity of Locks Scope = 1
Validity of Locks Scope = 2
Validity of Locks Scope = 3
ENQUEUE Function Modules Interface Parameters
Summary
Complex Transactions Further Information Unit 48
CALL TRANSACTION lsquoTA01rsquo and SUBMIT lsquoREP01rsquo AND RETURN
Implicit End of a Program or LEAVE PROGRAM
LEAVE TO TRANSACTION lsquoTA01rsquo
SUBMIT lsquoREP01rsquo
CALL FUNCTION lsquoFUNC1rsquoPERFORM form1 IN PROGRAM program
Help Functions Unit 49
Overview Standard F1 and F4 Functions
The Search Help Concept
Dialog for an Immediate Hit List
Dialog with Preselection
Dialog for Selecting a Search Help
Search Help Concepts
Search Helps
Defining the Dialog Fields
Defining the Data Selection
Collective Search Helps
Search Help Concepts
Linking Search Helps to Screen Fields
Search Help Concepts
Programmed Help Functions OverviewProgrammed F1 and F4 Help
The POH and POV Events Process
Function Modules for Data Transport
Field Transport to and from the Screen
Determining the Contents of Screen Fields ( POV POH )
Placing Values in Screen Fields ( POV )
Special F1 Functions
Displaying Input Values for a Table Field (POV)
Search Help Concepts
Overview Input Help Mechanisms
Migrating Existing Input Help
Assigning Number Range Numbers Unit 50
Objectives
Overview
Number Range Objects
Number Range Intervals
Sub-objects
Assigning Internal Numbers
Checking External Numbers
Number Range Information
Accessing Table NRIV 1 Without a Buffer Accessing Table NRIV 2 Without a Buffer
Buffering Number Ranges
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2734
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-27
Using Function Groups to Administer Number Ranges
Summary 1
Summary 2
Creating Change Documents Unit 51
ObjectivesOverview
Change Document Structure
Change Relevance
Change Document Objects
Generating Update Programs
INCLUDE Program Structure
Application Program
Change Document Objects and Internal Tables
Reading Change Documents
Using Function Groups to Edit Change Documents
Summary (1)
Summary (2)
Appendix Unit 52
Documentation ReferencesGlossary Index
I n t e r f a c e s f o r D a t a T r a n s f e r
Interfaces for Data Transfer Unit 53
Content
Data Transfer
Objectives
Data Transfer
Transferring Data Into the R3 System
Direct Data Transfer
Data Transfer Using Interfaces
Data Transfer Workbench
Data Analysis
Data Transfer
Analyzing the SAP Transaction
Assigning DataFormat Conversion
Transferring Legacy Data into the R3 System
Data Transfer Methods
Knowledge Tools
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer
Data Analysis and Formatting Unit 54
Data Analysis - Objectives
Data Analysis and Formatting
Standard Transfer Interfaces for Standard Transfer
Standard Transfer - Tasks
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2834
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-28
IMG Documentation
Data Transfer Workbench (DTW)
Documentation in the DTW
Data Analysis and Formatting
Record Layout Types
FB01 Record Layout StructureSample Data for Record Layouts
Generating Test Data in the DTW
Data Analysis and Formatting
Translating Data
Translating Data in the Legacy System
Generating SAP Structures in the DTW
Translating Data in the R3 System
Translating Data Types
Translating Data for Transaction FB01
Translating Data - Example
Translating Data Using EXCEL
Data Analysis and Formatting
Initializing Record Layouts
Initializing Record Layouts - Example
Filling Record Layouts
Structure of Transaction FB01
Mapping Data in Transaction FB01
Filling Record Layout BGR00 - Example
Data Analysis and Formatting
Additional Tasks
Converting Data
Converting Legacy System R3 System Data
Structure of a Conversion ProgramData Analysis - Summary
Exercises for Unit Data AnalysisSolutions to Unit Data Analysis
Files in the R3 System Unit 55
Objectives
Files in the R3 System
R3 Client Server Architecture
Transferring Files
Files in the R3 System
Processing FilesOpening Files
Opening Files - Options
Binary Mode and Text Mode
Transferring Data Records
Reading Data Records
Closing Deleting a Sequential File
Filling Record Layouts for Transaction FB01 (1)
Filling Record Layouts for Transaction FB01 (2)
Sequential Files - Summary
Files in the R3 System
DOWNLOAD and UPLOADFunction Module rsquoDOWNLOADrsquo
Example Program DOWNLOAD
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2934
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-29
Function Module rsquoUPLOADrsquo
Example Program UPLOAD
Summary
Exercises for Unit Files in the R3 SystemSolutions to Unit Files in the R3 System
Data Transfer Workbench Unit 56
Data Transfer - Objectives
Data Transfer Workbench
Preparing the Data Transfer
Testing and Executing the Data Transfer
Direct Input Management
Scheduling Direct Input
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer WorkbenchSolutions to Unit Data Transfer Workbench
Batch Input Sessions Unit 57
Objectives
Batch Input Sessions
Batch Input Processing
Batch Input Program
Format of a Batch Input Session
Creating Batch Input Sessions
Function Modules for Batch Input Programs
Structure of the BDC Table
Batch Input Processing
Batch Input Sessions
Batch Input Monitor - FunctionsSession Status
Processing Modes
Entering Data into Screens
Batch Input Processing
Session Statistics
Session Log
Summary
Exercises for Unit Batch Input SessionsSolutions to Unit Batch Input Sessions
Data Transfer Programs Unit 58Objectives
Data Transfer Programs
Customer Transfer Programs
Customer Transfer Program - Tasks
Data Transfer Programs
Batch Input Program Elements
Defining BDC Tables
Structure of the BDC Table
Determining Field Names
Determining Field Names with the Screen Painter
Structure DefinitionFunction Modules for a Batch Input Program
Function Module BDC_OPEN_GROUP
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3034
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-30
Function Module BDC_INSERT
Function Module BDC_CLOSE_GROUP
Structure of a Batch Input Program
Batch Input Program - Overview (I)
Batch Input Program - Overview (II)
Subroutine generate_bdc_dataProgram BDCRECXX (I)
Program BDCRECXX (II)
Program BDCRECXX (III)
Data Transfer Programs
Batch Input Recorder
Batch Input Recording
Recording the First Screen
Recording the Second Screen
Additional Screens Saving
Ending the Recording
Generating Sessions and Programs
Generating Batch Input Sessions
Structure of the Generated Program
Enhancing the Generated Program
Data Transfer Programs
Overview
Call Transaction Program
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (I)
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (II)
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (III)
Displaying the Messtab
Technical Implementation
Return Codes and System FieldsSystem Field Message Output
Generating Sessions When Errors Occur
Summary
Overview
Structure of a Data Transfer Program
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer ProgramSolutions to Unit Data Transfer Program
Additional Techniques Unit 59
ObjectivesAdditional Techniques - Overview
Changing Customers - Payment Transactions
Step Loop Field Names
Structure of the BDC Table
Filling BDC Tables in ABAP
Additional Techniques
Overview - Special Fields
Setting the Cursor in the Batch Input Session
Setting the Cursor in the ABAP Program
Additional Techniques
Successful Transaction EndAdditional Techniques
Processing Batch Input Sessions
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-31
Batch Input Flow
Additional Techniques
Program RSBDCSUB
Batch Input Authorizations
Service Programs
Summary Exercises for Unit Additional TechniquesSolutions for Unit Additional Techniques
Tips amp Tricks Unit 60
Tips and Tricks - Objectives
OSS Notes
Parallel Processing
Resetting Rollback Segments
Additional Tips and Information
Summary
Appendix Unit 61
Job Structure
Scheduling Jobs
Job Distribution
SAP-LUW Chronological Update
Update Principles
Asynchronous Update
Synchronous Update
Local Update
E n h a n c e m e n t s a n d M o d i f i c a t i o n s
Enhancements and Modifications Unit 62
Content
Introduction Contents
Course Overview Diagram
Main Business Scenario
Modifications Unit 63
Objectives
Modifications
What are modifications
Modifications and Upgrades
Modifications
Copying SAP Objects
Making Changes to SAP Copies (Modifications)
Registering Modifications in SSCR
Carrying Out a Registered Modification
Versions
Naming Conventions for Repository Objects
Modifications
Modifications Critical Success Factors (1)
Modifications Critical Success Factors (2)Modifications Critical Success Factors (3)
Documenting Modifications in Programs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-32
Modification Logs An Example
Modifications
Modification Adjustment SPDD and SPAU
Modification Adjustment Objects
Transaction SPAU (Process After Upgrade)
Transporting Adjustments between SystemsThe amount of work necessary at upgrade increases
Modifications Critical Repository Objects
Avoiding Adjustments
Modifications
User Exits
User Exits An Example
Using User Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Modifications
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Unit 64
Objectives
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Table Enhancements Overview
Append Structures
Append Structures at Upgrade
Customizing Includes
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Global Enhancements
Field Exits
Global and Local Field Exits
Creating Field Exits
Enhancements to Dictionary ElementsText Enhancements
Editing Text Enhancements
Keywords
Keyword Change Requirements
Keyword Changes and Release Upgrades
Restoring SAP Keywords
Enhanced Documentation for Data Elements
Customer Documentation
Summary Text Enhancements
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Solutions for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Enhancements using Customer Exits Unit 65
Objectives
Enhancements using Customer Exits
SAP Application Enhancements
Customer Enhancement Projects
SAP Enhancements and Customer Enhancement Projects
Enhancements using Customer Exits
The SAP Enhancement Creation Procedure
Implementing Enhancements in Customer SystemsCreating Customer Enhancement Projects
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-33
Editing Components
Activating Enhancement Projects
Transporting Projects
Summary Enhancement Management
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Function Module ExitsCalling and Creating Function Modules
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Organization of an X Function Group
Customer Source Code
Global Data SAP and the Customer
Subroutines Modules SAP and the Customer
Customer Screens
Customer Screens Modules
Summary Function Module Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Menu Exits
Menu Exit Requirements
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Menu Exits and Function Module Exits
Summary Menu Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Screen Exits
Subscreens in the R3 System
Calling Subscreens
Defining Screen Exits
Calling Customer Subscreens
Transporting Data to Subscreens
Transporting Data from SubscreensEditing Subscreens (1)
Editing Subscreens (2)
Summary Screen Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits Solutions for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits
Business Transaction Events Unit 66
Objectives
Business Transaction Events (BTE)
BTE Possible Scenarios (1)BTE Possible Scenarios (2)
Publish amp Subscribe vs Process Interfaces
Business Transaction Events SAP and the Customer
Finding Business Transaction Events
Creating a Publish amp Subscribe Interface
Differences between Customer Exits and BTEs
Summary
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3434
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 834
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-8
Exercises for Unit ABAP Open SQL Solutions for Unit ABAP Open SQL
ABAP Data and Statements Contents Unit 8
Objectives
The R3 ClientServer ArchitectureThe ABAP Type Concept
Defining Data Objects Overview
Data Types
Predefined Data Types
Elementary Data Objects
Structures
Internal Tables
Referring to ABAP Dictionary Objects
Type Groups in the ABAP Dictionary
PARAMETERS and TABLES
Literals and Constants
Text Symbols
Summary of Declarative Statements
Initializing Data Objects
Assigning Values
Assigning Values Field for Field
Type Conversion
Conversion Rules for Elementary Types
Conversion Rules for Structure Types
Calculating Values
Sub-fields
Calculating Dates
Control Statements OverviewLogical Expressions
Case Distinctions
DO and WHILE Loops
CHECK and EXIT
Summary
Summary (2)
Exercises for Unit ABAP Data and Statements Solutions for Unit ABAP Data and Statements
Test Tools Contents Unit 9
Test Tools Unit ObjectivesTest Tools
Debugging
Important Debugging Functions I
Important Debugging Functions II
Debugger Overview
Breakpoints
Advanced Techniques Runtime Analysis
Advanced Techniques SQL Trace
Advanced Techniques Computer Aided Test Tool
Summary
Internal Tables Contents Unit 10
Internal Tables Objectives
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 934
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-9
The R3 ClientServer Architecture
Internal Tables
Dynamic Table Expansion
Table Attributes Line Type
Keys
Data Access QuantitiesData Access Types
Table Types
Internal Table Work Areas
Defining Internal Tables
Filling Internal Tables
Array Fetch
Sorting an Internal Table
Loop Processing in Internal Tables
Accessing Individual Internal Table Entries
Changing an Internal Table with the Index
Changing an Internal Table with Keys
Deleting an Internal Table
Internal Tables withwithout Header Lines
Control Level Processing
Internal Tables Summary 1
Internal Tables Summary 2
Exercises for Unit Internal Tables Solutions for Unit Internal Tables
Modularization and Program Structure Unit 11
Objectives
Modularization and Program Structure
Structure of an ABAP ProgramStructure of Earlier Programs from the Course
Processing Block Types
Modularization and Program Structure
Event Blocks
Events in Executable Programs (Type 1)
Syntax Event Blocks
Modularization and Program Structure
Subroutines
Defining Subroutines
Defining the Interface
Data VisibilityCalling Subroutines
Calling Subroutines Syntax
Interface Parameters Structures
Interface Parameters Internal Tables
Modularization and Program Structure
Function Modules as Processing Blocks
Calling Function Modules
Creating a Function Group
Creating a Function Module
Elements of a Function Module
Interface Import ParametersException Handling
Function Module Source Code
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1034
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-10
Documentation and Testing
Calling Function Modules
Catching Exceptions
Central Role of Function Modules
Modularization and Program Structure
Includes Type I ProgramsTOP Includes
Standard Includes for Function Groups
Function Modules Summary
Exercises for Unit Modularization and Structure Solutions for Unit Modularization and Program Structure
Dialogs Contents Unit 12
Dialogs Unit Objectives
Dialogs
The R3 ClientServer Architecture
Overview
User Dialogs
Dialogs - Lists
Lists
List Operations
Page Headers
Multilingual Capability
ColorsIconsSymbols in Lists
Lists in Executable Programs
Details Lists
Example A Simple Details List
Syntax A Simple Details List
Details List ExampleHIDE Areas
Line Selection
Line Selection Syntax
Advanced Techniques Lists as Input Tools and Details Lists
Dialogs - Selection Screens
Selection Screens
The Selection Screen
Entering Selections
Search Help
Variants
Selection TextsRecap PARAMETERS
Using Parameters in the SELECT Statement
SELECT-OPTIONS
Using Select-Options in the SELECT Statement
Standard Selection Screens in Executable Programs
Standard Selection Screen Processing
Additional Input Checks
AT SELECTION-SCREEN
Example User-defined Selection Screens
User-defined Selection Screens
Syntax Defining and Calling Selection ScreensDialogs - User Messages
User Messages Overview
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-11
Syntax MESSAGE Statements
Dialog Message Types
Dialogs - Screens
Screens Strengths
Using Screens
Screens an ExampleParts of a Screen
Step 1 Creating a Screen
Creating a Screen Screen Attributes
Layout and Field Attributes 1
Layout and Field Attributes 2
Field Attributes The Field List
Check Tables
Step 2 Displaying Data
Screen Interfaces
Screen Processing Logic PBO and PAI
Screen Processing Blocks
PBO and PAI Processing Logic
Data Transport between Screens and Programs
Flow Logic
Step 3 Defining Pushbuttons
Defining Function Codes
Assigning a Field Name to the OK_CODE Field
Program Logic
Static Screen Sequencing
Dynamic Screen Sequencing
Database Updates
Advanced Techniques Screens
Dialogs - InterfacesOverview Interface Objects
Example Program Interface
Basic Interface Elements
Statuses Interface Views
Creating GUI Statuses for Lists
Creating Statuses Key Settings
Creating Statuses Menu Bars
Example Program Interface
Creating GUI Titles for a Screen
Creating GUI Statuses for a Screen
Title and StatusSummary Interfaces
Summary
Exercises for Unit Dialogs Solutions for Unit Dialogs
Authorization Checks Contents Unit 13
Objectives
Basic Authorization Concepts
Authorization Cehcks in Programs
AUTHORITY-CHECK Syntax
SummaryAuthorization Checks Summary
Exercises for Unit Authorization Checks
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-12
Solutions for Unit Authorization Checks
Software Logistics and Software Modifications Contents Unit 14
Software Logistics and Software Modifications Unit Object
Software Logistics and Software Modification
Workbench Organizer and Transport SystemManaging Development Projects in the WBO
Completing a Project
Functions of a Change Request
Local Objects
Originals and Copies
SAP Objects as Copies
Task Attributes
Changing Customer Copies
Changing SAP Copies (Modifications)
Software Logistics and Software Modification
Change Levels
Functional Enhancements
Enhancing User Dialogs
Enhancements Examples
Registering Developers in the SSCR
Software Logistics and Software Modification Summary
Software Logistics and Software Modifications Summary (II)
Exercises for Unit Software Logistics and Modification
Appendix Unit 15
Repository-Infosystem
Objectives
R3 Repository and Repository-ObjectsTypical Information System Requests
The Repository Information System
The SAP Application Hierarchy
Summary
Summary 2
Foreign Data Transfer
External Data Transfer
R3 Communication Interfaces I
R3 Communication Interfaces II
Termination Conditions 2
Advanced Techniques Dynamic Screen SequencingAdvanced Techniques Update
Appendix 1
Appendix 2
A B A P D i c t i o n a r y
ABAP Dictionary Unit 16
Content
IntroductionObjectives
Functions of the ABAP Dictionary
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-13
Linking to the ABAP Workbench (Active)
Access from ABAP Program
Summary
Tables in the ABAP Dictionary Unit 17
Objectives-Tables in the ABAP DictionaryTables and Fields
Basic Objects of the ABAP Dictionary
Two-Level Domain Concept Example
Transparent Tables
Structures
Technical Settings
Data Class
Size Category
Buffering Tables
Logging
Consistency between ABAP Dictionary and DB
Summary - Tables in the ABAP Dictionary
Exercises on Unit Tables in the ABAP Dictionary nSolutions to Unit Tables in the ABAP Dictionary
Performance during Table Access Unit 18
Objectives - Performance during Table Access
Indexes
Primary Index
Secondary Indexes
Data Access using the Buffer
Table Buffering
Full BufferingGeneric Buffering
Single-Record Buffering
Buffer Synchronization 1
Buffer Synchronization 2
Buffer Synchronization 3
Buffer Synchronization 4
Buffer Synchronization 5
Buffer Synchronization 6
Summary - Performance during Table Access
Exercises on Unit Performance during Table Access
Solutions to Unit Performance during Table Access
Relationships between Tables in the ABAP Dictionary Unit 19
Objectives - Relationships between Tables in the ABAP Dict
Definition of a Foreign Key
Foreign Key Fields Check Fields
Inserting a Data Record
Violation of the Foreign Key Check
Foreign Key Definitions in the Check Field
Requirements for the Field Assignment
Domains Value Tables Fixed Values
Check Table not Equal to Value TableField Assignment is not Unique
Semantic Attributes
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1434
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-14
Text Tables
Generic and Constant Foreign Keys
INCLUDE
Summary (1)
Summary (2)
Exercises on Unit Relationships between Tables nnSolutions to Unit Relationships between Tables m
R3 Repository Info System as seen by ABAP Dictionary Unit 20
Objectives - R3 Repository Information System
Typical Queries Made of the Information System
Selection Options
Functions
Summary (1) - R3 Repository Information System
Exercises on Unit The R3 Repository Information SystemSolutions to Unit The R3 Repository Information System
Changes to Tables Unit 21
Objectives - Changes to Tables
Active and Revised Versions
Runtime Objects
Handling Dependent Objects
Changing Database Tables
How is the Structure Adjusted
Conversion Process 1
Conversion Process 2
Conversion Process 3
Conversion Process 4
Conversion Process 5What to Do when a Conversion Terminates
Append Structures 1
Append Structures 2
Append Structures 3
Summary Changes to Tables
Exercises on Unit Changes to TablesSolutions to Unit Changes to Tables m
Views Unit 22
Objectives - Views
Why do you Need ViewsStructure of a View - Starting Situation
Structure of a View - Join Condition
Structure of a View - Field Selection (Projection)
Structure of a View - Selection Condition
How are Tables Linked to Views
Structure of the View
Data Selection with Views
Database Views
Buffering Database Views
Includes in Database Views
Maintenance ViewsInner and Outer Joins
Summary - Views
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1534
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-15
Exercises on Unit Views mmSolutions to Unit Views
Search Helps Unit 23
Objectives - Search Helps
R3 Standard Function Input HelpDescription of an Input Help
Interface of a Search Help
Description of the Dialog Behavior
Selection Method of a Serach Help
View as Selection Method
Performance of the Input Help
Input Help from the Data Element
Check Table Help
Attaching a Search Help to a Field
Input Help from Dictionary or Screen
Overview Mechanisms for the Input Help
Alternative Search Paths
Collective Search Helps and Elementary Search Helps
Further Options for Search Helps
Non-Standard Search Help Exit
Migration of Existing Input Helps
Summary - Search Helps
Exercises on Unit Search Helps nSolutions to Unit Search Helps nn
Appendix Unit 24
Important Menu Paths and Transactions
Decision Tree for Buffering TablesAppendix
T e c h n i q u e s o f L i s t P r o c e s s i n g
Techniques of List Processing Unit 25
Contents 12
Contents 22
Introduction
Course GoalsCourse Objectives
Course Overview Diagram
Business Scenario
Demo Programs Templates and Solutions
Overview of Exercises
Finding and Executing Programs Unit 26
Objectives
How to Find Existing Programs
SAP Anwendungshierarchie
The Repository Information SystemReport Trees Organization
Finding Report Trees
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1634
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-16
Summary
Creating Lists with ABAP Query Unit 27
Objectives
Creating Lists with ABAP Query
Programs and ABAP QueryABAP Query Organization
Creating Queries
Creating Lists with ABAP Query
Defining Queries
Choosing a Query Area and a Functional Area
Choosing Fields
Assigning Short Descriptions
Defining Local Fields
Basic Lists
Lists with Control Levels
Statistics
Ranked Lists
Interactive Functions - Single-Line Lists
Interactive Functions - Multiple-Line Lists
Saving Lists
Summary
Creating Lists with ABAP Query
Outputting Data to Lists Unit 28
Objectives
List Design Options
Generating a List
Setting the List FormatModifying and Suppressing Headers
Open Page Design TOP-OF-PAGE
Setting Fixed Lead Columns
The FORMAT Statement
Outputting Lines
The WRITE Statement General Syntax
The WRITE Statement Icons and Symbols
The WRITE Statement Checkboxes
Additional Statements for Output Design
Multilingual List Elements
System Fields and List GenerationStandard Functions in Lists
Summary Lists
Exercises for Outputting Data to Lists Solutions for Outputting Data to Lists
Selection Screens Unit 29
Objectives
Selection Screen Overivew
Declaration of Fields with PARAMETERS
Selections with SELECT-OPTIONS
Selection Options and Multiple SelectionsSyntax of the SELECT-OPTIONS Statement
Designing the Selection Screen I
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1734
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-17
Designing the Selection Screen II
Initializing the Selection Screen
General Help and Possible Entries Help (F1 and F4)
Input Checks AT SELECTION-SCREEN
CALL SELECTION-SCREEN I
CALL SELECTION-SCREEN IISelektionsbild Varianten I
Selection Screen Variants II
Summary
Exercises for Selection Screens Solutions for Selection Screens
Logical Databases Unit 30
Objectives
Generating Lists
Advantages of a Logical Database
Logical Databases Overview
LDB F1S Nodes
Sample Program for a Logical Database
LDB Sub-Objects Structure
LDB Sub-Objects Selections
Selection Screen for the Logical Database
Logical Database Dynamic Selections
LDB Sub-Objects Database Programs
Interaction Between LDBs and Programs
Events in Logical Databases
Program Flow and Termination Alternatives
Checking Internal Program Selections I
Checking Internal Program Selections IISummary
Exercises for Logical Databases Solutions for Logical Databases
Programming Data Retrieval Unit 31
Objectives
Programming Data Retrieval
Reading Multiple Database Tables
Reading Multiple Database Tables I
Reading Multiple Database Tables IIa
Reading Multiple Database Tables IIbReading Multiple Database Tables III
Reading Multiple Database Tables IV
Summary
Exercises for Programming Data Retrieval Solutions for Programming Data Retrieval
ABAP Query Administration Unit 32
Objectives
ABAP Query Administration
Maintaining User Groups
Authorizations and ABAP QueryABAP Query Administration
Defining Functional Areas
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1834
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-18
Overview Creating Functional Areas
Example Defining a Functional Area
Defining Functional Areas
Allocating Fields
Additional Information
Allocating Additional TablesAllocating Additional Fields
Selection Options
Allocating ABAP Statements
Summary
Exercises for ABAP Query Administration
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing Unit 33
Unit Objectives Control Level Processing
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Motivation
Control Level Processing
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Creating an Internal Table
Filling an Internal Table
Sorting and Editing an Internal Table
Control Level Processing for Internal Tables
Control Level Processing Schema for Internal Tables
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Generating an Extract Steps
Example Generating an Extract
Sorting and Processing an Extract
Example Control Level Processing
Schema for Control Level Processing of ExtractsData Formatting and Control Level Processing
Comparing Internal Tables and Extracts
Summary Control Level Processing
Exercises for Data Formatting and Control Level Processing Solutions for Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Storing Lists and Background Processing Unit 34
Objectives
Storing Lists and Background Processing
Saving Lists Possibilities
Saving Lists in SAPofficeSaving Lists as PC Files
Saving Lists in a Report Tree
Customizing Report Trees
Functions in Report Trees
Storing Lists and Background Processing
Options for Printing a List
Print Parameters
Program-Controlled Printing
Program-Controlled Printing with GET_PRINT_PARAMETERS
Storing Lists and Background Processing
Background Processing PhasesDefining Steps
Defining Start Times and Releasing Jobs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1934
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-19
Summary
Exercises for Storing Lists and Background Processing Solutions for Storing Lists and Background Processing
Interactive Lists Basics Unit 35
Unit Objectives Interactive ListsInteractive Lists Basics
User Interactions with Lists
Navigating Between Lists
Events Overview
Flow Control in Detail Lists
Creating Detail Lists I
Creating Detail Lists II
Interactive Lists Basics
Questions
HIDE Areas
HIDE Technique Line Selection
Data Buffering in a List System
Valid Line Selection
Field Selection
Interactive Lists Basics
Page Headers in Detail Lists
Interactive Lists Basics
Creating Lists in Modal Dialog Boxes
Summary Interactive Lists
Exercises for Interactive Lists Solutions for Interactive Lists
Creating User Interfaces Unit 36Objectives User Interfaces
User Interfaces Overview
Status Technical View I
Status Technical View II
Creating a GUI Status
Creating a GUI Status Assigning F Keys I
Creating a GUI Status Assigning F Keys II
Creating a GUI Status Menu Bars
Activating Title and Status
Event AT USER-COMMAND
Summary User Interfaces
Special Techniques for Interactive Lists Unit 37
Objectives
Scrolling in Lists
Reading Lists
Modifying Lists
List Navigation
Interactive List Messages
System Fields in Interactive Lists
Summary
Exercises for Creating User Interfaces Solutions for Creating User Interfaces
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2034
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-20
Linking Programs Unit 38
Objectives
Linking Programs
Data Visibility
Data Transfer Using SAP Memory
SETGET ParametersSUBMIT Statement Syntax
Example SUBMIT WITH
Datatransfer Using ABAP Memory
Returning from a Called Program
Summary
Exercises for Linking Programs Solutions for Linking Programs
Lists on the Internet Unit 39
Unit Objectives Special Application
Lists on the Internet
Motivation
The World Wide Web
HTTP Hypertext Transport Protocol
URL Uniform Resource Locator
HTML Hypertext Markup Language
R3 ClientServer Architecture
R3 ClientServer Architecture with ITS
Lists on the Internet
Web Reporting - Overview
Web Reporting Flow
Creating a List Using a URL
Parameters for WWW_GET_REPORTInteractive Lists
Access Authorization
Creating HTML Hyperlinks in Lists
Lists on the Internet
Web Reporting Browser
Releasing Report Trees for the Internet
Summary Special Application
Appendix Unit 40
Menu Data
T r a n s a c t i o n P ro g r a m m i n g
Transaction Programming Unit 41
Content
Introduction Contents
Couse Goal
Course Objectives
Overview Diagram
Main Business Scenario
About the Course Material
Basic Transaction Programming Unit 42
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-21
Objectives - Basics
Components of a Transaction
Writing a Transaction Process
Analyzing the Problem
User Dialogs in the R3 System
Advantages of ScreensComponents of a Screen
Static Screen Sequence
Creating a Screen Attributes
Creating a Screen Layout
Creating a Screen Field List
Writing the Flow Logic
Communictaion Between Screen and ABAP Program
Creating a Transaction Code
Summary Basic Dialog Programming
Screen Objects - List Unit 43
Screen Objects - Objectives
Screen Objects
Screen Objects General Attributes
Attributes of Screen Objects (Key)
Dynamically Modifiable Static Attributes
The System Table SCREEN
Modifying Attributes Dynamically Example
Object Attributes Modification Group
Modifying Attributes Dynamically Program
Screen Objects - Screen
Screen Object Screen
Defining and Managing ScreensScreen Attributes
Dynamic Next Screen Overview
Setting the Next Screen Dynamically
Inserting a Sequence of Screens Dynamically
Calling a Dialog Box Dynamically
Window Coordinates
Setting the Cursor Position Dynamically
Screen Objects - Title Bar
Screen Object Title Bar
Creating and Using Title Bars
Screen Objects - Text FieldScreen Object Text Field
Text Fields Attributes
Creating Text Fields
Hiding Texts Dynamically
Dynamically Modifiable Attributes Text Field
Dynamic Screen Modifications Program
Screen Objects - InputOutput Field
Screen Object InputOutput Field
InputOutput Fields Attributes
Creating InputOutput Fields
InputOutput Fields Automatic Field ChecksInputOutput Fields Default Values in SAP Memory
Defining SETGET Parameter Attributes
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-22
Programming Field Input Checks with an Error Dialog
Checking Groups of Fields
Controlling Error Dialogs
Dialog Message Categories
The FIELD Statement and Data Transport
Calling Modules Conditionally (1)Calling Modules Conditionally (2)
Screen Objects Status icon
Screen Objects Status Icons
Status Icons Attributes
Creating Status Icon Fields
Filling Status Icon Fields
Group Box
Screen Objects Group Boxes
Group Boxes Attributes
Screen Objects Radio Buttons
Screen Objects Radio Buttons and Checkboxes
Radio ButtonsCheckboxes Attributes
Creating a Radio Button Group
Creating a Checkbox
Screen Objects - Pushbutton
Screen Objects Pushbuttons
Pushbuttons Attributes
Creating Pushbuttons
Pushbuttons with Function Type E
Screen Objects - Subscreen
Screen Objects Subscreen (1)
Screen Objects Subscreen (2)
Subscreen AttributesCreating a Subscreen Area
Calling a Subscreen
Subscreens from External Programs
Subscreens Encapsulation in Function Groups
Subscreens in Function Groups Call Sequence
Subscreens in Function Groups Data Transport
Screen Objects - Tabstrip Control
Screen Object Tabstrip Control
Tabstrip Elements
Tab Page Technical View
Tabstrip Controls AttributesCreating a Tabstrip Control
Creating a Tabstrip Control Tabstrip Area
Creating a Tabstip Control Tab Title
Creating a Tabstrip Control Subscreens
Scrolling Locally in a Tabstrip Control
Scrolling Locally in a Tabstrip Control Coding
Scrolling in a Tabstrip Control
Scrolling in a Tabstrip Control Coding
Screen Objects - Table Control
Screen Object Table Control
ABAP Table Control (Functions)Table Control Table Settings
Actions in Table Controls
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-23
Creating Table Control Elements
Table Control Attributes
Creating a Table Control
Creating a Table Control Table Control Area
Creating a Table Control TC Fields (1)
Create Table Control TC Fields (2) Section ColumnTable Control Attributes at Runtime
Table Control Attributes (Structure)
Table Control Elements - Processing
Processing a Table Control (Principle 1)
Filling a Table Control
Changing the Contents of a Table Control
Table Control Applications (Principle)
Filling a Table Control Coding
Changing the Contents of a Table Control 4 Coding
Table Controls Field Transport in the PBO
Table Controls Field Transport in the PAI
Table Control Elements Further Techniques
Changing a Table Control
Changing the Attributes of a Table Control (1)
Changing the Attributes of a Table Control (2)
Table Control Modifying Field Attributes Temporarily
Sorting a Table Control (Example)
Scrolling Page by Page in a Table Control (Example)
Table Control Cursor Position (Example)
Screen Objects - GUI Status
Screen Object GUI Status
Status Technical View (1)
Status Technical View (2)Attributes of Functions
Function Key Settings
Menus and Menu Bars Attributes
Status Attributes
Standard Toolbar Functions and their Reserved function Keys
Creating a Status
Navigation - Targets
Navigation - Dialogs
Screen Objects - List
Screen Objects Lists
Displaying a List Within a TransactionLists in a Modal Dialog Box
Screen Objects - Selection Screen
Screen Object Selection Screen
Entering Value Ranges
Defining and Calling a Selection Screen
Summary Screen Objects
Uumlbung zu Kapitel Screen Objects Solutions Screen Objects Unit
Programming Database Changes Unit 44
Unit ObjectivesProgramming Database Changes
Statements for Database Dialogs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2434
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-24
SAP LUW
Database LUW
SAP R3 System 3-tier Architecture
System Architecture Implicit DB COMMIT
Objective Bundling the DB Changes in an SAP LUW
Programming Database ChangesBundling Techniques Overview
Bunding Using Delayed Inline Changes
Bundling Using Subroutines
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundline Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Techniques
Update Function modules
V1 and V2 Update Function Modules
Logging Records for Update
Deleting Update Entries Rollback in the Dialog Program
Rollback in the Update Program
Asynchronous Update
What Happens in a Commit Work
Comparison of Bundling Techniques
Programming Database Updates
Why Set Locks
Database Locks
SAP Locking Concept
Setting Logical Locks
SAP Lock ObjectsENQUEUE and DEQUEUE Function Modules
Calling the Function Modules
The Lock Table
Validity of Locks Scope = 2
Programming Database Updates
SAP Authorization Concept
Authorization Checks
User Master Record Authorizations
Authorization Checks for Transactions
Summary
Exercises Programming Database Updates Unit Solutions Programming Database Updates Unit
Complex Transactions Unit 45
Unit Objectives
Complex Transactions
Synchronous Calls Overview
Calling a Report Program
Calling a Transaction
Encapsulating Dialogs in Function Modules
Synchronous Program Calls Main Memory Contents
Complex TransactionsAsynchronous Calls
Calling Programs Asynchronously
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2534
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-25
Complex Transactions
Passing Data Overview
Passing Data Using the Interface of ABAP Programs
The WITH Addition in the SUBMIT Statement
Memory Areas Logical Model
ABAP MemoryPassing Parameters using the SAP Memory
Passing Parameters (SAP Memory)
Complex Transactions
Synchronous Program Calls SAP LUWs
Asynchronous Program Calls SAP LUWs
Program Calls Visible Data and LUWs
Complex Transactions
RFC Scenario R3 - R3
Enabling Function Modules for RFC
RFC Using ABAP Function Modules
Program Context of a Remote Function
RFC Calls System Exceptions
Complex Transactions
Remote Function Call Overview
Process Diagram Synchronous RFC
Process Diagram Asynchronous RFC
Process Diagram Transactional RFC
Transactional RFC (tRFC) Introduction
tRFC Properties
Complex Transactions
Lock Entries for Local Program Calls
Lock Entries for RFC Calls
Summary Exercises Complex Transactions Unit Solutions Complex Transactions Unit
Static Attributes in the Screen Painter Unit 46
Screen Attributes (1)
Screen Attributes (2)
General Attributes
Dictionary Attributes
Program Attributes
Display Attributes
Special Attributes for Subscreens and Tabstrip ControlsSpecial Attributes for Table Controls
Database Updates Further Information Unit 47
Objectives
Database Updates Further Information
Asynchronous Update
Synchronous Update
Local Update
SAP LUW Timescale of Updates
Database Updates Further Information
V1 and V2 Update Function ModulesV1 Update
V2 Update
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2634
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-26
Database Updates Further Information
Validity of Locks Scope = 1
Validity of Locks Scope = 2
Validity of Locks Scope = 3
ENQUEUE Function Modules Interface Parameters
Summary
Complex Transactions Further Information Unit 48
CALL TRANSACTION lsquoTA01rsquo and SUBMIT lsquoREP01rsquo AND RETURN
Implicit End of a Program or LEAVE PROGRAM
LEAVE TO TRANSACTION lsquoTA01rsquo
SUBMIT lsquoREP01rsquo
CALL FUNCTION lsquoFUNC1rsquoPERFORM form1 IN PROGRAM program
Help Functions Unit 49
Overview Standard F1 and F4 Functions
The Search Help Concept
Dialog for an Immediate Hit List
Dialog with Preselection
Dialog for Selecting a Search Help
Search Help Concepts
Search Helps
Defining the Dialog Fields
Defining the Data Selection
Collective Search Helps
Search Help Concepts
Linking Search Helps to Screen Fields
Search Help Concepts
Programmed Help Functions OverviewProgrammed F1 and F4 Help
The POH and POV Events Process
Function Modules for Data Transport
Field Transport to and from the Screen
Determining the Contents of Screen Fields ( POV POH )
Placing Values in Screen Fields ( POV )
Special F1 Functions
Displaying Input Values for a Table Field (POV)
Search Help Concepts
Overview Input Help Mechanisms
Migrating Existing Input Help
Assigning Number Range Numbers Unit 50
Objectives
Overview
Number Range Objects
Number Range Intervals
Sub-objects
Assigning Internal Numbers
Checking External Numbers
Number Range Information
Accessing Table NRIV 1 Without a Buffer Accessing Table NRIV 2 Without a Buffer
Buffering Number Ranges
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2734
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-27
Using Function Groups to Administer Number Ranges
Summary 1
Summary 2
Creating Change Documents Unit 51
ObjectivesOverview
Change Document Structure
Change Relevance
Change Document Objects
Generating Update Programs
INCLUDE Program Structure
Application Program
Change Document Objects and Internal Tables
Reading Change Documents
Using Function Groups to Edit Change Documents
Summary (1)
Summary (2)
Appendix Unit 52
Documentation ReferencesGlossary Index
I n t e r f a c e s f o r D a t a T r a n s f e r
Interfaces for Data Transfer Unit 53
Content
Data Transfer
Objectives
Data Transfer
Transferring Data Into the R3 System
Direct Data Transfer
Data Transfer Using Interfaces
Data Transfer Workbench
Data Analysis
Data Transfer
Analyzing the SAP Transaction
Assigning DataFormat Conversion
Transferring Legacy Data into the R3 System
Data Transfer Methods
Knowledge Tools
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer
Data Analysis and Formatting Unit 54
Data Analysis - Objectives
Data Analysis and Formatting
Standard Transfer Interfaces for Standard Transfer
Standard Transfer - Tasks
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2834
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-28
IMG Documentation
Data Transfer Workbench (DTW)
Documentation in the DTW
Data Analysis and Formatting
Record Layout Types
FB01 Record Layout StructureSample Data for Record Layouts
Generating Test Data in the DTW
Data Analysis and Formatting
Translating Data
Translating Data in the Legacy System
Generating SAP Structures in the DTW
Translating Data in the R3 System
Translating Data Types
Translating Data for Transaction FB01
Translating Data - Example
Translating Data Using EXCEL
Data Analysis and Formatting
Initializing Record Layouts
Initializing Record Layouts - Example
Filling Record Layouts
Structure of Transaction FB01
Mapping Data in Transaction FB01
Filling Record Layout BGR00 - Example
Data Analysis and Formatting
Additional Tasks
Converting Data
Converting Legacy System R3 System Data
Structure of a Conversion ProgramData Analysis - Summary
Exercises for Unit Data AnalysisSolutions to Unit Data Analysis
Files in the R3 System Unit 55
Objectives
Files in the R3 System
R3 Client Server Architecture
Transferring Files
Files in the R3 System
Processing FilesOpening Files
Opening Files - Options
Binary Mode and Text Mode
Transferring Data Records
Reading Data Records
Closing Deleting a Sequential File
Filling Record Layouts for Transaction FB01 (1)
Filling Record Layouts for Transaction FB01 (2)
Sequential Files - Summary
Files in the R3 System
DOWNLOAD and UPLOADFunction Module rsquoDOWNLOADrsquo
Example Program DOWNLOAD
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2934
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-29
Function Module rsquoUPLOADrsquo
Example Program UPLOAD
Summary
Exercises for Unit Files in the R3 SystemSolutions to Unit Files in the R3 System
Data Transfer Workbench Unit 56
Data Transfer - Objectives
Data Transfer Workbench
Preparing the Data Transfer
Testing and Executing the Data Transfer
Direct Input Management
Scheduling Direct Input
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer WorkbenchSolutions to Unit Data Transfer Workbench
Batch Input Sessions Unit 57
Objectives
Batch Input Sessions
Batch Input Processing
Batch Input Program
Format of a Batch Input Session
Creating Batch Input Sessions
Function Modules for Batch Input Programs
Structure of the BDC Table
Batch Input Processing
Batch Input Sessions
Batch Input Monitor - FunctionsSession Status
Processing Modes
Entering Data into Screens
Batch Input Processing
Session Statistics
Session Log
Summary
Exercises for Unit Batch Input SessionsSolutions to Unit Batch Input Sessions
Data Transfer Programs Unit 58Objectives
Data Transfer Programs
Customer Transfer Programs
Customer Transfer Program - Tasks
Data Transfer Programs
Batch Input Program Elements
Defining BDC Tables
Structure of the BDC Table
Determining Field Names
Determining Field Names with the Screen Painter
Structure DefinitionFunction Modules for a Batch Input Program
Function Module BDC_OPEN_GROUP
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3034
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-30
Function Module BDC_INSERT
Function Module BDC_CLOSE_GROUP
Structure of a Batch Input Program
Batch Input Program - Overview (I)
Batch Input Program - Overview (II)
Subroutine generate_bdc_dataProgram BDCRECXX (I)
Program BDCRECXX (II)
Program BDCRECXX (III)
Data Transfer Programs
Batch Input Recorder
Batch Input Recording
Recording the First Screen
Recording the Second Screen
Additional Screens Saving
Ending the Recording
Generating Sessions and Programs
Generating Batch Input Sessions
Structure of the Generated Program
Enhancing the Generated Program
Data Transfer Programs
Overview
Call Transaction Program
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (I)
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (II)
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (III)
Displaying the Messtab
Technical Implementation
Return Codes and System FieldsSystem Field Message Output
Generating Sessions When Errors Occur
Summary
Overview
Structure of a Data Transfer Program
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer ProgramSolutions to Unit Data Transfer Program
Additional Techniques Unit 59
ObjectivesAdditional Techniques - Overview
Changing Customers - Payment Transactions
Step Loop Field Names
Structure of the BDC Table
Filling BDC Tables in ABAP
Additional Techniques
Overview - Special Fields
Setting the Cursor in the Batch Input Session
Setting the Cursor in the ABAP Program
Additional Techniques
Successful Transaction EndAdditional Techniques
Processing Batch Input Sessions
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-31
Batch Input Flow
Additional Techniques
Program RSBDCSUB
Batch Input Authorizations
Service Programs
Summary Exercises for Unit Additional TechniquesSolutions for Unit Additional Techniques
Tips amp Tricks Unit 60
Tips and Tricks - Objectives
OSS Notes
Parallel Processing
Resetting Rollback Segments
Additional Tips and Information
Summary
Appendix Unit 61
Job Structure
Scheduling Jobs
Job Distribution
SAP-LUW Chronological Update
Update Principles
Asynchronous Update
Synchronous Update
Local Update
E n h a n c e m e n t s a n d M o d i f i c a t i o n s
Enhancements and Modifications Unit 62
Content
Introduction Contents
Course Overview Diagram
Main Business Scenario
Modifications Unit 63
Objectives
Modifications
What are modifications
Modifications and Upgrades
Modifications
Copying SAP Objects
Making Changes to SAP Copies (Modifications)
Registering Modifications in SSCR
Carrying Out a Registered Modification
Versions
Naming Conventions for Repository Objects
Modifications
Modifications Critical Success Factors (1)
Modifications Critical Success Factors (2)Modifications Critical Success Factors (3)
Documenting Modifications in Programs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-32
Modification Logs An Example
Modifications
Modification Adjustment SPDD and SPAU
Modification Adjustment Objects
Transaction SPAU (Process After Upgrade)
Transporting Adjustments between SystemsThe amount of work necessary at upgrade increases
Modifications Critical Repository Objects
Avoiding Adjustments
Modifications
User Exits
User Exits An Example
Using User Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Modifications
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Unit 64
Objectives
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Table Enhancements Overview
Append Structures
Append Structures at Upgrade
Customizing Includes
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Global Enhancements
Field Exits
Global and Local Field Exits
Creating Field Exits
Enhancements to Dictionary ElementsText Enhancements
Editing Text Enhancements
Keywords
Keyword Change Requirements
Keyword Changes and Release Upgrades
Restoring SAP Keywords
Enhanced Documentation for Data Elements
Customer Documentation
Summary Text Enhancements
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Solutions for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Enhancements using Customer Exits Unit 65
Objectives
Enhancements using Customer Exits
SAP Application Enhancements
Customer Enhancement Projects
SAP Enhancements and Customer Enhancement Projects
Enhancements using Customer Exits
The SAP Enhancement Creation Procedure
Implementing Enhancements in Customer SystemsCreating Customer Enhancement Projects
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-33
Editing Components
Activating Enhancement Projects
Transporting Projects
Summary Enhancement Management
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Function Module ExitsCalling and Creating Function Modules
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Organization of an X Function Group
Customer Source Code
Global Data SAP and the Customer
Subroutines Modules SAP and the Customer
Customer Screens
Customer Screens Modules
Summary Function Module Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Menu Exits
Menu Exit Requirements
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Menu Exits and Function Module Exits
Summary Menu Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Screen Exits
Subscreens in the R3 System
Calling Subscreens
Defining Screen Exits
Calling Customer Subscreens
Transporting Data to Subscreens
Transporting Data from SubscreensEditing Subscreens (1)
Editing Subscreens (2)
Summary Screen Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits Solutions for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits
Business Transaction Events Unit 66
Objectives
Business Transaction Events (BTE)
BTE Possible Scenarios (1)BTE Possible Scenarios (2)
Publish amp Subscribe vs Process Interfaces
Business Transaction Events SAP and the Customer
Finding Business Transaction Events
Creating a Publish amp Subscribe Interface
Differences between Customer Exits and BTEs
Summary
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3434
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 934
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-9
The R3 ClientServer Architecture
Internal Tables
Dynamic Table Expansion
Table Attributes Line Type
Keys
Data Access QuantitiesData Access Types
Table Types
Internal Table Work Areas
Defining Internal Tables
Filling Internal Tables
Array Fetch
Sorting an Internal Table
Loop Processing in Internal Tables
Accessing Individual Internal Table Entries
Changing an Internal Table with the Index
Changing an Internal Table with Keys
Deleting an Internal Table
Internal Tables withwithout Header Lines
Control Level Processing
Internal Tables Summary 1
Internal Tables Summary 2
Exercises for Unit Internal Tables Solutions for Unit Internal Tables
Modularization and Program Structure Unit 11
Objectives
Modularization and Program Structure
Structure of an ABAP ProgramStructure of Earlier Programs from the Course
Processing Block Types
Modularization and Program Structure
Event Blocks
Events in Executable Programs (Type 1)
Syntax Event Blocks
Modularization and Program Structure
Subroutines
Defining Subroutines
Defining the Interface
Data VisibilityCalling Subroutines
Calling Subroutines Syntax
Interface Parameters Structures
Interface Parameters Internal Tables
Modularization and Program Structure
Function Modules as Processing Blocks
Calling Function Modules
Creating a Function Group
Creating a Function Module
Elements of a Function Module
Interface Import ParametersException Handling
Function Module Source Code
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1034
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-10
Documentation and Testing
Calling Function Modules
Catching Exceptions
Central Role of Function Modules
Modularization and Program Structure
Includes Type I ProgramsTOP Includes
Standard Includes for Function Groups
Function Modules Summary
Exercises for Unit Modularization and Structure Solutions for Unit Modularization and Program Structure
Dialogs Contents Unit 12
Dialogs Unit Objectives
Dialogs
The R3 ClientServer Architecture
Overview
User Dialogs
Dialogs - Lists
Lists
List Operations
Page Headers
Multilingual Capability
ColorsIconsSymbols in Lists
Lists in Executable Programs
Details Lists
Example A Simple Details List
Syntax A Simple Details List
Details List ExampleHIDE Areas
Line Selection
Line Selection Syntax
Advanced Techniques Lists as Input Tools and Details Lists
Dialogs - Selection Screens
Selection Screens
The Selection Screen
Entering Selections
Search Help
Variants
Selection TextsRecap PARAMETERS
Using Parameters in the SELECT Statement
SELECT-OPTIONS
Using Select-Options in the SELECT Statement
Standard Selection Screens in Executable Programs
Standard Selection Screen Processing
Additional Input Checks
AT SELECTION-SCREEN
Example User-defined Selection Screens
User-defined Selection Screens
Syntax Defining and Calling Selection ScreensDialogs - User Messages
User Messages Overview
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-11
Syntax MESSAGE Statements
Dialog Message Types
Dialogs - Screens
Screens Strengths
Using Screens
Screens an ExampleParts of a Screen
Step 1 Creating a Screen
Creating a Screen Screen Attributes
Layout and Field Attributes 1
Layout and Field Attributes 2
Field Attributes The Field List
Check Tables
Step 2 Displaying Data
Screen Interfaces
Screen Processing Logic PBO and PAI
Screen Processing Blocks
PBO and PAI Processing Logic
Data Transport between Screens and Programs
Flow Logic
Step 3 Defining Pushbuttons
Defining Function Codes
Assigning a Field Name to the OK_CODE Field
Program Logic
Static Screen Sequencing
Dynamic Screen Sequencing
Database Updates
Advanced Techniques Screens
Dialogs - InterfacesOverview Interface Objects
Example Program Interface
Basic Interface Elements
Statuses Interface Views
Creating GUI Statuses for Lists
Creating Statuses Key Settings
Creating Statuses Menu Bars
Example Program Interface
Creating GUI Titles for a Screen
Creating GUI Statuses for a Screen
Title and StatusSummary Interfaces
Summary
Exercises for Unit Dialogs Solutions for Unit Dialogs
Authorization Checks Contents Unit 13
Objectives
Basic Authorization Concepts
Authorization Cehcks in Programs
AUTHORITY-CHECK Syntax
SummaryAuthorization Checks Summary
Exercises for Unit Authorization Checks
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-12
Solutions for Unit Authorization Checks
Software Logistics and Software Modifications Contents Unit 14
Software Logistics and Software Modifications Unit Object
Software Logistics and Software Modification
Workbench Organizer and Transport SystemManaging Development Projects in the WBO
Completing a Project
Functions of a Change Request
Local Objects
Originals and Copies
SAP Objects as Copies
Task Attributes
Changing Customer Copies
Changing SAP Copies (Modifications)
Software Logistics and Software Modification
Change Levels
Functional Enhancements
Enhancing User Dialogs
Enhancements Examples
Registering Developers in the SSCR
Software Logistics and Software Modification Summary
Software Logistics and Software Modifications Summary (II)
Exercises for Unit Software Logistics and Modification
Appendix Unit 15
Repository-Infosystem
Objectives
R3 Repository and Repository-ObjectsTypical Information System Requests
The Repository Information System
The SAP Application Hierarchy
Summary
Summary 2
Foreign Data Transfer
External Data Transfer
R3 Communication Interfaces I
R3 Communication Interfaces II
Termination Conditions 2
Advanced Techniques Dynamic Screen SequencingAdvanced Techniques Update
Appendix 1
Appendix 2
A B A P D i c t i o n a r y
ABAP Dictionary Unit 16
Content
IntroductionObjectives
Functions of the ABAP Dictionary
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-13
Linking to the ABAP Workbench (Active)
Access from ABAP Program
Summary
Tables in the ABAP Dictionary Unit 17
Objectives-Tables in the ABAP DictionaryTables and Fields
Basic Objects of the ABAP Dictionary
Two-Level Domain Concept Example
Transparent Tables
Structures
Technical Settings
Data Class
Size Category
Buffering Tables
Logging
Consistency between ABAP Dictionary and DB
Summary - Tables in the ABAP Dictionary
Exercises on Unit Tables in the ABAP Dictionary nSolutions to Unit Tables in the ABAP Dictionary
Performance during Table Access Unit 18
Objectives - Performance during Table Access
Indexes
Primary Index
Secondary Indexes
Data Access using the Buffer
Table Buffering
Full BufferingGeneric Buffering
Single-Record Buffering
Buffer Synchronization 1
Buffer Synchronization 2
Buffer Synchronization 3
Buffer Synchronization 4
Buffer Synchronization 5
Buffer Synchronization 6
Summary - Performance during Table Access
Exercises on Unit Performance during Table Access
Solutions to Unit Performance during Table Access
Relationships between Tables in the ABAP Dictionary Unit 19
Objectives - Relationships between Tables in the ABAP Dict
Definition of a Foreign Key
Foreign Key Fields Check Fields
Inserting a Data Record
Violation of the Foreign Key Check
Foreign Key Definitions in the Check Field
Requirements for the Field Assignment
Domains Value Tables Fixed Values
Check Table not Equal to Value TableField Assignment is not Unique
Semantic Attributes
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1434
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-14
Text Tables
Generic and Constant Foreign Keys
INCLUDE
Summary (1)
Summary (2)
Exercises on Unit Relationships between Tables nnSolutions to Unit Relationships between Tables m
R3 Repository Info System as seen by ABAP Dictionary Unit 20
Objectives - R3 Repository Information System
Typical Queries Made of the Information System
Selection Options
Functions
Summary (1) - R3 Repository Information System
Exercises on Unit The R3 Repository Information SystemSolutions to Unit The R3 Repository Information System
Changes to Tables Unit 21
Objectives - Changes to Tables
Active and Revised Versions
Runtime Objects
Handling Dependent Objects
Changing Database Tables
How is the Structure Adjusted
Conversion Process 1
Conversion Process 2
Conversion Process 3
Conversion Process 4
Conversion Process 5What to Do when a Conversion Terminates
Append Structures 1
Append Structures 2
Append Structures 3
Summary Changes to Tables
Exercises on Unit Changes to TablesSolutions to Unit Changes to Tables m
Views Unit 22
Objectives - Views
Why do you Need ViewsStructure of a View - Starting Situation
Structure of a View - Join Condition
Structure of a View - Field Selection (Projection)
Structure of a View - Selection Condition
How are Tables Linked to Views
Structure of the View
Data Selection with Views
Database Views
Buffering Database Views
Includes in Database Views
Maintenance ViewsInner and Outer Joins
Summary - Views
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1534
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-15
Exercises on Unit Views mmSolutions to Unit Views
Search Helps Unit 23
Objectives - Search Helps
R3 Standard Function Input HelpDescription of an Input Help
Interface of a Search Help
Description of the Dialog Behavior
Selection Method of a Serach Help
View as Selection Method
Performance of the Input Help
Input Help from the Data Element
Check Table Help
Attaching a Search Help to a Field
Input Help from Dictionary or Screen
Overview Mechanisms for the Input Help
Alternative Search Paths
Collective Search Helps and Elementary Search Helps
Further Options for Search Helps
Non-Standard Search Help Exit
Migration of Existing Input Helps
Summary - Search Helps
Exercises on Unit Search Helps nSolutions to Unit Search Helps nn
Appendix Unit 24
Important Menu Paths and Transactions
Decision Tree for Buffering TablesAppendix
T e c h n i q u e s o f L i s t P r o c e s s i n g
Techniques of List Processing Unit 25
Contents 12
Contents 22
Introduction
Course GoalsCourse Objectives
Course Overview Diagram
Business Scenario
Demo Programs Templates and Solutions
Overview of Exercises
Finding and Executing Programs Unit 26
Objectives
How to Find Existing Programs
SAP Anwendungshierarchie
The Repository Information SystemReport Trees Organization
Finding Report Trees
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1634
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-16
Summary
Creating Lists with ABAP Query Unit 27
Objectives
Creating Lists with ABAP Query
Programs and ABAP QueryABAP Query Organization
Creating Queries
Creating Lists with ABAP Query
Defining Queries
Choosing a Query Area and a Functional Area
Choosing Fields
Assigning Short Descriptions
Defining Local Fields
Basic Lists
Lists with Control Levels
Statistics
Ranked Lists
Interactive Functions - Single-Line Lists
Interactive Functions - Multiple-Line Lists
Saving Lists
Summary
Creating Lists with ABAP Query
Outputting Data to Lists Unit 28
Objectives
List Design Options
Generating a List
Setting the List FormatModifying and Suppressing Headers
Open Page Design TOP-OF-PAGE
Setting Fixed Lead Columns
The FORMAT Statement
Outputting Lines
The WRITE Statement General Syntax
The WRITE Statement Icons and Symbols
The WRITE Statement Checkboxes
Additional Statements for Output Design
Multilingual List Elements
System Fields and List GenerationStandard Functions in Lists
Summary Lists
Exercises for Outputting Data to Lists Solutions for Outputting Data to Lists
Selection Screens Unit 29
Objectives
Selection Screen Overivew
Declaration of Fields with PARAMETERS
Selections with SELECT-OPTIONS
Selection Options and Multiple SelectionsSyntax of the SELECT-OPTIONS Statement
Designing the Selection Screen I
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1734
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-17
Designing the Selection Screen II
Initializing the Selection Screen
General Help and Possible Entries Help (F1 and F4)
Input Checks AT SELECTION-SCREEN
CALL SELECTION-SCREEN I
CALL SELECTION-SCREEN IISelektionsbild Varianten I
Selection Screen Variants II
Summary
Exercises for Selection Screens Solutions for Selection Screens
Logical Databases Unit 30
Objectives
Generating Lists
Advantages of a Logical Database
Logical Databases Overview
LDB F1S Nodes
Sample Program for a Logical Database
LDB Sub-Objects Structure
LDB Sub-Objects Selections
Selection Screen for the Logical Database
Logical Database Dynamic Selections
LDB Sub-Objects Database Programs
Interaction Between LDBs and Programs
Events in Logical Databases
Program Flow and Termination Alternatives
Checking Internal Program Selections I
Checking Internal Program Selections IISummary
Exercises for Logical Databases Solutions for Logical Databases
Programming Data Retrieval Unit 31
Objectives
Programming Data Retrieval
Reading Multiple Database Tables
Reading Multiple Database Tables I
Reading Multiple Database Tables IIa
Reading Multiple Database Tables IIbReading Multiple Database Tables III
Reading Multiple Database Tables IV
Summary
Exercises for Programming Data Retrieval Solutions for Programming Data Retrieval
ABAP Query Administration Unit 32
Objectives
ABAP Query Administration
Maintaining User Groups
Authorizations and ABAP QueryABAP Query Administration
Defining Functional Areas
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1834
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-18
Overview Creating Functional Areas
Example Defining a Functional Area
Defining Functional Areas
Allocating Fields
Additional Information
Allocating Additional TablesAllocating Additional Fields
Selection Options
Allocating ABAP Statements
Summary
Exercises for ABAP Query Administration
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing Unit 33
Unit Objectives Control Level Processing
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Motivation
Control Level Processing
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Creating an Internal Table
Filling an Internal Table
Sorting and Editing an Internal Table
Control Level Processing for Internal Tables
Control Level Processing Schema for Internal Tables
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Generating an Extract Steps
Example Generating an Extract
Sorting and Processing an Extract
Example Control Level Processing
Schema for Control Level Processing of ExtractsData Formatting and Control Level Processing
Comparing Internal Tables and Extracts
Summary Control Level Processing
Exercises for Data Formatting and Control Level Processing Solutions for Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Storing Lists and Background Processing Unit 34
Objectives
Storing Lists and Background Processing
Saving Lists Possibilities
Saving Lists in SAPofficeSaving Lists as PC Files
Saving Lists in a Report Tree
Customizing Report Trees
Functions in Report Trees
Storing Lists and Background Processing
Options for Printing a List
Print Parameters
Program-Controlled Printing
Program-Controlled Printing with GET_PRINT_PARAMETERS
Storing Lists and Background Processing
Background Processing PhasesDefining Steps
Defining Start Times and Releasing Jobs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1934
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-19
Summary
Exercises for Storing Lists and Background Processing Solutions for Storing Lists and Background Processing
Interactive Lists Basics Unit 35
Unit Objectives Interactive ListsInteractive Lists Basics
User Interactions with Lists
Navigating Between Lists
Events Overview
Flow Control in Detail Lists
Creating Detail Lists I
Creating Detail Lists II
Interactive Lists Basics
Questions
HIDE Areas
HIDE Technique Line Selection
Data Buffering in a List System
Valid Line Selection
Field Selection
Interactive Lists Basics
Page Headers in Detail Lists
Interactive Lists Basics
Creating Lists in Modal Dialog Boxes
Summary Interactive Lists
Exercises for Interactive Lists Solutions for Interactive Lists
Creating User Interfaces Unit 36Objectives User Interfaces
User Interfaces Overview
Status Technical View I
Status Technical View II
Creating a GUI Status
Creating a GUI Status Assigning F Keys I
Creating a GUI Status Assigning F Keys II
Creating a GUI Status Menu Bars
Activating Title and Status
Event AT USER-COMMAND
Summary User Interfaces
Special Techniques for Interactive Lists Unit 37
Objectives
Scrolling in Lists
Reading Lists
Modifying Lists
List Navigation
Interactive List Messages
System Fields in Interactive Lists
Summary
Exercises for Creating User Interfaces Solutions for Creating User Interfaces
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2034
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-20
Linking Programs Unit 38
Objectives
Linking Programs
Data Visibility
Data Transfer Using SAP Memory
SETGET ParametersSUBMIT Statement Syntax
Example SUBMIT WITH
Datatransfer Using ABAP Memory
Returning from a Called Program
Summary
Exercises for Linking Programs Solutions for Linking Programs
Lists on the Internet Unit 39
Unit Objectives Special Application
Lists on the Internet
Motivation
The World Wide Web
HTTP Hypertext Transport Protocol
URL Uniform Resource Locator
HTML Hypertext Markup Language
R3 ClientServer Architecture
R3 ClientServer Architecture with ITS
Lists on the Internet
Web Reporting - Overview
Web Reporting Flow
Creating a List Using a URL
Parameters for WWW_GET_REPORTInteractive Lists
Access Authorization
Creating HTML Hyperlinks in Lists
Lists on the Internet
Web Reporting Browser
Releasing Report Trees for the Internet
Summary Special Application
Appendix Unit 40
Menu Data
T r a n s a c t i o n P ro g r a m m i n g
Transaction Programming Unit 41
Content
Introduction Contents
Couse Goal
Course Objectives
Overview Diagram
Main Business Scenario
About the Course Material
Basic Transaction Programming Unit 42
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-21
Objectives - Basics
Components of a Transaction
Writing a Transaction Process
Analyzing the Problem
User Dialogs in the R3 System
Advantages of ScreensComponents of a Screen
Static Screen Sequence
Creating a Screen Attributes
Creating a Screen Layout
Creating a Screen Field List
Writing the Flow Logic
Communictaion Between Screen and ABAP Program
Creating a Transaction Code
Summary Basic Dialog Programming
Screen Objects - List Unit 43
Screen Objects - Objectives
Screen Objects
Screen Objects General Attributes
Attributes of Screen Objects (Key)
Dynamically Modifiable Static Attributes
The System Table SCREEN
Modifying Attributes Dynamically Example
Object Attributes Modification Group
Modifying Attributes Dynamically Program
Screen Objects - Screen
Screen Object Screen
Defining and Managing ScreensScreen Attributes
Dynamic Next Screen Overview
Setting the Next Screen Dynamically
Inserting a Sequence of Screens Dynamically
Calling a Dialog Box Dynamically
Window Coordinates
Setting the Cursor Position Dynamically
Screen Objects - Title Bar
Screen Object Title Bar
Creating and Using Title Bars
Screen Objects - Text FieldScreen Object Text Field
Text Fields Attributes
Creating Text Fields
Hiding Texts Dynamically
Dynamically Modifiable Attributes Text Field
Dynamic Screen Modifications Program
Screen Objects - InputOutput Field
Screen Object InputOutput Field
InputOutput Fields Attributes
Creating InputOutput Fields
InputOutput Fields Automatic Field ChecksInputOutput Fields Default Values in SAP Memory
Defining SETGET Parameter Attributes
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-22
Programming Field Input Checks with an Error Dialog
Checking Groups of Fields
Controlling Error Dialogs
Dialog Message Categories
The FIELD Statement and Data Transport
Calling Modules Conditionally (1)Calling Modules Conditionally (2)
Screen Objects Status icon
Screen Objects Status Icons
Status Icons Attributes
Creating Status Icon Fields
Filling Status Icon Fields
Group Box
Screen Objects Group Boxes
Group Boxes Attributes
Screen Objects Radio Buttons
Screen Objects Radio Buttons and Checkboxes
Radio ButtonsCheckboxes Attributes
Creating a Radio Button Group
Creating a Checkbox
Screen Objects - Pushbutton
Screen Objects Pushbuttons
Pushbuttons Attributes
Creating Pushbuttons
Pushbuttons with Function Type E
Screen Objects - Subscreen
Screen Objects Subscreen (1)
Screen Objects Subscreen (2)
Subscreen AttributesCreating a Subscreen Area
Calling a Subscreen
Subscreens from External Programs
Subscreens Encapsulation in Function Groups
Subscreens in Function Groups Call Sequence
Subscreens in Function Groups Data Transport
Screen Objects - Tabstrip Control
Screen Object Tabstrip Control
Tabstrip Elements
Tab Page Technical View
Tabstrip Controls AttributesCreating a Tabstrip Control
Creating a Tabstrip Control Tabstrip Area
Creating a Tabstip Control Tab Title
Creating a Tabstrip Control Subscreens
Scrolling Locally in a Tabstrip Control
Scrolling Locally in a Tabstrip Control Coding
Scrolling in a Tabstrip Control
Scrolling in a Tabstrip Control Coding
Screen Objects - Table Control
Screen Object Table Control
ABAP Table Control (Functions)Table Control Table Settings
Actions in Table Controls
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-23
Creating Table Control Elements
Table Control Attributes
Creating a Table Control
Creating a Table Control Table Control Area
Creating a Table Control TC Fields (1)
Create Table Control TC Fields (2) Section ColumnTable Control Attributes at Runtime
Table Control Attributes (Structure)
Table Control Elements - Processing
Processing a Table Control (Principle 1)
Filling a Table Control
Changing the Contents of a Table Control
Table Control Applications (Principle)
Filling a Table Control Coding
Changing the Contents of a Table Control 4 Coding
Table Controls Field Transport in the PBO
Table Controls Field Transport in the PAI
Table Control Elements Further Techniques
Changing a Table Control
Changing the Attributes of a Table Control (1)
Changing the Attributes of a Table Control (2)
Table Control Modifying Field Attributes Temporarily
Sorting a Table Control (Example)
Scrolling Page by Page in a Table Control (Example)
Table Control Cursor Position (Example)
Screen Objects - GUI Status
Screen Object GUI Status
Status Technical View (1)
Status Technical View (2)Attributes of Functions
Function Key Settings
Menus and Menu Bars Attributes
Status Attributes
Standard Toolbar Functions and their Reserved function Keys
Creating a Status
Navigation - Targets
Navigation - Dialogs
Screen Objects - List
Screen Objects Lists
Displaying a List Within a TransactionLists in a Modal Dialog Box
Screen Objects - Selection Screen
Screen Object Selection Screen
Entering Value Ranges
Defining and Calling a Selection Screen
Summary Screen Objects
Uumlbung zu Kapitel Screen Objects Solutions Screen Objects Unit
Programming Database Changes Unit 44
Unit ObjectivesProgramming Database Changes
Statements for Database Dialogs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2434
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-24
SAP LUW
Database LUW
SAP R3 System 3-tier Architecture
System Architecture Implicit DB COMMIT
Objective Bundling the DB Changes in an SAP LUW
Programming Database ChangesBundling Techniques Overview
Bunding Using Delayed Inline Changes
Bundling Using Subroutines
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundline Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Techniques
Update Function modules
V1 and V2 Update Function Modules
Logging Records for Update
Deleting Update Entries Rollback in the Dialog Program
Rollback in the Update Program
Asynchronous Update
What Happens in a Commit Work
Comparison of Bundling Techniques
Programming Database Updates
Why Set Locks
Database Locks
SAP Locking Concept
Setting Logical Locks
SAP Lock ObjectsENQUEUE and DEQUEUE Function Modules
Calling the Function Modules
The Lock Table
Validity of Locks Scope = 2
Programming Database Updates
SAP Authorization Concept
Authorization Checks
User Master Record Authorizations
Authorization Checks for Transactions
Summary
Exercises Programming Database Updates Unit Solutions Programming Database Updates Unit
Complex Transactions Unit 45
Unit Objectives
Complex Transactions
Synchronous Calls Overview
Calling a Report Program
Calling a Transaction
Encapsulating Dialogs in Function Modules
Synchronous Program Calls Main Memory Contents
Complex TransactionsAsynchronous Calls
Calling Programs Asynchronously
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2534
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-25
Complex Transactions
Passing Data Overview
Passing Data Using the Interface of ABAP Programs
The WITH Addition in the SUBMIT Statement
Memory Areas Logical Model
ABAP MemoryPassing Parameters using the SAP Memory
Passing Parameters (SAP Memory)
Complex Transactions
Synchronous Program Calls SAP LUWs
Asynchronous Program Calls SAP LUWs
Program Calls Visible Data and LUWs
Complex Transactions
RFC Scenario R3 - R3
Enabling Function Modules for RFC
RFC Using ABAP Function Modules
Program Context of a Remote Function
RFC Calls System Exceptions
Complex Transactions
Remote Function Call Overview
Process Diagram Synchronous RFC
Process Diagram Asynchronous RFC
Process Diagram Transactional RFC
Transactional RFC (tRFC) Introduction
tRFC Properties
Complex Transactions
Lock Entries for Local Program Calls
Lock Entries for RFC Calls
Summary Exercises Complex Transactions Unit Solutions Complex Transactions Unit
Static Attributes in the Screen Painter Unit 46
Screen Attributes (1)
Screen Attributes (2)
General Attributes
Dictionary Attributes
Program Attributes
Display Attributes
Special Attributes for Subscreens and Tabstrip ControlsSpecial Attributes for Table Controls
Database Updates Further Information Unit 47
Objectives
Database Updates Further Information
Asynchronous Update
Synchronous Update
Local Update
SAP LUW Timescale of Updates
Database Updates Further Information
V1 and V2 Update Function ModulesV1 Update
V2 Update
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2634
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-26
Database Updates Further Information
Validity of Locks Scope = 1
Validity of Locks Scope = 2
Validity of Locks Scope = 3
ENQUEUE Function Modules Interface Parameters
Summary
Complex Transactions Further Information Unit 48
CALL TRANSACTION lsquoTA01rsquo and SUBMIT lsquoREP01rsquo AND RETURN
Implicit End of a Program or LEAVE PROGRAM
LEAVE TO TRANSACTION lsquoTA01rsquo
SUBMIT lsquoREP01rsquo
CALL FUNCTION lsquoFUNC1rsquoPERFORM form1 IN PROGRAM program
Help Functions Unit 49
Overview Standard F1 and F4 Functions
The Search Help Concept
Dialog for an Immediate Hit List
Dialog with Preselection
Dialog for Selecting a Search Help
Search Help Concepts
Search Helps
Defining the Dialog Fields
Defining the Data Selection
Collective Search Helps
Search Help Concepts
Linking Search Helps to Screen Fields
Search Help Concepts
Programmed Help Functions OverviewProgrammed F1 and F4 Help
The POH and POV Events Process
Function Modules for Data Transport
Field Transport to and from the Screen
Determining the Contents of Screen Fields ( POV POH )
Placing Values in Screen Fields ( POV )
Special F1 Functions
Displaying Input Values for a Table Field (POV)
Search Help Concepts
Overview Input Help Mechanisms
Migrating Existing Input Help
Assigning Number Range Numbers Unit 50
Objectives
Overview
Number Range Objects
Number Range Intervals
Sub-objects
Assigning Internal Numbers
Checking External Numbers
Number Range Information
Accessing Table NRIV 1 Without a Buffer Accessing Table NRIV 2 Without a Buffer
Buffering Number Ranges
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2734
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-27
Using Function Groups to Administer Number Ranges
Summary 1
Summary 2
Creating Change Documents Unit 51
ObjectivesOverview
Change Document Structure
Change Relevance
Change Document Objects
Generating Update Programs
INCLUDE Program Structure
Application Program
Change Document Objects and Internal Tables
Reading Change Documents
Using Function Groups to Edit Change Documents
Summary (1)
Summary (2)
Appendix Unit 52
Documentation ReferencesGlossary Index
I n t e r f a c e s f o r D a t a T r a n s f e r
Interfaces for Data Transfer Unit 53
Content
Data Transfer
Objectives
Data Transfer
Transferring Data Into the R3 System
Direct Data Transfer
Data Transfer Using Interfaces
Data Transfer Workbench
Data Analysis
Data Transfer
Analyzing the SAP Transaction
Assigning DataFormat Conversion
Transferring Legacy Data into the R3 System
Data Transfer Methods
Knowledge Tools
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer
Data Analysis and Formatting Unit 54
Data Analysis - Objectives
Data Analysis and Formatting
Standard Transfer Interfaces for Standard Transfer
Standard Transfer - Tasks
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2834
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-28
IMG Documentation
Data Transfer Workbench (DTW)
Documentation in the DTW
Data Analysis and Formatting
Record Layout Types
FB01 Record Layout StructureSample Data for Record Layouts
Generating Test Data in the DTW
Data Analysis and Formatting
Translating Data
Translating Data in the Legacy System
Generating SAP Structures in the DTW
Translating Data in the R3 System
Translating Data Types
Translating Data for Transaction FB01
Translating Data - Example
Translating Data Using EXCEL
Data Analysis and Formatting
Initializing Record Layouts
Initializing Record Layouts - Example
Filling Record Layouts
Structure of Transaction FB01
Mapping Data in Transaction FB01
Filling Record Layout BGR00 - Example
Data Analysis and Formatting
Additional Tasks
Converting Data
Converting Legacy System R3 System Data
Structure of a Conversion ProgramData Analysis - Summary
Exercises for Unit Data AnalysisSolutions to Unit Data Analysis
Files in the R3 System Unit 55
Objectives
Files in the R3 System
R3 Client Server Architecture
Transferring Files
Files in the R3 System
Processing FilesOpening Files
Opening Files - Options
Binary Mode and Text Mode
Transferring Data Records
Reading Data Records
Closing Deleting a Sequential File
Filling Record Layouts for Transaction FB01 (1)
Filling Record Layouts for Transaction FB01 (2)
Sequential Files - Summary
Files in the R3 System
DOWNLOAD and UPLOADFunction Module rsquoDOWNLOADrsquo
Example Program DOWNLOAD
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2934
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-29
Function Module rsquoUPLOADrsquo
Example Program UPLOAD
Summary
Exercises for Unit Files in the R3 SystemSolutions to Unit Files in the R3 System
Data Transfer Workbench Unit 56
Data Transfer - Objectives
Data Transfer Workbench
Preparing the Data Transfer
Testing and Executing the Data Transfer
Direct Input Management
Scheduling Direct Input
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer WorkbenchSolutions to Unit Data Transfer Workbench
Batch Input Sessions Unit 57
Objectives
Batch Input Sessions
Batch Input Processing
Batch Input Program
Format of a Batch Input Session
Creating Batch Input Sessions
Function Modules for Batch Input Programs
Structure of the BDC Table
Batch Input Processing
Batch Input Sessions
Batch Input Monitor - FunctionsSession Status
Processing Modes
Entering Data into Screens
Batch Input Processing
Session Statistics
Session Log
Summary
Exercises for Unit Batch Input SessionsSolutions to Unit Batch Input Sessions
Data Transfer Programs Unit 58Objectives
Data Transfer Programs
Customer Transfer Programs
Customer Transfer Program - Tasks
Data Transfer Programs
Batch Input Program Elements
Defining BDC Tables
Structure of the BDC Table
Determining Field Names
Determining Field Names with the Screen Painter
Structure DefinitionFunction Modules for a Batch Input Program
Function Module BDC_OPEN_GROUP
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3034
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-30
Function Module BDC_INSERT
Function Module BDC_CLOSE_GROUP
Structure of a Batch Input Program
Batch Input Program - Overview (I)
Batch Input Program - Overview (II)
Subroutine generate_bdc_dataProgram BDCRECXX (I)
Program BDCRECXX (II)
Program BDCRECXX (III)
Data Transfer Programs
Batch Input Recorder
Batch Input Recording
Recording the First Screen
Recording the Second Screen
Additional Screens Saving
Ending the Recording
Generating Sessions and Programs
Generating Batch Input Sessions
Structure of the Generated Program
Enhancing the Generated Program
Data Transfer Programs
Overview
Call Transaction Program
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (I)
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (II)
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (III)
Displaying the Messtab
Technical Implementation
Return Codes and System FieldsSystem Field Message Output
Generating Sessions When Errors Occur
Summary
Overview
Structure of a Data Transfer Program
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer ProgramSolutions to Unit Data Transfer Program
Additional Techniques Unit 59
ObjectivesAdditional Techniques - Overview
Changing Customers - Payment Transactions
Step Loop Field Names
Structure of the BDC Table
Filling BDC Tables in ABAP
Additional Techniques
Overview - Special Fields
Setting the Cursor in the Batch Input Session
Setting the Cursor in the ABAP Program
Additional Techniques
Successful Transaction EndAdditional Techniques
Processing Batch Input Sessions
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-31
Batch Input Flow
Additional Techniques
Program RSBDCSUB
Batch Input Authorizations
Service Programs
Summary Exercises for Unit Additional TechniquesSolutions for Unit Additional Techniques
Tips amp Tricks Unit 60
Tips and Tricks - Objectives
OSS Notes
Parallel Processing
Resetting Rollback Segments
Additional Tips and Information
Summary
Appendix Unit 61
Job Structure
Scheduling Jobs
Job Distribution
SAP-LUW Chronological Update
Update Principles
Asynchronous Update
Synchronous Update
Local Update
E n h a n c e m e n t s a n d M o d i f i c a t i o n s
Enhancements and Modifications Unit 62
Content
Introduction Contents
Course Overview Diagram
Main Business Scenario
Modifications Unit 63
Objectives
Modifications
What are modifications
Modifications and Upgrades
Modifications
Copying SAP Objects
Making Changes to SAP Copies (Modifications)
Registering Modifications in SSCR
Carrying Out a Registered Modification
Versions
Naming Conventions for Repository Objects
Modifications
Modifications Critical Success Factors (1)
Modifications Critical Success Factors (2)Modifications Critical Success Factors (3)
Documenting Modifications in Programs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-32
Modification Logs An Example
Modifications
Modification Adjustment SPDD and SPAU
Modification Adjustment Objects
Transaction SPAU (Process After Upgrade)
Transporting Adjustments between SystemsThe amount of work necessary at upgrade increases
Modifications Critical Repository Objects
Avoiding Adjustments
Modifications
User Exits
User Exits An Example
Using User Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Modifications
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Unit 64
Objectives
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Table Enhancements Overview
Append Structures
Append Structures at Upgrade
Customizing Includes
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Global Enhancements
Field Exits
Global and Local Field Exits
Creating Field Exits
Enhancements to Dictionary ElementsText Enhancements
Editing Text Enhancements
Keywords
Keyword Change Requirements
Keyword Changes and Release Upgrades
Restoring SAP Keywords
Enhanced Documentation for Data Elements
Customer Documentation
Summary Text Enhancements
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Solutions for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Enhancements using Customer Exits Unit 65
Objectives
Enhancements using Customer Exits
SAP Application Enhancements
Customer Enhancement Projects
SAP Enhancements and Customer Enhancement Projects
Enhancements using Customer Exits
The SAP Enhancement Creation Procedure
Implementing Enhancements in Customer SystemsCreating Customer Enhancement Projects
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-33
Editing Components
Activating Enhancement Projects
Transporting Projects
Summary Enhancement Management
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Function Module ExitsCalling and Creating Function Modules
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Organization of an X Function Group
Customer Source Code
Global Data SAP and the Customer
Subroutines Modules SAP and the Customer
Customer Screens
Customer Screens Modules
Summary Function Module Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Menu Exits
Menu Exit Requirements
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Menu Exits and Function Module Exits
Summary Menu Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Screen Exits
Subscreens in the R3 System
Calling Subscreens
Defining Screen Exits
Calling Customer Subscreens
Transporting Data to Subscreens
Transporting Data from SubscreensEditing Subscreens (1)
Editing Subscreens (2)
Summary Screen Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits Solutions for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits
Business Transaction Events Unit 66
Objectives
Business Transaction Events (BTE)
BTE Possible Scenarios (1)BTE Possible Scenarios (2)
Publish amp Subscribe vs Process Interfaces
Business Transaction Events SAP and the Customer
Finding Business Transaction Events
Creating a Publish amp Subscribe Interface
Differences between Customer Exits and BTEs
Summary
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3434
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1034
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-10
Documentation and Testing
Calling Function Modules
Catching Exceptions
Central Role of Function Modules
Modularization and Program Structure
Includes Type I ProgramsTOP Includes
Standard Includes for Function Groups
Function Modules Summary
Exercises for Unit Modularization and Structure Solutions for Unit Modularization and Program Structure
Dialogs Contents Unit 12
Dialogs Unit Objectives
Dialogs
The R3 ClientServer Architecture
Overview
User Dialogs
Dialogs - Lists
Lists
List Operations
Page Headers
Multilingual Capability
ColorsIconsSymbols in Lists
Lists in Executable Programs
Details Lists
Example A Simple Details List
Syntax A Simple Details List
Details List ExampleHIDE Areas
Line Selection
Line Selection Syntax
Advanced Techniques Lists as Input Tools and Details Lists
Dialogs - Selection Screens
Selection Screens
The Selection Screen
Entering Selections
Search Help
Variants
Selection TextsRecap PARAMETERS
Using Parameters in the SELECT Statement
SELECT-OPTIONS
Using Select-Options in the SELECT Statement
Standard Selection Screens in Executable Programs
Standard Selection Screen Processing
Additional Input Checks
AT SELECTION-SCREEN
Example User-defined Selection Screens
User-defined Selection Screens
Syntax Defining and Calling Selection ScreensDialogs - User Messages
User Messages Overview
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-11
Syntax MESSAGE Statements
Dialog Message Types
Dialogs - Screens
Screens Strengths
Using Screens
Screens an ExampleParts of a Screen
Step 1 Creating a Screen
Creating a Screen Screen Attributes
Layout and Field Attributes 1
Layout and Field Attributes 2
Field Attributes The Field List
Check Tables
Step 2 Displaying Data
Screen Interfaces
Screen Processing Logic PBO and PAI
Screen Processing Blocks
PBO and PAI Processing Logic
Data Transport between Screens and Programs
Flow Logic
Step 3 Defining Pushbuttons
Defining Function Codes
Assigning a Field Name to the OK_CODE Field
Program Logic
Static Screen Sequencing
Dynamic Screen Sequencing
Database Updates
Advanced Techniques Screens
Dialogs - InterfacesOverview Interface Objects
Example Program Interface
Basic Interface Elements
Statuses Interface Views
Creating GUI Statuses for Lists
Creating Statuses Key Settings
Creating Statuses Menu Bars
Example Program Interface
Creating GUI Titles for a Screen
Creating GUI Statuses for a Screen
Title and StatusSummary Interfaces
Summary
Exercises for Unit Dialogs Solutions for Unit Dialogs
Authorization Checks Contents Unit 13
Objectives
Basic Authorization Concepts
Authorization Cehcks in Programs
AUTHORITY-CHECK Syntax
SummaryAuthorization Checks Summary
Exercises for Unit Authorization Checks
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-12
Solutions for Unit Authorization Checks
Software Logistics and Software Modifications Contents Unit 14
Software Logistics and Software Modifications Unit Object
Software Logistics and Software Modification
Workbench Organizer and Transport SystemManaging Development Projects in the WBO
Completing a Project
Functions of a Change Request
Local Objects
Originals and Copies
SAP Objects as Copies
Task Attributes
Changing Customer Copies
Changing SAP Copies (Modifications)
Software Logistics and Software Modification
Change Levels
Functional Enhancements
Enhancing User Dialogs
Enhancements Examples
Registering Developers in the SSCR
Software Logistics and Software Modification Summary
Software Logistics and Software Modifications Summary (II)
Exercises for Unit Software Logistics and Modification
Appendix Unit 15
Repository-Infosystem
Objectives
R3 Repository and Repository-ObjectsTypical Information System Requests
The Repository Information System
The SAP Application Hierarchy
Summary
Summary 2
Foreign Data Transfer
External Data Transfer
R3 Communication Interfaces I
R3 Communication Interfaces II
Termination Conditions 2
Advanced Techniques Dynamic Screen SequencingAdvanced Techniques Update
Appendix 1
Appendix 2
A B A P D i c t i o n a r y
ABAP Dictionary Unit 16
Content
IntroductionObjectives
Functions of the ABAP Dictionary
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-13
Linking to the ABAP Workbench (Active)
Access from ABAP Program
Summary
Tables in the ABAP Dictionary Unit 17
Objectives-Tables in the ABAP DictionaryTables and Fields
Basic Objects of the ABAP Dictionary
Two-Level Domain Concept Example
Transparent Tables
Structures
Technical Settings
Data Class
Size Category
Buffering Tables
Logging
Consistency between ABAP Dictionary and DB
Summary - Tables in the ABAP Dictionary
Exercises on Unit Tables in the ABAP Dictionary nSolutions to Unit Tables in the ABAP Dictionary
Performance during Table Access Unit 18
Objectives - Performance during Table Access
Indexes
Primary Index
Secondary Indexes
Data Access using the Buffer
Table Buffering
Full BufferingGeneric Buffering
Single-Record Buffering
Buffer Synchronization 1
Buffer Synchronization 2
Buffer Synchronization 3
Buffer Synchronization 4
Buffer Synchronization 5
Buffer Synchronization 6
Summary - Performance during Table Access
Exercises on Unit Performance during Table Access
Solutions to Unit Performance during Table Access
Relationships between Tables in the ABAP Dictionary Unit 19
Objectives - Relationships between Tables in the ABAP Dict
Definition of a Foreign Key
Foreign Key Fields Check Fields
Inserting a Data Record
Violation of the Foreign Key Check
Foreign Key Definitions in the Check Field
Requirements for the Field Assignment
Domains Value Tables Fixed Values
Check Table not Equal to Value TableField Assignment is not Unique
Semantic Attributes
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1434
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-14
Text Tables
Generic and Constant Foreign Keys
INCLUDE
Summary (1)
Summary (2)
Exercises on Unit Relationships between Tables nnSolutions to Unit Relationships between Tables m
R3 Repository Info System as seen by ABAP Dictionary Unit 20
Objectives - R3 Repository Information System
Typical Queries Made of the Information System
Selection Options
Functions
Summary (1) - R3 Repository Information System
Exercises on Unit The R3 Repository Information SystemSolutions to Unit The R3 Repository Information System
Changes to Tables Unit 21
Objectives - Changes to Tables
Active and Revised Versions
Runtime Objects
Handling Dependent Objects
Changing Database Tables
How is the Structure Adjusted
Conversion Process 1
Conversion Process 2
Conversion Process 3
Conversion Process 4
Conversion Process 5What to Do when a Conversion Terminates
Append Structures 1
Append Structures 2
Append Structures 3
Summary Changes to Tables
Exercises on Unit Changes to TablesSolutions to Unit Changes to Tables m
Views Unit 22
Objectives - Views
Why do you Need ViewsStructure of a View - Starting Situation
Structure of a View - Join Condition
Structure of a View - Field Selection (Projection)
Structure of a View - Selection Condition
How are Tables Linked to Views
Structure of the View
Data Selection with Views
Database Views
Buffering Database Views
Includes in Database Views
Maintenance ViewsInner and Outer Joins
Summary - Views
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1534
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-15
Exercises on Unit Views mmSolutions to Unit Views
Search Helps Unit 23
Objectives - Search Helps
R3 Standard Function Input HelpDescription of an Input Help
Interface of a Search Help
Description of the Dialog Behavior
Selection Method of a Serach Help
View as Selection Method
Performance of the Input Help
Input Help from the Data Element
Check Table Help
Attaching a Search Help to a Field
Input Help from Dictionary or Screen
Overview Mechanisms for the Input Help
Alternative Search Paths
Collective Search Helps and Elementary Search Helps
Further Options for Search Helps
Non-Standard Search Help Exit
Migration of Existing Input Helps
Summary - Search Helps
Exercises on Unit Search Helps nSolutions to Unit Search Helps nn
Appendix Unit 24
Important Menu Paths and Transactions
Decision Tree for Buffering TablesAppendix
T e c h n i q u e s o f L i s t P r o c e s s i n g
Techniques of List Processing Unit 25
Contents 12
Contents 22
Introduction
Course GoalsCourse Objectives
Course Overview Diagram
Business Scenario
Demo Programs Templates and Solutions
Overview of Exercises
Finding and Executing Programs Unit 26
Objectives
How to Find Existing Programs
SAP Anwendungshierarchie
The Repository Information SystemReport Trees Organization
Finding Report Trees
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1634
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-16
Summary
Creating Lists with ABAP Query Unit 27
Objectives
Creating Lists with ABAP Query
Programs and ABAP QueryABAP Query Organization
Creating Queries
Creating Lists with ABAP Query
Defining Queries
Choosing a Query Area and a Functional Area
Choosing Fields
Assigning Short Descriptions
Defining Local Fields
Basic Lists
Lists with Control Levels
Statistics
Ranked Lists
Interactive Functions - Single-Line Lists
Interactive Functions - Multiple-Line Lists
Saving Lists
Summary
Creating Lists with ABAP Query
Outputting Data to Lists Unit 28
Objectives
List Design Options
Generating a List
Setting the List FormatModifying and Suppressing Headers
Open Page Design TOP-OF-PAGE
Setting Fixed Lead Columns
The FORMAT Statement
Outputting Lines
The WRITE Statement General Syntax
The WRITE Statement Icons and Symbols
The WRITE Statement Checkboxes
Additional Statements for Output Design
Multilingual List Elements
System Fields and List GenerationStandard Functions in Lists
Summary Lists
Exercises for Outputting Data to Lists Solutions for Outputting Data to Lists
Selection Screens Unit 29
Objectives
Selection Screen Overivew
Declaration of Fields with PARAMETERS
Selections with SELECT-OPTIONS
Selection Options and Multiple SelectionsSyntax of the SELECT-OPTIONS Statement
Designing the Selection Screen I
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1734
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-17
Designing the Selection Screen II
Initializing the Selection Screen
General Help and Possible Entries Help (F1 and F4)
Input Checks AT SELECTION-SCREEN
CALL SELECTION-SCREEN I
CALL SELECTION-SCREEN IISelektionsbild Varianten I
Selection Screen Variants II
Summary
Exercises for Selection Screens Solutions for Selection Screens
Logical Databases Unit 30
Objectives
Generating Lists
Advantages of a Logical Database
Logical Databases Overview
LDB F1S Nodes
Sample Program for a Logical Database
LDB Sub-Objects Structure
LDB Sub-Objects Selections
Selection Screen for the Logical Database
Logical Database Dynamic Selections
LDB Sub-Objects Database Programs
Interaction Between LDBs and Programs
Events in Logical Databases
Program Flow and Termination Alternatives
Checking Internal Program Selections I
Checking Internal Program Selections IISummary
Exercises for Logical Databases Solutions for Logical Databases
Programming Data Retrieval Unit 31
Objectives
Programming Data Retrieval
Reading Multiple Database Tables
Reading Multiple Database Tables I
Reading Multiple Database Tables IIa
Reading Multiple Database Tables IIbReading Multiple Database Tables III
Reading Multiple Database Tables IV
Summary
Exercises for Programming Data Retrieval Solutions for Programming Data Retrieval
ABAP Query Administration Unit 32
Objectives
ABAP Query Administration
Maintaining User Groups
Authorizations and ABAP QueryABAP Query Administration
Defining Functional Areas
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1834
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-18
Overview Creating Functional Areas
Example Defining a Functional Area
Defining Functional Areas
Allocating Fields
Additional Information
Allocating Additional TablesAllocating Additional Fields
Selection Options
Allocating ABAP Statements
Summary
Exercises for ABAP Query Administration
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing Unit 33
Unit Objectives Control Level Processing
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Motivation
Control Level Processing
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Creating an Internal Table
Filling an Internal Table
Sorting and Editing an Internal Table
Control Level Processing for Internal Tables
Control Level Processing Schema for Internal Tables
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Generating an Extract Steps
Example Generating an Extract
Sorting and Processing an Extract
Example Control Level Processing
Schema for Control Level Processing of ExtractsData Formatting and Control Level Processing
Comparing Internal Tables and Extracts
Summary Control Level Processing
Exercises for Data Formatting and Control Level Processing Solutions for Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Storing Lists and Background Processing Unit 34
Objectives
Storing Lists and Background Processing
Saving Lists Possibilities
Saving Lists in SAPofficeSaving Lists as PC Files
Saving Lists in a Report Tree
Customizing Report Trees
Functions in Report Trees
Storing Lists and Background Processing
Options for Printing a List
Print Parameters
Program-Controlled Printing
Program-Controlled Printing with GET_PRINT_PARAMETERS
Storing Lists and Background Processing
Background Processing PhasesDefining Steps
Defining Start Times and Releasing Jobs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1934
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-19
Summary
Exercises for Storing Lists and Background Processing Solutions for Storing Lists and Background Processing
Interactive Lists Basics Unit 35
Unit Objectives Interactive ListsInteractive Lists Basics
User Interactions with Lists
Navigating Between Lists
Events Overview
Flow Control in Detail Lists
Creating Detail Lists I
Creating Detail Lists II
Interactive Lists Basics
Questions
HIDE Areas
HIDE Technique Line Selection
Data Buffering in a List System
Valid Line Selection
Field Selection
Interactive Lists Basics
Page Headers in Detail Lists
Interactive Lists Basics
Creating Lists in Modal Dialog Boxes
Summary Interactive Lists
Exercises for Interactive Lists Solutions for Interactive Lists
Creating User Interfaces Unit 36Objectives User Interfaces
User Interfaces Overview
Status Technical View I
Status Technical View II
Creating a GUI Status
Creating a GUI Status Assigning F Keys I
Creating a GUI Status Assigning F Keys II
Creating a GUI Status Menu Bars
Activating Title and Status
Event AT USER-COMMAND
Summary User Interfaces
Special Techniques for Interactive Lists Unit 37
Objectives
Scrolling in Lists
Reading Lists
Modifying Lists
List Navigation
Interactive List Messages
System Fields in Interactive Lists
Summary
Exercises for Creating User Interfaces Solutions for Creating User Interfaces
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2034
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-20
Linking Programs Unit 38
Objectives
Linking Programs
Data Visibility
Data Transfer Using SAP Memory
SETGET ParametersSUBMIT Statement Syntax
Example SUBMIT WITH
Datatransfer Using ABAP Memory
Returning from a Called Program
Summary
Exercises for Linking Programs Solutions for Linking Programs
Lists on the Internet Unit 39
Unit Objectives Special Application
Lists on the Internet
Motivation
The World Wide Web
HTTP Hypertext Transport Protocol
URL Uniform Resource Locator
HTML Hypertext Markup Language
R3 ClientServer Architecture
R3 ClientServer Architecture with ITS
Lists on the Internet
Web Reporting - Overview
Web Reporting Flow
Creating a List Using a URL
Parameters for WWW_GET_REPORTInteractive Lists
Access Authorization
Creating HTML Hyperlinks in Lists
Lists on the Internet
Web Reporting Browser
Releasing Report Trees for the Internet
Summary Special Application
Appendix Unit 40
Menu Data
T r a n s a c t i o n P ro g r a m m i n g
Transaction Programming Unit 41
Content
Introduction Contents
Couse Goal
Course Objectives
Overview Diagram
Main Business Scenario
About the Course Material
Basic Transaction Programming Unit 42
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-21
Objectives - Basics
Components of a Transaction
Writing a Transaction Process
Analyzing the Problem
User Dialogs in the R3 System
Advantages of ScreensComponents of a Screen
Static Screen Sequence
Creating a Screen Attributes
Creating a Screen Layout
Creating a Screen Field List
Writing the Flow Logic
Communictaion Between Screen and ABAP Program
Creating a Transaction Code
Summary Basic Dialog Programming
Screen Objects - List Unit 43
Screen Objects - Objectives
Screen Objects
Screen Objects General Attributes
Attributes of Screen Objects (Key)
Dynamically Modifiable Static Attributes
The System Table SCREEN
Modifying Attributes Dynamically Example
Object Attributes Modification Group
Modifying Attributes Dynamically Program
Screen Objects - Screen
Screen Object Screen
Defining and Managing ScreensScreen Attributes
Dynamic Next Screen Overview
Setting the Next Screen Dynamically
Inserting a Sequence of Screens Dynamically
Calling a Dialog Box Dynamically
Window Coordinates
Setting the Cursor Position Dynamically
Screen Objects - Title Bar
Screen Object Title Bar
Creating and Using Title Bars
Screen Objects - Text FieldScreen Object Text Field
Text Fields Attributes
Creating Text Fields
Hiding Texts Dynamically
Dynamically Modifiable Attributes Text Field
Dynamic Screen Modifications Program
Screen Objects - InputOutput Field
Screen Object InputOutput Field
InputOutput Fields Attributes
Creating InputOutput Fields
InputOutput Fields Automatic Field ChecksInputOutput Fields Default Values in SAP Memory
Defining SETGET Parameter Attributes
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-22
Programming Field Input Checks with an Error Dialog
Checking Groups of Fields
Controlling Error Dialogs
Dialog Message Categories
The FIELD Statement and Data Transport
Calling Modules Conditionally (1)Calling Modules Conditionally (2)
Screen Objects Status icon
Screen Objects Status Icons
Status Icons Attributes
Creating Status Icon Fields
Filling Status Icon Fields
Group Box
Screen Objects Group Boxes
Group Boxes Attributes
Screen Objects Radio Buttons
Screen Objects Radio Buttons and Checkboxes
Radio ButtonsCheckboxes Attributes
Creating a Radio Button Group
Creating a Checkbox
Screen Objects - Pushbutton
Screen Objects Pushbuttons
Pushbuttons Attributes
Creating Pushbuttons
Pushbuttons with Function Type E
Screen Objects - Subscreen
Screen Objects Subscreen (1)
Screen Objects Subscreen (2)
Subscreen AttributesCreating a Subscreen Area
Calling a Subscreen
Subscreens from External Programs
Subscreens Encapsulation in Function Groups
Subscreens in Function Groups Call Sequence
Subscreens in Function Groups Data Transport
Screen Objects - Tabstrip Control
Screen Object Tabstrip Control
Tabstrip Elements
Tab Page Technical View
Tabstrip Controls AttributesCreating a Tabstrip Control
Creating a Tabstrip Control Tabstrip Area
Creating a Tabstip Control Tab Title
Creating a Tabstrip Control Subscreens
Scrolling Locally in a Tabstrip Control
Scrolling Locally in a Tabstrip Control Coding
Scrolling in a Tabstrip Control
Scrolling in a Tabstrip Control Coding
Screen Objects - Table Control
Screen Object Table Control
ABAP Table Control (Functions)Table Control Table Settings
Actions in Table Controls
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-23
Creating Table Control Elements
Table Control Attributes
Creating a Table Control
Creating a Table Control Table Control Area
Creating a Table Control TC Fields (1)
Create Table Control TC Fields (2) Section ColumnTable Control Attributes at Runtime
Table Control Attributes (Structure)
Table Control Elements - Processing
Processing a Table Control (Principle 1)
Filling a Table Control
Changing the Contents of a Table Control
Table Control Applications (Principle)
Filling a Table Control Coding
Changing the Contents of a Table Control 4 Coding
Table Controls Field Transport in the PBO
Table Controls Field Transport in the PAI
Table Control Elements Further Techniques
Changing a Table Control
Changing the Attributes of a Table Control (1)
Changing the Attributes of a Table Control (2)
Table Control Modifying Field Attributes Temporarily
Sorting a Table Control (Example)
Scrolling Page by Page in a Table Control (Example)
Table Control Cursor Position (Example)
Screen Objects - GUI Status
Screen Object GUI Status
Status Technical View (1)
Status Technical View (2)Attributes of Functions
Function Key Settings
Menus and Menu Bars Attributes
Status Attributes
Standard Toolbar Functions and their Reserved function Keys
Creating a Status
Navigation - Targets
Navigation - Dialogs
Screen Objects - List
Screen Objects Lists
Displaying a List Within a TransactionLists in a Modal Dialog Box
Screen Objects - Selection Screen
Screen Object Selection Screen
Entering Value Ranges
Defining and Calling a Selection Screen
Summary Screen Objects
Uumlbung zu Kapitel Screen Objects Solutions Screen Objects Unit
Programming Database Changes Unit 44
Unit ObjectivesProgramming Database Changes
Statements for Database Dialogs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2434
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-24
SAP LUW
Database LUW
SAP R3 System 3-tier Architecture
System Architecture Implicit DB COMMIT
Objective Bundling the DB Changes in an SAP LUW
Programming Database ChangesBundling Techniques Overview
Bunding Using Delayed Inline Changes
Bundling Using Subroutines
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundline Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Techniques
Update Function modules
V1 and V2 Update Function Modules
Logging Records for Update
Deleting Update Entries Rollback in the Dialog Program
Rollback in the Update Program
Asynchronous Update
What Happens in a Commit Work
Comparison of Bundling Techniques
Programming Database Updates
Why Set Locks
Database Locks
SAP Locking Concept
Setting Logical Locks
SAP Lock ObjectsENQUEUE and DEQUEUE Function Modules
Calling the Function Modules
The Lock Table
Validity of Locks Scope = 2
Programming Database Updates
SAP Authorization Concept
Authorization Checks
User Master Record Authorizations
Authorization Checks for Transactions
Summary
Exercises Programming Database Updates Unit Solutions Programming Database Updates Unit
Complex Transactions Unit 45
Unit Objectives
Complex Transactions
Synchronous Calls Overview
Calling a Report Program
Calling a Transaction
Encapsulating Dialogs in Function Modules
Synchronous Program Calls Main Memory Contents
Complex TransactionsAsynchronous Calls
Calling Programs Asynchronously
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2534
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-25
Complex Transactions
Passing Data Overview
Passing Data Using the Interface of ABAP Programs
The WITH Addition in the SUBMIT Statement
Memory Areas Logical Model
ABAP MemoryPassing Parameters using the SAP Memory
Passing Parameters (SAP Memory)
Complex Transactions
Synchronous Program Calls SAP LUWs
Asynchronous Program Calls SAP LUWs
Program Calls Visible Data and LUWs
Complex Transactions
RFC Scenario R3 - R3
Enabling Function Modules for RFC
RFC Using ABAP Function Modules
Program Context of a Remote Function
RFC Calls System Exceptions
Complex Transactions
Remote Function Call Overview
Process Diagram Synchronous RFC
Process Diagram Asynchronous RFC
Process Diagram Transactional RFC
Transactional RFC (tRFC) Introduction
tRFC Properties
Complex Transactions
Lock Entries for Local Program Calls
Lock Entries for RFC Calls
Summary Exercises Complex Transactions Unit Solutions Complex Transactions Unit
Static Attributes in the Screen Painter Unit 46
Screen Attributes (1)
Screen Attributes (2)
General Attributes
Dictionary Attributes
Program Attributes
Display Attributes
Special Attributes for Subscreens and Tabstrip ControlsSpecial Attributes for Table Controls
Database Updates Further Information Unit 47
Objectives
Database Updates Further Information
Asynchronous Update
Synchronous Update
Local Update
SAP LUW Timescale of Updates
Database Updates Further Information
V1 and V2 Update Function ModulesV1 Update
V2 Update
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2634
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-26
Database Updates Further Information
Validity of Locks Scope = 1
Validity of Locks Scope = 2
Validity of Locks Scope = 3
ENQUEUE Function Modules Interface Parameters
Summary
Complex Transactions Further Information Unit 48
CALL TRANSACTION lsquoTA01rsquo and SUBMIT lsquoREP01rsquo AND RETURN
Implicit End of a Program or LEAVE PROGRAM
LEAVE TO TRANSACTION lsquoTA01rsquo
SUBMIT lsquoREP01rsquo
CALL FUNCTION lsquoFUNC1rsquoPERFORM form1 IN PROGRAM program
Help Functions Unit 49
Overview Standard F1 and F4 Functions
The Search Help Concept
Dialog for an Immediate Hit List
Dialog with Preselection
Dialog for Selecting a Search Help
Search Help Concepts
Search Helps
Defining the Dialog Fields
Defining the Data Selection
Collective Search Helps
Search Help Concepts
Linking Search Helps to Screen Fields
Search Help Concepts
Programmed Help Functions OverviewProgrammed F1 and F4 Help
The POH and POV Events Process
Function Modules for Data Transport
Field Transport to and from the Screen
Determining the Contents of Screen Fields ( POV POH )
Placing Values in Screen Fields ( POV )
Special F1 Functions
Displaying Input Values for a Table Field (POV)
Search Help Concepts
Overview Input Help Mechanisms
Migrating Existing Input Help
Assigning Number Range Numbers Unit 50
Objectives
Overview
Number Range Objects
Number Range Intervals
Sub-objects
Assigning Internal Numbers
Checking External Numbers
Number Range Information
Accessing Table NRIV 1 Without a Buffer Accessing Table NRIV 2 Without a Buffer
Buffering Number Ranges
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2734
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-27
Using Function Groups to Administer Number Ranges
Summary 1
Summary 2
Creating Change Documents Unit 51
ObjectivesOverview
Change Document Structure
Change Relevance
Change Document Objects
Generating Update Programs
INCLUDE Program Structure
Application Program
Change Document Objects and Internal Tables
Reading Change Documents
Using Function Groups to Edit Change Documents
Summary (1)
Summary (2)
Appendix Unit 52
Documentation ReferencesGlossary Index
I n t e r f a c e s f o r D a t a T r a n s f e r
Interfaces for Data Transfer Unit 53
Content
Data Transfer
Objectives
Data Transfer
Transferring Data Into the R3 System
Direct Data Transfer
Data Transfer Using Interfaces
Data Transfer Workbench
Data Analysis
Data Transfer
Analyzing the SAP Transaction
Assigning DataFormat Conversion
Transferring Legacy Data into the R3 System
Data Transfer Methods
Knowledge Tools
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer
Data Analysis and Formatting Unit 54
Data Analysis - Objectives
Data Analysis and Formatting
Standard Transfer Interfaces for Standard Transfer
Standard Transfer - Tasks
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2834
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-28
IMG Documentation
Data Transfer Workbench (DTW)
Documentation in the DTW
Data Analysis and Formatting
Record Layout Types
FB01 Record Layout StructureSample Data for Record Layouts
Generating Test Data in the DTW
Data Analysis and Formatting
Translating Data
Translating Data in the Legacy System
Generating SAP Structures in the DTW
Translating Data in the R3 System
Translating Data Types
Translating Data for Transaction FB01
Translating Data - Example
Translating Data Using EXCEL
Data Analysis and Formatting
Initializing Record Layouts
Initializing Record Layouts - Example
Filling Record Layouts
Structure of Transaction FB01
Mapping Data in Transaction FB01
Filling Record Layout BGR00 - Example
Data Analysis and Formatting
Additional Tasks
Converting Data
Converting Legacy System R3 System Data
Structure of a Conversion ProgramData Analysis - Summary
Exercises for Unit Data AnalysisSolutions to Unit Data Analysis
Files in the R3 System Unit 55
Objectives
Files in the R3 System
R3 Client Server Architecture
Transferring Files
Files in the R3 System
Processing FilesOpening Files
Opening Files - Options
Binary Mode and Text Mode
Transferring Data Records
Reading Data Records
Closing Deleting a Sequential File
Filling Record Layouts for Transaction FB01 (1)
Filling Record Layouts for Transaction FB01 (2)
Sequential Files - Summary
Files in the R3 System
DOWNLOAD and UPLOADFunction Module rsquoDOWNLOADrsquo
Example Program DOWNLOAD
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2934
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-29
Function Module rsquoUPLOADrsquo
Example Program UPLOAD
Summary
Exercises for Unit Files in the R3 SystemSolutions to Unit Files in the R3 System
Data Transfer Workbench Unit 56
Data Transfer - Objectives
Data Transfer Workbench
Preparing the Data Transfer
Testing and Executing the Data Transfer
Direct Input Management
Scheduling Direct Input
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer WorkbenchSolutions to Unit Data Transfer Workbench
Batch Input Sessions Unit 57
Objectives
Batch Input Sessions
Batch Input Processing
Batch Input Program
Format of a Batch Input Session
Creating Batch Input Sessions
Function Modules for Batch Input Programs
Structure of the BDC Table
Batch Input Processing
Batch Input Sessions
Batch Input Monitor - FunctionsSession Status
Processing Modes
Entering Data into Screens
Batch Input Processing
Session Statistics
Session Log
Summary
Exercises for Unit Batch Input SessionsSolutions to Unit Batch Input Sessions
Data Transfer Programs Unit 58Objectives
Data Transfer Programs
Customer Transfer Programs
Customer Transfer Program - Tasks
Data Transfer Programs
Batch Input Program Elements
Defining BDC Tables
Structure of the BDC Table
Determining Field Names
Determining Field Names with the Screen Painter
Structure DefinitionFunction Modules for a Batch Input Program
Function Module BDC_OPEN_GROUP
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3034
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-30
Function Module BDC_INSERT
Function Module BDC_CLOSE_GROUP
Structure of a Batch Input Program
Batch Input Program - Overview (I)
Batch Input Program - Overview (II)
Subroutine generate_bdc_dataProgram BDCRECXX (I)
Program BDCRECXX (II)
Program BDCRECXX (III)
Data Transfer Programs
Batch Input Recorder
Batch Input Recording
Recording the First Screen
Recording the Second Screen
Additional Screens Saving
Ending the Recording
Generating Sessions and Programs
Generating Batch Input Sessions
Structure of the Generated Program
Enhancing the Generated Program
Data Transfer Programs
Overview
Call Transaction Program
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (I)
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (II)
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (III)
Displaying the Messtab
Technical Implementation
Return Codes and System FieldsSystem Field Message Output
Generating Sessions When Errors Occur
Summary
Overview
Structure of a Data Transfer Program
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer ProgramSolutions to Unit Data Transfer Program
Additional Techniques Unit 59
ObjectivesAdditional Techniques - Overview
Changing Customers - Payment Transactions
Step Loop Field Names
Structure of the BDC Table
Filling BDC Tables in ABAP
Additional Techniques
Overview - Special Fields
Setting the Cursor in the Batch Input Session
Setting the Cursor in the ABAP Program
Additional Techniques
Successful Transaction EndAdditional Techniques
Processing Batch Input Sessions
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-31
Batch Input Flow
Additional Techniques
Program RSBDCSUB
Batch Input Authorizations
Service Programs
Summary Exercises for Unit Additional TechniquesSolutions for Unit Additional Techniques
Tips amp Tricks Unit 60
Tips and Tricks - Objectives
OSS Notes
Parallel Processing
Resetting Rollback Segments
Additional Tips and Information
Summary
Appendix Unit 61
Job Structure
Scheduling Jobs
Job Distribution
SAP-LUW Chronological Update
Update Principles
Asynchronous Update
Synchronous Update
Local Update
E n h a n c e m e n t s a n d M o d i f i c a t i o n s
Enhancements and Modifications Unit 62
Content
Introduction Contents
Course Overview Diagram
Main Business Scenario
Modifications Unit 63
Objectives
Modifications
What are modifications
Modifications and Upgrades
Modifications
Copying SAP Objects
Making Changes to SAP Copies (Modifications)
Registering Modifications in SSCR
Carrying Out a Registered Modification
Versions
Naming Conventions for Repository Objects
Modifications
Modifications Critical Success Factors (1)
Modifications Critical Success Factors (2)Modifications Critical Success Factors (3)
Documenting Modifications in Programs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-32
Modification Logs An Example
Modifications
Modification Adjustment SPDD and SPAU
Modification Adjustment Objects
Transaction SPAU (Process After Upgrade)
Transporting Adjustments between SystemsThe amount of work necessary at upgrade increases
Modifications Critical Repository Objects
Avoiding Adjustments
Modifications
User Exits
User Exits An Example
Using User Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Modifications
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Unit 64
Objectives
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Table Enhancements Overview
Append Structures
Append Structures at Upgrade
Customizing Includes
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Global Enhancements
Field Exits
Global and Local Field Exits
Creating Field Exits
Enhancements to Dictionary ElementsText Enhancements
Editing Text Enhancements
Keywords
Keyword Change Requirements
Keyword Changes and Release Upgrades
Restoring SAP Keywords
Enhanced Documentation for Data Elements
Customer Documentation
Summary Text Enhancements
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Solutions for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Enhancements using Customer Exits Unit 65
Objectives
Enhancements using Customer Exits
SAP Application Enhancements
Customer Enhancement Projects
SAP Enhancements and Customer Enhancement Projects
Enhancements using Customer Exits
The SAP Enhancement Creation Procedure
Implementing Enhancements in Customer SystemsCreating Customer Enhancement Projects
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-33
Editing Components
Activating Enhancement Projects
Transporting Projects
Summary Enhancement Management
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Function Module ExitsCalling and Creating Function Modules
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Organization of an X Function Group
Customer Source Code
Global Data SAP and the Customer
Subroutines Modules SAP and the Customer
Customer Screens
Customer Screens Modules
Summary Function Module Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Menu Exits
Menu Exit Requirements
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Menu Exits and Function Module Exits
Summary Menu Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Screen Exits
Subscreens in the R3 System
Calling Subscreens
Defining Screen Exits
Calling Customer Subscreens
Transporting Data to Subscreens
Transporting Data from SubscreensEditing Subscreens (1)
Editing Subscreens (2)
Summary Screen Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits Solutions for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits
Business Transaction Events Unit 66
Objectives
Business Transaction Events (BTE)
BTE Possible Scenarios (1)BTE Possible Scenarios (2)
Publish amp Subscribe vs Process Interfaces
Business Transaction Events SAP and the Customer
Finding Business Transaction Events
Creating a Publish amp Subscribe Interface
Differences between Customer Exits and BTEs
Summary
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3434
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-11
Syntax MESSAGE Statements
Dialog Message Types
Dialogs - Screens
Screens Strengths
Using Screens
Screens an ExampleParts of a Screen
Step 1 Creating a Screen
Creating a Screen Screen Attributes
Layout and Field Attributes 1
Layout and Field Attributes 2
Field Attributes The Field List
Check Tables
Step 2 Displaying Data
Screen Interfaces
Screen Processing Logic PBO and PAI
Screen Processing Blocks
PBO and PAI Processing Logic
Data Transport between Screens and Programs
Flow Logic
Step 3 Defining Pushbuttons
Defining Function Codes
Assigning a Field Name to the OK_CODE Field
Program Logic
Static Screen Sequencing
Dynamic Screen Sequencing
Database Updates
Advanced Techniques Screens
Dialogs - InterfacesOverview Interface Objects
Example Program Interface
Basic Interface Elements
Statuses Interface Views
Creating GUI Statuses for Lists
Creating Statuses Key Settings
Creating Statuses Menu Bars
Example Program Interface
Creating GUI Titles for a Screen
Creating GUI Statuses for a Screen
Title and StatusSummary Interfaces
Summary
Exercises for Unit Dialogs Solutions for Unit Dialogs
Authorization Checks Contents Unit 13
Objectives
Basic Authorization Concepts
Authorization Cehcks in Programs
AUTHORITY-CHECK Syntax
SummaryAuthorization Checks Summary
Exercises for Unit Authorization Checks
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-12
Solutions for Unit Authorization Checks
Software Logistics and Software Modifications Contents Unit 14
Software Logistics and Software Modifications Unit Object
Software Logistics and Software Modification
Workbench Organizer and Transport SystemManaging Development Projects in the WBO
Completing a Project
Functions of a Change Request
Local Objects
Originals and Copies
SAP Objects as Copies
Task Attributes
Changing Customer Copies
Changing SAP Copies (Modifications)
Software Logistics and Software Modification
Change Levels
Functional Enhancements
Enhancing User Dialogs
Enhancements Examples
Registering Developers in the SSCR
Software Logistics and Software Modification Summary
Software Logistics and Software Modifications Summary (II)
Exercises for Unit Software Logistics and Modification
Appendix Unit 15
Repository-Infosystem
Objectives
R3 Repository and Repository-ObjectsTypical Information System Requests
The Repository Information System
The SAP Application Hierarchy
Summary
Summary 2
Foreign Data Transfer
External Data Transfer
R3 Communication Interfaces I
R3 Communication Interfaces II
Termination Conditions 2
Advanced Techniques Dynamic Screen SequencingAdvanced Techniques Update
Appendix 1
Appendix 2
A B A P D i c t i o n a r y
ABAP Dictionary Unit 16
Content
IntroductionObjectives
Functions of the ABAP Dictionary
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-13
Linking to the ABAP Workbench (Active)
Access from ABAP Program
Summary
Tables in the ABAP Dictionary Unit 17
Objectives-Tables in the ABAP DictionaryTables and Fields
Basic Objects of the ABAP Dictionary
Two-Level Domain Concept Example
Transparent Tables
Structures
Technical Settings
Data Class
Size Category
Buffering Tables
Logging
Consistency between ABAP Dictionary and DB
Summary - Tables in the ABAP Dictionary
Exercises on Unit Tables in the ABAP Dictionary nSolutions to Unit Tables in the ABAP Dictionary
Performance during Table Access Unit 18
Objectives - Performance during Table Access
Indexes
Primary Index
Secondary Indexes
Data Access using the Buffer
Table Buffering
Full BufferingGeneric Buffering
Single-Record Buffering
Buffer Synchronization 1
Buffer Synchronization 2
Buffer Synchronization 3
Buffer Synchronization 4
Buffer Synchronization 5
Buffer Synchronization 6
Summary - Performance during Table Access
Exercises on Unit Performance during Table Access
Solutions to Unit Performance during Table Access
Relationships between Tables in the ABAP Dictionary Unit 19
Objectives - Relationships between Tables in the ABAP Dict
Definition of a Foreign Key
Foreign Key Fields Check Fields
Inserting a Data Record
Violation of the Foreign Key Check
Foreign Key Definitions in the Check Field
Requirements for the Field Assignment
Domains Value Tables Fixed Values
Check Table not Equal to Value TableField Assignment is not Unique
Semantic Attributes
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1434
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-14
Text Tables
Generic and Constant Foreign Keys
INCLUDE
Summary (1)
Summary (2)
Exercises on Unit Relationships between Tables nnSolutions to Unit Relationships between Tables m
R3 Repository Info System as seen by ABAP Dictionary Unit 20
Objectives - R3 Repository Information System
Typical Queries Made of the Information System
Selection Options
Functions
Summary (1) - R3 Repository Information System
Exercises on Unit The R3 Repository Information SystemSolutions to Unit The R3 Repository Information System
Changes to Tables Unit 21
Objectives - Changes to Tables
Active and Revised Versions
Runtime Objects
Handling Dependent Objects
Changing Database Tables
How is the Structure Adjusted
Conversion Process 1
Conversion Process 2
Conversion Process 3
Conversion Process 4
Conversion Process 5What to Do when a Conversion Terminates
Append Structures 1
Append Structures 2
Append Structures 3
Summary Changes to Tables
Exercises on Unit Changes to TablesSolutions to Unit Changes to Tables m
Views Unit 22
Objectives - Views
Why do you Need ViewsStructure of a View - Starting Situation
Structure of a View - Join Condition
Structure of a View - Field Selection (Projection)
Structure of a View - Selection Condition
How are Tables Linked to Views
Structure of the View
Data Selection with Views
Database Views
Buffering Database Views
Includes in Database Views
Maintenance ViewsInner and Outer Joins
Summary - Views
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1534
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-15
Exercises on Unit Views mmSolutions to Unit Views
Search Helps Unit 23
Objectives - Search Helps
R3 Standard Function Input HelpDescription of an Input Help
Interface of a Search Help
Description of the Dialog Behavior
Selection Method of a Serach Help
View as Selection Method
Performance of the Input Help
Input Help from the Data Element
Check Table Help
Attaching a Search Help to a Field
Input Help from Dictionary or Screen
Overview Mechanisms for the Input Help
Alternative Search Paths
Collective Search Helps and Elementary Search Helps
Further Options for Search Helps
Non-Standard Search Help Exit
Migration of Existing Input Helps
Summary - Search Helps
Exercises on Unit Search Helps nSolutions to Unit Search Helps nn
Appendix Unit 24
Important Menu Paths and Transactions
Decision Tree for Buffering TablesAppendix
T e c h n i q u e s o f L i s t P r o c e s s i n g
Techniques of List Processing Unit 25
Contents 12
Contents 22
Introduction
Course GoalsCourse Objectives
Course Overview Diagram
Business Scenario
Demo Programs Templates and Solutions
Overview of Exercises
Finding and Executing Programs Unit 26
Objectives
How to Find Existing Programs
SAP Anwendungshierarchie
The Repository Information SystemReport Trees Organization
Finding Report Trees
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1634
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-16
Summary
Creating Lists with ABAP Query Unit 27
Objectives
Creating Lists with ABAP Query
Programs and ABAP QueryABAP Query Organization
Creating Queries
Creating Lists with ABAP Query
Defining Queries
Choosing a Query Area and a Functional Area
Choosing Fields
Assigning Short Descriptions
Defining Local Fields
Basic Lists
Lists with Control Levels
Statistics
Ranked Lists
Interactive Functions - Single-Line Lists
Interactive Functions - Multiple-Line Lists
Saving Lists
Summary
Creating Lists with ABAP Query
Outputting Data to Lists Unit 28
Objectives
List Design Options
Generating a List
Setting the List FormatModifying and Suppressing Headers
Open Page Design TOP-OF-PAGE
Setting Fixed Lead Columns
The FORMAT Statement
Outputting Lines
The WRITE Statement General Syntax
The WRITE Statement Icons and Symbols
The WRITE Statement Checkboxes
Additional Statements for Output Design
Multilingual List Elements
System Fields and List GenerationStandard Functions in Lists
Summary Lists
Exercises for Outputting Data to Lists Solutions for Outputting Data to Lists
Selection Screens Unit 29
Objectives
Selection Screen Overivew
Declaration of Fields with PARAMETERS
Selections with SELECT-OPTIONS
Selection Options and Multiple SelectionsSyntax of the SELECT-OPTIONS Statement
Designing the Selection Screen I
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1734
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-17
Designing the Selection Screen II
Initializing the Selection Screen
General Help and Possible Entries Help (F1 and F4)
Input Checks AT SELECTION-SCREEN
CALL SELECTION-SCREEN I
CALL SELECTION-SCREEN IISelektionsbild Varianten I
Selection Screen Variants II
Summary
Exercises for Selection Screens Solutions for Selection Screens
Logical Databases Unit 30
Objectives
Generating Lists
Advantages of a Logical Database
Logical Databases Overview
LDB F1S Nodes
Sample Program for a Logical Database
LDB Sub-Objects Structure
LDB Sub-Objects Selections
Selection Screen for the Logical Database
Logical Database Dynamic Selections
LDB Sub-Objects Database Programs
Interaction Between LDBs and Programs
Events in Logical Databases
Program Flow and Termination Alternatives
Checking Internal Program Selections I
Checking Internal Program Selections IISummary
Exercises for Logical Databases Solutions for Logical Databases
Programming Data Retrieval Unit 31
Objectives
Programming Data Retrieval
Reading Multiple Database Tables
Reading Multiple Database Tables I
Reading Multiple Database Tables IIa
Reading Multiple Database Tables IIbReading Multiple Database Tables III
Reading Multiple Database Tables IV
Summary
Exercises for Programming Data Retrieval Solutions for Programming Data Retrieval
ABAP Query Administration Unit 32
Objectives
ABAP Query Administration
Maintaining User Groups
Authorizations and ABAP QueryABAP Query Administration
Defining Functional Areas
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1834
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-18
Overview Creating Functional Areas
Example Defining a Functional Area
Defining Functional Areas
Allocating Fields
Additional Information
Allocating Additional TablesAllocating Additional Fields
Selection Options
Allocating ABAP Statements
Summary
Exercises for ABAP Query Administration
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing Unit 33
Unit Objectives Control Level Processing
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Motivation
Control Level Processing
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Creating an Internal Table
Filling an Internal Table
Sorting and Editing an Internal Table
Control Level Processing for Internal Tables
Control Level Processing Schema for Internal Tables
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Generating an Extract Steps
Example Generating an Extract
Sorting and Processing an Extract
Example Control Level Processing
Schema for Control Level Processing of ExtractsData Formatting and Control Level Processing
Comparing Internal Tables and Extracts
Summary Control Level Processing
Exercises for Data Formatting and Control Level Processing Solutions for Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Storing Lists and Background Processing Unit 34
Objectives
Storing Lists and Background Processing
Saving Lists Possibilities
Saving Lists in SAPofficeSaving Lists as PC Files
Saving Lists in a Report Tree
Customizing Report Trees
Functions in Report Trees
Storing Lists and Background Processing
Options for Printing a List
Print Parameters
Program-Controlled Printing
Program-Controlled Printing with GET_PRINT_PARAMETERS
Storing Lists and Background Processing
Background Processing PhasesDefining Steps
Defining Start Times and Releasing Jobs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1934
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-19
Summary
Exercises for Storing Lists and Background Processing Solutions for Storing Lists and Background Processing
Interactive Lists Basics Unit 35
Unit Objectives Interactive ListsInteractive Lists Basics
User Interactions with Lists
Navigating Between Lists
Events Overview
Flow Control in Detail Lists
Creating Detail Lists I
Creating Detail Lists II
Interactive Lists Basics
Questions
HIDE Areas
HIDE Technique Line Selection
Data Buffering in a List System
Valid Line Selection
Field Selection
Interactive Lists Basics
Page Headers in Detail Lists
Interactive Lists Basics
Creating Lists in Modal Dialog Boxes
Summary Interactive Lists
Exercises for Interactive Lists Solutions for Interactive Lists
Creating User Interfaces Unit 36Objectives User Interfaces
User Interfaces Overview
Status Technical View I
Status Technical View II
Creating a GUI Status
Creating a GUI Status Assigning F Keys I
Creating a GUI Status Assigning F Keys II
Creating a GUI Status Menu Bars
Activating Title and Status
Event AT USER-COMMAND
Summary User Interfaces
Special Techniques for Interactive Lists Unit 37
Objectives
Scrolling in Lists
Reading Lists
Modifying Lists
List Navigation
Interactive List Messages
System Fields in Interactive Lists
Summary
Exercises for Creating User Interfaces Solutions for Creating User Interfaces
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2034
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-20
Linking Programs Unit 38
Objectives
Linking Programs
Data Visibility
Data Transfer Using SAP Memory
SETGET ParametersSUBMIT Statement Syntax
Example SUBMIT WITH
Datatransfer Using ABAP Memory
Returning from a Called Program
Summary
Exercises for Linking Programs Solutions for Linking Programs
Lists on the Internet Unit 39
Unit Objectives Special Application
Lists on the Internet
Motivation
The World Wide Web
HTTP Hypertext Transport Protocol
URL Uniform Resource Locator
HTML Hypertext Markup Language
R3 ClientServer Architecture
R3 ClientServer Architecture with ITS
Lists on the Internet
Web Reporting - Overview
Web Reporting Flow
Creating a List Using a URL
Parameters for WWW_GET_REPORTInteractive Lists
Access Authorization
Creating HTML Hyperlinks in Lists
Lists on the Internet
Web Reporting Browser
Releasing Report Trees for the Internet
Summary Special Application
Appendix Unit 40
Menu Data
T r a n s a c t i o n P ro g r a m m i n g
Transaction Programming Unit 41
Content
Introduction Contents
Couse Goal
Course Objectives
Overview Diagram
Main Business Scenario
About the Course Material
Basic Transaction Programming Unit 42
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-21
Objectives - Basics
Components of a Transaction
Writing a Transaction Process
Analyzing the Problem
User Dialogs in the R3 System
Advantages of ScreensComponents of a Screen
Static Screen Sequence
Creating a Screen Attributes
Creating a Screen Layout
Creating a Screen Field List
Writing the Flow Logic
Communictaion Between Screen and ABAP Program
Creating a Transaction Code
Summary Basic Dialog Programming
Screen Objects - List Unit 43
Screen Objects - Objectives
Screen Objects
Screen Objects General Attributes
Attributes of Screen Objects (Key)
Dynamically Modifiable Static Attributes
The System Table SCREEN
Modifying Attributes Dynamically Example
Object Attributes Modification Group
Modifying Attributes Dynamically Program
Screen Objects - Screen
Screen Object Screen
Defining and Managing ScreensScreen Attributes
Dynamic Next Screen Overview
Setting the Next Screen Dynamically
Inserting a Sequence of Screens Dynamically
Calling a Dialog Box Dynamically
Window Coordinates
Setting the Cursor Position Dynamically
Screen Objects - Title Bar
Screen Object Title Bar
Creating and Using Title Bars
Screen Objects - Text FieldScreen Object Text Field
Text Fields Attributes
Creating Text Fields
Hiding Texts Dynamically
Dynamically Modifiable Attributes Text Field
Dynamic Screen Modifications Program
Screen Objects - InputOutput Field
Screen Object InputOutput Field
InputOutput Fields Attributes
Creating InputOutput Fields
InputOutput Fields Automatic Field ChecksInputOutput Fields Default Values in SAP Memory
Defining SETGET Parameter Attributes
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-22
Programming Field Input Checks with an Error Dialog
Checking Groups of Fields
Controlling Error Dialogs
Dialog Message Categories
The FIELD Statement and Data Transport
Calling Modules Conditionally (1)Calling Modules Conditionally (2)
Screen Objects Status icon
Screen Objects Status Icons
Status Icons Attributes
Creating Status Icon Fields
Filling Status Icon Fields
Group Box
Screen Objects Group Boxes
Group Boxes Attributes
Screen Objects Radio Buttons
Screen Objects Radio Buttons and Checkboxes
Radio ButtonsCheckboxes Attributes
Creating a Radio Button Group
Creating a Checkbox
Screen Objects - Pushbutton
Screen Objects Pushbuttons
Pushbuttons Attributes
Creating Pushbuttons
Pushbuttons with Function Type E
Screen Objects - Subscreen
Screen Objects Subscreen (1)
Screen Objects Subscreen (2)
Subscreen AttributesCreating a Subscreen Area
Calling a Subscreen
Subscreens from External Programs
Subscreens Encapsulation in Function Groups
Subscreens in Function Groups Call Sequence
Subscreens in Function Groups Data Transport
Screen Objects - Tabstrip Control
Screen Object Tabstrip Control
Tabstrip Elements
Tab Page Technical View
Tabstrip Controls AttributesCreating a Tabstrip Control
Creating a Tabstrip Control Tabstrip Area
Creating a Tabstip Control Tab Title
Creating a Tabstrip Control Subscreens
Scrolling Locally in a Tabstrip Control
Scrolling Locally in a Tabstrip Control Coding
Scrolling in a Tabstrip Control
Scrolling in a Tabstrip Control Coding
Screen Objects - Table Control
Screen Object Table Control
ABAP Table Control (Functions)Table Control Table Settings
Actions in Table Controls
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-23
Creating Table Control Elements
Table Control Attributes
Creating a Table Control
Creating a Table Control Table Control Area
Creating a Table Control TC Fields (1)
Create Table Control TC Fields (2) Section ColumnTable Control Attributes at Runtime
Table Control Attributes (Structure)
Table Control Elements - Processing
Processing a Table Control (Principle 1)
Filling a Table Control
Changing the Contents of a Table Control
Table Control Applications (Principle)
Filling a Table Control Coding
Changing the Contents of a Table Control 4 Coding
Table Controls Field Transport in the PBO
Table Controls Field Transport in the PAI
Table Control Elements Further Techniques
Changing a Table Control
Changing the Attributes of a Table Control (1)
Changing the Attributes of a Table Control (2)
Table Control Modifying Field Attributes Temporarily
Sorting a Table Control (Example)
Scrolling Page by Page in a Table Control (Example)
Table Control Cursor Position (Example)
Screen Objects - GUI Status
Screen Object GUI Status
Status Technical View (1)
Status Technical View (2)Attributes of Functions
Function Key Settings
Menus and Menu Bars Attributes
Status Attributes
Standard Toolbar Functions and their Reserved function Keys
Creating a Status
Navigation - Targets
Navigation - Dialogs
Screen Objects - List
Screen Objects Lists
Displaying a List Within a TransactionLists in a Modal Dialog Box
Screen Objects - Selection Screen
Screen Object Selection Screen
Entering Value Ranges
Defining and Calling a Selection Screen
Summary Screen Objects
Uumlbung zu Kapitel Screen Objects Solutions Screen Objects Unit
Programming Database Changes Unit 44
Unit ObjectivesProgramming Database Changes
Statements for Database Dialogs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2434
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-24
SAP LUW
Database LUW
SAP R3 System 3-tier Architecture
System Architecture Implicit DB COMMIT
Objective Bundling the DB Changes in an SAP LUW
Programming Database ChangesBundling Techniques Overview
Bunding Using Delayed Inline Changes
Bundling Using Subroutines
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundline Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Techniques
Update Function modules
V1 and V2 Update Function Modules
Logging Records for Update
Deleting Update Entries Rollback in the Dialog Program
Rollback in the Update Program
Asynchronous Update
What Happens in a Commit Work
Comparison of Bundling Techniques
Programming Database Updates
Why Set Locks
Database Locks
SAP Locking Concept
Setting Logical Locks
SAP Lock ObjectsENQUEUE and DEQUEUE Function Modules
Calling the Function Modules
The Lock Table
Validity of Locks Scope = 2
Programming Database Updates
SAP Authorization Concept
Authorization Checks
User Master Record Authorizations
Authorization Checks for Transactions
Summary
Exercises Programming Database Updates Unit Solutions Programming Database Updates Unit
Complex Transactions Unit 45
Unit Objectives
Complex Transactions
Synchronous Calls Overview
Calling a Report Program
Calling a Transaction
Encapsulating Dialogs in Function Modules
Synchronous Program Calls Main Memory Contents
Complex TransactionsAsynchronous Calls
Calling Programs Asynchronously
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2534
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-25
Complex Transactions
Passing Data Overview
Passing Data Using the Interface of ABAP Programs
The WITH Addition in the SUBMIT Statement
Memory Areas Logical Model
ABAP MemoryPassing Parameters using the SAP Memory
Passing Parameters (SAP Memory)
Complex Transactions
Synchronous Program Calls SAP LUWs
Asynchronous Program Calls SAP LUWs
Program Calls Visible Data and LUWs
Complex Transactions
RFC Scenario R3 - R3
Enabling Function Modules for RFC
RFC Using ABAP Function Modules
Program Context of a Remote Function
RFC Calls System Exceptions
Complex Transactions
Remote Function Call Overview
Process Diagram Synchronous RFC
Process Diagram Asynchronous RFC
Process Diagram Transactional RFC
Transactional RFC (tRFC) Introduction
tRFC Properties
Complex Transactions
Lock Entries for Local Program Calls
Lock Entries for RFC Calls
Summary Exercises Complex Transactions Unit Solutions Complex Transactions Unit
Static Attributes in the Screen Painter Unit 46
Screen Attributes (1)
Screen Attributes (2)
General Attributes
Dictionary Attributes
Program Attributes
Display Attributes
Special Attributes for Subscreens and Tabstrip ControlsSpecial Attributes for Table Controls
Database Updates Further Information Unit 47
Objectives
Database Updates Further Information
Asynchronous Update
Synchronous Update
Local Update
SAP LUW Timescale of Updates
Database Updates Further Information
V1 and V2 Update Function ModulesV1 Update
V2 Update
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2634
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-26
Database Updates Further Information
Validity of Locks Scope = 1
Validity of Locks Scope = 2
Validity of Locks Scope = 3
ENQUEUE Function Modules Interface Parameters
Summary
Complex Transactions Further Information Unit 48
CALL TRANSACTION lsquoTA01rsquo and SUBMIT lsquoREP01rsquo AND RETURN
Implicit End of a Program or LEAVE PROGRAM
LEAVE TO TRANSACTION lsquoTA01rsquo
SUBMIT lsquoREP01rsquo
CALL FUNCTION lsquoFUNC1rsquoPERFORM form1 IN PROGRAM program
Help Functions Unit 49
Overview Standard F1 and F4 Functions
The Search Help Concept
Dialog for an Immediate Hit List
Dialog with Preselection
Dialog for Selecting a Search Help
Search Help Concepts
Search Helps
Defining the Dialog Fields
Defining the Data Selection
Collective Search Helps
Search Help Concepts
Linking Search Helps to Screen Fields
Search Help Concepts
Programmed Help Functions OverviewProgrammed F1 and F4 Help
The POH and POV Events Process
Function Modules for Data Transport
Field Transport to and from the Screen
Determining the Contents of Screen Fields ( POV POH )
Placing Values in Screen Fields ( POV )
Special F1 Functions
Displaying Input Values for a Table Field (POV)
Search Help Concepts
Overview Input Help Mechanisms
Migrating Existing Input Help
Assigning Number Range Numbers Unit 50
Objectives
Overview
Number Range Objects
Number Range Intervals
Sub-objects
Assigning Internal Numbers
Checking External Numbers
Number Range Information
Accessing Table NRIV 1 Without a Buffer Accessing Table NRIV 2 Without a Buffer
Buffering Number Ranges
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2734
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-27
Using Function Groups to Administer Number Ranges
Summary 1
Summary 2
Creating Change Documents Unit 51
ObjectivesOverview
Change Document Structure
Change Relevance
Change Document Objects
Generating Update Programs
INCLUDE Program Structure
Application Program
Change Document Objects and Internal Tables
Reading Change Documents
Using Function Groups to Edit Change Documents
Summary (1)
Summary (2)
Appendix Unit 52
Documentation ReferencesGlossary Index
I n t e r f a c e s f o r D a t a T r a n s f e r
Interfaces for Data Transfer Unit 53
Content
Data Transfer
Objectives
Data Transfer
Transferring Data Into the R3 System
Direct Data Transfer
Data Transfer Using Interfaces
Data Transfer Workbench
Data Analysis
Data Transfer
Analyzing the SAP Transaction
Assigning DataFormat Conversion
Transferring Legacy Data into the R3 System
Data Transfer Methods
Knowledge Tools
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer
Data Analysis and Formatting Unit 54
Data Analysis - Objectives
Data Analysis and Formatting
Standard Transfer Interfaces for Standard Transfer
Standard Transfer - Tasks
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2834
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-28
IMG Documentation
Data Transfer Workbench (DTW)
Documentation in the DTW
Data Analysis and Formatting
Record Layout Types
FB01 Record Layout StructureSample Data for Record Layouts
Generating Test Data in the DTW
Data Analysis and Formatting
Translating Data
Translating Data in the Legacy System
Generating SAP Structures in the DTW
Translating Data in the R3 System
Translating Data Types
Translating Data for Transaction FB01
Translating Data - Example
Translating Data Using EXCEL
Data Analysis and Formatting
Initializing Record Layouts
Initializing Record Layouts - Example
Filling Record Layouts
Structure of Transaction FB01
Mapping Data in Transaction FB01
Filling Record Layout BGR00 - Example
Data Analysis and Formatting
Additional Tasks
Converting Data
Converting Legacy System R3 System Data
Structure of a Conversion ProgramData Analysis - Summary
Exercises for Unit Data AnalysisSolutions to Unit Data Analysis
Files in the R3 System Unit 55
Objectives
Files in the R3 System
R3 Client Server Architecture
Transferring Files
Files in the R3 System
Processing FilesOpening Files
Opening Files - Options
Binary Mode and Text Mode
Transferring Data Records
Reading Data Records
Closing Deleting a Sequential File
Filling Record Layouts for Transaction FB01 (1)
Filling Record Layouts for Transaction FB01 (2)
Sequential Files - Summary
Files in the R3 System
DOWNLOAD and UPLOADFunction Module rsquoDOWNLOADrsquo
Example Program DOWNLOAD
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2934
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-29
Function Module rsquoUPLOADrsquo
Example Program UPLOAD
Summary
Exercises for Unit Files in the R3 SystemSolutions to Unit Files in the R3 System
Data Transfer Workbench Unit 56
Data Transfer - Objectives
Data Transfer Workbench
Preparing the Data Transfer
Testing and Executing the Data Transfer
Direct Input Management
Scheduling Direct Input
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer WorkbenchSolutions to Unit Data Transfer Workbench
Batch Input Sessions Unit 57
Objectives
Batch Input Sessions
Batch Input Processing
Batch Input Program
Format of a Batch Input Session
Creating Batch Input Sessions
Function Modules for Batch Input Programs
Structure of the BDC Table
Batch Input Processing
Batch Input Sessions
Batch Input Monitor - FunctionsSession Status
Processing Modes
Entering Data into Screens
Batch Input Processing
Session Statistics
Session Log
Summary
Exercises for Unit Batch Input SessionsSolutions to Unit Batch Input Sessions
Data Transfer Programs Unit 58Objectives
Data Transfer Programs
Customer Transfer Programs
Customer Transfer Program - Tasks
Data Transfer Programs
Batch Input Program Elements
Defining BDC Tables
Structure of the BDC Table
Determining Field Names
Determining Field Names with the Screen Painter
Structure DefinitionFunction Modules for a Batch Input Program
Function Module BDC_OPEN_GROUP
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3034
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-30
Function Module BDC_INSERT
Function Module BDC_CLOSE_GROUP
Structure of a Batch Input Program
Batch Input Program - Overview (I)
Batch Input Program - Overview (II)
Subroutine generate_bdc_dataProgram BDCRECXX (I)
Program BDCRECXX (II)
Program BDCRECXX (III)
Data Transfer Programs
Batch Input Recorder
Batch Input Recording
Recording the First Screen
Recording the Second Screen
Additional Screens Saving
Ending the Recording
Generating Sessions and Programs
Generating Batch Input Sessions
Structure of the Generated Program
Enhancing the Generated Program
Data Transfer Programs
Overview
Call Transaction Program
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (I)
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (II)
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (III)
Displaying the Messtab
Technical Implementation
Return Codes and System FieldsSystem Field Message Output
Generating Sessions When Errors Occur
Summary
Overview
Structure of a Data Transfer Program
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer ProgramSolutions to Unit Data Transfer Program
Additional Techniques Unit 59
ObjectivesAdditional Techniques - Overview
Changing Customers - Payment Transactions
Step Loop Field Names
Structure of the BDC Table
Filling BDC Tables in ABAP
Additional Techniques
Overview - Special Fields
Setting the Cursor in the Batch Input Session
Setting the Cursor in the ABAP Program
Additional Techniques
Successful Transaction EndAdditional Techniques
Processing Batch Input Sessions
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-31
Batch Input Flow
Additional Techniques
Program RSBDCSUB
Batch Input Authorizations
Service Programs
Summary Exercises for Unit Additional TechniquesSolutions for Unit Additional Techniques
Tips amp Tricks Unit 60
Tips and Tricks - Objectives
OSS Notes
Parallel Processing
Resetting Rollback Segments
Additional Tips and Information
Summary
Appendix Unit 61
Job Structure
Scheduling Jobs
Job Distribution
SAP-LUW Chronological Update
Update Principles
Asynchronous Update
Synchronous Update
Local Update
E n h a n c e m e n t s a n d M o d i f i c a t i o n s
Enhancements and Modifications Unit 62
Content
Introduction Contents
Course Overview Diagram
Main Business Scenario
Modifications Unit 63
Objectives
Modifications
What are modifications
Modifications and Upgrades
Modifications
Copying SAP Objects
Making Changes to SAP Copies (Modifications)
Registering Modifications in SSCR
Carrying Out a Registered Modification
Versions
Naming Conventions for Repository Objects
Modifications
Modifications Critical Success Factors (1)
Modifications Critical Success Factors (2)Modifications Critical Success Factors (3)
Documenting Modifications in Programs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-32
Modification Logs An Example
Modifications
Modification Adjustment SPDD and SPAU
Modification Adjustment Objects
Transaction SPAU (Process After Upgrade)
Transporting Adjustments between SystemsThe amount of work necessary at upgrade increases
Modifications Critical Repository Objects
Avoiding Adjustments
Modifications
User Exits
User Exits An Example
Using User Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Modifications
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Unit 64
Objectives
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Table Enhancements Overview
Append Structures
Append Structures at Upgrade
Customizing Includes
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Global Enhancements
Field Exits
Global and Local Field Exits
Creating Field Exits
Enhancements to Dictionary ElementsText Enhancements
Editing Text Enhancements
Keywords
Keyword Change Requirements
Keyword Changes and Release Upgrades
Restoring SAP Keywords
Enhanced Documentation for Data Elements
Customer Documentation
Summary Text Enhancements
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Solutions for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Enhancements using Customer Exits Unit 65
Objectives
Enhancements using Customer Exits
SAP Application Enhancements
Customer Enhancement Projects
SAP Enhancements and Customer Enhancement Projects
Enhancements using Customer Exits
The SAP Enhancement Creation Procedure
Implementing Enhancements in Customer SystemsCreating Customer Enhancement Projects
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-33
Editing Components
Activating Enhancement Projects
Transporting Projects
Summary Enhancement Management
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Function Module ExitsCalling and Creating Function Modules
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Organization of an X Function Group
Customer Source Code
Global Data SAP and the Customer
Subroutines Modules SAP and the Customer
Customer Screens
Customer Screens Modules
Summary Function Module Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Menu Exits
Menu Exit Requirements
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Menu Exits and Function Module Exits
Summary Menu Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Screen Exits
Subscreens in the R3 System
Calling Subscreens
Defining Screen Exits
Calling Customer Subscreens
Transporting Data to Subscreens
Transporting Data from SubscreensEditing Subscreens (1)
Editing Subscreens (2)
Summary Screen Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits Solutions for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits
Business Transaction Events Unit 66
Objectives
Business Transaction Events (BTE)
BTE Possible Scenarios (1)BTE Possible Scenarios (2)
Publish amp Subscribe vs Process Interfaces
Business Transaction Events SAP and the Customer
Finding Business Transaction Events
Creating a Publish amp Subscribe Interface
Differences between Customer Exits and BTEs
Summary
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3434
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-12
Solutions for Unit Authorization Checks
Software Logistics and Software Modifications Contents Unit 14
Software Logistics and Software Modifications Unit Object
Software Logistics and Software Modification
Workbench Organizer and Transport SystemManaging Development Projects in the WBO
Completing a Project
Functions of a Change Request
Local Objects
Originals and Copies
SAP Objects as Copies
Task Attributes
Changing Customer Copies
Changing SAP Copies (Modifications)
Software Logistics and Software Modification
Change Levels
Functional Enhancements
Enhancing User Dialogs
Enhancements Examples
Registering Developers in the SSCR
Software Logistics and Software Modification Summary
Software Logistics and Software Modifications Summary (II)
Exercises for Unit Software Logistics and Modification
Appendix Unit 15
Repository-Infosystem
Objectives
R3 Repository and Repository-ObjectsTypical Information System Requests
The Repository Information System
The SAP Application Hierarchy
Summary
Summary 2
Foreign Data Transfer
External Data Transfer
R3 Communication Interfaces I
R3 Communication Interfaces II
Termination Conditions 2
Advanced Techniques Dynamic Screen SequencingAdvanced Techniques Update
Appendix 1
Appendix 2
A B A P D i c t i o n a r y
ABAP Dictionary Unit 16
Content
IntroductionObjectives
Functions of the ABAP Dictionary
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-13
Linking to the ABAP Workbench (Active)
Access from ABAP Program
Summary
Tables in the ABAP Dictionary Unit 17
Objectives-Tables in the ABAP DictionaryTables and Fields
Basic Objects of the ABAP Dictionary
Two-Level Domain Concept Example
Transparent Tables
Structures
Technical Settings
Data Class
Size Category
Buffering Tables
Logging
Consistency between ABAP Dictionary and DB
Summary - Tables in the ABAP Dictionary
Exercises on Unit Tables in the ABAP Dictionary nSolutions to Unit Tables in the ABAP Dictionary
Performance during Table Access Unit 18
Objectives - Performance during Table Access
Indexes
Primary Index
Secondary Indexes
Data Access using the Buffer
Table Buffering
Full BufferingGeneric Buffering
Single-Record Buffering
Buffer Synchronization 1
Buffer Synchronization 2
Buffer Synchronization 3
Buffer Synchronization 4
Buffer Synchronization 5
Buffer Synchronization 6
Summary - Performance during Table Access
Exercises on Unit Performance during Table Access
Solutions to Unit Performance during Table Access
Relationships between Tables in the ABAP Dictionary Unit 19
Objectives - Relationships between Tables in the ABAP Dict
Definition of a Foreign Key
Foreign Key Fields Check Fields
Inserting a Data Record
Violation of the Foreign Key Check
Foreign Key Definitions in the Check Field
Requirements for the Field Assignment
Domains Value Tables Fixed Values
Check Table not Equal to Value TableField Assignment is not Unique
Semantic Attributes
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1434
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-14
Text Tables
Generic and Constant Foreign Keys
INCLUDE
Summary (1)
Summary (2)
Exercises on Unit Relationships between Tables nnSolutions to Unit Relationships between Tables m
R3 Repository Info System as seen by ABAP Dictionary Unit 20
Objectives - R3 Repository Information System
Typical Queries Made of the Information System
Selection Options
Functions
Summary (1) - R3 Repository Information System
Exercises on Unit The R3 Repository Information SystemSolutions to Unit The R3 Repository Information System
Changes to Tables Unit 21
Objectives - Changes to Tables
Active and Revised Versions
Runtime Objects
Handling Dependent Objects
Changing Database Tables
How is the Structure Adjusted
Conversion Process 1
Conversion Process 2
Conversion Process 3
Conversion Process 4
Conversion Process 5What to Do when a Conversion Terminates
Append Structures 1
Append Structures 2
Append Structures 3
Summary Changes to Tables
Exercises on Unit Changes to TablesSolutions to Unit Changes to Tables m
Views Unit 22
Objectives - Views
Why do you Need ViewsStructure of a View - Starting Situation
Structure of a View - Join Condition
Structure of a View - Field Selection (Projection)
Structure of a View - Selection Condition
How are Tables Linked to Views
Structure of the View
Data Selection with Views
Database Views
Buffering Database Views
Includes in Database Views
Maintenance ViewsInner and Outer Joins
Summary - Views
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1534
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-15
Exercises on Unit Views mmSolutions to Unit Views
Search Helps Unit 23
Objectives - Search Helps
R3 Standard Function Input HelpDescription of an Input Help
Interface of a Search Help
Description of the Dialog Behavior
Selection Method of a Serach Help
View as Selection Method
Performance of the Input Help
Input Help from the Data Element
Check Table Help
Attaching a Search Help to a Field
Input Help from Dictionary or Screen
Overview Mechanisms for the Input Help
Alternative Search Paths
Collective Search Helps and Elementary Search Helps
Further Options for Search Helps
Non-Standard Search Help Exit
Migration of Existing Input Helps
Summary - Search Helps
Exercises on Unit Search Helps nSolutions to Unit Search Helps nn
Appendix Unit 24
Important Menu Paths and Transactions
Decision Tree for Buffering TablesAppendix
T e c h n i q u e s o f L i s t P r o c e s s i n g
Techniques of List Processing Unit 25
Contents 12
Contents 22
Introduction
Course GoalsCourse Objectives
Course Overview Diagram
Business Scenario
Demo Programs Templates and Solutions
Overview of Exercises
Finding and Executing Programs Unit 26
Objectives
How to Find Existing Programs
SAP Anwendungshierarchie
The Repository Information SystemReport Trees Organization
Finding Report Trees
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1634
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-16
Summary
Creating Lists with ABAP Query Unit 27
Objectives
Creating Lists with ABAP Query
Programs and ABAP QueryABAP Query Organization
Creating Queries
Creating Lists with ABAP Query
Defining Queries
Choosing a Query Area and a Functional Area
Choosing Fields
Assigning Short Descriptions
Defining Local Fields
Basic Lists
Lists with Control Levels
Statistics
Ranked Lists
Interactive Functions - Single-Line Lists
Interactive Functions - Multiple-Line Lists
Saving Lists
Summary
Creating Lists with ABAP Query
Outputting Data to Lists Unit 28
Objectives
List Design Options
Generating a List
Setting the List FormatModifying and Suppressing Headers
Open Page Design TOP-OF-PAGE
Setting Fixed Lead Columns
The FORMAT Statement
Outputting Lines
The WRITE Statement General Syntax
The WRITE Statement Icons and Symbols
The WRITE Statement Checkboxes
Additional Statements for Output Design
Multilingual List Elements
System Fields and List GenerationStandard Functions in Lists
Summary Lists
Exercises for Outputting Data to Lists Solutions for Outputting Data to Lists
Selection Screens Unit 29
Objectives
Selection Screen Overivew
Declaration of Fields with PARAMETERS
Selections with SELECT-OPTIONS
Selection Options and Multiple SelectionsSyntax of the SELECT-OPTIONS Statement
Designing the Selection Screen I
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1734
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-17
Designing the Selection Screen II
Initializing the Selection Screen
General Help and Possible Entries Help (F1 and F4)
Input Checks AT SELECTION-SCREEN
CALL SELECTION-SCREEN I
CALL SELECTION-SCREEN IISelektionsbild Varianten I
Selection Screen Variants II
Summary
Exercises for Selection Screens Solutions for Selection Screens
Logical Databases Unit 30
Objectives
Generating Lists
Advantages of a Logical Database
Logical Databases Overview
LDB F1S Nodes
Sample Program for a Logical Database
LDB Sub-Objects Structure
LDB Sub-Objects Selections
Selection Screen for the Logical Database
Logical Database Dynamic Selections
LDB Sub-Objects Database Programs
Interaction Between LDBs and Programs
Events in Logical Databases
Program Flow and Termination Alternatives
Checking Internal Program Selections I
Checking Internal Program Selections IISummary
Exercises for Logical Databases Solutions for Logical Databases
Programming Data Retrieval Unit 31
Objectives
Programming Data Retrieval
Reading Multiple Database Tables
Reading Multiple Database Tables I
Reading Multiple Database Tables IIa
Reading Multiple Database Tables IIbReading Multiple Database Tables III
Reading Multiple Database Tables IV
Summary
Exercises for Programming Data Retrieval Solutions for Programming Data Retrieval
ABAP Query Administration Unit 32
Objectives
ABAP Query Administration
Maintaining User Groups
Authorizations and ABAP QueryABAP Query Administration
Defining Functional Areas
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1834
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-18
Overview Creating Functional Areas
Example Defining a Functional Area
Defining Functional Areas
Allocating Fields
Additional Information
Allocating Additional TablesAllocating Additional Fields
Selection Options
Allocating ABAP Statements
Summary
Exercises for ABAP Query Administration
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing Unit 33
Unit Objectives Control Level Processing
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Motivation
Control Level Processing
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Creating an Internal Table
Filling an Internal Table
Sorting and Editing an Internal Table
Control Level Processing for Internal Tables
Control Level Processing Schema for Internal Tables
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Generating an Extract Steps
Example Generating an Extract
Sorting and Processing an Extract
Example Control Level Processing
Schema for Control Level Processing of ExtractsData Formatting and Control Level Processing
Comparing Internal Tables and Extracts
Summary Control Level Processing
Exercises for Data Formatting and Control Level Processing Solutions for Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Storing Lists and Background Processing Unit 34
Objectives
Storing Lists and Background Processing
Saving Lists Possibilities
Saving Lists in SAPofficeSaving Lists as PC Files
Saving Lists in a Report Tree
Customizing Report Trees
Functions in Report Trees
Storing Lists and Background Processing
Options for Printing a List
Print Parameters
Program-Controlled Printing
Program-Controlled Printing with GET_PRINT_PARAMETERS
Storing Lists and Background Processing
Background Processing PhasesDefining Steps
Defining Start Times and Releasing Jobs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1934
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-19
Summary
Exercises for Storing Lists and Background Processing Solutions for Storing Lists and Background Processing
Interactive Lists Basics Unit 35
Unit Objectives Interactive ListsInteractive Lists Basics
User Interactions with Lists
Navigating Between Lists
Events Overview
Flow Control in Detail Lists
Creating Detail Lists I
Creating Detail Lists II
Interactive Lists Basics
Questions
HIDE Areas
HIDE Technique Line Selection
Data Buffering in a List System
Valid Line Selection
Field Selection
Interactive Lists Basics
Page Headers in Detail Lists
Interactive Lists Basics
Creating Lists in Modal Dialog Boxes
Summary Interactive Lists
Exercises for Interactive Lists Solutions for Interactive Lists
Creating User Interfaces Unit 36Objectives User Interfaces
User Interfaces Overview
Status Technical View I
Status Technical View II
Creating a GUI Status
Creating a GUI Status Assigning F Keys I
Creating a GUI Status Assigning F Keys II
Creating a GUI Status Menu Bars
Activating Title and Status
Event AT USER-COMMAND
Summary User Interfaces
Special Techniques for Interactive Lists Unit 37
Objectives
Scrolling in Lists
Reading Lists
Modifying Lists
List Navigation
Interactive List Messages
System Fields in Interactive Lists
Summary
Exercises for Creating User Interfaces Solutions for Creating User Interfaces
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2034
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-20
Linking Programs Unit 38
Objectives
Linking Programs
Data Visibility
Data Transfer Using SAP Memory
SETGET ParametersSUBMIT Statement Syntax
Example SUBMIT WITH
Datatransfer Using ABAP Memory
Returning from a Called Program
Summary
Exercises for Linking Programs Solutions for Linking Programs
Lists on the Internet Unit 39
Unit Objectives Special Application
Lists on the Internet
Motivation
The World Wide Web
HTTP Hypertext Transport Protocol
URL Uniform Resource Locator
HTML Hypertext Markup Language
R3 ClientServer Architecture
R3 ClientServer Architecture with ITS
Lists on the Internet
Web Reporting - Overview
Web Reporting Flow
Creating a List Using a URL
Parameters for WWW_GET_REPORTInteractive Lists
Access Authorization
Creating HTML Hyperlinks in Lists
Lists on the Internet
Web Reporting Browser
Releasing Report Trees for the Internet
Summary Special Application
Appendix Unit 40
Menu Data
T r a n s a c t i o n P ro g r a m m i n g
Transaction Programming Unit 41
Content
Introduction Contents
Couse Goal
Course Objectives
Overview Diagram
Main Business Scenario
About the Course Material
Basic Transaction Programming Unit 42
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-21
Objectives - Basics
Components of a Transaction
Writing a Transaction Process
Analyzing the Problem
User Dialogs in the R3 System
Advantages of ScreensComponents of a Screen
Static Screen Sequence
Creating a Screen Attributes
Creating a Screen Layout
Creating a Screen Field List
Writing the Flow Logic
Communictaion Between Screen and ABAP Program
Creating a Transaction Code
Summary Basic Dialog Programming
Screen Objects - List Unit 43
Screen Objects - Objectives
Screen Objects
Screen Objects General Attributes
Attributes of Screen Objects (Key)
Dynamically Modifiable Static Attributes
The System Table SCREEN
Modifying Attributes Dynamically Example
Object Attributes Modification Group
Modifying Attributes Dynamically Program
Screen Objects - Screen
Screen Object Screen
Defining and Managing ScreensScreen Attributes
Dynamic Next Screen Overview
Setting the Next Screen Dynamically
Inserting a Sequence of Screens Dynamically
Calling a Dialog Box Dynamically
Window Coordinates
Setting the Cursor Position Dynamically
Screen Objects - Title Bar
Screen Object Title Bar
Creating and Using Title Bars
Screen Objects - Text FieldScreen Object Text Field
Text Fields Attributes
Creating Text Fields
Hiding Texts Dynamically
Dynamically Modifiable Attributes Text Field
Dynamic Screen Modifications Program
Screen Objects - InputOutput Field
Screen Object InputOutput Field
InputOutput Fields Attributes
Creating InputOutput Fields
InputOutput Fields Automatic Field ChecksInputOutput Fields Default Values in SAP Memory
Defining SETGET Parameter Attributes
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-22
Programming Field Input Checks with an Error Dialog
Checking Groups of Fields
Controlling Error Dialogs
Dialog Message Categories
The FIELD Statement and Data Transport
Calling Modules Conditionally (1)Calling Modules Conditionally (2)
Screen Objects Status icon
Screen Objects Status Icons
Status Icons Attributes
Creating Status Icon Fields
Filling Status Icon Fields
Group Box
Screen Objects Group Boxes
Group Boxes Attributes
Screen Objects Radio Buttons
Screen Objects Radio Buttons and Checkboxes
Radio ButtonsCheckboxes Attributes
Creating a Radio Button Group
Creating a Checkbox
Screen Objects - Pushbutton
Screen Objects Pushbuttons
Pushbuttons Attributes
Creating Pushbuttons
Pushbuttons with Function Type E
Screen Objects - Subscreen
Screen Objects Subscreen (1)
Screen Objects Subscreen (2)
Subscreen AttributesCreating a Subscreen Area
Calling a Subscreen
Subscreens from External Programs
Subscreens Encapsulation in Function Groups
Subscreens in Function Groups Call Sequence
Subscreens in Function Groups Data Transport
Screen Objects - Tabstrip Control
Screen Object Tabstrip Control
Tabstrip Elements
Tab Page Technical View
Tabstrip Controls AttributesCreating a Tabstrip Control
Creating a Tabstrip Control Tabstrip Area
Creating a Tabstip Control Tab Title
Creating a Tabstrip Control Subscreens
Scrolling Locally in a Tabstrip Control
Scrolling Locally in a Tabstrip Control Coding
Scrolling in a Tabstrip Control
Scrolling in a Tabstrip Control Coding
Screen Objects - Table Control
Screen Object Table Control
ABAP Table Control (Functions)Table Control Table Settings
Actions in Table Controls
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-23
Creating Table Control Elements
Table Control Attributes
Creating a Table Control
Creating a Table Control Table Control Area
Creating a Table Control TC Fields (1)
Create Table Control TC Fields (2) Section ColumnTable Control Attributes at Runtime
Table Control Attributes (Structure)
Table Control Elements - Processing
Processing a Table Control (Principle 1)
Filling a Table Control
Changing the Contents of a Table Control
Table Control Applications (Principle)
Filling a Table Control Coding
Changing the Contents of a Table Control 4 Coding
Table Controls Field Transport in the PBO
Table Controls Field Transport in the PAI
Table Control Elements Further Techniques
Changing a Table Control
Changing the Attributes of a Table Control (1)
Changing the Attributes of a Table Control (2)
Table Control Modifying Field Attributes Temporarily
Sorting a Table Control (Example)
Scrolling Page by Page in a Table Control (Example)
Table Control Cursor Position (Example)
Screen Objects - GUI Status
Screen Object GUI Status
Status Technical View (1)
Status Technical View (2)Attributes of Functions
Function Key Settings
Menus and Menu Bars Attributes
Status Attributes
Standard Toolbar Functions and their Reserved function Keys
Creating a Status
Navigation - Targets
Navigation - Dialogs
Screen Objects - List
Screen Objects Lists
Displaying a List Within a TransactionLists in a Modal Dialog Box
Screen Objects - Selection Screen
Screen Object Selection Screen
Entering Value Ranges
Defining and Calling a Selection Screen
Summary Screen Objects
Uumlbung zu Kapitel Screen Objects Solutions Screen Objects Unit
Programming Database Changes Unit 44
Unit ObjectivesProgramming Database Changes
Statements for Database Dialogs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2434
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-24
SAP LUW
Database LUW
SAP R3 System 3-tier Architecture
System Architecture Implicit DB COMMIT
Objective Bundling the DB Changes in an SAP LUW
Programming Database ChangesBundling Techniques Overview
Bunding Using Delayed Inline Changes
Bundling Using Subroutines
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundline Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Techniques
Update Function modules
V1 and V2 Update Function Modules
Logging Records for Update
Deleting Update Entries Rollback in the Dialog Program
Rollback in the Update Program
Asynchronous Update
What Happens in a Commit Work
Comparison of Bundling Techniques
Programming Database Updates
Why Set Locks
Database Locks
SAP Locking Concept
Setting Logical Locks
SAP Lock ObjectsENQUEUE and DEQUEUE Function Modules
Calling the Function Modules
The Lock Table
Validity of Locks Scope = 2
Programming Database Updates
SAP Authorization Concept
Authorization Checks
User Master Record Authorizations
Authorization Checks for Transactions
Summary
Exercises Programming Database Updates Unit Solutions Programming Database Updates Unit
Complex Transactions Unit 45
Unit Objectives
Complex Transactions
Synchronous Calls Overview
Calling a Report Program
Calling a Transaction
Encapsulating Dialogs in Function Modules
Synchronous Program Calls Main Memory Contents
Complex TransactionsAsynchronous Calls
Calling Programs Asynchronously
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2534
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-25
Complex Transactions
Passing Data Overview
Passing Data Using the Interface of ABAP Programs
The WITH Addition in the SUBMIT Statement
Memory Areas Logical Model
ABAP MemoryPassing Parameters using the SAP Memory
Passing Parameters (SAP Memory)
Complex Transactions
Synchronous Program Calls SAP LUWs
Asynchronous Program Calls SAP LUWs
Program Calls Visible Data and LUWs
Complex Transactions
RFC Scenario R3 - R3
Enabling Function Modules for RFC
RFC Using ABAP Function Modules
Program Context of a Remote Function
RFC Calls System Exceptions
Complex Transactions
Remote Function Call Overview
Process Diagram Synchronous RFC
Process Diagram Asynchronous RFC
Process Diagram Transactional RFC
Transactional RFC (tRFC) Introduction
tRFC Properties
Complex Transactions
Lock Entries for Local Program Calls
Lock Entries for RFC Calls
Summary Exercises Complex Transactions Unit Solutions Complex Transactions Unit
Static Attributes in the Screen Painter Unit 46
Screen Attributes (1)
Screen Attributes (2)
General Attributes
Dictionary Attributes
Program Attributes
Display Attributes
Special Attributes for Subscreens and Tabstrip ControlsSpecial Attributes for Table Controls
Database Updates Further Information Unit 47
Objectives
Database Updates Further Information
Asynchronous Update
Synchronous Update
Local Update
SAP LUW Timescale of Updates
Database Updates Further Information
V1 and V2 Update Function ModulesV1 Update
V2 Update
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2634
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-26
Database Updates Further Information
Validity of Locks Scope = 1
Validity of Locks Scope = 2
Validity of Locks Scope = 3
ENQUEUE Function Modules Interface Parameters
Summary
Complex Transactions Further Information Unit 48
CALL TRANSACTION lsquoTA01rsquo and SUBMIT lsquoREP01rsquo AND RETURN
Implicit End of a Program or LEAVE PROGRAM
LEAVE TO TRANSACTION lsquoTA01rsquo
SUBMIT lsquoREP01rsquo
CALL FUNCTION lsquoFUNC1rsquoPERFORM form1 IN PROGRAM program
Help Functions Unit 49
Overview Standard F1 and F4 Functions
The Search Help Concept
Dialog for an Immediate Hit List
Dialog with Preselection
Dialog for Selecting a Search Help
Search Help Concepts
Search Helps
Defining the Dialog Fields
Defining the Data Selection
Collective Search Helps
Search Help Concepts
Linking Search Helps to Screen Fields
Search Help Concepts
Programmed Help Functions OverviewProgrammed F1 and F4 Help
The POH and POV Events Process
Function Modules for Data Transport
Field Transport to and from the Screen
Determining the Contents of Screen Fields ( POV POH )
Placing Values in Screen Fields ( POV )
Special F1 Functions
Displaying Input Values for a Table Field (POV)
Search Help Concepts
Overview Input Help Mechanisms
Migrating Existing Input Help
Assigning Number Range Numbers Unit 50
Objectives
Overview
Number Range Objects
Number Range Intervals
Sub-objects
Assigning Internal Numbers
Checking External Numbers
Number Range Information
Accessing Table NRIV 1 Without a Buffer Accessing Table NRIV 2 Without a Buffer
Buffering Number Ranges
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2734
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-27
Using Function Groups to Administer Number Ranges
Summary 1
Summary 2
Creating Change Documents Unit 51
ObjectivesOverview
Change Document Structure
Change Relevance
Change Document Objects
Generating Update Programs
INCLUDE Program Structure
Application Program
Change Document Objects and Internal Tables
Reading Change Documents
Using Function Groups to Edit Change Documents
Summary (1)
Summary (2)
Appendix Unit 52
Documentation ReferencesGlossary Index
I n t e r f a c e s f o r D a t a T r a n s f e r
Interfaces for Data Transfer Unit 53
Content
Data Transfer
Objectives
Data Transfer
Transferring Data Into the R3 System
Direct Data Transfer
Data Transfer Using Interfaces
Data Transfer Workbench
Data Analysis
Data Transfer
Analyzing the SAP Transaction
Assigning DataFormat Conversion
Transferring Legacy Data into the R3 System
Data Transfer Methods
Knowledge Tools
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer
Data Analysis and Formatting Unit 54
Data Analysis - Objectives
Data Analysis and Formatting
Standard Transfer Interfaces for Standard Transfer
Standard Transfer - Tasks
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2834
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-28
IMG Documentation
Data Transfer Workbench (DTW)
Documentation in the DTW
Data Analysis and Formatting
Record Layout Types
FB01 Record Layout StructureSample Data for Record Layouts
Generating Test Data in the DTW
Data Analysis and Formatting
Translating Data
Translating Data in the Legacy System
Generating SAP Structures in the DTW
Translating Data in the R3 System
Translating Data Types
Translating Data for Transaction FB01
Translating Data - Example
Translating Data Using EXCEL
Data Analysis and Formatting
Initializing Record Layouts
Initializing Record Layouts - Example
Filling Record Layouts
Structure of Transaction FB01
Mapping Data in Transaction FB01
Filling Record Layout BGR00 - Example
Data Analysis and Formatting
Additional Tasks
Converting Data
Converting Legacy System R3 System Data
Structure of a Conversion ProgramData Analysis - Summary
Exercises for Unit Data AnalysisSolutions to Unit Data Analysis
Files in the R3 System Unit 55
Objectives
Files in the R3 System
R3 Client Server Architecture
Transferring Files
Files in the R3 System
Processing FilesOpening Files
Opening Files - Options
Binary Mode and Text Mode
Transferring Data Records
Reading Data Records
Closing Deleting a Sequential File
Filling Record Layouts for Transaction FB01 (1)
Filling Record Layouts for Transaction FB01 (2)
Sequential Files - Summary
Files in the R3 System
DOWNLOAD and UPLOADFunction Module rsquoDOWNLOADrsquo
Example Program DOWNLOAD
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2934
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-29
Function Module rsquoUPLOADrsquo
Example Program UPLOAD
Summary
Exercises for Unit Files in the R3 SystemSolutions to Unit Files in the R3 System
Data Transfer Workbench Unit 56
Data Transfer - Objectives
Data Transfer Workbench
Preparing the Data Transfer
Testing and Executing the Data Transfer
Direct Input Management
Scheduling Direct Input
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer WorkbenchSolutions to Unit Data Transfer Workbench
Batch Input Sessions Unit 57
Objectives
Batch Input Sessions
Batch Input Processing
Batch Input Program
Format of a Batch Input Session
Creating Batch Input Sessions
Function Modules for Batch Input Programs
Structure of the BDC Table
Batch Input Processing
Batch Input Sessions
Batch Input Monitor - FunctionsSession Status
Processing Modes
Entering Data into Screens
Batch Input Processing
Session Statistics
Session Log
Summary
Exercises for Unit Batch Input SessionsSolutions to Unit Batch Input Sessions
Data Transfer Programs Unit 58Objectives
Data Transfer Programs
Customer Transfer Programs
Customer Transfer Program - Tasks
Data Transfer Programs
Batch Input Program Elements
Defining BDC Tables
Structure of the BDC Table
Determining Field Names
Determining Field Names with the Screen Painter
Structure DefinitionFunction Modules for a Batch Input Program
Function Module BDC_OPEN_GROUP
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3034
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-30
Function Module BDC_INSERT
Function Module BDC_CLOSE_GROUP
Structure of a Batch Input Program
Batch Input Program - Overview (I)
Batch Input Program - Overview (II)
Subroutine generate_bdc_dataProgram BDCRECXX (I)
Program BDCRECXX (II)
Program BDCRECXX (III)
Data Transfer Programs
Batch Input Recorder
Batch Input Recording
Recording the First Screen
Recording the Second Screen
Additional Screens Saving
Ending the Recording
Generating Sessions and Programs
Generating Batch Input Sessions
Structure of the Generated Program
Enhancing the Generated Program
Data Transfer Programs
Overview
Call Transaction Program
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (I)
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (II)
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (III)
Displaying the Messtab
Technical Implementation
Return Codes and System FieldsSystem Field Message Output
Generating Sessions When Errors Occur
Summary
Overview
Structure of a Data Transfer Program
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer ProgramSolutions to Unit Data Transfer Program
Additional Techniques Unit 59
ObjectivesAdditional Techniques - Overview
Changing Customers - Payment Transactions
Step Loop Field Names
Structure of the BDC Table
Filling BDC Tables in ABAP
Additional Techniques
Overview - Special Fields
Setting the Cursor in the Batch Input Session
Setting the Cursor in the ABAP Program
Additional Techniques
Successful Transaction EndAdditional Techniques
Processing Batch Input Sessions
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-31
Batch Input Flow
Additional Techniques
Program RSBDCSUB
Batch Input Authorizations
Service Programs
Summary Exercises for Unit Additional TechniquesSolutions for Unit Additional Techniques
Tips amp Tricks Unit 60
Tips and Tricks - Objectives
OSS Notes
Parallel Processing
Resetting Rollback Segments
Additional Tips and Information
Summary
Appendix Unit 61
Job Structure
Scheduling Jobs
Job Distribution
SAP-LUW Chronological Update
Update Principles
Asynchronous Update
Synchronous Update
Local Update
E n h a n c e m e n t s a n d M o d i f i c a t i o n s
Enhancements and Modifications Unit 62
Content
Introduction Contents
Course Overview Diagram
Main Business Scenario
Modifications Unit 63
Objectives
Modifications
What are modifications
Modifications and Upgrades
Modifications
Copying SAP Objects
Making Changes to SAP Copies (Modifications)
Registering Modifications in SSCR
Carrying Out a Registered Modification
Versions
Naming Conventions for Repository Objects
Modifications
Modifications Critical Success Factors (1)
Modifications Critical Success Factors (2)Modifications Critical Success Factors (3)
Documenting Modifications in Programs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-32
Modification Logs An Example
Modifications
Modification Adjustment SPDD and SPAU
Modification Adjustment Objects
Transaction SPAU (Process After Upgrade)
Transporting Adjustments between SystemsThe amount of work necessary at upgrade increases
Modifications Critical Repository Objects
Avoiding Adjustments
Modifications
User Exits
User Exits An Example
Using User Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Modifications
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Unit 64
Objectives
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Table Enhancements Overview
Append Structures
Append Structures at Upgrade
Customizing Includes
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Global Enhancements
Field Exits
Global and Local Field Exits
Creating Field Exits
Enhancements to Dictionary ElementsText Enhancements
Editing Text Enhancements
Keywords
Keyword Change Requirements
Keyword Changes and Release Upgrades
Restoring SAP Keywords
Enhanced Documentation for Data Elements
Customer Documentation
Summary Text Enhancements
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Solutions for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Enhancements using Customer Exits Unit 65
Objectives
Enhancements using Customer Exits
SAP Application Enhancements
Customer Enhancement Projects
SAP Enhancements and Customer Enhancement Projects
Enhancements using Customer Exits
The SAP Enhancement Creation Procedure
Implementing Enhancements in Customer SystemsCreating Customer Enhancement Projects
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-33
Editing Components
Activating Enhancement Projects
Transporting Projects
Summary Enhancement Management
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Function Module ExitsCalling and Creating Function Modules
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Organization of an X Function Group
Customer Source Code
Global Data SAP and the Customer
Subroutines Modules SAP and the Customer
Customer Screens
Customer Screens Modules
Summary Function Module Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Menu Exits
Menu Exit Requirements
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Menu Exits and Function Module Exits
Summary Menu Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Screen Exits
Subscreens in the R3 System
Calling Subscreens
Defining Screen Exits
Calling Customer Subscreens
Transporting Data to Subscreens
Transporting Data from SubscreensEditing Subscreens (1)
Editing Subscreens (2)
Summary Screen Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits Solutions for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits
Business Transaction Events Unit 66
Objectives
Business Transaction Events (BTE)
BTE Possible Scenarios (1)BTE Possible Scenarios (2)
Publish amp Subscribe vs Process Interfaces
Business Transaction Events SAP and the Customer
Finding Business Transaction Events
Creating a Publish amp Subscribe Interface
Differences between Customer Exits and BTEs
Summary
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3434
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-13
Linking to the ABAP Workbench (Active)
Access from ABAP Program
Summary
Tables in the ABAP Dictionary Unit 17
Objectives-Tables in the ABAP DictionaryTables and Fields
Basic Objects of the ABAP Dictionary
Two-Level Domain Concept Example
Transparent Tables
Structures
Technical Settings
Data Class
Size Category
Buffering Tables
Logging
Consistency between ABAP Dictionary and DB
Summary - Tables in the ABAP Dictionary
Exercises on Unit Tables in the ABAP Dictionary nSolutions to Unit Tables in the ABAP Dictionary
Performance during Table Access Unit 18
Objectives - Performance during Table Access
Indexes
Primary Index
Secondary Indexes
Data Access using the Buffer
Table Buffering
Full BufferingGeneric Buffering
Single-Record Buffering
Buffer Synchronization 1
Buffer Synchronization 2
Buffer Synchronization 3
Buffer Synchronization 4
Buffer Synchronization 5
Buffer Synchronization 6
Summary - Performance during Table Access
Exercises on Unit Performance during Table Access
Solutions to Unit Performance during Table Access
Relationships between Tables in the ABAP Dictionary Unit 19
Objectives - Relationships between Tables in the ABAP Dict
Definition of a Foreign Key
Foreign Key Fields Check Fields
Inserting a Data Record
Violation of the Foreign Key Check
Foreign Key Definitions in the Check Field
Requirements for the Field Assignment
Domains Value Tables Fixed Values
Check Table not Equal to Value TableField Assignment is not Unique
Semantic Attributes
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1434
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-14
Text Tables
Generic and Constant Foreign Keys
INCLUDE
Summary (1)
Summary (2)
Exercises on Unit Relationships between Tables nnSolutions to Unit Relationships between Tables m
R3 Repository Info System as seen by ABAP Dictionary Unit 20
Objectives - R3 Repository Information System
Typical Queries Made of the Information System
Selection Options
Functions
Summary (1) - R3 Repository Information System
Exercises on Unit The R3 Repository Information SystemSolutions to Unit The R3 Repository Information System
Changes to Tables Unit 21
Objectives - Changes to Tables
Active and Revised Versions
Runtime Objects
Handling Dependent Objects
Changing Database Tables
How is the Structure Adjusted
Conversion Process 1
Conversion Process 2
Conversion Process 3
Conversion Process 4
Conversion Process 5What to Do when a Conversion Terminates
Append Structures 1
Append Structures 2
Append Structures 3
Summary Changes to Tables
Exercises on Unit Changes to TablesSolutions to Unit Changes to Tables m
Views Unit 22
Objectives - Views
Why do you Need ViewsStructure of a View - Starting Situation
Structure of a View - Join Condition
Structure of a View - Field Selection (Projection)
Structure of a View - Selection Condition
How are Tables Linked to Views
Structure of the View
Data Selection with Views
Database Views
Buffering Database Views
Includes in Database Views
Maintenance ViewsInner and Outer Joins
Summary - Views
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1534
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-15
Exercises on Unit Views mmSolutions to Unit Views
Search Helps Unit 23
Objectives - Search Helps
R3 Standard Function Input HelpDescription of an Input Help
Interface of a Search Help
Description of the Dialog Behavior
Selection Method of a Serach Help
View as Selection Method
Performance of the Input Help
Input Help from the Data Element
Check Table Help
Attaching a Search Help to a Field
Input Help from Dictionary or Screen
Overview Mechanisms for the Input Help
Alternative Search Paths
Collective Search Helps and Elementary Search Helps
Further Options for Search Helps
Non-Standard Search Help Exit
Migration of Existing Input Helps
Summary - Search Helps
Exercises on Unit Search Helps nSolutions to Unit Search Helps nn
Appendix Unit 24
Important Menu Paths and Transactions
Decision Tree for Buffering TablesAppendix
T e c h n i q u e s o f L i s t P r o c e s s i n g
Techniques of List Processing Unit 25
Contents 12
Contents 22
Introduction
Course GoalsCourse Objectives
Course Overview Diagram
Business Scenario
Demo Programs Templates and Solutions
Overview of Exercises
Finding and Executing Programs Unit 26
Objectives
How to Find Existing Programs
SAP Anwendungshierarchie
The Repository Information SystemReport Trees Organization
Finding Report Trees
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1634
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-16
Summary
Creating Lists with ABAP Query Unit 27
Objectives
Creating Lists with ABAP Query
Programs and ABAP QueryABAP Query Organization
Creating Queries
Creating Lists with ABAP Query
Defining Queries
Choosing a Query Area and a Functional Area
Choosing Fields
Assigning Short Descriptions
Defining Local Fields
Basic Lists
Lists with Control Levels
Statistics
Ranked Lists
Interactive Functions - Single-Line Lists
Interactive Functions - Multiple-Line Lists
Saving Lists
Summary
Creating Lists with ABAP Query
Outputting Data to Lists Unit 28
Objectives
List Design Options
Generating a List
Setting the List FormatModifying and Suppressing Headers
Open Page Design TOP-OF-PAGE
Setting Fixed Lead Columns
The FORMAT Statement
Outputting Lines
The WRITE Statement General Syntax
The WRITE Statement Icons and Symbols
The WRITE Statement Checkboxes
Additional Statements for Output Design
Multilingual List Elements
System Fields and List GenerationStandard Functions in Lists
Summary Lists
Exercises for Outputting Data to Lists Solutions for Outputting Data to Lists
Selection Screens Unit 29
Objectives
Selection Screen Overivew
Declaration of Fields with PARAMETERS
Selections with SELECT-OPTIONS
Selection Options and Multiple SelectionsSyntax of the SELECT-OPTIONS Statement
Designing the Selection Screen I
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1734
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-17
Designing the Selection Screen II
Initializing the Selection Screen
General Help and Possible Entries Help (F1 and F4)
Input Checks AT SELECTION-SCREEN
CALL SELECTION-SCREEN I
CALL SELECTION-SCREEN IISelektionsbild Varianten I
Selection Screen Variants II
Summary
Exercises for Selection Screens Solutions for Selection Screens
Logical Databases Unit 30
Objectives
Generating Lists
Advantages of a Logical Database
Logical Databases Overview
LDB F1S Nodes
Sample Program for a Logical Database
LDB Sub-Objects Structure
LDB Sub-Objects Selections
Selection Screen for the Logical Database
Logical Database Dynamic Selections
LDB Sub-Objects Database Programs
Interaction Between LDBs and Programs
Events in Logical Databases
Program Flow and Termination Alternatives
Checking Internal Program Selections I
Checking Internal Program Selections IISummary
Exercises for Logical Databases Solutions for Logical Databases
Programming Data Retrieval Unit 31
Objectives
Programming Data Retrieval
Reading Multiple Database Tables
Reading Multiple Database Tables I
Reading Multiple Database Tables IIa
Reading Multiple Database Tables IIbReading Multiple Database Tables III
Reading Multiple Database Tables IV
Summary
Exercises for Programming Data Retrieval Solutions for Programming Data Retrieval
ABAP Query Administration Unit 32
Objectives
ABAP Query Administration
Maintaining User Groups
Authorizations and ABAP QueryABAP Query Administration
Defining Functional Areas
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1834
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-18
Overview Creating Functional Areas
Example Defining a Functional Area
Defining Functional Areas
Allocating Fields
Additional Information
Allocating Additional TablesAllocating Additional Fields
Selection Options
Allocating ABAP Statements
Summary
Exercises for ABAP Query Administration
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing Unit 33
Unit Objectives Control Level Processing
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Motivation
Control Level Processing
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Creating an Internal Table
Filling an Internal Table
Sorting and Editing an Internal Table
Control Level Processing for Internal Tables
Control Level Processing Schema for Internal Tables
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Generating an Extract Steps
Example Generating an Extract
Sorting and Processing an Extract
Example Control Level Processing
Schema for Control Level Processing of ExtractsData Formatting and Control Level Processing
Comparing Internal Tables and Extracts
Summary Control Level Processing
Exercises for Data Formatting and Control Level Processing Solutions for Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Storing Lists and Background Processing Unit 34
Objectives
Storing Lists and Background Processing
Saving Lists Possibilities
Saving Lists in SAPofficeSaving Lists as PC Files
Saving Lists in a Report Tree
Customizing Report Trees
Functions in Report Trees
Storing Lists and Background Processing
Options for Printing a List
Print Parameters
Program-Controlled Printing
Program-Controlled Printing with GET_PRINT_PARAMETERS
Storing Lists and Background Processing
Background Processing PhasesDefining Steps
Defining Start Times and Releasing Jobs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1934
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-19
Summary
Exercises for Storing Lists and Background Processing Solutions for Storing Lists and Background Processing
Interactive Lists Basics Unit 35
Unit Objectives Interactive ListsInteractive Lists Basics
User Interactions with Lists
Navigating Between Lists
Events Overview
Flow Control in Detail Lists
Creating Detail Lists I
Creating Detail Lists II
Interactive Lists Basics
Questions
HIDE Areas
HIDE Technique Line Selection
Data Buffering in a List System
Valid Line Selection
Field Selection
Interactive Lists Basics
Page Headers in Detail Lists
Interactive Lists Basics
Creating Lists in Modal Dialog Boxes
Summary Interactive Lists
Exercises for Interactive Lists Solutions for Interactive Lists
Creating User Interfaces Unit 36Objectives User Interfaces
User Interfaces Overview
Status Technical View I
Status Technical View II
Creating a GUI Status
Creating a GUI Status Assigning F Keys I
Creating a GUI Status Assigning F Keys II
Creating a GUI Status Menu Bars
Activating Title and Status
Event AT USER-COMMAND
Summary User Interfaces
Special Techniques for Interactive Lists Unit 37
Objectives
Scrolling in Lists
Reading Lists
Modifying Lists
List Navigation
Interactive List Messages
System Fields in Interactive Lists
Summary
Exercises for Creating User Interfaces Solutions for Creating User Interfaces
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2034
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-20
Linking Programs Unit 38
Objectives
Linking Programs
Data Visibility
Data Transfer Using SAP Memory
SETGET ParametersSUBMIT Statement Syntax
Example SUBMIT WITH
Datatransfer Using ABAP Memory
Returning from a Called Program
Summary
Exercises for Linking Programs Solutions for Linking Programs
Lists on the Internet Unit 39
Unit Objectives Special Application
Lists on the Internet
Motivation
The World Wide Web
HTTP Hypertext Transport Protocol
URL Uniform Resource Locator
HTML Hypertext Markup Language
R3 ClientServer Architecture
R3 ClientServer Architecture with ITS
Lists on the Internet
Web Reporting - Overview
Web Reporting Flow
Creating a List Using a URL
Parameters for WWW_GET_REPORTInteractive Lists
Access Authorization
Creating HTML Hyperlinks in Lists
Lists on the Internet
Web Reporting Browser
Releasing Report Trees for the Internet
Summary Special Application
Appendix Unit 40
Menu Data
T r a n s a c t i o n P ro g r a m m i n g
Transaction Programming Unit 41
Content
Introduction Contents
Couse Goal
Course Objectives
Overview Diagram
Main Business Scenario
About the Course Material
Basic Transaction Programming Unit 42
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-21
Objectives - Basics
Components of a Transaction
Writing a Transaction Process
Analyzing the Problem
User Dialogs in the R3 System
Advantages of ScreensComponents of a Screen
Static Screen Sequence
Creating a Screen Attributes
Creating a Screen Layout
Creating a Screen Field List
Writing the Flow Logic
Communictaion Between Screen and ABAP Program
Creating a Transaction Code
Summary Basic Dialog Programming
Screen Objects - List Unit 43
Screen Objects - Objectives
Screen Objects
Screen Objects General Attributes
Attributes of Screen Objects (Key)
Dynamically Modifiable Static Attributes
The System Table SCREEN
Modifying Attributes Dynamically Example
Object Attributes Modification Group
Modifying Attributes Dynamically Program
Screen Objects - Screen
Screen Object Screen
Defining and Managing ScreensScreen Attributes
Dynamic Next Screen Overview
Setting the Next Screen Dynamically
Inserting a Sequence of Screens Dynamically
Calling a Dialog Box Dynamically
Window Coordinates
Setting the Cursor Position Dynamically
Screen Objects - Title Bar
Screen Object Title Bar
Creating and Using Title Bars
Screen Objects - Text FieldScreen Object Text Field
Text Fields Attributes
Creating Text Fields
Hiding Texts Dynamically
Dynamically Modifiable Attributes Text Field
Dynamic Screen Modifications Program
Screen Objects - InputOutput Field
Screen Object InputOutput Field
InputOutput Fields Attributes
Creating InputOutput Fields
InputOutput Fields Automatic Field ChecksInputOutput Fields Default Values in SAP Memory
Defining SETGET Parameter Attributes
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-22
Programming Field Input Checks with an Error Dialog
Checking Groups of Fields
Controlling Error Dialogs
Dialog Message Categories
The FIELD Statement and Data Transport
Calling Modules Conditionally (1)Calling Modules Conditionally (2)
Screen Objects Status icon
Screen Objects Status Icons
Status Icons Attributes
Creating Status Icon Fields
Filling Status Icon Fields
Group Box
Screen Objects Group Boxes
Group Boxes Attributes
Screen Objects Radio Buttons
Screen Objects Radio Buttons and Checkboxes
Radio ButtonsCheckboxes Attributes
Creating a Radio Button Group
Creating a Checkbox
Screen Objects - Pushbutton
Screen Objects Pushbuttons
Pushbuttons Attributes
Creating Pushbuttons
Pushbuttons with Function Type E
Screen Objects - Subscreen
Screen Objects Subscreen (1)
Screen Objects Subscreen (2)
Subscreen AttributesCreating a Subscreen Area
Calling a Subscreen
Subscreens from External Programs
Subscreens Encapsulation in Function Groups
Subscreens in Function Groups Call Sequence
Subscreens in Function Groups Data Transport
Screen Objects - Tabstrip Control
Screen Object Tabstrip Control
Tabstrip Elements
Tab Page Technical View
Tabstrip Controls AttributesCreating a Tabstrip Control
Creating a Tabstrip Control Tabstrip Area
Creating a Tabstip Control Tab Title
Creating a Tabstrip Control Subscreens
Scrolling Locally in a Tabstrip Control
Scrolling Locally in a Tabstrip Control Coding
Scrolling in a Tabstrip Control
Scrolling in a Tabstrip Control Coding
Screen Objects - Table Control
Screen Object Table Control
ABAP Table Control (Functions)Table Control Table Settings
Actions in Table Controls
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-23
Creating Table Control Elements
Table Control Attributes
Creating a Table Control
Creating a Table Control Table Control Area
Creating a Table Control TC Fields (1)
Create Table Control TC Fields (2) Section ColumnTable Control Attributes at Runtime
Table Control Attributes (Structure)
Table Control Elements - Processing
Processing a Table Control (Principle 1)
Filling a Table Control
Changing the Contents of a Table Control
Table Control Applications (Principle)
Filling a Table Control Coding
Changing the Contents of a Table Control 4 Coding
Table Controls Field Transport in the PBO
Table Controls Field Transport in the PAI
Table Control Elements Further Techniques
Changing a Table Control
Changing the Attributes of a Table Control (1)
Changing the Attributes of a Table Control (2)
Table Control Modifying Field Attributes Temporarily
Sorting a Table Control (Example)
Scrolling Page by Page in a Table Control (Example)
Table Control Cursor Position (Example)
Screen Objects - GUI Status
Screen Object GUI Status
Status Technical View (1)
Status Technical View (2)Attributes of Functions
Function Key Settings
Menus and Menu Bars Attributes
Status Attributes
Standard Toolbar Functions and their Reserved function Keys
Creating a Status
Navigation - Targets
Navigation - Dialogs
Screen Objects - List
Screen Objects Lists
Displaying a List Within a TransactionLists in a Modal Dialog Box
Screen Objects - Selection Screen
Screen Object Selection Screen
Entering Value Ranges
Defining and Calling a Selection Screen
Summary Screen Objects
Uumlbung zu Kapitel Screen Objects Solutions Screen Objects Unit
Programming Database Changes Unit 44
Unit ObjectivesProgramming Database Changes
Statements for Database Dialogs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2434
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-24
SAP LUW
Database LUW
SAP R3 System 3-tier Architecture
System Architecture Implicit DB COMMIT
Objective Bundling the DB Changes in an SAP LUW
Programming Database ChangesBundling Techniques Overview
Bunding Using Delayed Inline Changes
Bundling Using Subroutines
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundline Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Techniques
Update Function modules
V1 and V2 Update Function Modules
Logging Records for Update
Deleting Update Entries Rollback in the Dialog Program
Rollback in the Update Program
Asynchronous Update
What Happens in a Commit Work
Comparison of Bundling Techniques
Programming Database Updates
Why Set Locks
Database Locks
SAP Locking Concept
Setting Logical Locks
SAP Lock ObjectsENQUEUE and DEQUEUE Function Modules
Calling the Function Modules
The Lock Table
Validity of Locks Scope = 2
Programming Database Updates
SAP Authorization Concept
Authorization Checks
User Master Record Authorizations
Authorization Checks for Transactions
Summary
Exercises Programming Database Updates Unit Solutions Programming Database Updates Unit
Complex Transactions Unit 45
Unit Objectives
Complex Transactions
Synchronous Calls Overview
Calling a Report Program
Calling a Transaction
Encapsulating Dialogs in Function Modules
Synchronous Program Calls Main Memory Contents
Complex TransactionsAsynchronous Calls
Calling Programs Asynchronously
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2534
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-25
Complex Transactions
Passing Data Overview
Passing Data Using the Interface of ABAP Programs
The WITH Addition in the SUBMIT Statement
Memory Areas Logical Model
ABAP MemoryPassing Parameters using the SAP Memory
Passing Parameters (SAP Memory)
Complex Transactions
Synchronous Program Calls SAP LUWs
Asynchronous Program Calls SAP LUWs
Program Calls Visible Data and LUWs
Complex Transactions
RFC Scenario R3 - R3
Enabling Function Modules for RFC
RFC Using ABAP Function Modules
Program Context of a Remote Function
RFC Calls System Exceptions
Complex Transactions
Remote Function Call Overview
Process Diagram Synchronous RFC
Process Diagram Asynchronous RFC
Process Diagram Transactional RFC
Transactional RFC (tRFC) Introduction
tRFC Properties
Complex Transactions
Lock Entries for Local Program Calls
Lock Entries for RFC Calls
Summary Exercises Complex Transactions Unit Solutions Complex Transactions Unit
Static Attributes in the Screen Painter Unit 46
Screen Attributes (1)
Screen Attributes (2)
General Attributes
Dictionary Attributes
Program Attributes
Display Attributes
Special Attributes for Subscreens and Tabstrip ControlsSpecial Attributes for Table Controls
Database Updates Further Information Unit 47
Objectives
Database Updates Further Information
Asynchronous Update
Synchronous Update
Local Update
SAP LUW Timescale of Updates
Database Updates Further Information
V1 and V2 Update Function ModulesV1 Update
V2 Update
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2634
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-26
Database Updates Further Information
Validity of Locks Scope = 1
Validity of Locks Scope = 2
Validity of Locks Scope = 3
ENQUEUE Function Modules Interface Parameters
Summary
Complex Transactions Further Information Unit 48
CALL TRANSACTION lsquoTA01rsquo and SUBMIT lsquoREP01rsquo AND RETURN
Implicit End of a Program or LEAVE PROGRAM
LEAVE TO TRANSACTION lsquoTA01rsquo
SUBMIT lsquoREP01rsquo
CALL FUNCTION lsquoFUNC1rsquoPERFORM form1 IN PROGRAM program
Help Functions Unit 49
Overview Standard F1 and F4 Functions
The Search Help Concept
Dialog for an Immediate Hit List
Dialog with Preselection
Dialog for Selecting a Search Help
Search Help Concepts
Search Helps
Defining the Dialog Fields
Defining the Data Selection
Collective Search Helps
Search Help Concepts
Linking Search Helps to Screen Fields
Search Help Concepts
Programmed Help Functions OverviewProgrammed F1 and F4 Help
The POH and POV Events Process
Function Modules for Data Transport
Field Transport to and from the Screen
Determining the Contents of Screen Fields ( POV POH )
Placing Values in Screen Fields ( POV )
Special F1 Functions
Displaying Input Values for a Table Field (POV)
Search Help Concepts
Overview Input Help Mechanisms
Migrating Existing Input Help
Assigning Number Range Numbers Unit 50
Objectives
Overview
Number Range Objects
Number Range Intervals
Sub-objects
Assigning Internal Numbers
Checking External Numbers
Number Range Information
Accessing Table NRIV 1 Without a Buffer Accessing Table NRIV 2 Without a Buffer
Buffering Number Ranges
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2734
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-27
Using Function Groups to Administer Number Ranges
Summary 1
Summary 2
Creating Change Documents Unit 51
ObjectivesOverview
Change Document Structure
Change Relevance
Change Document Objects
Generating Update Programs
INCLUDE Program Structure
Application Program
Change Document Objects and Internal Tables
Reading Change Documents
Using Function Groups to Edit Change Documents
Summary (1)
Summary (2)
Appendix Unit 52
Documentation ReferencesGlossary Index
I n t e r f a c e s f o r D a t a T r a n s f e r
Interfaces for Data Transfer Unit 53
Content
Data Transfer
Objectives
Data Transfer
Transferring Data Into the R3 System
Direct Data Transfer
Data Transfer Using Interfaces
Data Transfer Workbench
Data Analysis
Data Transfer
Analyzing the SAP Transaction
Assigning DataFormat Conversion
Transferring Legacy Data into the R3 System
Data Transfer Methods
Knowledge Tools
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer
Data Analysis and Formatting Unit 54
Data Analysis - Objectives
Data Analysis and Formatting
Standard Transfer Interfaces for Standard Transfer
Standard Transfer - Tasks
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2834
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-28
IMG Documentation
Data Transfer Workbench (DTW)
Documentation in the DTW
Data Analysis and Formatting
Record Layout Types
FB01 Record Layout StructureSample Data for Record Layouts
Generating Test Data in the DTW
Data Analysis and Formatting
Translating Data
Translating Data in the Legacy System
Generating SAP Structures in the DTW
Translating Data in the R3 System
Translating Data Types
Translating Data for Transaction FB01
Translating Data - Example
Translating Data Using EXCEL
Data Analysis and Formatting
Initializing Record Layouts
Initializing Record Layouts - Example
Filling Record Layouts
Structure of Transaction FB01
Mapping Data in Transaction FB01
Filling Record Layout BGR00 - Example
Data Analysis and Formatting
Additional Tasks
Converting Data
Converting Legacy System R3 System Data
Structure of a Conversion ProgramData Analysis - Summary
Exercises for Unit Data AnalysisSolutions to Unit Data Analysis
Files in the R3 System Unit 55
Objectives
Files in the R3 System
R3 Client Server Architecture
Transferring Files
Files in the R3 System
Processing FilesOpening Files
Opening Files - Options
Binary Mode and Text Mode
Transferring Data Records
Reading Data Records
Closing Deleting a Sequential File
Filling Record Layouts for Transaction FB01 (1)
Filling Record Layouts for Transaction FB01 (2)
Sequential Files - Summary
Files in the R3 System
DOWNLOAD and UPLOADFunction Module rsquoDOWNLOADrsquo
Example Program DOWNLOAD
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2934
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-29
Function Module rsquoUPLOADrsquo
Example Program UPLOAD
Summary
Exercises for Unit Files in the R3 SystemSolutions to Unit Files in the R3 System
Data Transfer Workbench Unit 56
Data Transfer - Objectives
Data Transfer Workbench
Preparing the Data Transfer
Testing and Executing the Data Transfer
Direct Input Management
Scheduling Direct Input
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer WorkbenchSolutions to Unit Data Transfer Workbench
Batch Input Sessions Unit 57
Objectives
Batch Input Sessions
Batch Input Processing
Batch Input Program
Format of a Batch Input Session
Creating Batch Input Sessions
Function Modules for Batch Input Programs
Structure of the BDC Table
Batch Input Processing
Batch Input Sessions
Batch Input Monitor - FunctionsSession Status
Processing Modes
Entering Data into Screens
Batch Input Processing
Session Statistics
Session Log
Summary
Exercises for Unit Batch Input SessionsSolutions to Unit Batch Input Sessions
Data Transfer Programs Unit 58Objectives
Data Transfer Programs
Customer Transfer Programs
Customer Transfer Program - Tasks
Data Transfer Programs
Batch Input Program Elements
Defining BDC Tables
Structure of the BDC Table
Determining Field Names
Determining Field Names with the Screen Painter
Structure DefinitionFunction Modules for a Batch Input Program
Function Module BDC_OPEN_GROUP
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3034
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-30
Function Module BDC_INSERT
Function Module BDC_CLOSE_GROUP
Structure of a Batch Input Program
Batch Input Program - Overview (I)
Batch Input Program - Overview (II)
Subroutine generate_bdc_dataProgram BDCRECXX (I)
Program BDCRECXX (II)
Program BDCRECXX (III)
Data Transfer Programs
Batch Input Recorder
Batch Input Recording
Recording the First Screen
Recording the Second Screen
Additional Screens Saving
Ending the Recording
Generating Sessions and Programs
Generating Batch Input Sessions
Structure of the Generated Program
Enhancing the Generated Program
Data Transfer Programs
Overview
Call Transaction Program
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (I)
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (II)
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (III)
Displaying the Messtab
Technical Implementation
Return Codes and System FieldsSystem Field Message Output
Generating Sessions When Errors Occur
Summary
Overview
Structure of a Data Transfer Program
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer ProgramSolutions to Unit Data Transfer Program
Additional Techniques Unit 59
ObjectivesAdditional Techniques - Overview
Changing Customers - Payment Transactions
Step Loop Field Names
Structure of the BDC Table
Filling BDC Tables in ABAP
Additional Techniques
Overview - Special Fields
Setting the Cursor in the Batch Input Session
Setting the Cursor in the ABAP Program
Additional Techniques
Successful Transaction EndAdditional Techniques
Processing Batch Input Sessions
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-31
Batch Input Flow
Additional Techniques
Program RSBDCSUB
Batch Input Authorizations
Service Programs
Summary Exercises for Unit Additional TechniquesSolutions for Unit Additional Techniques
Tips amp Tricks Unit 60
Tips and Tricks - Objectives
OSS Notes
Parallel Processing
Resetting Rollback Segments
Additional Tips and Information
Summary
Appendix Unit 61
Job Structure
Scheduling Jobs
Job Distribution
SAP-LUW Chronological Update
Update Principles
Asynchronous Update
Synchronous Update
Local Update
E n h a n c e m e n t s a n d M o d i f i c a t i o n s
Enhancements and Modifications Unit 62
Content
Introduction Contents
Course Overview Diagram
Main Business Scenario
Modifications Unit 63
Objectives
Modifications
What are modifications
Modifications and Upgrades
Modifications
Copying SAP Objects
Making Changes to SAP Copies (Modifications)
Registering Modifications in SSCR
Carrying Out a Registered Modification
Versions
Naming Conventions for Repository Objects
Modifications
Modifications Critical Success Factors (1)
Modifications Critical Success Factors (2)Modifications Critical Success Factors (3)
Documenting Modifications in Programs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-32
Modification Logs An Example
Modifications
Modification Adjustment SPDD and SPAU
Modification Adjustment Objects
Transaction SPAU (Process After Upgrade)
Transporting Adjustments between SystemsThe amount of work necessary at upgrade increases
Modifications Critical Repository Objects
Avoiding Adjustments
Modifications
User Exits
User Exits An Example
Using User Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Modifications
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Unit 64
Objectives
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Table Enhancements Overview
Append Structures
Append Structures at Upgrade
Customizing Includes
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Global Enhancements
Field Exits
Global and Local Field Exits
Creating Field Exits
Enhancements to Dictionary ElementsText Enhancements
Editing Text Enhancements
Keywords
Keyword Change Requirements
Keyword Changes and Release Upgrades
Restoring SAP Keywords
Enhanced Documentation for Data Elements
Customer Documentation
Summary Text Enhancements
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Solutions for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Enhancements using Customer Exits Unit 65
Objectives
Enhancements using Customer Exits
SAP Application Enhancements
Customer Enhancement Projects
SAP Enhancements and Customer Enhancement Projects
Enhancements using Customer Exits
The SAP Enhancement Creation Procedure
Implementing Enhancements in Customer SystemsCreating Customer Enhancement Projects
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-33
Editing Components
Activating Enhancement Projects
Transporting Projects
Summary Enhancement Management
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Function Module ExitsCalling and Creating Function Modules
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Organization of an X Function Group
Customer Source Code
Global Data SAP and the Customer
Subroutines Modules SAP and the Customer
Customer Screens
Customer Screens Modules
Summary Function Module Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Menu Exits
Menu Exit Requirements
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Menu Exits and Function Module Exits
Summary Menu Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Screen Exits
Subscreens in the R3 System
Calling Subscreens
Defining Screen Exits
Calling Customer Subscreens
Transporting Data to Subscreens
Transporting Data from SubscreensEditing Subscreens (1)
Editing Subscreens (2)
Summary Screen Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits Solutions for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits
Business Transaction Events Unit 66
Objectives
Business Transaction Events (BTE)
BTE Possible Scenarios (1)BTE Possible Scenarios (2)
Publish amp Subscribe vs Process Interfaces
Business Transaction Events SAP and the Customer
Finding Business Transaction Events
Creating a Publish amp Subscribe Interface
Differences between Customer Exits and BTEs
Summary
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3434
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1434
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-14
Text Tables
Generic and Constant Foreign Keys
INCLUDE
Summary (1)
Summary (2)
Exercises on Unit Relationships between Tables nnSolutions to Unit Relationships between Tables m
R3 Repository Info System as seen by ABAP Dictionary Unit 20
Objectives - R3 Repository Information System
Typical Queries Made of the Information System
Selection Options
Functions
Summary (1) - R3 Repository Information System
Exercises on Unit The R3 Repository Information SystemSolutions to Unit The R3 Repository Information System
Changes to Tables Unit 21
Objectives - Changes to Tables
Active and Revised Versions
Runtime Objects
Handling Dependent Objects
Changing Database Tables
How is the Structure Adjusted
Conversion Process 1
Conversion Process 2
Conversion Process 3
Conversion Process 4
Conversion Process 5What to Do when a Conversion Terminates
Append Structures 1
Append Structures 2
Append Structures 3
Summary Changes to Tables
Exercises on Unit Changes to TablesSolutions to Unit Changes to Tables m
Views Unit 22
Objectives - Views
Why do you Need ViewsStructure of a View - Starting Situation
Structure of a View - Join Condition
Structure of a View - Field Selection (Projection)
Structure of a View - Selection Condition
How are Tables Linked to Views
Structure of the View
Data Selection with Views
Database Views
Buffering Database Views
Includes in Database Views
Maintenance ViewsInner and Outer Joins
Summary - Views
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1534
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-15
Exercises on Unit Views mmSolutions to Unit Views
Search Helps Unit 23
Objectives - Search Helps
R3 Standard Function Input HelpDescription of an Input Help
Interface of a Search Help
Description of the Dialog Behavior
Selection Method of a Serach Help
View as Selection Method
Performance of the Input Help
Input Help from the Data Element
Check Table Help
Attaching a Search Help to a Field
Input Help from Dictionary or Screen
Overview Mechanisms for the Input Help
Alternative Search Paths
Collective Search Helps and Elementary Search Helps
Further Options for Search Helps
Non-Standard Search Help Exit
Migration of Existing Input Helps
Summary - Search Helps
Exercises on Unit Search Helps nSolutions to Unit Search Helps nn
Appendix Unit 24
Important Menu Paths and Transactions
Decision Tree for Buffering TablesAppendix
T e c h n i q u e s o f L i s t P r o c e s s i n g
Techniques of List Processing Unit 25
Contents 12
Contents 22
Introduction
Course GoalsCourse Objectives
Course Overview Diagram
Business Scenario
Demo Programs Templates and Solutions
Overview of Exercises
Finding and Executing Programs Unit 26
Objectives
How to Find Existing Programs
SAP Anwendungshierarchie
The Repository Information SystemReport Trees Organization
Finding Report Trees
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1634
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-16
Summary
Creating Lists with ABAP Query Unit 27
Objectives
Creating Lists with ABAP Query
Programs and ABAP QueryABAP Query Organization
Creating Queries
Creating Lists with ABAP Query
Defining Queries
Choosing a Query Area and a Functional Area
Choosing Fields
Assigning Short Descriptions
Defining Local Fields
Basic Lists
Lists with Control Levels
Statistics
Ranked Lists
Interactive Functions - Single-Line Lists
Interactive Functions - Multiple-Line Lists
Saving Lists
Summary
Creating Lists with ABAP Query
Outputting Data to Lists Unit 28
Objectives
List Design Options
Generating a List
Setting the List FormatModifying and Suppressing Headers
Open Page Design TOP-OF-PAGE
Setting Fixed Lead Columns
The FORMAT Statement
Outputting Lines
The WRITE Statement General Syntax
The WRITE Statement Icons and Symbols
The WRITE Statement Checkboxes
Additional Statements for Output Design
Multilingual List Elements
System Fields and List GenerationStandard Functions in Lists
Summary Lists
Exercises for Outputting Data to Lists Solutions for Outputting Data to Lists
Selection Screens Unit 29
Objectives
Selection Screen Overivew
Declaration of Fields with PARAMETERS
Selections with SELECT-OPTIONS
Selection Options and Multiple SelectionsSyntax of the SELECT-OPTIONS Statement
Designing the Selection Screen I
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1734
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-17
Designing the Selection Screen II
Initializing the Selection Screen
General Help and Possible Entries Help (F1 and F4)
Input Checks AT SELECTION-SCREEN
CALL SELECTION-SCREEN I
CALL SELECTION-SCREEN IISelektionsbild Varianten I
Selection Screen Variants II
Summary
Exercises for Selection Screens Solutions for Selection Screens
Logical Databases Unit 30
Objectives
Generating Lists
Advantages of a Logical Database
Logical Databases Overview
LDB F1S Nodes
Sample Program for a Logical Database
LDB Sub-Objects Structure
LDB Sub-Objects Selections
Selection Screen for the Logical Database
Logical Database Dynamic Selections
LDB Sub-Objects Database Programs
Interaction Between LDBs and Programs
Events in Logical Databases
Program Flow and Termination Alternatives
Checking Internal Program Selections I
Checking Internal Program Selections IISummary
Exercises for Logical Databases Solutions for Logical Databases
Programming Data Retrieval Unit 31
Objectives
Programming Data Retrieval
Reading Multiple Database Tables
Reading Multiple Database Tables I
Reading Multiple Database Tables IIa
Reading Multiple Database Tables IIbReading Multiple Database Tables III
Reading Multiple Database Tables IV
Summary
Exercises for Programming Data Retrieval Solutions for Programming Data Retrieval
ABAP Query Administration Unit 32
Objectives
ABAP Query Administration
Maintaining User Groups
Authorizations and ABAP QueryABAP Query Administration
Defining Functional Areas
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1834
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-18
Overview Creating Functional Areas
Example Defining a Functional Area
Defining Functional Areas
Allocating Fields
Additional Information
Allocating Additional TablesAllocating Additional Fields
Selection Options
Allocating ABAP Statements
Summary
Exercises for ABAP Query Administration
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing Unit 33
Unit Objectives Control Level Processing
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Motivation
Control Level Processing
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Creating an Internal Table
Filling an Internal Table
Sorting and Editing an Internal Table
Control Level Processing for Internal Tables
Control Level Processing Schema for Internal Tables
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Generating an Extract Steps
Example Generating an Extract
Sorting and Processing an Extract
Example Control Level Processing
Schema for Control Level Processing of ExtractsData Formatting and Control Level Processing
Comparing Internal Tables and Extracts
Summary Control Level Processing
Exercises for Data Formatting and Control Level Processing Solutions for Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Storing Lists and Background Processing Unit 34
Objectives
Storing Lists and Background Processing
Saving Lists Possibilities
Saving Lists in SAPofficeSaving Lists as PC Files
Saving Lists in a Report Tree
Customizing Report Trees
Functions in Report Trees
Storing Lists and Background Processing
Options for Printing a List
Print Parameters
Program-Controlled Printing
Program-Controlled Printing with GET_PRINT_PARAMETERS
Storing Lists and Background Processing
Background Processing PhasesDefining Steps
Defining Start Times and Releasing Jobs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1934
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-19
Summary
Exercises for Storing Lists and Background Processing Solutions for Storing Lists and Background Processing
Interactive Lists Basics Unit 35
Unit Objectives Interactive ListsInteractive Lists Basics
User Interactions with Lists
Navigating Between Lists
Events Overview
Flow Control in Detail Lists
Creating Detail Lists I
Creating Detail Lists II
Interactive Lists Basics
Questions
HIDE Areas
HIDE Technique Line Selection
Data Buffering in a List System
Valid Line Selection
Field Selection
Interactive Lists Basics
Page Headers in Detail Lists
Interactive Lists Basics
Creating Lists in Modal Dialog Boxes
Summary Interactive Lists
Exercises for Interactive Lists Solutions for Interactive Lists
Creating User Interfaces Unit 36Objectives User Interfaces
User Interfaces Overview
Status Technical View I
Status Technical View II
Creating a GUI Status
Creating a GUI Status Assigning F Keys I
Creating a GUI Status Assigning F Keys II
Creating a GUI Status Menu Bars
Activating Title and Status
Event AT USER-COMMAND
Summary User Interfaces
Special Techniques for Interactive Lists Unit 37
Objectives
Scrolling in Lists
Reading Lists
Modifying Lists
List Navigation
Interactive List Messages
System Fields in Interactive Lists
Summary
Exercises for Creating User Interfaces Solutions for Creating User Interfaces
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2034
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-20
Linking Programs Unit 38
Objectives
Linking Programs
Data Visibility
Data Transfer Using SAP Memory
SETGET ParametersSUBMIT Statement Syntax
Example SUBMIT WITH
Datatransfer Using ABAP Memory
Returning from a Called Program
Summary
Exercises for Linking Programs Solutions for Linking Programs
Lists on the Internet Unit 39
Unit Objectives Special Application
Lists on the Internet
Motivation
The World Wide Web
HTTP Hypertext Transport Protocol
URL Uniform Resource Locator
HTML Hypertext Markup Language
R3 ClientServer Architecture
R3 ClientServer Architecture with ITS
Lists on the Internet
Web Reporting - Overview
Web Reporting Flow
Creating a List Using a URL
Parameters for WWW_GET_REPORTInteractive Lists
Access Authorization
Creating HTML Hyperlinks in Lists
Lists on the Internet
Web Reporting Browser
Releasing Report Trees for the Internet
Summary Special Application
Appendix Unit 40
Menu Data
T r a n s a c t i o n P ro g r a m m i n g
Transaction Programming Unit 41
Content
Introduction Contents
Couse Goal
Course Objectives
Overview Diagram
Main Business Scenario
About the Course Material
Basic Transaction Programming Unit 42
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-21
Objectives - Basics
Components of a Transaction
Writing a Transaction Process
Analyzing the Problem
User Dialogs in the R3 System
Advantages of ScreensComponents of a Screen
Static Screen Sequence
Creating a Screen Attributes
Creating a Screen Layout
Creating a Screen Field List
Writing the Flow Logic
Communictaion Between Screen and ABAP Program
Creating a Transaction Code
Summary Basic Dialog Programming
Screen Objects - List Unit 43
Screen Objects - Objectives
Screen Objects
Screen Objects General Attributes
Attributes of Screen Objects (Key)
Dynamically Modifiable Static Attributes
The System Table SCREEN
Modifying Attributes Dynamically Example
Object Attributes Modification Group
Modifying Attributes Dynamically Program
Screen Objects - Screen
Screen Object Screen
Defining and Managing ScreensScreen Attributes
Dynamic Next Screen Overview
Setting the Next Screen Dynamically
Inserting a Sequence of Screens Dynamically
Calling a Dialog Box Dynamically
Window Coordinates
Setting the Cursor Position Dynamically
Screen Objects - Title Bar
Screen Object Title Bar
Creating and Using Title Bars
Screen Objects - Text FieldScreen Object Text Field
Text Fields Attributes
Creating Text Fields
Hiding Texts Dynamically
Dynamically Modifiable Attributes Text Field
Dynamic Screen Modifications Program
Screen Objects - InputOutput Field
Screen Object InputOutput Field
InputOutput Fields Attributes
Creating InputOutput Fields
InputOutput Fields Automatic Field ChecksInputOutput Fields Default Values in SAP Memory
Defining SETGET Parameter Attributes
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-22
Programming Field Input Checks with an Error Dialog
Checking Groups of Fields
Controlling Error Dialogs
Dialog Message Categories
The FIELD Statement and Data Transport
Calling Modules Conditionally (1)Calling Modules Conditionally (2)
Screen Objects Status icon
Screen Objects Status Icons
Status Icons Attributes
Creating Status Icon Fields
Filling Status Icon Fields
Group Box
Screen Objects Group Boxes
Group Boxes Attributes
Screen Objects Radio Buttons
Screen Objects Radio Buttons and Checkboxes
Radio ButtonsCheckboxes Attributes
Creating a Radio Button Group
Creating a Checkbox
Screen Objects - Pushbutton
Screen Objects Pushbuttons
Pushbuttons Attributes
Creating Pushbuttons
Pushbuttons with Function Type E
Screen Objects - Subscreen
Screen Objects Subscreen (1)
Screen Objects Subscreen (2)
Subscreen AttributesCreating a Subscreen Area
Calling a Subscreen
Subscreens from External Programs
Subscreens Encapsulation in Function Groups
Subscreens in Function Groups Call Sequence
Subscreens in Function Groups Data Transport
Screen Objects - Tabstrip Control
Screen Object Tabstrip Control
Tabstrip Elements
Tab Page Technical View
Tabstrip Controls AttributesCreating a Tabstrip Control
Creating a Tabstrip Control Tabstrip Area
Creating a Tabstip Control Tab Title
Creating a Tabstrip Control Subscreens
Scrolling Locally in a Tabstrip Control
Scrolling Locally in a Tabstrip Control Coding
Scrolling in a Tabstrip Control
Scrolling in a Tabstrip Control Coding
Screen Objects - Table Control
Screen Object Table Control
ABAP Table Control (Functions)Table Control Table Settings
Actions in Table Controls
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-23
Creating Table Control Elements
Table Control Attributes
Creating a Table Control
Creating a Table Control Table Control Area
Creating a Table Control TC Fields (1)
Create Table Control TC Fields (2) Section ColumnTable Control Attributes at Runtime
Table Control Attributes (Structure)
Table Control Elements - Processing
Processing a Table Control (Principle 1)
Filling a Table Control
Changing the Contents of a Table Control
Table Control Applications (Principle)
Filling a Table Control Coding
Changing the Contents of a Table Control 4 Coding
Table Controls Field Transport in the PBO
Table Controls Field Transport in the PAI
Table Control Elements Further Techniques
Changing a Table Control
Changing the Attributes of a Table Control (1)
Changing the Attributes of a Table Control (2)
Table Control Modifying Field Attributes Temporarily
Sorting a Table Control (Example)
Scrolling Page by Page in a Table Control (Example)
Table Control Cursor Position (Example)
Screen Objects - GUI Status
Screen Object GUI Status
Status Technical View (1)
Status Technical View (2)Attributes of Functions
Function Key Settings
Menus and Menu Bars Attributes
Status Attributes
Standard Toolbar Functions and their Reserved function Keys
Creating a Status
Navigation - Targets
Navigation - Dialogs
Screen Objects - List
Screen Objects Lists
Displaying a List Within a TransactionLists in a Modal Dialog Box
Screen Objects - Selection Screen
Screen Object Selection Screen
Entering Value Ranges
Defining and Calling a Selection Screen
Summary Screen Objects
Uumlbung zu Kapitel Screen Objects Solutions Screen Objects Unit
Programming Database Changes Unit 44
Unit ObjectivesProgramming Database Changes
Statements for Database Dialogs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2434
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-24
SAP LUW
Database LUW
SAP R3 System 3-tier Architecture
System Architecture Implicit DB COMMIT
Objective Bundling the DB Changes in an SAP LUW
Programming Database ChangesBundling Techniques Overview
Bunding Using Delayed Inline Changes
Bundling Using Subroutines
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundline Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Techniques
Update Function modules
V1 and V2 Update Function Modules
Logging Records for Update
Deleting Update Entries Rollback in the Dialog Program
Rollback in the Update Program
Asynchronous Update
What Happens in a Commit Work
Comparison of Bundling Techniques
Programming Database Updates
Why Set Locks
Database Locks
SAP Locking Concept
Setting Logical Locks
SAP Lock ObjectsENQUEUE and DEQUEUE Function Modules
Calling the Function Modules
The Lock Table
Validity of Locks Scope = 2
Programming Database Updates
SAP Authorization Concept
Authorization Checks
User Master Record Authorizations
Authorization Checks for Transactions
Summary
Exercises Programming Database Updates Unit Solutions Programming Database Updates Unit
Complex Transactions Unit 45
Unit Objectives
Complex Transactions
Synchronous Calls Overview
Calling a Report Program
Calling a Transaction
Encapsulating Dialogs in Function Modules
Synchronous Program Calls Main Memory Contents
Complex TransactionsAsynchronous Calls
Calling Programs Asynchronously
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2534
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-25
Complex Transactions
Passing Data Overview
Passing Data Using the Interface of ABAP Programs
The WITH Addition in the SUBMIT Statement
Memory Areas Logical Model
ABAP MemoryPassing Parameters using the SAP Memory
Passing Parameters (SAP Memory)
Complex Transactions
Synchronous Program Calls SAP LUWs
Asynchronous Program Calls SAP LUWs
Program Calls Visible Data and LUWs
Complex Transactions
RFC Scenario R3 - R3
Enabling Function Modules for RFC
RFC Using ABAP Function Modules
Program Context of a Remote Function
RFC Calls System Exceptions
Complex Transactions
Remote Function Call Overview
Process Diagram Synchronous RFC
Process Diagram Asynchronous RFC
Process Diagram Transactional RFC
Transactional RFC (tRFC) Introduction
tRFC Properties
Complex Transactions
Lock Entries for Local Program Calls
Lock Entries for RFC Calls
Summary Exercises Complex Transactions Unit Solutions Complex Transactions Unit
Static Attributes in the Screen Painter Unit 46
Screen Attributes (1)
Screen Attributes (2)
General Attributes
Dictionary Attributes
Program Attributes
Display Attributes
Special Attributes for Subscreens and Tabstrip ControlsSpecial Attributes for Table Controls
Database Updates Further Information Unit 47
Objectives
Database Updates Further Information
Asynchronous Update
Synchronous Update
Local Update
SAP LUW Timescale of Updates
Database Updates Further Information
V1 and V2 Update Function ModulesV1 Update
V2 Update
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2634
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-26
Database Updates Further Information
Validity of Locks Scope = 1
Validity of Locks Scope = 2
Validity of Locks Scope = 3
ENQUEUE Function Modules Interface Parameters
Summary
Complex Transactions Further Information Unit 48
CALL TRANSACTION lsquoTA01rsquo and SUBMIT lsquoREP01rsquo AND RETURN
Implicit End of a Program or LEAVE PROGRAM
LEAVE TO TRANSACTION lsquoTA01rsquo
SUBMIT lsquoREP01rsquo
CALL FUNCTION lsquoFUNC1rsquoPERFORM form1 IN PROGRAM program
Help Functions Unit 49
Overview Standard F1 and F4 Functions
The Search Help Concept
Dialog for an Immediate Hit List
Dialog with Preselection
Dialog for Selecting a Search Help
Search Help Concepts
Search Helps
Defining the Dialog Fields
Defining the Data Selection
Collective Search Helps
Search Help Concepts
Linking Search Helps to Screen Fields
Search Help Concepts
Programmed Help Functions OverviewProgrammed F1 and F4 Help
The POH and POV Events Process
Function Modules for Data Transport
Field Transport to and from the Screen
Determining the Contents of Screen Fields ( POV POH )
Placing Values in Screen Fields ( POV )
Special F1 Functions
Displaying Input Values for a Table Field (POV)
Search Help Concepts
Overview Input Help Mechanisms
Migrating Existing Input Help
Assigning Number Range Numbers Unit 50
Objectives
Overview
Number Range Objects
Number Range Intervals
Sub-objects
Assigning Internal Numbers
Checking External Numbers
Number Range Information
Accessing Table NRIV 1 Without a Buffer Accessing Table NRIV 2 Without a Buffer
Buffering Number Ranges
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2734
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-27
Using Function Groups to Administer Number Ranges
Summary 1
Summary 2
Creating Change Documents Unit 51
ObjectivesOverview
Change Document Structure
Change Relevance
Change Document Objects
Generating Update Programs
INCLUDE Program Structure
Application Program
Change Document Objects and Internal Tables
Reading Change Documents
Using Function Groups to Edit Change Documents
Summary (1)
Summary (2)
Appendix Unit 52
Documentation ReferencesGlossary Index
I n t e r f a c e s f o r D a t a T r a n s f e r
Interfaces for Data Transfer Unit 53
Content
Data Transfer
Objectives
Data Transfer
Transferring Data Into the R3 System
Direct Data Transfer
Data Transfer Using Interfaces
Data Transfer Workbench
Data Analysis
Data Transfer
Analyzing the SAP Transaction
Assigning DataFormat Conversion
Transferring Legacy Data into the R3 System
Data Transfer Methods
Knowledge Tools
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer
Data Analysis and Formatting Unit 54
Data Analysis - Objectives
Data Analysis and Formatting
Standard Transfer Interfaces for Standard Transfer
Standard Transfer - Tasks
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2834
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-28
IMG Documentation
Data Transfer Workbench (DTW)
Documentation in the DTW
Data Analysis and Formatting
Record Layout Types
FB01 Record Layout StructureSample Data for Record Layouts
Generating Test Data in the DTW
Data Analysis and Formatting
Translating Data
Translating Data in the Legacy System
Generating SAP Structures in the DTW
Translating Data in the R3 System
Translating Data Types
Translating Data for Transaction FB01
Translating Data - Example
Translating Data Using EXCEL
Data Analysis and Formatting
Initializing Record Layouts
Initializing Record Layouts - Example
Filling Record Layouts
Structure of Transaction FB01
Mapping Data in Transaction FB01
Filling Record Layout BGR00 - Example
Data Analysis and Formatting
Additional Tasks
Converting Data
Converting Legacy System R3 System Data
Structure of a Conversion ProgramData Analysis - Summary
Exercises for Unit Data AnalysisSolutions to Unit Data Analysis
Files in the R3 System Unit 55
Objectives
Files in the R3 System
R3 Client Server Architecture
Transferring Files
Files in the R3 System
Processing FilesOpening Files
Opening Files - Options
Binary Mode and Text Mode
Transferring Data Records
Reading Data Records
Closing Deleting a Sequential File
Filling Record Layouts for Transaction FB01 (1)
Filling Record Layouts for Transaction FB01 (2)
Sequential Files - Summary
Files in the R3 System
DOWNLOAD and UPLOADFunction Module rsquoDOWNLOADrsquo
Example Program DOWNLOAD
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2934
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-29
Function Module rsquoUPLOADrsquo
Example Program UPLOAD
Summary
Exercises for Unit Files in the R3 SystemSolutions to Unit Files in the R3 System
Data Transfer Workbench Unit 56
Data Transfer - Objectives
Data Transfer Workbench
Preparing the Data Transfer
Testing and Executing the Data Transfer
Direct Input Management
Scheduling Direct Input
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer WorkbenchSolutions to Unit Data Transfer Workbench
Batch Input Sessions Unit 57
Objectives
Batch Input Sessions
Batch Input Processing
Batch Input Program
Format of a Batch Input Session
Creating Batch Input Sessions
Function Modules for Batch Input Programs
Structure of the BDC Table
Batch Input Processing
Batch Input Sessions
Batch Input Monitor - FunctionsSession Status
Processing Modes
Entering Data into Screens
Batch Input Processing
Session Statistics
Session Log
Summary
Exercises for Unit Batch Input SessionsSolutions to Unit Batch Input Sessions
Data Transfer Programs Unit 58Objectives
Data Transfer Programs
Customer Transfer Programs
Customer Transfer Program - Tasks
Data Transfer Programs
Batch Input Program Elements
Defining BDC Tables
Structure of the BDC Table
Determining Field Names
Determining Field Names with the Screen Painter
Structure DefinitionFunction Modules for a Batch Input Program
Function Module BDC_OPEN_GROUP
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3034
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-30
Function Module BDC_INSERT
Function Module BDC_CLOSE_GROUP
Structure of a Batch Input Program
Batch Input Program - Overview (I)
Batch Input Program - Overview (II)
Subroutine generate_bdc_dataProgram BDCRECXX (I)
Program BDCRECXX (II)
Program BDCRECXX (III)
Data Transfer Programs
Batch Input Recorder
Batch Input Recording
Recording the First Screen
Recording the Second Screen
Additional Screens Saving
Ending the Recording
Generating Sessions and Programs
Generating Batch Input Sessions
Structure of the Generated Program
Enhancing the Generated Program
Data Transfer Programs
Overview
Call Transaction Program
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (I)
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (II)
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (III)
Displaying the Messtab
Technical Implementation
Return Codes and System FieldsSystem Field Message Output
Generating Sessions When Errors Occur
Summary
Overview
Structure of a Data Transfer Program
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer ProgramSolutions to Unit Data Transfer Program
Additional Techniques Unit 59
ObjectivesAdditional Techniques - Overview
Changing Customers - Payment Transactions
Step Loop Field Names
Structure of the BDC Table
Filling BDC Tables in ABAP
Additional Techniques
Overview - Special Fields
Setting the Cursor in the Batch Input Session
Setting the Cursor in the ABAP Program
Additional Techniques
Successful Transaction EndAdditional Techniques
Processing Batch Input Sessions
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-31
Batch Input Flow
Additional Techniques
Program RSBDCSUB
Batch Input Authorizations
Service Programs
Summary Exercises for Unit Additional TechniquesSolutions for Unit Additional Techniques
Tips amp Tricks Unit 60
Tips and Tricks - Objectives
OSS Notes
Parallel Processing
Resetting Rollback Segments
Additional Tips and Information
Summary
Appendix Unit 61
Job Structure
Scheduling Jobs
Job Distribution
SAP-LUW Chronological Update
Update Principles
Asynchronous Update
Synchronous Update
Local Update
E n h a n c e m e n t s a n d M o d i f i c a t i o n s
Enhancements and Modifications Unit 62
Content
Introduction Contents
Course Overview Diagram
Main Business Scenario
Modifications Unit 63
Objectives
Modifications
What are modifications
Modifications and Upgrades
Modifications
Copying SAP Objects
Making Changes to SAP Copies (Modifications)
Registering Modifications in SSCR
Carrying Out a Registered Modification
Versions
Naming Conventions for Repository Objects
Modifications
Modifications Critical Success Factors (1)
Modifications Critical Success Factors (2)Modifications Critical Success Factors (3)
Documenting Modifications in Programs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-32
Modification Logs An Example
Modifications
Modification Adjustment SPDD and SPAU
Modification Adjustment Objects
Transaction SPAU (Process After Upgrade)
Transporting Adjustments between SystemsThe amount of work necessary at upgrade increases
Modifications Critical Repository Objects
Avoiding Adjustments
Modifications
User Exits
User Exits An Example
Using User Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Modifications
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Unit 64
Objectives
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Table Enhancements Overview
Append Structures
Append Structures at Upgrade
Customizing Includes
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Global Enhancements
Field Exits
Global and Local Field Exits
Creating Field Exits
Enhancements to Dictionary ElementsText Enhancements
Editing Text Enhancements
Keywords
Keyword Change Requirements
Keyword Changes and Release Upgrades
Restoring SAP Keywords
Enhanced Documentation for Data Elements
Customer Documentation
Summary Text Enhancements
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Solutions for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Enhancements using Customer Exits Unit 65
Objectives
Enhancements using Customer Exits
SAP Application Enhancements
Customer Enhancement Projects
SAP Enhancements and Customer Enhancement Projects
Enhancements using Customer Exits
The SAP Enhancement Creation Procedure
Implementing Enhancements in Customer SystemsCreating Customer Enhancement Projects
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-33
Editing Components
Activating Enhancement Projects
Transporting Projects
Summary Enhancement Management
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Function Module ExitsCalling and Creating Function Modules
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Organization of an X Function Group
Customer Source Code
Global Data SAP and the Customer
Subroutines Modules SAP and the Customer
Customer Screens
Customer Screens Modules
Summary Function Module Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Menu Exits
Menu Exit Requirements
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Menu Exits and Function Module Exits
Summary Menu Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Screen Exits
Subscreens in the R3 System
Calling Subscreens
Defining Screen Exits
Calling Customer Subscreens
Transporting Data to Subscreens
Transporting Data from SubscreensEditing Subscreens (1)
Editing Subscreens (2)
Summary Screen Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits Solutions for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits
Business Transaction Events Unit 66
Objectives
Business Transaction Events (BTE)
BTE Possible Scenarios (1)BTE Possible Scenarios (2)
Publish amp Subscribe vs Process Interfaces
Business Transaction Events SAP and the Customer
Finding Business Transaction Events
Creating a Publish amp Subscribe Interface
Differences between Customer Exits and BTEs
Summary
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3434
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1534
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-15
Exercises on Unit Views mmSolutions to Unit Views
Search Helps Unit 23
Objectives - Search Helps
R3 Standard Function Input HelpDescription of an Input Help
Interface of a Search Help
Description of the Dialog Behavior
Selection Method of a Serach Help
View as Selection Method
Performance of the Input Help
Input Help from the Data Element
Check Table Help
Attaching a Search Help to a Field
Input Help from Dictionary or Screen
Overview Mechanisms for the Input Help
Alternative Search Paths
Collective Search Helps and Elementary Search Helps
Further Options for Search Helps
Non-Standard Search Help Exit
Migration of Existing Input Helps
Summary - Search Helps
Exercises on Unit Search Helps nSolutions to Unit Search Helps nn
Appendix Unit 24
Important Menu Paths and Transactions
Decision Tree for Buffering TablesAppendix
T e c h n i q u e s o f L i s t P r o c e s s i n g
Techniques of List Processing Unit 25
Contents 12
Contents 22
Introduction
Course GoalsCourse Objectives
Course Overview Diagram
Business Scenario
Demo Programs Templates and Solutions
Overview of Exercises
Finding and Executing Programs Unit 26
Objectives
How to Find Existing Programs
SAP Anwendungshierarchie
The Repository Information SystemReport Trees Organization
Finding Report Trees
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1634
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-16
Summary
Creating Lists with ABAP Query Unit 27
Objectives
Creating Lists with ABAP Query
Programs and ABAP QueryABAP Query Organization
Creating Queries
Creating Lists with ABAP Query
Defining Queries
Choosing a Query Area and a Functional Area
Choosing Fields
Assigning Short Descriptions
Defining Local Fields
Basic Lists
Lists with Control Levels
Statistics
Ranked Lists
Interactive Functions - Single-Line Lists
Interactive Functions - Multiple-Line Lists
Saving Lists
Summary
Creating Lists with ABAP Query
Outputting Data to Lists Unit 28
Objectives
List Design Options
Generating a List
Setting the List FormatModifying and Suppressing Headers
Open Page Design TOP-OF-PAGE
Setting Fixed Lead Columns
The FORMAT Statement
Outputting Lines
The WRITE Statement General Syntax
The WRITE Statement Icons and Symbols
The WRITE Statement Checkboxes
Additional Statements for Output Design
Multilingual List Elements
System Fields and List GenerationStandard Functions in Lists
Summary Lists
Exercises for Outputting Data to Lists Solutions for Outputting Data to Lists
Selection Screens Unit 29
Objectives
Selection Screen Overivew
Declaration of Fields with PARAMETERS
Selections with SELECT-OPTIONS
Selection Options and Multiple SelectionsSyntax of the SELECT-OPTIONS Statement
Designing the Selection Screen I
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1734
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-17
Designing the Selection Screen II
Initializing the Selection Screen
General Help and Possible Entries Help (F1 and F4)
Input Checks AT SELECTION-SCREEN
CALL SELECTION-SCREEN I
CALL SELECTION-SCREEN IISelektionsbild Varianten I
Selection Screen Variants II
Summary
Exercises for Selection Screens Solutions for Selection Screens
Logical Databases Unit 30
Objectives
Generating Lists
Advantages of a Logical Database
Logical Databases Overview
LDB F1S Nodes
Sample Program for a Logical Database
LDB Sub-Objects Structure
LDB Sub-Objects Selections
Selection Screen for the Logical Database
Logical Database Dynamic Selections
LDB Sub-Objects Database Programs
Interaction Between LDBs and Programs
Events in Logical Databases
Program Flow and Termination Alternatives
Checking Internal Program Selections I
Checking Internal Program Selections IISummary
Exercises for Logical Databases Solutions for Logical Databases
Programming Data Retrieval Unit 31
Objectives
Programming Data Retrieval
Reading Multiple Database Tables
Reading Multiple Database Tables I
Reading Multiple Database Tables IIa
Reading Multiple Database Tables IIbReading Multiple Database Tables III
Reading Multiple Database Tables IV
Summary
Exercises for Programming Data Retrieval Solutions for Programming Data Retrieval
ABAP Query Administration Unit 32
Objectives
ABAP Query Administration
Maintaining User Groups
Authorizations and ABAP QueryABAP Query Administration
Defining Functional Areas
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1834
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-18
Overview Creating Functional Areas
Example Defining a Functional Area
Defining Functional Areas
Allocating Fields
Additional Information
Allocating Additional TablesAllocating Additional Fields
Selection Options
Allocating ABAP Statements
Summary
Exercises for ABAP Query Administration
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing Unit 33
Unit Objectives Control Level Processing
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Motivation
Control Level Processing
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Creating an Internal Table
Filling an Internal Table
Sorting and Editing an Internal Table
Control Level Processing for Internal Tables
Control Level Processing Schema for Internal Tables
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Generating an Extract Steps
Example Generating an Extract
Sorting and Processing an Extract
Example Control Level Processing
Schema for Control Level Processing of ExtractsData Formatting and Control Level Processing
Comparing Internal Tables and Extracts
Summary Control Level Processing
Exercises for Data Formatting and Control Level Processing Solutions for Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Storing Lists and Background Processing Unit 34
Objectives
Storing Lists and Background Processing
Saving Lists Possibilities
Saving Lists in SAPofficeSaving Lists as PC Files
Saving Lists in a Report Tree
Customizing Report Trees
Functions in Report Trees
Storing Lists and Background Processing
Options for Printing a List
Print Parameters
Program-Controlled Printing
Program-Controlled Printing with GET_PRINT_PARAMETERS
Storing Lists and Background Processing
Background Processing PhasesDefining Steps
Defining Start Times and Releasing Jobs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1934
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-19
Summary
Exercises for Storing Lists and Background Processing Solutions for Storing Lists and Background Processing
Interactive Lists Basics Unit 35
Unit Objectives Interactive ListsInteractive Lists Basics
User Interactions with Lists
Navigating Between Lists
Events Overview
Flow Control in Detail Lists
Creating Detail Lists I
Creating Detail Lists II
Interactive Lists Basics
Questions
HIDE Areas
HIDE Technique Line Selection
Data Buffering in a List System
Valid Line Selection
Field Selection
Interactive Lists Basics
Page Headers in Detail Lists
Interactive Lists Basics
Creating Lists in Modal Dialog Boxes
Summary Interactive Lists
Exercises for Interactive Lists Solutions for Interactive Lists
Creating User Interfaces Unit 36Objectives User Interfaces
User Interfaces Overview
Status Technical View I
Status Technical View II
Creating a GUI Status
Creating a GUI Status Assigning F Keys I
Creating a GUI Status Assigning F Keys II
Creating a GUI Status Menu Bars
Activating Title and Status
Event AT USER-COMMAND
Summary User Interfaces
Special Techniques for Interactive Lists Unit 37
Objectives
Scrolling in Lists
Reading Lists
Modifying Lists
List Navigation
Interactive List Messages
System Fields in Interactive Lists
Summary
Exercises for Creating User Interfaces Solutions for Creating User Interfaces
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2034
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-20
Linking Programs Unit 38
Objectives
Linking Programs
Data Visibility
Data Transfer Using SAP Memory
SETGET ParametersSUBMIT Statement Syntax
Example SUBMIT WITH
Datatransfer Using ABAP Memory
Returning from a Called Program
Summary
Exercises for Linking Programs Solutions for Linking Programs
Lists on the Internet Unit 39
Unit Objectives Special Application
Lists on the Internet
Motivation
The World Wide Web
HTTP Hypertext Transport Protocol
URL Uniform Resource Locator
HTML Hypertext Markup Language
R3 ClientServer Architecture
R3 ClientServer Architecture with ITS
Lists on the Internet
Web Reporting - Overview
Web Reporting Flow
Creating a List Using a URL
Parameters for WWW_GET_REPORTInteractive Lists
Access Authorization
Creating HTML Hyperlinks in Lists
Lists on the Internet
Web Reporting Browser
Releasing Report Trees for the Internet
Summary Special Application
Appendix Unit 40
Menu Data
T r a n s a c t i o n P ro g r a m m i n g
Transaction Programming Unit 41
Content
Introduction Contents
Couse Goal
Course Objectives
Overview Diagram
Main Business Scenario
About the Course Material
Basic Transaction Programming Unit 42
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-21
Objectives - Basics
Components of a Transaction
Writing a Transaction Process
Analyzing the Problem
User Dialogs in the R3 System
Advantages of ScreensComponents of a Screen
Static Screen Sequence
Creating a Screen Attributes
Creating a Screen Layout
Creating a Screen Field List
Writing the Flow Logic
Communictaion Between Screen and ABAP Program
Creating a Transaction Code
Summary Basic Dialog Programming
Screen Objects - List Unit 43
Screen Objects - Objectives
Screen Objects
Screen Objects General Attributes
Attributes of Screen Objects (Key)
Dynamically Modifiable Static Attributes
The System Table SCREEN
Modifying Attributes Dynamically Example
Object Attributes Modification Group
Modifying Attributes Dynamically Program
Screen Objects - Screen
Screen Object Screen
Defining and Managing ScreensScreen Attributes
Dynamic Next Screen Overview
Setting the Next Screen Dynamically
Inserting a Sequence of Screens Dynamically
Calling a Dialog Box Dynamically
Window Coordinates
Setting the Cursor Position Dynamically
Screen Objects - Title Bar
Screen Object Title Bar
Creating and Using Title Bars
Screen Objects - Text FieldScreen Object Text Field
Text Fields Attributes
Creating Text Fields
Hiding Texts Dynamically
Dynamically Modifiable Attributes Text Field
Dynamic Screen Modifications Program
Screen Objects - InputOutput Field
Screen Object InputOutput Field
InputOutput Fields Attributes
Creating InputOutput Fields
InputOutput Fields Automatic Field ChecksInputOutput Fields Default Values in SAP Memory
Defining SETGET Parameter Attributes
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-22
Programming Field Input Checks with an Error Dialog
Checking Groups of Fields
Controlling Error Dialogs
Dialog Message Categories
The FIELD Statement and Data Transport
Calling Modules Conditionally (1)Calling Modules Conditionally (2)
Screen Objects Status icon
Screen Objects Status Icons
Status Icons Attributes
Creating Status Icon Fields
Filling Status Icon Fields
Group Box
Screen Objects Group Boxes
Group Boxes Attributes
Screen Objects Radio Buttons
Screen Objects Radio Buttons and Checkboxes
Radio ButtonsCheckboxes Attributes
Creating a Radio Button Group
Creating a Checkbox
Screen Objects - Pushbutton
Screen Objects Pushbuttons
Pushbuttons Attributes
Creating Pushbuttons
Pushbuttons with Function Type E
Screen Objects - Subscreen
Screen Objects Subscreen (1)
Screen Objects Subscreen (2)
Subscreen AttributesCreating a Subscreen Area
Calling a Subscreen
Subscreens from External Programs
Subscreens Encapsulation in Function Groups
Subscreens in Function Groups Call Sequence
Subscreens in Function Groups Data Transport
Screen Objects - Tabstrip Control
Screen Object Tabstrip Control
Tabstrip Elements
Tab Page Technical View
Tabstrip Controls AttributesCreating a Tabstrip Control
Creating a Tabstrip Control Tabstrip Area
Creating a Tabstip Control Tab Title
Creating a Tabstrip Control Subscreens
Scrolling Locally in a Tabstrip Control
Scrolling Locally in a Tabstrip Control Coding
Scrolling in a Tabstrip Control
Scrolling in a Tabstrip Control Coding
Screen Objects - Table Control
Screen Object Table Control
ABAP Table Control (Functions)Table Control Table Settings
Actions in Table Controls
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-23
Creating Table Control Elements
Table Control Attributes
Creating a Table Control
Creating a Table Control Table Control Area
Creating a Table Control TC Fields (1)
Create Table Control TC Fields (2) Section ColumnTable Control Attributes at Runtime
Table Control Attributes (Structure)
Table Control Elements - Processing
Processing a Table Control (Principle 1)
Filling a Table Control
Changing the Contents of a Table Control
Table Control Applications (Principle)
Filling a Table Control Coding
Changing the Contents of a Table Control 4 Coding
Table Controls Field Transport in the PBO
Table Controls Field Transport in the PAI
Table Control Elements Further Techniques
Changing a Table Control
Changing the Attributes of a Table Control (1)
Changing the Attributes of a Table Control (2)
Table Control Modifying Field Attributes Temporarily
Sorting a Table Control (Example)
Scrolling Page by Page in a Table Control (Example)
Table Control Cursor Position (Example)
Screen Objects - GUI Status
Screen Object GUI Status
Status Technical View (1)
Status Technical View (2)Attributes of Functions
Function Key Settings
Menus and Menu Bars Attributes
Status Attributes
Standard Toolbar Functions and their Reserved function Keys
Creating a Status
Navigation - Targets
Navigation - Dialogs
Screen Objects - List
Screen Objects Lists
Displaying a List Within a TransactionLists in a Modal Dialog Box
Screen Objects - Selection Screen
Screen Object Selection Screen
Entering Value Ranges
Defining and Calling a Selection Screen
Summary Screen Objects
Uumlbung zu Kapitel Screen Objects Solutions Screen Objects Unit
Programming Database Changes Unit 44
Unit ObjectivesProgramming Database Changes
Statements for Database Dialogs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2434
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-24
SAP LUW
Database LUW
SAP R3 System 3-tier Architecture
System Architecture Implicit DB COMMIT
Objective Bundling the DB Changes in an SAP LUW
Programming Database ChangesBundling Techniques Overview
Bunding Using Delayed Inline Changes
Bundling Using Subroutines
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundline Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Techniques
Update Function modules
V1 and V2 Update Function Modules
Logging Records for Update
Deleting Update Entries Rollback in the Dialog Program
Rollback in the Update Program
Asynchronous Update
What Happens in a Commit Work
Comparison of Bundling Techniques
Programming Database Updates
Why Set Locks
Database Locks
SAP Locking Concept
Setting Logical Locks
SAP Lock ObjectsENQUEUE and DEQUEUE Function Modules
Calling the Function Modules
The Lock Table
Validity of Locks Scope = 2
Programming Database Updates
SAP Authorization Concept
Authorization Checks
User Master Record Authorizations
Authorization Checks for Transactions
Summary
Exercises Programming Database Updates Unit Solutions Programming Database Updates Unit
Complex Transactions Unit 45
Unit Objectives
Complex Transactions
Synchronous Calls Overview
Calling a Report Program
Calling a Transaction
Encapsulating Dialogs in Function Modules
Synchronous Program Calls Main Memory Contents
Complex TransactionsAsynchronous Calls
Calling Programs Asynchronously
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2534
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-25
Complex Transactions
Passing Data Overview
Passing Data Using the Interface of ABAP Programs
The WITH Addition in the SUBMIT Statement
Memory Areas Logical Model
ABAP MemoryPassing Parameters using the SAP Memory
Passing Parameters (SAP Memory)
Complex Transactions
Synchronous Program Calls SAP LUWs
Asynchronous Program Calls SAP LUWs
Program Calls Visible Data and LUWs
Complex Transactions
RFC Scenario R3 - R3
Enabling Function Modules for RFC
RFC Using ABAP Function Modules
Program Context of a Remote Function
RFC Calls System Exceptions
Complex Transactions
Remote Function Call Overview
Process Diagram Synchronous RFC
Process Diagram Asynchronous RFC
Process Diagram Transactional RFC
Transactional RFC (tRFC) Introduction
tRFC Properties
Complex Transactions
Lock Entries for Local Program Calls
Lock Entries for RFC Calls
Summary Exercises Complex Transactions Unit Solutions Complex Transactions Unit
Static Attributes in the Screen Painter Unit 46
Screen Attributes (1)
Screen Attributes (2)
General Attributes
Dictionary Attributes
Program Attributes
Display Attributes
Special Attributes for Subscreens and Tabstrip ControlsSpecial Attributes for Table Controls
Database Updates Further Information Unit 47
Objectives
Database Updates Further Information
Asynchronous Update
Synchronous Update
Local Update
SAP LUW Timescale of Updates
Database Updates Further Information
V1 and V2 Update Function ModulesV1 Update
V2 Update
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2634
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-26
Database Updates Further Information
Validity of Locks Scope = 1
Validity of Locks Scope = 2
Validity of Locks Scope = 3
ENQUEUE Function Modules Interface Parameters
Summary
Complex Transactions Further Information Unit 48
CALL TRANSACTION lsquoTA01rsquo and SUBMIT lsquoREP01rsquo AND RETURN
Implicit End of a Program or LEAVE PROGRAM
LEAVE TO TRANSACTION lsquoTA01rsquo
SUBMIT lsquoREP01rsquo
CALL FUNCTION lsquoFUNC1rsquoPERFORM form1 IN PROGRAM program
Help Functions Unit 49
Overview Standard F1 and F4 Functions
The Search Help Concept
Dialog for an Immediate Hit List
Dialog with Preselection
Dialog for Selecting a Search Help
Search Help Concepts
Search Helps
Defining the Dialog Fields
Defining the Data Selection
Collective Search Helps
Search Help Concepts
Linking Search Helps to Screen Fields
Search Help Concepts
Programmed Help Functions OverviewProgrammed F1 and F4 Help
The POH and POV Events Process
Function Modules for Data Transport
Field Transport to and from the Screen
Determining the Contents of Screen Fields ( POV POH )
Placing Values in Screen Fields ( POV )
Special F1 Functions
Displaying Input Values for a Table Field (POV)
Search Help Concepts
Overview Input Help Mechanisms
Migrating Existing Input Help
Assigning Number Range Numbers Unit 50
Objectives
Overview
Number Range Objects
Number Range Intervals
Sub-objects
Assigning Internal Numbers
Checking External Numbers
Number Range Information
Accessing Table NRIV 1 Without a Buffer Accessing Table NRIV 2 Without a Buffer
Buffering Number Ranges
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2734
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-27
Using Function Groups to Administer Number Ranges
Summary 1
Summary 2
Creating Change Documents Unit 51
ObjectivesOverview
Change Document Structure
Change Relevance
Change Document Objects
Generating Update Programs
INCLUDE Program Structure
Application Program
Change Document Objects and Internal Tables
Reading Change Documents
Using Function Groups to Edit Change Documents
Summary (1)
Summary (2)
Appendix Unit 52
Documentation ReferencesGlossary Index
I n t e r f a c e s f o r D a t a T r a n s f e r
Interfaces for Data Transfer Unit 53
Content
Data Transfer
Objectives
Data Transfer
Transferring Data Into the R3 System
Direct Data Transfer
Data Transfer Using Interfaces
Data Transfer Workbench
Data Analysis
Data Transfer
Analyzing the SAP Transaction
Assigning DataFormat Conversion
Transferring Legacy Data into the R3 System
Data Transfer Methods
Knowledge Tools
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer
Data Analysis and Formatting Unit 54
Data Analysis - Objectives
Data Analysis and Formatting
Standard Transfer Interfaces for Standard Transfer
Standard Transfer - Tasks
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2834
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-28
IMG Documentation
Data Transfer Workbench (DTW)
Documentation in the DTW
Data Analysis and Formatting
Record Layout Types
FB01 Record Layout StructureSample Data for Record Layouts
Generating Test Data in the DTW
Data Analysis and Formatting
Translating Data
Translating Data in the Legacy System
Generating SAP Structures in the DTW
Translating Data in the R3 System
Translating Data Types
Translating Data for Transaction FB01
Translating Data - Example
Translating Data Using EXCEL
Data Analysis and Formatting
Initializing Record Layouts
Initializing Record Layouts - Example
Filling Record Layouts
Structure of Transaction FB01
Mapping Data in Transaction FB01
Filling Record Layout BGR00 - Example
Data Analysis and Formatting
Additional Tasks
Converting Data
Converting Legacy System R3 System Data
Structure of a Conversion ProgramData Analysis - Summary
Exercises for Unit Data AnalysisSolutions to Unit Data Analysis
Files in the R3 System Unit 55
Objectives
Files in the R3 System
R3 Client Server Architecture
Transferring Files
Files in the R3 System
Processing FilesOpening Files
Opening Files - Options
Binary Mode and Text Mode
Transferring Data Records
Reading Data Records
Closing Deleting a Sequential File
Filling Record Layouts for Transaction FB01 (1)
Filling Record Layouts for Transaction FB01 (2)
Sequential Files - Summary
Files in the R3 System
DOWNLOAD and UPLOADFunction Module rsquoDOWNLOADrsquo
Example Program DOWNLOAD
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2934
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-29
Function Module rsquoUPLOADrsquo
Example Program UPLOAD
Summary
Exercises for Unit Files in the R3 SystemSolutions to Unit Files in the R3 System
Data Transfer Workbench Unit 56
Data Transfer - Objectives
Data Transfer Workbench
Preparing the Data Transfer
Testing and Executing the Data Transfer
Direct Input Management
Scheduling Direct Input
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer WorkbenchSolutions to Unit Data Transfer Workbench
Batch Input Sessions Unit 57
Objectives
Batch Input Sessions
Batch Input Processing
Batch Input Program
Format of a Batch Input Session
Creating Batch Input Sessions
Function Modules for Batch Input Programs
Structure of the BDC Table
Batch Input Processing
Batch Input Sessions
Batch Input Monitor - FunctionsSession Status
Processing Modes
Entering Data into Screens
Batch Input Processing
Session Statistics
Session Log
Summary
Exercises for Unit Batch Input SessionsSolutions to Unit Batch Input Sessions
Data Transfer Programs Unit 58Objectives
Data Transfer Programs
Customer Transfer Programs
Customer Transfer Program - Tasks
Data Transfer Programs
Batch Input Program Elements
Defining BDC Tables
Structure of the BDC Table
Determining Field Names
Determining Field Names with the Screen Painter
Structure DefinitionFunction Modules for a Batch Input Program
Function Module BDC_OPEN_GROUP
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3034
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-30
Function Module BDC_INSERT
Function Module BDC_CLOSE_GROUP
Structure of a Batch Input Program
Batch Input Program - Overview (I)
Batch Input Program - Overview (II)
Subroutine generate_bdc_dataProgram BDCRECXX (I)
Program BDCRECXX (II)
Program BDCRECXX (III)
Data Transfer Programs
Batch Input Recorder
Batch Input Recording
Recording the First Screen
Recording the Second Screen
Additional Screens Saving
Ending the Recording
Generating Sessions and Programs
Generating Batch Input Sessions
Structure of the Generated Program
Enhancing the Generated Program
Data Transfer Programs
Overview
Call Transaction Program
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (I)
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (II)
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (III)
Displaying the Messtab
Technical Implementation
Return Codes and System FieldsSystem Field Message Output
Generating Sessions When Errors Occur
Summary
Overview
Structure of a Data Transfer Program
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer ProgramSolutions to Unit Data Transfer Program
Additional Techniques Unit 59
ObjectivesAdditional Techniques - Overview
Changing Customers - Payment Transactions
Step Loop Field Names
Structure of the BDC Table
Filling BDC Tables in ABAP
Additional Techniques
Overview - Special Fields
Setting the Cursor in the Batch Input Session
Setting the Cursor in the ABAP Program
Additional Techniques
Successful Transaction EndAdditional Techniques
Processing Batch Input Sessions
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-31
Batch Input Flow
Additional Techniques
Program RSBDCSUB
Batch Input Authorizations
Service Programs
Summary Exercises for Unit Additional TechniquesSolutions for Unit Additional Techniques
Tips amp Tricks Unit 60
Tips and Tricks - Objectives
OSS Notes
Parallel Processing
Resetting Rollback Segments
Additional Tips and Information
Summary
Appendix Unit 61
Job Structure
Scheduling Jobs
Job Distribution
SAP-LUW Chronological Update
Update Principles
Asynchronous Update
Synchronous Update
Local Update
E n h a n c e m e n t s a n d M o d i f i c a t i o n s
Enhancements and Modifications Unit 62
Content
Introduction Contents
Course Overview Diagram
Main Business Scenario
Modifications Unit 63
Objectives
Modifications
What are modifications
Modifications and Upgrades
Modifications
Copying SAP Objects
Making Changes to SAP Copies (Modifications)
Registering Modifications in SSCR
Carrying Out a Registered Modification
Versions
Naming Conventions for Repository Objects
Modifications
Modifications Critical Success Factors (1)
Modifications Critical Success Factors (2)Modifications Critical Success Factors (3)
Documenting Modifications in Programs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-32
Modification Logs An Example
Modifications
Modification Adjustment SPDD and SPAU
Modification Adjustment Objects
Transaction SPAU (Process After Upgrade)
Transporting Adjustments between SystemsThe amount of work necessary at upgrade increases
Modifications Critical Repository Objects
Avoiding Adjustments
Modifications
User Exits
User Exits An Example
Using User Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Modifications
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Unit 64
Objectives
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Table Enhancements Overview
Append Structures
Append Structures at Upgrade
Customizing Includes
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Global Enhancements
Field Exits
Global and Local Field Exits
Creating Field Exits
Enhancements to Dictionary ElementsText Enhancements
Editing Text Enhancements
Keywords
Keyword Change Requirements
Keyword Changes and Release Upgrades
Restoring SAP Keywords
Enhanced Documentation for Data Elements
Customer Documentation
Summary Text Enhancements
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Solutions for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Enhancements using Customer Exits Unit 65
Objectives
Enhancements using Customer Exits
SAP Application Enhancements
Customer Enhancement Projects
SAP Enhancements and Customer Enhancement Projects
Enhancements using Customer Exits
The SAP Enhancement Creation Procedure
Implementing Enhancements in Customer SystemsCreating Customer Enhancement Projects
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-33
Editing Components
Activating Enhancement Projects
Transporting Projects
Summary Enhancement Management
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Function Module ExitsCalling and Creating Function Modules
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Organization of an X Function Group
Customer Source Code
Global Data SAP and the Customer
Subroutines Modules SAP and the Customer
Customer Screens
Customer Screens Modules
Summary Function Module Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Menu Exits
Menu Exit Requirements
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Menu Exits and Function Module Exits
Summary Menu Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Screen Exits
Subscreens in the R3 System
Calling Subscreens
Defining Screen Exits
Calling Customer Subscreens
Transporting Data to Subscreens
Transporting Data from SubscreensEditing Subscreens (1)
Editing Subscreens (2)
Summary Screen Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits Solutions for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits
Business Transaction Events Unit 66
Objectives
Business Transaction Events (BTE)
BTE Possible Scenarios (1)BTE Possible Scenarios (2)
Publish amp Subscribe vs Process Interfaces
Business Transaction Events SAP and the Customer
Finding Business Transaction Events
Creating a Publish amp Subscribe Interface
Differences between Customer Exits and BTEs
Summary
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3434
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1634
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-16
Summary
Creating Lists with ABAP Query Unit 27
Objectives
Creating Lists with ABAP Query
Programs and ABAP QueryABAP Query Organization
Creating Queries
Creating Lists with ABAP Query
Defining Queries
Choosing a Query Area and a Functional Area
Choosing Fields
Assigning Short Descriptions
Defining Local Fields
Basic Lists
Lists with Control Levels
Statistics
Ranked Lists
Interactive Functions - Single-Line Lists
Interactive Functions - Multiple-Line Lists
Saving Lists
Summary
Creating Lists with ABAP Query
Outputting Data to Lists Unit 28
Objectives
List Design Options
Generating a List
Setting the List FormatModifying and Suppressing Headers
Open Page Design TOP-OF-PAGE
Setting Fixed Lead Columns
The FORMAT Statement
Outputting Lines
The WRITE Statement General Syntax
The WRITE Statement Icons and Symbols
The WRITE Statement Checkboxes
Additional Statements for Output Design
Multilingual List Elements
System Fields and List GenerationStandard Functions in Lists
Summary Lists
Exercises for Outputting Data to Lists Solutions for Outputting Data to Lists
Selection Screens Unit 29
Objectives
Selection Screen Overivew
Declaration of Fields with PARAMETERS
Selections with SELECT-OPTIONS
Selection Options and Multiple SelectionsSyntax of the SELECT-OPTIONS Statement
Designing the Selection Screen I
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1734
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-17
Designing the Selection Screen II
Initializing the Selection Screen
General Help and Possible Entries Help (F1 and F4)
Input Checks AT SELECTION-SCREEN
CALL SELECTION-SCREEN I
CALL SELECTION-SCREEN IISelektionsbild Varianten I
Selection Screen Variants II
Summary
Exercises for Selection Screens Solutions for Selection Screens
Logical Databases Unit 30
Objectives
Generating Lists
Advantages of a Logical Database
Logical Databases Overview
LDB F1S Nodes
Sample Program for a Logical Database
LDB Sub-Objects Structure
LDB Sub-Objects Selections
Selection Screen for the Logical Database
Logical Database Dynamic Selections
LDB Sub-Objects Database Programs
Interaction Between LDBs and Programs
Events in Logical Databases
Program Flow and Termination Alternatives
Checking Internal Program Selections I
Checking Internal Program Selections IISummary
Exercises for Logical Databases Solutions for Logical Databases
Programming Data Retrieval Unit 31
Objectives
Programming Data Retrieval
Reading Multiple Database Tables
Reading Multiple Database Tables I
Reading Multiple Database Tables IIa
Reading Multiple Database Tables IIbReading Multiple Database Tables III
Reading Multiple Database Tables IV
Summary
Exercises for Programming Data Retrieval Solutions for Programming Data Retrieval
ABAP Query Administration Unit 32
Objectives
ABAP Query Administration
Maintaining User Groups
Authorizations and ABAP QueryABAP Query Administration
Defining Functional Areas
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1834
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-18
Overview Creating Functional Areas
Example Defining a Functional Area
Defining Functional Areas
Allocating Fields
Additional Information
Allocating Additional TablesAllocating Additional Fields
Selection Options
Allocating ABAP Statements
Summary
Exercises for ABAP Query Administration
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing Unit 33
Unit Objectives Control Level Processing
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Motivation
Control Level Processing
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Creating an Internal Table
Filling an Internal Table
Sorting and Editing an Internal Table
Control Level Processing for Internal Tables
Control Level Processing Schema for Internal Tables
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Generating an Extract Steps
Example Generating an Extract
Sorting and Processing an Extract
Example Control Level Processing
Schema for Control Level Processing of ExtractsData Formatting and Control Level Processing
Comparing Internal Tables and Extracts
Summary Control Level Processing
Exercises for Data Formatting and Control Level Processing Solutions for Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Storing Lists and Background Processing Unit 34
Objectives
Storing Lists and Background Processing
Saving Lists Possibilities
Saving Lists in SAPofficeSaving Lists as PC Files
Saving Lists in a Report Tree
Customizing Report Trees
Functions in Report Trees
Storing Lists and Background Processing
Options for Printing a List
Print Parameters
Program-Controlled Printing
Program-Controlled Printing with GET_PRINT_PARAMETERS
Storing Lists and Background Processing
Background Processing PhasesDefining Steps
Defining Start Times and Releasing Jobs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1934
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-19
Summary
Exercises for Storing Lists and Background Processing Solutions for Storing Lists and Background Processing
Interactive Lists Basics Unit 35
Unit Objectives Interactive ListsInteractive Lists Basics
User Interactions with Lists
Navigating Between Lists
Events Overview
Flow Control in Detail Lists
Creating Detail Lists I
Creating Detail Lists II
Interactive Lists Basics
Questions
HIDE Areas
HIDE Technique Line Selection
Data Buffering in a List System
Valid Line Selection
Field Selection
Interactive Lists Basics
Page Headers in Detail Lists
Interactive Lists Basics
Creating Lists in Modal Dialog Boxes
Summary Interactive Lists
Exercises for Interactive Lists Solutions for Interactive Lists
Creating User Interfaces Unit 36Objectives User Interfaces
User Interfaces Overview
Status Technical View I
Status Technical View II
Creating a GUI Status
Creating a GUI Status Assigning F Keys I
Creating a GUI Status Assigning F Keys II
Creating a GUI Status Menu Bars
Activating Title and Status
Event AT USER-COMMAND
Summary User Interfaces
Special Techniques for Interactive Lists Unit 37
Objectives
Scrolling in Lists
Reading Lists
Modifying Lists
List Navigation
Interactive List Messages
System Fields in Interactive Lists
Summary
Exercises for Creating User Interfaces Solutions for Creating User Interfaces
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2034
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-20
Linking Programs Unit 38
Objectives
Linking Programs
Data Visibility
Data Transfer Using SAP Memory
SETGET ParametersSUBMIT Statement Syntax
Example SUBMIT WITH
Datatransfer Using ABAP Memory
Returning from a Called Program
Summary
Exercises for Linking Programs Solutions for Linking Programs
Lists on the Internet Unit 39
Unit Objectives Special Application
Lists on the Internet
Motivation
The World Wide Web
HTTP Hypertext Transport Protocol
URL Uniform Resource Locator
HTML Hypertext Markup Language
R3 ClientServer Architecture
R3 ClientServer Architecture with ITS
Lists on the Internet
Web Reporting - Overview
Web Reporting Flow
Creating a List Using a URL
Parameters for WWW_GET_REPORTInteractive Lists
Access Authorization
Creating HTML Hyperlinks in Lists
Lists on the Internet
Web Reporting Browser
Releasing Report Trees for the Internet
Summary Special Application
Appendix Unit 40
Menu Data
T r a n s a c t i o n P ro g r a m m i n g
Transaction Programming Unit 41
Content
Introduction Contents
Couse Goal
Course Objectives
Overview Diagram
Main Business Scenario
About the Course Material
Basic Transaction Programming Unit 42
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-21
Objectives - Basics
Components of a Transaction
Writing a Transaction Process
Analyzing the Problem
User Dialogs in the R3 System
Advantages of ScreensComponents of a Screen
Static Screen Sequence
Creating a Screen Attributes
Creating a Screen Layout
Creating a Screen Field List
Writing the Flow Logic
Communictaion Between Screen and ABAP Program
Creating a Transaction Code
Summary Basic Dialog Programming
Screen Objects - List Unit 43
Screen Objects - Objectives
Screen Objects
Screen Objects General Attributes
Attributes of Screen Objects (Key)
Dynamically Modifiable Static Attributes
The System Table SCREEN
Modifying Attributes Dynamically Example
Object Attributes Modification Group
Modifying Attributes Dynamically Program
Screen Objects - Screen
Screen Object Screen
Defining and Managing ScreensScreen Attributes
Dynamic Next Screen Overview
Setting the Next Screen Dynamically
Inserting a Sequence of Screens Dynamically
Calling a Dialog Box Dynamically
Window Coordinates
Setting the Cursor Position Dynamically
Screen Objects - Title Bar
Screen Object Title Bar
Creating and Using Title Bars
Screen Objects - Text FieldScreen Object Text Field
Text Fields Attributes
Creating Text Fields
Hiding Texts Dynamically
Dynamically Modifiable Attributes Text Field
Dynamic Screen Modifications Program
Screen Objects - InputOutput Field
Screen Object InputOutput Field
InputOutput Fields Attributes
Creating InputOutput Fields
InputOutput Fields Automatic Field ChecksInputOutput Fields Default Values in SAP Memory
Defining SETGET Parameter Attributes
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-22
Programming Field Input Checks with an Error Dialog
Checking Groups of Fields
Controlling Error Dialogs
Dialog Message Categories
The FIELD Statement and Data Transport
Calling Modules Conditionally (1)Calling Modules Conditionally (2)
Screen Objects Status icon
Screen Objects Status Icons
Status Icons Attributes
Creating Status Icon Fields
Filling Status Icon Fields
Group Box
Screen Objects Group Boxes
Group Boxes Attributes
Screen Objects Radio Buttons
Screen Objects Radio Buttons and Checkboxes
Radio ButtonsCheckboxes Attributes
Creating a Radio Button Group
Creating a Checkbox
Screen Objects - Pushbutton
Screen Objects Pushbuttons
Pushbuttons Attributes
Creating Pushbuttons
Pushbuttons with Function Type E
Screen Objects - Subscreen
Screen Objects Subscreen (1)
Screen Objects Subscreen (2)
Subscreen AttributesCreating a Subscreen Area
Calling a Subscreen
Subscreens from External Programs
Subscreens Encapsulation in Function Groups
Subscreens in Function Groups Call Sequence
Subscreens in Function Groups Data Transport
Screen Objects - Tabstrip Control
Screen Object Tabstrip Control
Tabstrip Elements
Tab Page Technical View
Tabstrip Controls AttributesCreating a Tabstrip Control
Creating a Tabstrip Control Tabstrip Area
Creating a Tabstip Control Tab Title
Creating a Tabstrip Control Subscreens
Scrolling Locally in a Tabstrip Control
Scrolling Locally in a Tabstrip Control Coding
Scrolling in a Tabstrip Control
Scrolling in a Tabstrip Control Coding
Screen Objects - Table Control
Screen Object Table Control
ABAP Table Control (Functions)Table Control Table Settings
Actions in Table Controls
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-23
Creating Table Control Elements
Table Control Attributes
Creating a Table Control
Creating a Table Control Table Control Area
Creating a Table Control TC Fields (1)
Create Table Control TC Fields (2) Section ColumnTable Control Attributes at Runtime
Table Control Attributes (Structure)
Table Control Elements - Processing
Processing a Table Control (Principle 1)
Filling a Table Control
Changing the Contents of a Table Control
Table Control Applications (Principle)
Filling a Table Control Coding
Changing the Contents of a Table Control 4 Coding
Table Controls Field Transport in the PBO
Table Controls Field Transport in the PAI
Table Control Elements Further Techniques
Changing a Table Control
Changing the Attributes of a Table Control (1)
Changing the Attributes of a Table Control (2)
Table Control Modifying Field Attributes Temporarily
Sorting a Table Control (Example)
Scrolling Page by Page in a Table Control (Example)
Table Control Cursor Position (Example)
Screen Objects - GUI Status
Screen Object GUI Status
Status Technical View (1)
Status Technical View (2)Attributes of Functions
Function Key Settings
Menus and Menu Bars Attributes
Status Attributes
Standard Toolbar Functions and their Reserved function Keys
Creating a Status
Navigation - Targets
Navigation - Dialogs
Screen Objects - List
Screen Objects Lists
Displaying a List Within a TransactionLists in a Modal Dialog Box
Screen Objects - Selection Screen
Screen Object Selection Screen
Entering Value Ranges
Defining and Calling a Selection Screen
Summary Screen Objects
Uumlbung zu Kapitel Screen Objects Solutions Screen Objects Unit
Programming Database Changes Unit 44
Unit ObjectivesProgramming Database Changes
Statements for Database Dialogs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2434
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-24
SAP LUW
Database LUW
SAP R3 System 3-tier Architecture
System Architecture Implicit DB COMMIT
Objective Bundling the DB Changes in an SAP LUW
Programming Database ChangesBundling Techniques Overview
Bunding Using Delayed Inline Changes
Bundling Using Subroutines
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundline Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Techniques
Update Function modules
V1 and V2 Update Function Modules
Logging Records for Update
Deleting Update Entries Rollback in the Dialog Program
Rollback in the Update Program
Asynchronous Update
What Happens in a Commit Work
Comparison of Bundling Techniques
Programming Database Updates
Why Set Locks
Database Locks
SAP Locking Concept
Setting Logical Locks
SAP Lock ObjectsENQUEUE and DEQUEUE Function Modules
Calling the Function Modules
The Lock Table
Validity of Locks Scope = 2
Programming Database Updates
SAP Authorization Concept
Authorization Checks
User Master Record Authorizations
Authorization Checks for Transactions
Summary
Exercises Programming Database Updates Unit Solutions Programming Database Updates Unit
Complex Transactions Unit 45
Unit Objectives
Complex Transactions
Synchronous Calls Overview
Calling a Report Program
Calling a Transaction
Encapsulating Dialogs in Function Modules
Synchronous Program Calls Main Memory Contents
Complex TransactionsAsynchronous Calls
Calling Programs Asynchronously
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2534
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-25
Complex Transactions
Passing Data Overview
Passing Data Using the Interface of ABAP Programs
The WITH Addition in the SUBMIT Statement
Memory Areas Logical Model
ABAP MemoryPassing Parameters using the SAP Memory
Passing Parameters (SAP Memory)
Complex Transactions
Synchronous Program Calls SAP LUWs
Asynchronous Program Calls SAP LUWs
Program Calls Visible Data and LUWs
Complex Transactions
RFC Scenario R3 - R3
Enabling Function Modules for RFC
RFC Using ABAP Function Modules
Program Context of a Remote Function
RFC Calls System Exceptions
Complex Transactions
Remote Function Call Overview
Process Diagram Synchronous RFC
Process Diagram Asynchronous RFC
Process Diagram Transactional RFC
Transactional RFC (tRFC) Introduction
tRFC Properties
Complex Transactions
Lock Entries for Local Program Calls
Lock Entries for RFC Calls
Summary Exercises Complex Transactions Unit Solutions Complex Transactions Unit
Static Attributes in the Screen Painter Unit 46
Screen Attributes (1)
Screen Attributes (2)
General Attributes
Dictionary Attributes
Program Attributes
Display Attributes
Special Attributes for Subscreens and Tabstrip ControlsSpecial Attributes for Table Controls
Database Updates Further Information Unit 47
Objectives
Database Updates Further Information
Asynchronous Update
Synchronous Update
Local Update
SAP LUW Timescale of Updates
Database Updates Further Information
V1 and V2 Update Function ModulesV1 Update
V2 Update
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2634
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-26
Database Updates Further Information
Validity of Locks Scope = 1
Validity of Locks Scope = 2
Validity of Locks Scope = 3
ENQUEUE Function Modules Interface Parameters
Summary
Complex Transactions Further Information Unit 48
CALL TRANSACTION lsquoTA01rsquo and SUBMIT lsquoREP01rsquo AND RETURN
Implicit End of a Program or LEAVE PROGRAM
LEAVE TO TRANSACTION lsquoTA01rsquo
SUBMIT lsquoREP01rsquo
CALL FUNCTION lsquoFUNC1rsquoPERFORM form1 IN PROGRAM program
Help Functions Unit 49
Overview Standard F1 and F4 Functions
The Search Help Concept
Dialog for an Immediate Hit List
Dialog with Preselection
Dialog for Selecting a Search Help
Search Help Concepts
Search Helps
Defining the Dialog Fields
Defining the Data Selection
Collective Search Helps
Search Help Concepts
Linking Search Helps to Screen Fields
Search Help Concepts
Programmed Help Functions OverviewProgrammed F1 and F4 Help
The POH and POV Events Process
Function Modules for Data Transport
Field Transport to and from the Screen
Determining the Contents of Screen Fields ( POV POH )
Placing Values in Screen Fields ( POV )
Special F1 Functions
Displaying Input Values for a Table Field (POV)
Search Help Concepts
Overview Input Help Mechanisms
Migrating Existing Input Help
Assigning Number Range Numbers Unit 50
Objectives
Overview
Number Range Objects
Number Range Intervals
Sub-objects
Assigning Internal Numbers
Checking External Numbers
Number Range Information
Accessing Table NRIV 1 Without a Buffer Accessing Table NRIV 2 Without a Buffer
Buffering Number Ranges
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2734
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-27
Using Function Groups to Administer Number Ranges
Summary 1
Summary 2
Creating Change Documents Unit 51
ObjectivesOverview
Change Document Structure
Change Relevance
Change Document Objects
Generating Update Programs
INCLUDE Program Structure
Application Program
Change Document Objects and Internal Tables
Reading Change Documents
Using Function Groups to Edit Change Documents
Summary (1)
Summary (2)
Appendix Unit 52
Documentation ReferencesGlossary Index
I n t e r f a c e s f o r D a t a T r a n s f e r
Interfaces for Data Transfer Unit 53
Content
Data Transfer
Objectives
Data Transfer
Transferring Data Into the R3 System
Direct Data Transfer
Data Transfer Using Interfaces
Data Transfer Workbench
Data Analysis
Data Transfer
Analyzing the SAP Transaction
Assigning DataFormat Conversion
Transferring Legacy Data into the R3 System
Data Transfer Methods
Knowledge Tools
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer
Data Analysis and Formatting Unit 54
Data Analysis - Objectives
Data Analysis and Formatting
Standard Transfer Interfaces for Standard Transfer
Standard Transfer - Tasks
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2834
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-28
IMG Documentation
Data Transfer Workbench (DTW)
Documentation in the DTW
Data Analysis and Formatting
Record Layout Types
FB01 Record Layout StructureSample Data for Record Layouts
Generating Test Data in the DTW
Data Analysis and Formatting
Translating Data
Translating Data in the Legacy System
Generating SAP Structures in the DTW
Translating Data in the R3 System
Translating Data Types
Translating Data for Transaction FB01
Translating Data - Example
Translating Data Using EXCEL
Data Analysis and Formatting
Initializing Record Layouts
Initializing Record Layouts - Example
Filling Record Layouts
Structure of Transaction FB01
Mapping Data in Transaction FB01
Filling Record Layout BGR00 - Example
Data Analysis and Formatting
Additional Tasks
Converting Data
Converting Legacy System R3 System Data
Structure of a Conversion ProgramData Analysis - Summary
Exercises for Unit Data AnalysisSolutions to Unit Data Analysis
Files in the R3 System Unit 55
Objectives
Files in the R3 System
R3 Client Server Architecture
Transferring Files
Files in the R3 System
Processing FilesOpening Files
Opening Files - Options
Binary Mode and Text Mode
Transferring Data Records
Reading Data Records
Closing Deleting a Sequential File
Filling Record Layouts for Transaction FB01 (1)
Filling Record Layouts for Transaction FB01 (2)
Sequential Files - Summary
Files in the R3 System
DOWNLOAD and UPLOADFunction Module rsquoDOWNLOADrsquo
Example Program DOWNLOAD
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2934
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-29
Function Module rsquoUPLOADrsquo
Example Program UPLOAD
Summary
Exercises for Unit Files in the R3 SystemSolutions to Unit Files in the R3 System
Data Transfer Workbench Unit 56
Data Transfer - Objectives
Data Transfer Workbench
Preparing the Data Transfer
Testing and Executing the Data Transfer
Direct Input Management
Scheduling Direct Input
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer WorkbenchSolutions to Unit Data Transfer Workbench
Batch Input Sessions Unit 57
Objectives
Batch Input Sessions
Batch Input Processing
Batch Input Program
Format of a Batch Input Session
Creating Batch Input Sessions
Function Modules for Batch Input Programs
Structure of the BDC Table
Batch Input Processing
Batch Input Sessions
Batch Input Monitor - FunctionsSession Status
Processing Modes
Entering Data into Screens
Batch Input Processing
Session Statistics
Session Log
Summary
Exercises for Unit Batch Input SessionsSolutions to Unit Batch Input Sessions
Data Transfer Programs Unit 58Objectives
Data Transfer Programs
Customer Transfer Programs
Customer Transfer Program - Tasks
Data Transfer Programs
Batch Input Program Elements
Defining BDC Tables
Structure of the BDC Table
Determining Field Names
Determining Field Names with the Screen Painter
Structure DefinitionFunction Modules for a Batch Input Program
Function Module BDC_OPEN_GROUP
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3034
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-30
Function Module BDC_INSERT
Function Module BDC_CLOSE_GROUP
Structure of a Batch Input Program
Batch Input Program - Overview (I)
Batch Input Program - Overview (II)
Subroutine generate_bdc_dataProgram BDCRECXX (I)
Program BDCRECXX (II)
Program BDCRECXX (III)
Data Transfer Programs
Batch Input Recorder
Batch Input Recording
Recording the First Screen
Recording the Second Screen
Additional Screens Saving
Ending the Recording
Generating Sessions and Programs
Generating Batch Input Sessions
Structure of the Generated Program
Enhancing the Generated Program
Data Transfer Programs
Overview
Call Transaction Program
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (I)
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (II)
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (III)
Displaying the Messtab
Technical Implementation
Return Codes and System FieldsSystem Field Message Output
Generating Sessions When Errors Occur
Summary
Overview
Structure of a Data Transfer Program
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer ProgramSolutions to Unit Data Transfer Program
Additional Techniques Unit 59
ObjectivesAdditional Techniques - Overview
Changing Customers - Payment Transactions
Step Loop Field Names
Structure of the BDC Table
Filling BDC Tables in ABAP
Additional Techniques
Overview - Special Fields
Setting the Cursor in the Batch Input Session
Setting the Cursor in the ABAP Program
Additional Techniques
Successful Transaction EndAdditional Techniques
Processing Batch Input Sessions
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-31
Batch Input Flow
Additional Techniques
Program RSBDCSUB
Batch Input Authorizations
Service Programs
Summary Exercises for Unit Additional TechniquesSolutions for Unit Additional Techniques
Tips amp Tricks Unit 60
Tips and Tricks - Objectives
OSS Notes
Parallel Processing
Resetting Rollback Segments
Additional Tips and Information
Summary
Appendix Unit 61
Job Structure
Scheduling Jobs
Job Distribution
SAP-LUW Chronological Update
Update Principles
Asynchronous Update
Synchronous Update
Local Update
E n h a n c e m e n t s a n d M o d i f i c a t i o n s
Enhancements and Modifications Unit 62
Content
Introduction Contents
Course Overview Diagram
Main Business Scenario
Modifications Unit 63
Objectives
Modifications
What are modifications
Modifications and Upgrades
Modifications
Copying SAP Objects
Making Changes to SAP Copies (Modifications)
Registering Modifications in SSCR
Carrying Out a Registered Modification
Versions
Naming Conventions for Repository Objects
Modifications
Modifications Critical Success Factors (1)
Modifications Critical Success Factors (2)Modifications Critical Success Factors (3)
Documenting Modifications in Programs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-32
Modification Logs An Example
Modifications
Modification Adjustment SPDD and SPAU
Modification Adjustment Objects
Transaction SPAU (Process After Upgrade)
Transporting Adjustments between SystemsThe amount of work necessary at upgrade increases
Modifications Critical Repository Objects
Avoiding Adjustments
Modifications
User Exits
User Exits An Example
Using User Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Modifications
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Unit 64
Objectives
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Table Enhancements Overview
Append Structures
Append Structures at Upgrade
Customizing Includes
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Global Enhancements
Field Exits
Global and Local Field Exits
Creating Field Exits
Enhancements to Dictionary ElementsText Enhancements
Editing Text Enhancements
Keywords
Keyword Change Requirements
Keyword Changes and Release Upgrades
Restoring SAP Keywords
Enhanced Documentation for Data Elements
Customer Documentation
Summary Text Enhancements
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Solutions for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Enhancements using Customer Exits Unit 65
Objectives
Enhancements using Customer Exits
SAP Application Enhancements
Customer Enhancement Projects
SAP Enhancements and Customer Enhancement Projects
Enhancements using Customer Exits
The SAP Enhancement Creation Procedure
Implementing Enhancements in Customer SystemsCreating Customer Enhancement Projects
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-33
Editing Components
Activating Enhancement Projects
Transporting Projects
Summary Enhancement Management
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Function Module ExitsCalling and Creating Function Modules
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Organization of an X Function Group
Customer Source Code
Global Data SAP and the Customer
Subroutines Modules SAP and the Customer
Customer Screens
Customer Screens Modules
Summary Function Module Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Menu Exits
Menu Exit Requirements
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Menu Exits and Function Module Exits
Summary Menu Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Screen Exits
Subscreens in the R3 System
Calling Subscreens
Defining Screen Exits
Calling Customer Subscreens
Transporting Data to Subscreens
Transporting Data from SubscreensEditing Subscreens (1)
Editing Subscreens (2)
Summary Screen Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits Solutions for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits
Business Transaction Events Unit 66
Objectives
Business Transaction Events (BTE)
BTE Possible Scenarios (1)BTE Possible Scenarios (2)
Publish amp Subscribe vs Process Interfaces
Business Transaction Events SAP and the Customer
Finding Business Transaction Events
Creating a Publish amp Subscribe Interface
Differences between Customer Exits and BTEs
Summary
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3434
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1734
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-17
Designing the Selection Screen II
Initializing the Selection Screen
General Help and Possible Entries Help (F1 and F4)
Input Checks AT SELECTION-SCREEN
CALL SELECTION-SCREEN I
CALL SELECTION-SCREEN IISelektionsbild Varianten I
Selection Screen Variants II
Summary
Exercises for Selection Screens Solutions for Selection Screens
Logical Databases Unit 30
Objectives
Generating Lists
Advantages of a Logical Database
Logical Databases Overview
LDB F1S Nodes
Sample Program for a Logical Database
LDB Sub-Objects Structure
LDB Sub-Objects Selections
Selection Screen for the Logical Database
Logical Database Dynamic Selections
LDB Sub-Objects Database Programs
Interaction Between LDBs and Programs
Events in Logical Databases
Program Flow and Termination Alternatives
Checking Internal Program Selections I
Checking Internal Program Selections IISummary
Exercises for Logical Databases Solutions for Logical Databases
Programming Data Retrieval Unit 31
Objectives
Programming Data Retrieval
Reading Multiple Database Tables
Reading Multiple Database Tables I
Reading Multiple Database Tables IIa
Reading Multiple Database Tables IIbReading Multiple Database Tables III
Reading Multiple Database Tables IV
Summary
Exercises for Programming Data Retrieval Solutions for Programming Data Retrieval
ABAP Query Administration Unit 32
Objectives
ABAP Query Administration
Maintaining User Groups
Authorizations and ABAP QueryABAP Query Administration
Defining Functional Areas
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1834
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-18
Overview Creating Functional Areas
Example Defining a Functional Area
Defining Functional Areas
Allocating Fields
Additional Information
Allocating Additional TablesAllocating Additional Fields
Selection Options
Allocating ABAP Statements
Summary
Exercises for ABAP Query Administration
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing Unit 33
Unit Objectives Control Level Processing
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Motivation
Control Level Processing
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Creating an Internal Table
Filling an Internal Table
Sorting and Editing an Internal Table
Control Level Processing for Internal Tables
Control Level Processing Schema for Internal Tables
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Generating an Extract Steps
Example Generating an Extract
Sorting and Processing an Extract
Example Control Level Processing
Schema for Control Level Processing of ExtractsData Formatting and Control Level Processing
Comparing Internal Tables and Extracts
Summary Control Level Processing
Exercises for Data Formatting and Control Level Processing Solutions for Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Storing Lists and Background Processing Unit 34
Objectives
Storing Lists and Background Processing
Saving Lists Possibilities
Saving Lists in SAPofficeSaving Lists as PC Files
Saving Lists in a Report Tree
Customizing Report Trees
Functions in Report Trees
Storing Lists and Background Processing
Options for Printing a List
Print Parameters
Program-Controlled Printing
Program-Controlled Printing with GET_PRINT_PARAMETERS
Storing Lists and Background Processing
Background Processing PhasesDefining Steps
Defining Start Times and Releasing Jobs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1934
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-19
Summary
Exercises for Storing Lists and Background Processing Solutions for Storing Lists and Background Processing
Interactive Lists Basics Unit 35
Unit Objectives Interactive ListsInteractive Lists Basics
User Interactions with Lists
Navigating Between Lists
Events Overview
Flow Control in Detail Lists
Creating Detail Lists I
Creating Detail Lists II
Interactive Lists Basics
Questions
HIDE Areas
HIDE Technique Line Selection
Data Buffering in a List System
Valid Line Selection
Field Selection
Interactive Lists Basics
Page Headers in Detail Lists
Interactive Lists Basics
Creating Lists in Modal Dialog Boxes
Summary Interactive Lists
Exercises for Interactive Lists Solutions for Interactive Lists
Creating User Interfaces Unit 36Objectives User Interfaces
User Interfaces Overview
Status Technical View I
Status Technical View II
Creating a GUI Status
Creating a GUI Status Assigning F Keys I
Creating a GUI Status Assigning F Keys II
Creating a GUI Status Menu Bars
Activating Title and Status
Event AT USER-COMMAND
Summary User Interfaces
Special Techniques for Interactive Lists Unit 37
Objectives
Scrolling in Lists
Reading Lists
Modifying Lists
List Navigation
Interactive List Messages
System Fields in Interactive Lists
Summary
Exercises for Creating User Interfaces Solutions for Creating User Interfaces
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2034
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-20
Linking Programs Unit 38
Objectives
Linking Programs
Data Visibility
Data Transfer Using SAP Memory
SETGET ParametersSUBMIT Statement Syntax
Example SUBMIT WITH
Datatransfer Using ABAP Memory
Returning from a Called Program
Summary
Exercises for Linking Programs Solutions for Linking Programs
Lists on the Internet Unit 39
Unit Objectives Special Application
Lists on the Internet
Motivation
The World Wide Web
HTTP Hypertext Transport Protocol
URL Uniform Resource Locator
HTML Hypertext Markup Language
R3 ClientServer Architecture
R3 ClientServer Architecture with ITS
Lists on the Internet
Web Reporting - Overview
Web Reporting Flow
Creating a List Using a URL
Parameters for WWW_GET_REPORTInteractive Lists
Access Authorization
Creating HTML Hyperlinks in Lists
Lists on the Internet
Web Reporting Browser
Releasing Report Trees for the Internet
Summary Special Application
Appendix Unit 40
Menu Data
T r a n s a c t i o n P ro g r a m m i n g
Transaction Programming Unit 41
Content
Introduction Contents
Couse Goal
Course Objectives
Overview Diagram
Main Business Scenario
About the Course Material
Basic Transaction Programming Unit 42
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-21
Objectives - Basics
Components of a Transaction
Writing a Transaction Process
Analyzing the Problem
User Dialogs in the R3 System
Advantages of ScreensComponents of a Screen
Static Screen Sequence
Creating a Screen Attributes
Creating a Screen Layout
Creating a Screen Field List
Writing the Flow Logic
Communictaion Between Screen and ABAP Program
Creating a Transaction Code
Summary Basic Dialog Programming
Screen Objects - List Unit 43
Screen Objects - Objectives
Screen Objects
Screen Objects General Attributes
Attributes of Screen Objects (Key)
Dynamically Modifiable Static Attributes
The System Table SCREEN
Modifying Attributes Dynamically Example
Object Attributes Modification Group
Modifying Attributes Dynamically Program
Screen Objects - Screen
Screen Object Screen
Defining and Managing ScreensScreen Attributes
Dynamic Next Screen Overview
Setting the Next Screen Dynamically
Inserting a Sequence of Screens Dynamically
Calling a Dialog Box Dynamically
Window Coordinates
Setting the Cursor Position Dynamically
Screen Objects - Title Bar
Screen Object Title Bar
Creating and Using Title Bars
Screen Objects - Text FieldScreen Object Text Field
Text Fields Attributes
Creating Text Fields
Hiding Texts Dynamically
Dynamically Modifiable Attributes Text Field
Dynamic Screen Modifications Program
Screen Objects - InputOutput Field
Screen Object InputOutput Field
InputOutput Fields Attributes
Creating InputOutput Fields
InputOutput Fields Automatic Field ChecksInputOutput Fields Default Values in SAP Memory
Defining SETGET Parameter Attributes
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-22
Programming Field Input Checks with an Error Dialog
Checking Groups of Fields
Controlling Error Dialogs
Dialog Message Categories
The FIELD Statement and Data Transport
Calling Modules Conditionally (1)Calling Modules Conditionally (2)
Screen Objects Status icon
Screen Objects Status Icons
Status Icons Attributes
Creating Status Icon Fields
Filling Status Icon Fields
Group Box
Screen Objects Group Boxes
Group Boxes Attributes
Screen Objects Radio Buttons
Screen Objects Radio Buttons and Checkboxes
Radio ButtonsCheckboxes Attributes
Creating a Radio Button Group
Creating a Checkbox
Screen Objects - Pushbutton
Screen Objects Pushbuttons
Pushbuttons Attributes
Creating Pushbuttons
Pushbuttons with Function Type E
Screen Objects - Subscreen
Screen Objects Subscreen (1)
Screen Objects Subscreen (2)
Subscreen AttributesCreating a Subscreen Area
Calling a Subscreen
Subscreens from External Programs
Subscreens Encapsulation in Function Groups
Subscreens in Function Groups Call Sequence
Subscreens in Function Groups Data Transport
Screen Objects - Tabstrip Control
Screen Object Tabstrip Control
Tabstrip Elements
Tab Page Technical View
Tabstrip Controls AttributesCreating a Tabstrip Control
Creating a Tabstrip Control Tabstrip Area
Creating a Tabstip Control Tab Title
Creating a Tabstrip Control Subscreens
Scrolling Locally in a Tabstrip Control
Scrolling Locally in a Tabstrip Control Coding
Scrolling in a Tabstrip Control
Scrolling in a Tabstrip Control Coding
Screen Objects - Table Control
Screen Object Table Control
ABAP Table Control (Functions)Table Control Table Settings
Actions in Table Controls
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-23
Creating Table Control Elements
Table Control Attributes
Creating a Table Control
Creating a Table Control Table Control Area
Creating a Table Control TC Fields (1)
Create Table Control TC Fields (2) Section ColumnTable Control Attributes at Runtime
Table Control Attributes (Structure)
Table Control Elements - Processing
Processing a Table Control (Principle 1)
Filling a Table Control
Changing the Contents of a Table Control
Table Control Applications (Principle)
Filling a Table Control Coding
Changing the Contents of a Table Control 4 Coding
Table Controls Field Transport in the PBO
Table Controls Field Transport in the PAI
Table Control Elements Further Techniques
Changing a Table Control
Changing the Attributes of a Table Control (1)
Changing the Attributes of a Table Control (2)
Table Control Modifying Field Attributes Temporarily
Sorting a Table Control (Example)
Scrolling Page by Page in a Table Control (Example)
Table Control Cursor Position (Example)
Screen Objects - GUI Status
Screen Object GUI Status
Status Technical View (1)
Status Technical View (2)Attributes of Functions
Function Key Settings
Menus and Menu Bars Attributes
Status Attributes
Standard Toolbar Functions and their Reserved function Keys
Creating a Status
Navigation - Targets
Navigation - Dialogs
Screen Objects - List
Screen Objects Lists
Displaying a List Within a TransactionLists in a Modal Dialog Box
Screen Objects - Selection Screen
Screen Object Selection Screen
Entering Value Ranges
Defining and Calling a Selection Screen
Summary Screen Objects
Uumlbung zu Kapitel Screen Objects Solutions Screen Objects Unit
Programming Database Changes Unit 44
Unit ObjectivesProgramming Database Changes
Statements for Database Dialogs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2434
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-24
SAP LUW
Database LUW
SAP R3 System 3-tier Architecture
System Architecture Implicit DB COMMIT
Objective Bundling the DB Changes in an SAP LUW
Programming Database ChangesBundling Techniques Overview
Bunding Using Delayed Inline Changes
Bundling Using Subroutines
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundline Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Techniques
Update Function modules
V1 and V2 Update Function Modules
Logging Records for Update
Deleting Update Entries Rollback in the Dialog Program
Rollback in the Update Program
Asynchronous Update
What Happens in a Commit Work
Comparison of Bundling Techniques
Programming Database Updates
Why Set Locks
Database Locks
SAP Locking Concept
Setting Logical Locks
SAP Lock ObjectsENQUEUE and DEQUEUE Function Modules
Calling the Function Modules
The Lock Table
Validity of Locks Scope = 2
Programming Database Updates
SAP Authorization Concept
Authorization Checks
User Master Record Authorizations
Authorization Checks for Transactions
Summary
Exercises Programming Database Updates Unit Solutions Programming Database Updates Unit
Complex Transactions Unit 45
Unit Objectives
Complex Transactions
Synchronous Calls Overview
Calling a Report Program
Calling a Transaction
Encapsulating Dialogs in Function Modules
Synchronous Program Calls Main Memory Contents
Complex TransactionsAsynchronous Calls
Calling Programs Asynchronously
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2534
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-25
Complex Transactions
Passing Data Overview
Passing Data Using the Interface of ABAP Programs
The WITH Addition in the SUBMIT Statement
Memory Areas Logical Model
ABAP MemoryPassing Parameters using the SAP Memory
Passing Parameters (SAP Memory)
Complex Transactions
Synchronous Program Calls SAP LUWs
Asynchronous Program Calls SAP LUWs
Program Calls Visible Data and LUWs
Complex Transactions
RFC Scenario R3 - R3
Enabling Function Modules for RFC
RFC Using ABAP Function Modules
Program Context of a Remote Function
RFC Calls System Exceptions
Complex Transactions
Remote Function Call Overview
Process Diagram Synchronous RFC
Process Diagram Asynchronous RFC
Process Diagram Transactional RFC
Transactional RFC (tRFC) Introduction
tRFC Properties
Complex Transactions
Lock Entries for Local Program Calls
Lock Entries for RFC Calls
Summary Exercises Complex Transactions Unit Solutions Complex Transactions Unit
Static Attributes in the Screen Painter Unit 46
Screen Attributes (1)
Screen Attributes (2)
General Attributes
Dictionary Attributes
Program Attributes
Display Attributes
Special Attributes for Subscreens and Tabstrip ControlsSpecial Attributes for Table Controls
Database Updates Further Information Unit 47
Objectives
Database Updates Further Information
Asynchronous Update
Synchronous Update
Local Update
SAP LUW Timescale of Updates
Database Updates Further Information
V1 and V2 Update Function ModulesV1 Update
V2 Update
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2634
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-26
Database Updates Further Information
Validity of Locks Scope = 1
Validity of Locks Scope = 2
Validity of Locks Scope = 3
ENQUEUE Function Modules Interface Parameters
Summary
Complex Transactions Further Information Unit 48
CALL TRANSACTION lsquoTA01rsquo and SUBMIT lsquoREP01rsquo AND RETURN
Implicit End of a Program or LEAVE PROGRAM
LEAVE TO TRANSACTION lsquoTA01rsquo
SUBMIT lsquoREP01rsquo
CALL FUNCTION lsquoFUNC1rsquoPERFORM form1 IN PROGRAM program
Help Functions Unit 49
Overview Standard F1 and F4 Functions
The Search Help Concept
Dialog for an Immediate Hit List
Dialog with Preselection
Dialog for Selecting a Search Help
Search Help Concepts
Search Helps
Defining the Dialog Fields
Defining the Data Selection
Collective Search Helps
Search Help Concepts
Linking Search Helps to Screen Fields
Search Help Concepts
Programmed Help Functions OverviewProgrammed F1 and F4 Help
The POH and POV Events Process
Function Modules for Data Transport
Field Transport to and from the Screen
Determining the Contents of Screen Fields ( POV POH )
Placing Values in Screen Fields ( POV )
Special F1 Functions
Displaying Input Values for a Table Field (POV)
Search Help Concepts
Overview Input Help Mechanisms
Migrating Existing Input Help
Assigning Number Range Numbers Unit 50
Objectives
Overview
Number Range Objects
Number Range Intervals
Sub-objects
Assigning Internal Numbers
Checking External Numbers
Number Range Information
Accessing Table NRIV 1 Without a Buffer Accessing Table NRIV 2 Without a Buffer
Buffering Number Ranges
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2734
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-27
Using Function Groups to Administer Number Ranges
Summary 1
Summary 2
Creating Change Documents Unit 51
ObjectivesOverview
Change Document Structure
Change Relevance
Change Document Objects
Generating Update Programs
INCLUDE Program Structure
Application Program
Change Document Objects and Internal Tables
Reading Change Documents
Using Function Groups to Edit Change Documents
Summary (1)
Summary (2)
Appendix Unit 52
Documentation ReferencesGlossary Index
I n t e r f a c e s f o r D a t a T r a n s f e r
Interfaces for Data Transfer Unit 53
Content
Data Transfer
Objectives
Data Transfer
Transferring Data Into the R3 System
Direct Data Transfer
Data Transfer Using Interfaces
Data Transfer Workbench
Data Analysis
Data Transfer
Analyzing the SAP Transaction
Assigning DataFormat Conversion
Transferring Legacy Data into the R3 System
Data Transfer Methods
Knowledge Tools
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer
Data Analysis and Formatting Unit 54
Data Analysis - Objectives
Data Analysis and Formatting
Standard Transfer Interfaces for Standard Transfer
Standard Transfer - Tasks
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2834
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-28
IMG Documentation
Data Transfer Workbench (DTW)
Documentation in the DTW
Data Analysis and Formatting
Record Layout Types
FB01 Record Layout StructureSample Data for Record Layouts
Generating Test Data in the DTW
Data Analysis and Formatting
Translating Data
Translating Data in the Legacy System
Generating SAP Structures in the DTW
Translating Data in the R3 System
Translating Data Types
Translating Data for Transaction FB01
Translating Data - Example
Translating Data Using EXCEL
Data Analysis and Formatting
Initializing Record Layouts
Initializing Record Layouts - Example
Filling Record Layouts
Structure of Transaction FB01
Mapping Data in Transaction FB01
Filling Record Layout BGR00 - Example
Data Analysis and Formatting
Additional Tasks
Converting Data
Converting Legacy System R3 System Data
Structure of a Conversion ProgramData Analysis - Summary
Exercises for Unit Data AnalysisSolutions to Unit Data Analysis
Files in the R3 System Unit 55
Objectives
Files in the R3 System
R3 Client Server Architecture
Transferring Files
Files in the R3 System
Processing FilesOpening Files
Opening Files - Options
Binary Mode and Text Mode
Transferring Data Records
Reading Data Records
Closing Deleting a Sequential File
Filling Record Layouts for Transaction FB01 (1)
Filling Record Layouts for Transaction FB01 (2)
Sequential Files - Summary
Files in the R3 System
DOWNLOAD and UPLOADFunction Module rsquoDOWNLOADrsquo
Example Program DOWNLOAD
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2934
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-29
Function Module rsquoUPLOADrsquo
Example Program UPLOAD
Summary
Exercises for Unit Files in the R3 SystemSolutions to Unit Files in the R3 System
Data Transfer Workbench Unit 56
Data Transfer - Objectives
Data Transfer Workbench
Preparing the Data Transfer
Testing and Executing the Data Transfer
Direct Input Management
Scheduling Direct Input
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer WorkbenchSolutions to Unit Data Transfer Workbench
Batch Input Sessions Unit 57
Objectives
Batch Input Sessions
Batch Input Processing
Batch Input Program
Format of a Batch Input Session
Creating Batch Input Sessions
Function Modules for Batch Input Programs
Structure of the BDC Table
Batch Input Processing
Batch Input Sessions
Batch Input Monitor - FunctionsSession Status
Processing Modes
Entering Data into Screens
Batch Input Processing
Session Statistics
Session Log
Summary
Exercises for Unit Batch Input SessionsSolutions to Unit Batch Input Sessions
Data Transfer Programs Unit 58Objectives
Data Transfer Programs
Customer Transfer Programs
Customer Transfer Program - Tasks
Data Transfer Programs
Batch Input Program Elements
Defining BDC Tables
Structure of the BDC Table
Determining Field Names
Determining Field Names with the Screen Painter
Structure DefinitionFunction Modules for a Batch Input Program
Function Module BDC_OPEN_GROUP
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3034
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-30
Function Module BDC_INSERT
Function Module BDC_CLOSE_GROUP
Structure of a Batch Input Program
Batch Input Program - Overview (I)
Batch Input Program - Overview (II)
Subroutine generate_bdc_dataProgram BDCRECXX (I)
Program BDCRECXX (II)
Program BDCRECXX (III)
Data Transfer Programs
Batch Input Recorder
Batch Input Recording
Recording the First Screen
Recording the Second Screen
Additional Screens Saving
Ending the Recording
Generating Sessions and Programs
Generating Batch Input Sessions
Structure of the Generated Program
Enhancing the Generated Program
Data Transfer Programs
Overview
Call Transaction Program
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (I)
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (II)
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (III)
Displaying the Messtab
Technical Implementation
Return Codes and System FieldsSystem Field Message Output
Generating Sessions When Errors Occur
Summary
Overview
Structure of a Data Transfer Program
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer ProgramSolutions to Unit Data Transfer Program
Additional Techniques Unit 59
ObjectivesAdditional Techniques - Overview
Changing Customers - Payment Transactions
Step Loop Field Names
Structure of the BDC Table
Filling BDC Tables in ABAP
Additional Techniques
Overview - Special Fields
Setting the Cursor in the Batch Input Session
Setting the Cursor in the ABAP Program
Additional Techniques
Successful Transaction EndAdditional Techniques
Processing Batch Input Sessions
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-31
Batch Input Flow
Additional Techniques
Program RSBDCSUB
Batch Input Authorizations
Service Programs
Summary Exercises for Unit Additional TechniquesSolutions for Unit Additional Techniques
Tips amp Tricks Unit 60
Tips and Tricks - Objectives
OSS Notes
Parallel Processing
Resetting Rollback Segments
Additional Tips and Information
Summary
Appendix Unit 61
Job Structure
Scheduling Jobs
Job Distribution
SAP-LUW Chronological Update
Update Principles
Asynchronous Update
Synchronous Update
Local Update
E n h a n c e m e n t s a n d M o d i f i c a t i o n s
Enhancements and Modifications Unit 62
Content
Introduction Contents
Course Overview Diagram
Main Business Scenario
Modifications Unit 63
Objectives
Modifications
What are modifications
Modifications and Upgrades
Modifications
Copying SAP Objects
Making Changes to SAP Copies (Modifications)
Registering Modifications in SSCR
Carrying Out a Registered Modification
Versions
Naming Conventions for Repository Objects
Modifications
Modifications Critical Success Factors (1)
Modifications Critical Success Factors (2)Modifications Critical Success Factors (3)
Documenting Modifications in Programs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-32
Modification Logs An Example
Modifications
Modification Adjustment SPDD and SPAU
Modification Adjustment Objects
Transaction SPAU (Process After Upgrade)
Transporting Adjustments between SystemsThe amount of work necessary at upgrade increases
Modifications Critical Repository Objects
Avoiding Adjustments
Modifications
User Exits
User Exits An Example
Using User Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Modifications
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Unit 64
Objectives
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Table Enhancements Overview
Append Structures
Append Structures at Upgrade
Customizing Includes
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Global Enhancements
Field Exits
Global and Local Field Exits
Creating Field Exits
Enhancements to Dictionary ElementsText Enhancements
Editing Text Enhancements
Keywords
Keyword Change Requirements
Keyword Changes and Release Upgrades
Restoring SAP Keywords
Enhanced Documentation for Data Elements
Customer Documentation
Summary Text Enhancements
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Solutions for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Enhancements using Customer Exits Unit 65
Objectives
Enhancements using Customer Exits
SAP Application Enhancements
Customer Enhancement Projects
SAP Enhancements and Customer Enhancement Projects
Enhancements using Customer Exits
The SAP Enhancement Creation Procedure
Implementing Enhancements in Customer SystemsCreating Customer Enhancement Projects
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-33
Editing Components
Activating Enhancement Projects
Transporting Projects
Summary Enhancement Management
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Function Module ExitsCalling and Creating Function Modules
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Organization of an X Function Group
Customer Source Code
Global Data SAP and the Customer
Subroutines Modules SAP and the Customer
Customer Screens
Customer Screens Modules
Summary Function Module Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Menu Exits
Menu Exit Requirements
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Menu Exits and Function Module Exits
Summary Menu Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Screen Exits
Subscreens in the R3 System
Calling Subscreens
Defining Screen Exits
Calling Customer Subscreens
Transporting Data to Subscreens
Transporting Data from SubscreensEditing Subscreens (1)
Editing Subscreens (2)
Summary Screen Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits Solutions for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits
Business Transaction Events Unit 66
Objectives
Business Transaction Events (BTE)
BTE Possible Scenarios (1)BTE Possible Scenarios (2)
Publish amp Subscribe vs Process Interfaces
Business Transaction Events SAP and the Customer
Finding Business Transaction Events
Creating a Publish amp Subscribe Interface
Differences between Customer Exits and BTEs
Summary
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3434
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1834
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-18
Overview Creating Functional Areas
Example Defining a Functional Area
Defining Functional Areas
Allocating Fields
Additional Information
Allocating Additional TablesAllocating Additional Fields
Selection Options
Allocating ABAP Statements
Summary
Exercises for ABAP Query Administration
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing Unit 33
Unit Objectives Control Level Processing
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Motivation
Control Level Processing
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Creating an Internal Table
Filling an Internal Table
Sorting and Editing an Internal Table
Control Level Processing for Internal Tables
Control Level Processing Schema for Internal Tables
Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Generating an Extract Steps
Example Generating an Extract
Sorting and Processing an Extract
Example Control Level Processing
Schema for Control Level Processing of ExtractsData Formatting and Control Level Processing
Comparing Internal Tables and Extracts
Summary Control Level Processing
Exercises for Data Formatting and Control Level Processing Solutions for Data Formatting and Control Level Processing
Storing Lists and Background Processing Unit 34
Objectives
Storing Lists and Background Processing
Saving Lists Possibilities
Saving Lists in SAPofficeSaving Lists as PC Files
Saving Lists in a Report Tree
Customizing Report Trees
Functions in Report Trees
Storing Lists and Background Processing
Options for Printing a List
Print Parameters
Program-Controlled Printing
Program-Controlled Printing with GET_PRINT_PARAMETERS
Storing Lists and Background Processing
Background Processing PhasesDefining Steps
Defining Start Times and Releasing Jobs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1934
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-19
Summary
Exercises for Storing Lists and Background Processing Solutions for Storing Lists and Background Processing
Interactive Lists Basics Unit 35
Unit Objectives Interactive ListsInteractive Lists Basics
User Interactions with Lists
Navigating Between Lists
Events Overview
Flow Control in Detail Lists
Creating Detail Lists I
Creating Detail Lists II
Interactive Lists Basics
Questions
HIDE Areas
HIDE Technique Line Selection
Data Buffering in a List System
Valid Line Selection
Field Selection
Interactive Lists Basics
Page Headers in Detail Lists
Interactive Lists Basics
Creating Lists in Modal Dialog Boxes
Summary Interactive Lists
Exercises for Interactive Lists Solutions for Interactive Lists
Creating User Interfaces Unit 36Objectives User Interfaces
User Interfaces Overview
Status Technical View I
Status Technical View II
Creating a GUI Status
Creating a GUI Status Assigning F Keys I
Creating a GUI Status Assigning F Keys II
Creating a GUI Status Menu Bars
Activating Title and Status
Event AT USER-COMMAND
Summary User Interfaces
Special Techniques for Interactive Lists Unit 37
Objectives
Scrolling in Lists
Reading Lists
Modifying Lists
List Navigation
Interactive List Messages
System Fields in Interactive Lists
Summary
Exercises for Creating User Interfaces Solutions for Creating User Interfaces
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2034
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-20
Linking Programs Unit 38
Objectives
Linking Programs
Data Visibility
Data Transfer Using SAP Memory
SETGET ParametersSUBMIT Statement Syntax
Example SUBMIT WITH
Datatransfer Using ABAP Memory
Returning from a Called Program
Summary
Exercises for Linking Programs Solutions for Linking Programs
Lists on the Internet Unit 39
Unit Objectives Special Application
Lists on the Internet
Motivation
The World Wide Web
HTTP Hypertext Transport Protocol
URL Uniform Resource Locator
HTML Hypertext Markup Language
R3 ClientServer Architecture
R3 ClientServer Architecture with ITS
Lists on the Internet
Web Reporting - Overview
Web Reporting Flow
Creating a List Using a URL
Parameters for WWW_GET_REPORTInteractive Lists
Access Authorization
Creating HTML Hyperlinks in Lists
Lists on the Internet
Web Reporting Browser
Releasing Report Trees for the Internet
Summary Special Application
Appendix Unit 40
Menu Data
T r a n s a c t i o n P ro g r a m m i n g
Transaction Programming Unit 41
Content
Introduction Contents
Couse Goal
Course Objectives
Overview Diagram
Main Business Scenario
About the Course Material
Basic Transaction Programming Unit 42
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-21
Objectives - Basics
Components of a Transaction
Writing a Transaction Process
Analyzing the Problem
User Dialogs in the R3 System
Advantages of ScreensComponents of a Screen
Static Screen Sequence
Creating a Screen Attributes
Creating a Screen Layout
Creating a Screen Field List
Writing the Flow Logic
Communictaion Between Screen and ABAP Program
Creating a Transaction Code
Summary Basic Dialog Programming
Screen Objects - List Unit 43
Screen Objects - Objectives
Screen Objects
Screen Objects General Attributes
Attributes of Screen Objects (Key)
Dynamically Modifiable Static Attributes
The System Table SCREEN
Modifying Attributes Dynamically Example
Object Attributes Modification Group
Modifying Attributes Dynamically Program
Screen Objects - Screen
Screen Object Screen
Defining and Managing ScreensScreen Attributes
Dynamic Next Screen Overview
Setting the Next Screen Dynamically
Inserting a Sequence of Screens Dynamically
Calling a Dialog Box Dynamically
Window Coordinates
Setting the Cursor Position Dynamically
Screen Objects - Title Bar
Screen Object Title Bar
Creating and Using Title Bars
Screen Objects - Text FieldScreen Object Text Field
Text Fields Attributes
Creating Text Fields
Hiding Texts Dynamically
Dynamically Modifiable Attributes Text Field
Dynamic Screen Modifications Program
Screen Objects - InputOutput Field
Screen Object InputOutput Field
InputOutput Fields Attributes
Creating InputOutput Fields
InputOutput Fields Automatic Field ChecksInputOutput Fields Default Values in SAP Memory
Defining SETGET Parameter Attributes
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-22
Programming Field Input Checks with an Error Dialog
Checking Groups of Fields
Controlling Error Dialogs
Dialog Message Categories
The FIELD Statement and Data Transport
Calling Modules Conditionally (1)Calling Modules Conditionally (2)
Screen Objects Status icon
Screen Objects Status Icons
Status Icons Attributes
Creating Status Icon Fields
Filling Status Icon Fields
Group Box
Screen Objects Group Boxes
Group Boxes Attributes
Screen Objects Radio Buttons
Screen Objects Radio Buttons and Checkboxes
Radio ButtonsCheckboxes Attributes
Creating a Radio Button Group
Creating a Checkbox
Screen Objects - Pushbutton
Screen Objects Pushbuttons
Pushbuttons Attributes
Creating Pushbuttons
Pushbuttons with Function Type E
Screen Objects - Subscreen
Screen Objects Subscreen (1)
Screen Objects Subscreen (2)
Subscreen AttributesCreating a Subscreen Area
Calling a Subscreen
Subscreens from External Programs
Subscreens Encapsulation in Function Groups
Subscreens in Function Groups Call Sequence
Subscreens in Function Groups Data Transport
Screen Objects - Tabstrip Control
Screen Object Tabstrip Control
Tabstrip Elements
Tab Page Technical View
Tabstrip Controls AttributesCreating a Tabstrip Control
Creating a Tabstrip Control Tabstrip Area
Creating a Tabstip Control Tab Title
Creating a Tabstrip Control Subscreens
Scrolling Locally in a Tabstrip Control
Scrolling Locally in a Tabstrip Control Coding
Scrolling in a Tabstrip Control
Scrolling in a Tabstrip Control Coding
Screen Objects - Table Control
Screen Object Table Control
ABAP Table Control (Functions)Table Control Table Settings
Actions in Table Controls
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-23
Creating Table Control Elements
Table Control Attributes
Creating a Table Control
Creating a Table Control Table Control Area
Creating a Table Control TC Fields (1)
Create Table Control TC Fields (2) Section ColumnTable Control Attributes at Runtime
Table Control Attributes (Structure)
Table Control Elements - Processing
Processing a Table Control (Principle 1)
Filling a Table Control
Changing the Contents of a Table Control
Table Control Applications (Principle)
Filling a Table Control Coding
Changing the Contents of a Table Control 4 Coding
Table Controls Field Transport in the PBO
Table Controls Field Transport in the PAI
Table Control Elements Further Techniques
Changing a Table Control
Changing the Attributes of a Table Control (1)
Changing the Attributes of a Table Control (2)
Table Control Modifying Field Attributes Temporarily
Sorting a Table Control (Example)
Scrolling Page by Page in a Table Control (Example)
Table Control Cursor Position (Example)
Screen Objects - GUI Status
Screen Object GUI Status
Status Technical View (1)
Status Technical View (2)Attributes of Functions
Function Key Settings
Menus and Menu Bars Attributes
Status Attributes
Standard Toolbar Functions and their Reserved function Keys
Creating a Status
Navigation - Targets
Navigation - Dialogs
Screen Objects - List
Screen Objects Lists
Displaying a List Within a TransactionLists in a Modal Dialog Box
Screen Objects - Selection Screen
Screen Object Selection Screen
Entering Value Ranges
Defining and Calling a Selection Screen
Summary Screen Objects
Uumlbung zu Kapitel Screen Objects Solutions Screen Objects Unit
Programming Database Changes Unit 44
Unit ObjectivesProgramming Database Changes
Statements for Database Dialogs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2434
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-24
SAP LUW
Database LUW
SAP R3 System 3-tier Architecture
System Architecture Implicit DB COMMIT
Objective Bundling the DB Changes in an SAP LUW
Programming Database ChangesBundling Techniques Overview
Bunding Using Delayed Inline Changes
Bundling Using Subroutines
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundline Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Techniques
Update Function modules
V1 and V2 Update Function Modules
Logging Records for Update
Deleting Update Entries Rollback in the Dialog Program
Rollback in the Update Program
Asynchronous Update
What Happens in a Commit Work
Comparison of Bundling Techniques
Programming Database Updates
Why Set Locks
Database Locks
SAP Locking Concept
Setting Logical Locks
SAP Lock ObjectsENQUEUE and DEQUEUE Function Modules
Calling the Function Modules
The Lock Table
Validity of Locks Scope = 2
Programming Database Updates
SAP Authorization Concept
Authorization Checks
User Master Record Authorizations
Authorization Checks for Transactions
Summary
Exercises Programming Database Updates Unit Solutions Programming Database Updates Unit
Complex Transactions Unit 45
Unit Objectives
Complex Transactions
Synchronous Calls Overview
Calling a Report Program
Calling a Transaction
Encapsulating Dialogs in Function Modules
Synchronous Program Calls Main Memory Contents
Complex TransactionsAsynchronous Calls
Calling Programs Asynchronously
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2534
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-25
Complex Transactions
Passing Data Overview
Passing Data Using the Interface of ABAP Programs
The WITH Addition in the SUBMIT Statement
Memory Areas Logical Model
ABAP MemoryPassing Parameters using the SAP Memory
Passing Parameters (SAP Memory)
Complex Transactions
Synchronous Program Calls SAP LUWs
Asynchronous Program Calls SAP LUWs
Program Calls Visible Data and LUWs
Complex Transactions
RFC Scenario R3 - R3
Enabling Function Modules for RFC
RFC Using ABAP Function Modules
Program Context of a Remote Function
RFC Calls System Exceptions
Complex Transactions
Remote Function Call Overview
Process Diagram Synchronous RFC
Process Diagram Asynchronous RFC
Process Diagram Transactional RFC
Transactional RFC (tRFC) Introduction
tRFC Properties
Complex Transactions
Lock Entries for Local Program Calls
Lock Entries for RFC Calls
Summary Exercises Complex Transactions Unit Solutions Complex Transactions Unit
Static Attributes in the Screen Painter Unit 46
Screen Attributes (1)
Screen Attributes (2)
General Attributes
Dictionary Attributes
Program Attributes
Display Attributes
Special Attributes for Subscreens and Tabstrip ControlsSpecial Attributes for Table Controls
Database Updates Further Information Unit 47
Objectives
Database Updates Further Information
Asynchronous Update
Synchronous Update
Local Update
SAP LUW Timescale of Updates
Database Updates Further Information
V1 and V2 Update Function ModulesV1 Update
V2 Update
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2634
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-26
Database Updates Further Information
Validity of Locks Scope = 1
Validity of Locks Scope = 2
Validity of Locks Scope = 3
ENQUEUE Function Modules Interface Parameters
Summary
Complex Transactions Further Information Unit 48
CALL TRANSACTION lsquoTA01rsquo and SUBMIT lsquoREP01rsquo AND RETURN
Implicit End of a Program or LEAVE PROGRAM
LEAVE TO TRANSACTION lsquoTA01rsquo
SUBMIT lsquoREP01rsquo
CALL FUNCTION lsquoFUNC1rsquoPERFORM form1 IN PROGRAM program
Help Functions Unit 49
Overview Standard F1 and F4 Functions
The Search Help Concept
Dialog for an Immediate Hit List
Dialog with Preselection
Dialog for Selecting a Search Help
Search Help Concepts
Search Helps
Defining the Dialog Fields
Defining the Data Selection
Collective Search Helps
Search Help Concepts
Linking Search Helps to Screen Fields
Search Help Concepts
Programmed Help Functions OverviewProgrammed F1 and F4 Help
The POH and POV Events Process
Function Modules for Data Transport
Field Transport to and from the Screen
Determining the Contents of Screen Fields ( POV POH )
Placing Values in Screen Fields ( POV )
Special F1 Functions
Displaying Input Values for a Table Field (POV)
Search Help Concepts
Overview Input Help Mechanisms
Migrating Existing Input Help
Assigning Number Range Numbers Unit 50
Objectives
Overview
Number Range Objects
Number Range Intervals
Sub-objects
Assigning Internal Numbers
Checking External Numbers
Number Range Information
Accessing Table NRIV 1 Without a Buffer Accessing Table NRIV 2 Without a Buffer
Buffering Number Ranges
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2734
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-27
Using Function Groups to Administer Number Ranges
Summary 1
Summary 2
Creating Change Documents Unit 51
ObjectivesOverview
Change Document Structure
Change Relevance
Change Document Objects
Generating Update Programs
INCLUDE Program Structure
Application Program
Change Document Objects and Internal Tables
Reading Change Documents
Using Function Groups to Edit Change Documents
Summary (1)
Summary (2)
Appendix Unit 52
Documentation ReferencesGlossary Index
I n t e r f a c e s f o r D a t a T r a n s f e r
Interfaces for Data Transfer Unit 53
Content
Data Transfer
Objectives
Data Transfer
Transferring Data Into the R3 System
Direct Data Transfer
Data Transfer Using Interfaces
Data Transfer Workbench
Data Analysis
Data Transfer
Analyzing the SAP Transaction
Assigning DataFormat Conversion
Transferring Legacy Data into the R3 System
Data Transfer Methods
Knowledge Tools
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer
Data Analysis and Formatting Unit 54
Data Analysis - Objectives
Data Analysis and Formatting
Standard Transfer Interfaces for Standard Transfer
Standard Transfer - Tasks
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2834
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-28
IMG Documentation
Data Transfer Workbench (DTW)
Documentation in the DTW
Data Analysis and Formatting
Record Layout Types
FB01 Record Layout StructureSample Data for Record Layouts
Generating Test Data in the DTW
Data Analysis and Formatting
Translating Data
Translating Data in the Legacy System
Generating SAP Structures in the DTW
Translating Data in the R3 System
Translating Data Types
Translating Data for Transaction FB01
Translating Data - Example
Translating Data Using EXCEL
Data Analysis and Formatting
Initializing Record Layouts
Initializing Record Layouts - Example
Filling Record Layouts
Structure of Transaction FB01
Mapping Data in Transaction FB01
Filling Record Layout BGR00 - Example
Data Analysis and Formatting
Additional Tasks
Converting Data
Converting Legacy System R3 System Data
Structure of a Conversion ProgramData Analysis - Summary
Exercises for Unit Data AnalysisSolutions to Unit Data Analysis
Files in the R3 System Unit 55
Objectives
Files in the R3 System
R3 Client Server Architecture
Transferring Files
Files in the R3 System
Processing FilesOpening Files
Opening Files - Options
Binary Mode and Text Mode
Transferring Data Records
Reading Data Records
Closing Deleting a Sequential File
Filling Record Layouts for Transaction FB01 (1)
Filling Record Layouts for Transaction FB01 (2)
Sequential Files - Summary
Files in the R3 System
DOWNLOAD and UPLOADFunction Module rsquoDOWNLOADrsquo
Example Program DOWNLOAD
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2934
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-29
Function Module rsquoUPLOADrsquo
Example Program UPLOAD
Summary
Exercises for Unit Files in the R3 SystemSolutions to Unit Files in the R3 System
Data Transfer Workbench Unit 56
Data Transfer - Objectives
Data Transfer Workbench
Preparing the Data Transfer
Testing and Executing the Data Transfer
Direct Input Management
Scheduling Direct Input
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer WorkbenchSolutions to Unit Data Transfer Workbench
Batch Input Sessions Unit 57
Objectives
Batch Input Sessions
Batch Input Processing
Batch Input Program
Format of a Batch Input Session
Creating Batch Input Sessions
Function Modules for Batch Input Programs
Structure of the BDC Table
Batch Input Processing
Batch Input Sessions
Batch Input Monitor - FunctionsSession Status
Processing Modes
Entering Data into Screens
Batch Input Processing
Session Statistics
Session Log
Summary
Exercises for Unit Batch Input SessionsSolutions to Unit Batch Input Sessions
Data Transfer Programs Unit 58Objectives
Data Transfer Programs
Customer Transfer Programs
Customer Transfer Program - Tasks
Data Transfer Programs
Batch Input Program Elements
Defining BDC Tables
Structure of the BDC Table
Determining Field Names
Determining Field Names with the Screen Painter
Structure DefinitionFunction Modules for a Batch Input Program
Function Module BDC_OPEN_GROUP
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3034
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-30
Function Module BDC_INSERT
Function Module BDC_CLOSE_GROUP
Structure of a Batch Input Program
Batch Input Program - Overview (I)
Batch Input Program - Overview (II)
Subroutine generate_bdc_dataProgram BDCRECXX (I)
Program BDCRECXX (II)
Program BDCRECXX (III)
Data Transfer Programs
Batch Input Recorder
Batch Input Recording
Recording the First Screen
Recording the Second Screen
Additional Screens Saving
Ending the Recording
Generating Sessions and Programs
Generating Batch Input Sessions
Structure of the Generated Program
Enhancing the Generated Program
Data Transfer Programs
Overview
Call Transaction Program
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (I)
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (II)
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (III)
Displaying the Messtab
Technical Implementation
Return Codes and System FieldsSystem Field Message Output
Generating Sessions When Errors Occur
Summary
Overview
Structure of a Data Transfer Program
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer ProgramSolutions to Unit Data Transfer Program
Additional Techniques Unit 59
ObjectivesAdditional Techniques - Overview
Changing Customers - Payment Transactions
Step Loop Field Names
Structure of the BDC Table
Filling BDC Tables in ABAP
Additional Techniques
Overview - Special Fields
Setting the Cursor in the Batch Input Session
Setting the Cursor in the ABAP Program
Additional Techniques
Successful Transaction EndAdditional Techniques
Processing Batch Input Sessions
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-31
Batch Input Flow
Additional Techniques
Program RSBDCSUB
Batch Input Authorizations
Service Programs
Summary Exercises for Unit Additional TechniquesSolutions for Unit Additional Techniques
Tips amp Tricks Unit 60
Tips and Tricks - Objectives
OSS Notes
Parallel Processing
Resetting Rollback Segments
Additional Tips and Information
Summary
Appendix Unit 61
Job Structure
Scheduling Jobs
Job Distribution
SAP-LUW Chronological Update
Update Principles
Asynchronous Update
Synchronous Update
Local Update
E n h a n c e m e n t s a n d M o d i f i c a t i o n s
Enhancements and Modifications Unit 62
Content
Introduction Contents
Course Overview Diagram
Main Business Scenario
Modifications Unit 63
Objectives
Modifications
What are modifications
Modifications and Upgrades
Modifications
Copying SAP Objects
Making Changes to SAP Copies (Modifications)
Registering Modifications in SSCR
Carrying Out a Registered Modification
Versions
Naming Conventions for Repository Objects
Modifications
Modifications Critical Success Factors (1)
Modifications Critical Success Factors (2)Modifications Critical Success Factors (3)
Documenting Modifications in Programs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-32
Modification Logs An Example
Modifications
Modification Adjustment SPDD and SPAU
Modification Adjustment Objects
Transaction SPAU (Process After Upgrade)
Transporting Adjustments between SystemsThe amount of work necessary at upgrade increases
Modifications Critical Repository Objects
Avoiding Adjustments
Modifications
User Exits
User Exits An Example
Using User Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Modifications
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Unit 64
Objectives
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Table Enhancements Overview
Append Structures
Append Structures at Upgrade
Customizing Includes
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Global Enhancements
Field Exits
Global and Local Field Exits
Creating Field Exits
Enhancements to Dictionary ElementsText Enhancements
Editing Text Enhancements
Keywords
Keyword Change Requirements
Keyword Changes and Release Upgrades
Restoring SAP Keywords
Enhanced Documentation for Data Elements
Customer Documentation
Summary Text Enhancements
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Solutions for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Enhancements using Customer Exits Unit 65
Objectives
Enhancements using Customer Exits
SAP Application Enhancements
Customer Enhancement Projects
SAP Enhancements and Customer Enhancement Projects
Enhancements using Customer Exits
The SAP Enhancement Creation Procedure
Implementing Enhancements in Customer SystemsCreating Customer Enhancement Projects
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-33
Editing Components
Activating Enhancement Projects
Transporting Projects
Summary Enhancement Management
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Function Module ExitsCalling and Creating Function Modules
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Organization of an X Function Group
Customer Source Code
Global Data SAP and the Customer
Subroutines Modules SAP and the Customer
Customer Screens
Customer Screens Modules
Summary Function Module Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Menu Exits
Menu Exit Requirements
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Menu Exits and Function Module Exits
Summary Menu Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Screen Exits
Subscreens in the R3 System
Calling Subscreens
Defining Screen Exits
Calling Customer Subscreens
Transporting Data to Subscreens
Transporting Data from SubscreensEditing Subscreens (1)
Editing Subscreens (2)
Summary Screen Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits Solutions for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits
Business Transaction Events Unit 66
Objectives
Business Transaction Events (BTE)
BTE Possible Scenarios (1)BTE Possible Scenarios (2)
Publish amp Subscribe vs Process Interfaces
Business Transaction Events SAP and the Customer
Finding Business Transaction Events
Creating a Publish amp Subscribe Interface
Differences between Customer Exits and BTEs
Summary
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3434
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 1934
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-19
Summary
Exercises for Storing Lists and Background Processing Solutions for Storing Lists and Background Processing
Interactive Lists Basics Unit 35
Unit Objectives Interactive ListsInteractive Lists Basics
User Interactions with Lists
Navigating Between Lists
Events Overview
Flow Control in Detail Lists
Creating Detail Lists I
Creating Detail Lists II
Interactive Lists Basics
Questions
HIDE Areas
HIDE Technique Line Selection
Data Buffering in a List System
Valid Line Selection
Field Selection
Interactive Lists Basics
Page Headers in Detail Lists
Interactive Lists Basics
Creating Lists in Modal Dialog Boxes
Summary Interactive Lists
Exercises for Interactive Lists Solutions for Interactive Lists
Creating User Interfaces Unit 36Objectives User Interfaces
User Interfaces Overview
Status Technical View I
Status Technical View II
Creating a GUI Status
Creating a GUI Status Assigning F Keys I
Creating a GUI Status Assigning F Keys II
Creating a GUI Status Menu Bars
Activating Title and Status
Event AT USER-COMMAND
Summary User Interfaces
Special Techniques for Interactive Lists Unit 37
Objectives
Scrolling in Lists
Reading Lists
Modifying Lists
List Navigation
Interactive List Messages
System Fields in Interactive Lists
Summary
Exercises for Creating User Interfaces Solutions for Creating User Interfaces
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2034
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-20
Linking Programs Unit 38
Objectives
Linking Programs
Data Visibility
Data Transfer Using SAP Memory
SETGET ParametersSUBMIT Statement Syntax
Example SUBMIT WITH
Datatransfer Using ABAP Memory
Returning from a Called Program
Summary
Exercises for Linking Programs Solutions for Linking Programs
Lists on the Internet Unit 39
Unit Objectives Special Application
Lists on the Internet
Motivation
The World Wide Web
HTTP Hypertext Transport Protocol
URL Uniform Resource Locator
HTML Hypertext Markup Language
R3 ClientServer Architecture
R3 ClientServer Architecture with ITS
Lists on the Internet
Web Reporting - Overview
Web Reporting Flow
Creating a List Using a URL
Parameters for WWW_GET_REPORTInteractive Lists
Access Authorization
Creating HTML Hyperlinks in Lists
Lists on the Internet
Web Reporting Browser
Releasing Report Trees for the Internet
Summary Special Application
Appendix Unit 40
Menu Data
T r a n s a c t i o n P ro g r a m m i n g
Transaction Programming Unit 41
Content
Introduction Contents
Couse Goal
Course Objectives
Overview Diagram
Main Business Scenario
About the Course Material
Basic Transaction Programming Unit 42
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-21
Objectives - Basics
Components of a Transaction
Writing a Transaction Process
Analyzing the Problem
User Dialogs in the R3 System
Advantages of ScreensComponents of a Screen
Static Screen Sequence
Creating a Screen Attributes
Creating a Screen Layout
Creating a Screen Field List
Writing the Flow Logic
Communictaion Between Screen and ABAP Program
Creating a Transaction Code
Summary Basic Dialog Programming
Screen Objects - List Unit 43
Screen Objects - Objectives
Screen Objects
Screen Objects General Attributes
Attributes of Screen Objects (Key)
Dynamically Modifiable Static Attributes
The System Table SCREEN
Modifying Attributes Dynamically Example
Object Attributes Modification Group
Modifying Attributes Dynamically Program
Screen Objects - Screen
Screen Object Screen
Defining and Managing ScreensScreen Attributes
Dynamic Next Screen Overview
Setting the Next Screen Dynamically
Inserting a Sequence of Screens Dynamically
Calling a Dialog Box Dynamically
Window Coordinates
Setting the Cursor Position Dynamically
Screen Objects - Title Bar
Screen Object Title Bar
Creating and Using Title Bars
Screen Objects - Text FieldScreen Object Text Field
Text Fields Attributes
Creating Text Fields
Hiding Texts Dynamically
Dynamically Modifiable Attributes Text Field
Dynamic Screen Modifications Program
Screen Objects - InputOutput Field
Screen Object InputOutput Field
InputOutput Fields Attributes
Creating InputOutput Fields
InputOutput Fields Automatic Field ChecksInputOutput Fields Default Values in SAP Memory
Defining SETGET Parameter Attributes
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-22
Programming Field Input Checks with an Error Dialog
Checking Groups of Fields
Controlling Error Dialogs
Dialog Message Categories
The FIELD Statement and Data Transport
Calling Modules Conditionally (1)Calling Modules Conditionally (2)
Screen Objects Status icon
Screen Objects Status Icons
Status Icons Attributes
Creating Status Icon Fields
Filling Status Icon Fields
Group Box
Screen Objects Group Boxes
Group Boxes Attributes
Screen Objects Radio Buttons
Screen Objects Radio Buttons and Checkboxes
Radio ButtonsCheckboxes Attributes
Creating a Radio Button Group
Creating a Checkbox
Screen Objects - Pushbutton
Screen Objects Pushbuttons
Pushbuttons Attributes
Creating Pushbuttons
Pushbuttons with Function Type E
Screen Objects - Subscreen
Screen Objects Subscreen (1)
Screen Objects Subscreen (2)
Subscreen AttributesCreating a Subscreen Area
Calling a Subscreen
Subscreens from External Programs
Subscreens Encapsulation in Function Groups
Subscreens in Function Groups Call Sequence
Subscreens in Function Groups Data Transport
Screen Objects - Tabstrip Control
Screen Object Tabstrip Control
Tabstrip Elements
Tab Page Technical View
Tabstrip Controls AttributesCreating a Tabstrip Control
Creating a Tabstrip Control Tabstrip Area
Creating a Tabstip Control Tab Title
Creating a Tabstrip Control Subscreens
Scrolling Locally in a Tabstrip Control
Scrolling Locally in a Tabstrip Control Coding
Scrolling in a Tabstrip Control
Scrolling in a Tabstrip Control Coding
Screen Objects - Table Control
Screen Object Table Control
ABAP Table Control (Functions)Table Control Table Settings
Actions in Table Controls
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-23
Creating Table Control Elements
Table Control Attributes
Creating a Table Control
Creating a Table Control Table Control Area
Creating a Table Control TC Fields (1)
Create Table Control TC Fields (2) Section ColumnTable Control Attributes at Runtime
Table Control Attributes (Structure)
Table Control Elements - Processing
Processing a Table Control (Principle 1)
Filling a Table Control
Changing the Contents of a Table Control
Table Control Applications (Principle)
Filling a Table Control Coding
Changing the Contents of a Table Control 4 Coding
Table Controls Field Transport in the PBO
Table Controls Field Transport in the PAI
Table Control Elements Further Techniques
Changing a Table Control
Changing the Attributes of a Table Control (1)
Changing the Attributes of a Table Control (2)
Table Control Modifying Field Attributes Temporarily
Sorting a Table Control (Example)
Scrolling Page by Page in a Table Control (Example)
Table Control Cursor Position (Example)
Screen Objects - GUI Status
Screen Object GUI Status
Status Technical View (1)
Status Technical View (2)Attributes of Functions
Function Key Settings
Menus and Menu Bars Attributes
Status Attributes
Standard Toolbar Functions and their Reserved function Keys
Creating a Status
Navigation - Targets
Navigation - Dialogs
Screen Objects - List
Screen Objects Lists
Displaying a List Within a TransactionLists in a Modal Dialog Box
Screen Objects - Selection Screen
Screen Object Selection Screen
Entering Value Ranges
Defining and Calling a Selection Screen
Summary Screen Objects
Uumlbung zu Kapitel Screen Objects Solutions Screen Objects Unit
Programming Database Changes Unit 44
Unit ObjectivesProgramming Database Changes
Statements for Database Dialogs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2434
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-24
SAP LUW
Database LUW
SAP R3 System 3-tier Architecture
System Architecture Implicit DB COMMIT
Objective Bundling the DB Changes in an SAP LUW
Programming Database ChangesBundling Techniques Overview
Bunding Using Delayed Inline Changes
Bundling Using Subroutines
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundline Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Techniques
Update Function modules
V1 and V2 Update Function Modules
Logging Records for Update
Deleting Update Entries Rollback in the Dialog Program
Rollback in the Update Program
Asynchronous Update
What Happens in a Commit Work
Comparison of Bundling Techniques
Programming Database Updates
Why Set Locks
Database Locks
SAP Locking Concept
Setting Logical Locks
SAP Lock ObjectsENQUEUE and DEQUEUE Function Modules
Calling the Function Modules
The Lock Table
Validity of Locks Scope = 2
Programming Database Updates
SAP Authorization Concept
Authorization Checks
User Master Record Authorizations
Authorization Checks for Transactions
Summary
Exercises Programming Database Updates Unit Solutions Programming Database Updates Unit
Complex Transactions Unit 45
Unit Objectives
Complex Transactions
Synchronous Calls Overview
Calling a Report Program
Calling a Transaction
Encapsulating Dialogs in Function Modules
Synchronous Program Calls Main Memory Contents
Complex TransactionsAsynchronous Calls
Calling Programs Asynchronously
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2534
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-25
Complex Transactions
Passing Data Overview
Passing Data Using the Interface of ABAP Programs
The WITH Addition in the SUBMIT Statement
Memory Areas Logical Model
ABAP MemoryPassing Parameters using the SAP Memory
Passing Parameters (SAP Memory)
Complex Transactions
Synchronous Program Calls SAP LUWs
Asynchronous Program Calls SAP LUWs
Program Calls Visible Data and LUWs
Complex Transactions
RFC Scenario R3 - R3
Enabling Function Modules for RFC
RFC Using ABAP Function Modules
Program Context of a Remote Function
RFC Calls System Exceptions
Complex Transactions
Remote Function Call Overview
Process Diagram Synchronous RFC
Process Diagram Asynchronous RFC
Process Diagram Transactional RFC
Transactional RFC (tRFC) Introduction
tRFC Properties
Complex Transactions
Lock Entries for Local Program Calls
Lock Entries for RFC Calls
Summary Exercises Complex Transactions Unit Solutions Complex Transactions Unit
Static Attributes in the Screen Painter Unit 46
Screen Attributes (1)
Screen Attributes (2)
General Attributes
Dictionary Attributes
Program Attributes
Display Attributes
Special Attributes for Subscreens and Tabstrip ControlsSpecial Attributes for Table Controls
Database Updates Further Information Unit 47
Objectives
Database Updates Further Information
Asynchronous Update
Synchronous Update
Local Update
SAP LUW Timescale of Updates
Database Updates Further Information
V1 and V2 Update Function ModulesV1 Update
V2 Update
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2634
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-26
Database Updates Further Information
Validity of Locks Scope = 1
Validity of Locks Scope = 2
Validity of Locks Scope = 3
ENQUEUE Function Modules Interface Parameters
Summary
Complex Transactions Further Information Unit 48
CALL TRANSACTION lsquoTA01rsquo and SUBMIT lsquoREP01rsquo AND RETURN
Implicit End of a Program or LEAVE PROGRAM
LEAVE TO TRANSACTION lsquoTA01rsquo
SUBMIT lsquoREP01rsquo
CALL FUNCTION lsquoFUNC1rsquoPERFORM form1 IN PROGRAM program
Help Functions Unit 49
Overview Standard F1 and F4 Functions
The Search Help Concept
Dialog for an Immediate Hit List
Dialog with Preselection
Dialog for Selecting a Search Help
Search Help Concepts
Search Helps
Defining the Dialog Fields
Defining the Data Selection
Collective Search Helps
Search Help Concepts
Linking Search Helps to Screen Fields
Search Help Concepts
Programmed Help Functions OverviewProgrammed F1 and F4 Help
The POH and POV Events Process
Function Modules for Data Transport
Field Transport to and from the Screen
Determining the Contents of Screen Fields ( POV POH )
Placing Values in Screen Fields ( POV )
Special F1 Functions
Displaying Input Values for a Table Field (POV)
Search Help Concepts
Overview Input Help Mechanisms
Migrating Existing Input Help
Assigning Number Range Numbers Unit 50
Objectives
Overview
Number Range Objects
Number Range Intervals
Sub-objects
Assigning Internal Numbers
Checking External Numbers
Number Range Information
Accessing Table NRIV 1 Without a Buffer Accessing Table NRIV 2 Without a Buffer
Buffering Number Ranges
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2734
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-27
Using Function Groups to Administer Number Ranges
Summary 1
Summary 2
Creating Change Documents Unit 51
ObjectivesOverview
Change Document Structure
Change Relevance
Change Document Objects
Generating Update Programs
INCLUDE Program Structure
Application Program
Change Document Objects and Internal Tables
Reading Change Documents
Using Function Groups to Edit Change Documents
Summary (1)
Summary (2)
Appendix Unit 52
Documentation ReferencesGlossary Index
I n t e r f a c e s f o r D a t a T r a n s f e r
Interfaces for Data Transfer Unit 53
Content
Data Transfer
Objectives
Data Transfer
Transferring Data Into the R3 System
Direct Data Transfer
Data Transfer Using Interfaces
Data Transfer Workbench
Data Analysis
Data Transfer
Analyzing the SAP Transaction
Assigning DataFormat Conversion
Transferring Legacy Data into the R3 System
Data Transfer Methods
Knowledge Tools
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer
Data Analysis and Formatting Unit 54
Data Analysis - Objectives
Data Analysis and Formatting
Standard Transfer Interfaces for Standard Transfer
Standard Transfer - Tasks
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2834
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-28
IMG Documentation
Data Transfer Workbench (DTW)
Documentation in the DTW
Data Analysis and Formatting
Record Layout Types
FB01 Record Layout StructureSample Data for Record Layouts
Generating Test Data in the DTW
Data Analysis and Formatting
Translating Data
Translating Data in the Legacy System
Generating SAP Structures in the DTW
Translating Data in the R3 System
Translating Data Types
Translating Data for Transaction FB01
Translating Data - Example
Translating Data Using EXCEL
Data Analysis and Formatting
Initializing Record Layouts
Initializing Record Layouts - Example
Filling Record Layouts
Structure of Transaction FB01
Mapping Data in Transaction FB01
Filling Record Layout BGR00 - Example
Data Analysis and Formatting
Additional Tasks
Converting Data
Converting Legacy System R3 System Data
Structure of a Conversion ProgramData Analysis - Summary
Exercises for Unit Data AnalysisSolutions to Unit Data Analysis
Files in the R3 System Unit 55
Objectives
Files in the R3 System
R3 Client Server Architecture
Transferring Files
Files in the R3 System
Processing FilesOpening Files
Opening Files - Options
Binary Mode and Text Mode
Transferring Data Records
Reading Data Records
Closing Deleting a Sequential File
Filling Record Layouts for Transaction FB01 (1)
Filling Record Layouts for Transaction FB01 (2)
Sequential Files - Summary
Files in the R3 System
DOWNLOAD and UPLOADFunction Module rsquoDOWNLOADrsquo
Example Program DOWNLOAD
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2934
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-29
Function Module rsquoUPLOADrsquo
Example Program UPLOAD
Summary
Exercises for Unit Files in the R3 SystemSolutions to Unit Files in the R3 System
Data Transfer Workbench Unit 56
Data Transfer - Objectives
Data Transfer Workbench
Preparing the Data Transfer
Testing and Executing the Data Transfer
Direct Input Management
Scheduling Direct Input
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer WorkbenchSolutions to Unit Data Transfer Workbench
Batch Input Sessions Unit 57
Objectives
Batch Input Sessions
Batch Input Processing
Batch Input Program
Format of a Batch Input Session
Creating Batch Input Sessions
Function Modules for Batch Input Programs
Structure of the BDC Table
Batch Input Processing
Batch Input Sessions
Batch Input Monitor - FunctionsSession Status
Processing Modes
Entering Data into Screens
Batch Input Processing
Session Statistics
Session Log
Summary
Exercises for Unit Batch Input SessionsSolutions to Unit Batch Input Sessions
Data Transfer Programs Unit 58Objectives
Data Transfer Programs
Customer Transfer Programs
Customer Transfer Program - Tasks
Data Transfer Programs
Batch Input Program Elements
Defining BDC Tables
Structure of the BDC Table
Determining Field Names
Determining Field Names with the Screen Painter
Structure DefinitionFunction Modules for a Batch Input Program
Function Module BDC_OPEN_GROUP
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3034
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-30
Function Module BDC_INSERT
Function Module BDC_CLOSE_GROUP
Structure of a Batch Input Program
Batch Input Program - Overview (I)
Batch Input Program - Overview (II)
Subroutine generate_bdc_dataProgram BDCRECXX (I)
Program BDCRECXX (II)
Program BDCRECXX (III)
Data Transfer Programs
Batch Input Recorder
Batch Input Recording
Recording the First Screen
Recording the Second Screen
Additional Screens Saving
Ending the Recording
Generating Sessions and Programs
Generating Batch Input Sessions
Structure of the Generated Program
Enhancing the Generated Program
Data Transfer Programs
Overview
Call Transaction Program
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (I)
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (II)
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (III)
Displaying the Messtab
Technical Implementation
Return Codes and System FieldsSystem Field Message Output
Generating Sessions When Errors Occur
Summary
Overview
Structure of a Data Transfer Program
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer ProgramSolutions to Unit Data Transfer Program
Additional Techniques Unit 59
ObjectivesAdditional Techniques - Overview
Changing Customers - Payment Transactions
Step Loop Field Names
Structure of the BDC Table
Filling BDC Tables in ABAP
Additional Techniques
Overview - Special Fields
Setting the Cursor in the Batch Input Session
Setting the Cursor in the ABAP Program
Additional Techniques
Successful Transaction EndAdditional Techniques
Processing Batch Input Sessions
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-31
Batch Input Flow
Additional Techniques
Program RSBDCSUB
Batch Input Authorizations
Service Programs
Summary Exercises for Unit Additional TechniquesSolutions for Unit Additional Techniques
Tips amp Tricks Unit 60
Tips and Tricks - Objectives
OSS Notes
Parallel Processing
Resetting Rollback Segments
Additional Tips and Information
Summary
Appendix Unit 61
Job Structure
Scheduling Jobs
Job Distribution
SAP-LUW Chronological Update
Update Principles
Asynchronous Update
Synchronous Update
Local Update
E n h a n c e m e n t s a n d M o d i f i c a t i o n s
Enhancements and Modifications Unit 62
Content
Introduction Contents
Course Overview Diagram
Main Business Scenario
Modifications Unit 63
Objectives
Modifications
What are modifications
Modifications and Upgrades
Modifications
Copying SAP Objects
Making Changes to SAP Copies (Modifications)
Registering Modifications in SSCR
Carrying Out a Registered Modification
Versions
Naming Conventions for Repository Objects
Modifications
Modifications Critical Success Factors (1)
Modifications Critical Success Factors (2)Modifications Critical Success Factors (3)
Documenting Modifications in Programs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-32
Modification Logs An Example
Modifications
Modification Adjustment SPDD and SPAU
Modification Adjustment Objects
Transaction SPAU (Process After Upgrade)
Transporting Adjustments between SystemsThe amount of work necessary at upgrade increases
Modifications Critical Repository Objects
Avoiding Adjustments
Modifications
User Exits
User Exits An Example
Using User Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Modifications
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Unit 64
Objectives
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Table Enhancements Overview
Append Structures
Append Structures at Upgrade
Customizing Includes
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Global Enhancements
Field Exits
Global and Local Field Exits
Creating Field Exits
Enhancements to Dictionary ElementsText Enhancements
Editing Text Enhancements
Keywords
Keyword Change Requirements
Keyword Changes and Release Upgrades
Restoring SAP Keywords
Enhanced Documentation for Data Elements
Customer Documentation
Summary Text Enhancements
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Solutions for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Enhancements using Customer Exits Unit 65
Objectives
Enhancements using Customer Exits
SAP Application Enhancements
Customer Enhancement Projects
SAP Enhancements and Customer Enhancement Projects
Enhancements using Customer Exits
The SAP Enhancement Creation Procedure
Implementing Enhancements in Customer SystemsCreating Customer Enhancement Projects
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-33
Editing Components
Activating Enhancement Projects
Transporting Projects
Summary Enhancement Management
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Function Module ExitsCalling and Creating Function Modules
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Organization of an X Function Group
Customer Source Code
Global Data SAP and the Customer
Subroutines Modules SAP and the Customer
Customer Screens
Customer Screens Modules
Summary Function Module Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Menu Exits
Menu Exit Requirements
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Menu Exits and Function Module Exits
Summary Menu Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Screen Exits
Subscreens in the R3 System
Calling Subscreens
Defining Screen Exits
Calling Customer Subscreens
Transporting Data to Subscreens
Transporting Data from SubscreensEditing Subscreens (1)
Editing Subscreens (2)
Summary Screen Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits Solutions for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits
Business Transaction Events Unit 66
Objectives
Business Transaction Events (BTE)
BTE Possible Scenarios (1)BTE Possible Scenarios (2)
Publish amp Subscribe vs Process Interfaces
Business Transaction Events SAP and the Customer
Finding Business Transaction Events
Creating a Publish amp Subscribe Interface
Differences between Customer Exits and BTEs
Summary
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3434
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2034
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-20
Linking Programs Unit 38
Objectives
Linking Programs
Data Visibility
Data Transfer Using SAP Memory
SETGET ParametersSUBMIT Statement Syntax
Example SUBMIT WITH
Datatransfer Using ABAP Memory
Returning from a Called Program
Summary
Exercises for Linking Programs Solutions for Linking Programs
Lists on the Internet Unit 39
Unit Objectives Special Application
Lists on the Internet
Motivation
The World Wide Web
HTTP Hypertext Transport Protocol
URL Uniform Resource Locator
HTML Hypertext Markup Language
R3 ClientServer Architecture
R3 ClientServer Architecture with ITS
Lists on the Internet
Web Reporting - Overview
Web Reporting Flow
Creating a List Using a URL
Parameters for WWW_GET_REPORTInteractive Lists
Access Authorization
Creating HTML Hyperlinks in Lists
Lists on the Internet
Web Reporting Browser
Releasing Report Trees for the Internet
Summary Special Application
Appendix Unit 40
Menu Data
T r a n s a c t i o n P ro g r a m m i n g
Transaction Programming Unit 41
Content
Introduction Contents
Couse Goal
Course Objectives
Overview Diagram
Main Business Scenario
About the Course Material
Basic Transaction Programming Unit 42
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-21
Objectives - Basics
Components of a Transaction
Writing a Transaction Process
Analyzing the Problem
User Dialogs in the R3 System
Advantages of ScreensComponents of a Screen
Static Screen Sequence
Creating a Screen Attributes
Creating a Screen Layout
Creating a Screen Field List
Writing the Flow Logic
Communictaion Between Screen and ABAP Program
Creating a Transaction Code
Summary Basic Dialog Programming
Screen Objects - List Unit 43
Screen Objects - Objectives
Screen Objects
Screen Objects General Attributes
Attributes of Screen Objects (Key)
Dynamically Modifiable Static Attributes
The System Table SCREEN
Modifying Attributes Dynamically Example
Object Attributes Modification Group
Modifying Attributes Dynamically Program
Screen Objects - Screen
Screen Object Screen
Defining and Managing ScreensScreen Attributes
Dynamic Next Screen Overview
Setting the Next Screen Dynamically
Inserting a Sequence of Screens Dynamically
Calling a Dialog Box Dynamically
Window Coordinates
Setting the Cursor Position Dynamically
Screen Objects - Title Bar
Screen Object Title Bar
Creating and Using Title Bars
Screen Objects - Text FieldScreen Object Text Field
Text Fields Attributes
Creating Text Fields
Hiding Texts Dynamically
Dynamically Modifiable Attributes Text Field
Dynamic Screen Modifications Program
Screen Objects - InputOutput Field
Screen Object InputOutput Field
InputOutput Fields Attributes
Creating InputOutput Fields
InputOutput Fields Automatic Field ChecksInputOutput Fields Default Values in SAP Memory
Defining SETGET Parameter Attributes
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-22
Programming Field Input Checks with an Error Dialog
Checking Groups of Fields
Controlling Error Dialogs
Dialog Message Categories
The FIELD Statement and Data Transport
Calling Modules Conditionally (1)Calling Modules Conditionally (2)
Screen Objects Status icon
Screen Objects Status Icons
Status Icons Attributes
Creating Status Icon Fields
Filling Status Icon Fields
Group Box
Screen Objects Group Boxes
Group Boxes Attributes
Screen Objects Radio Buttons
Screen Objects Radio Buttons and Checkboxes
Radio ButtonsCheckboxes Attributes
Creating a Radio Button Group
Creating a Checkbox
Screen Objects - Pushbutton
Screen Objects Pushbuttons
Pushbuttons Attributes
Creating Pushbuttons
Pushbuttons with Function Type E
Screen Objects - Subscreen
Screen Objects Subscreen (1)
Screen Objects Subscreen (2)
Subscreen AttributesCreating a Subscreen Area
Calling a Subscreen
Subscreens from External Programs
Subscreens Encapsulation in Function Groups
Subscreens in Function Groups Call Sequence
Subscreens in Function Groups Data Transport
Screen Objects - Tabstrip Control
Screen Object Tabstrip Control
Tabstrip Elements
Tab Page Technical View
Tabstrip Controls AttributesCreating a Tabstrip Control
Creating a Tabstrip Control Tabstrip Area
Creating a Tabstip Control Tab Title
Creating a Tabstrip Control Subscreens
Scrolling Locally in a Tabstrip Control
Scrolling Locally in a Tabstrip Control Coding
Scrolling in a Tabstrip Control
Scrolling in a Tabstrip Control Coding
Screen Objects - Table Control
Screen Object Table Control
ABAP Table Control (Functions)Table Control Table Settings
Actions in Table Controls
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-23
Creating Table Control Elements
Table Control Attributes
Creating a Table Control
Creating a Table Control Table Control Area
Creating a Table Control TC Fields (1)
Create Table Control TC Fields (2) Section ColumnTable Control Attributes at Runtime
Table Control Attributes (Structure)
Table Control Elements - Processing
Processing a Table Control (Principle 1)
Filling a Table Control
Changing the Contents of a Table Control
Table Control Applications (Principle)
Filling a Table Control Coding
Changing the Contents of a Table Control 4 Coding
Table Controls Field Transport in the PBO
Table Controls Field Transport in the PAI
Table Control Elements Further Techniques
Changing a Table Control
Changing the Attributes of a Table Control (1)
Changing the Attributes of a Table Control (2)
Table Control Modifying Field Attributes Temporarily
Sorting a Table Control (Example)
Scrolling Page by Page in a Table Control (Example)
Table Control Cursor Position (Example)
Screen Objects - GUI Status
Screen Object GUI Status
Status Technical View (1)
Status Technical View (2)Attributes of Functions
Function Key Settings
Menus and Menu Bars Attributes
Status Attributes
Standard Toolbar Functions and their Reserved function Keys
Creating a Status
Navigation - Targets
Navigation - Dialogs
Screen Objects - List
Screen Objects Lists
Displaying a List Within a TransactionLists in a Modal Dialog Box
Screen Objects - Selection Screen
Screen Object Selection Screen
Entering Value Ranges
Defining and Calling a Selection Screen
Summary Screen Objects
Uumlbung zu Kapitel Screen Objects Solutions Screen Objects Unit
Programming Database Changes Unit 44
Unit ObjectivesProgramming Database Changes
Statements for Database Dialogs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2434
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-24
SAP LUW
Database LUW
SAP R3 System 3-tier Architecture
System Architecture Implicit DB COMMIT
Objective Bundling the DB Changes in an SAP LUW
Programming Database ChangesBundling Techniques Overview
Bunding Using Delayed Inline Changes
Bundling Using Subroutines
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundline Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Techniques
Update Function modules
V1 and V2 Update Function Modules
Logging Records for Update
Deleting Update Entries Rollback in the Dialog Program
Rollback in the Update Program
Asynchronous Update
What Happens in a Commit Work
Comparison of Bundling Techniques
Programming Database Updates
Why Set Locks
Database Locks
SAP Locking Concept
Setting Logical Locks
SAP Lock ObjectsENQUEUE and DEQUEUE Function Modules
Calling the Function Modules
The Lock Table
Validity of Locks Scope = 2
Programming Database Updates
SAP Authorization Concept
Authorization Checks
User Master Record Authorizations
Authorization Checks for Transactions
Summary
Exercises Programming Database Updates Unit Solutions Programming Database Updates Unit
Complex Transactions Unit 45
Unit Objectives
Complex Transactions
Synchronous Calls Overview
Calling a Report Program
Calling a Transaction
Encapsulating Dialogs in Function Modules
Synchronous Program Calls Main Memory Contents
Complex TransactionsAsynchronous Calls
Calling Programs Asynchronously
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2534
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-25
Complex Transactions
Passing Data Overview
Passing Data Using the Interface of ABAP Programs
The WITH Addition in the SUBMIT Statement
Memory Areas Logical Model
ABAP MemoryPassing Parameters using the SAP Memory
Passing Parameters (SAP Memory)
Complex Transactions
Synchronous Program Calls SAP LUWs
Asynchronous Program Calls SAP LUWs
Program Calls Visible Data and LUWs
Complex Transactions
RFC Scenario R3 - R3
Enabling Function Modules for RFC
RFC Using ABAP Function Modules
Program Context of a Remote Function
RFC Calls System Exceptions
Complex Transactions
Remote Function Call Overview
Process Diagram Synchronous RFC
Process Diagram Asynchronous RFC
Process Diagram Transactional RFC
Transactional RFC (tRFC) Introduction
tRFC Properties
Complex Transactions
Lock Entries for Local Program Calls
Lock Entries for RFC Calls
Summary Exercises Complex Transactions Unit Solutions Complex Transactions Unit
Static Attributes in the Screen Painter Unit 46
Screen Attributes (1)
Screen Attributes (2)
General Attributes
Dictionary Attributes
Program Attributes
Display Attributes
Special Attributes for Subscreens and Tabstrip ControlsSpecial Attributes for Table Controls
Database Updates Further Information Unit 47
Objectives
Database Updates Further Information
Asynchronous Update
Synchronous Update
Local Update
SAP LUW Timescale of Updates
Database Updates Further Information
V1 and V2 Update Function ModulesV1 Update
V2 Update
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2634
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-26
Database Updates Further Information
Validity of Locks Scope = 1
Validity of Locks Scope = 2
Validity of Locks Scope = 3
ENQUEUE Function Modules Interface Parameters
Summary
Complex Transactions Further Information Unit 48
CALL TRANSACTION lsquoTA01rsquo and SUBMIT lsquoREP01rsquo AND RETURN
Implicit End of a Program or LEAVE PROGRAM
LEAVE TO TRANSACTION lsquoTA01rsquo
SUBMIT lsquoREP01rsquo
CALL FUNCTION lsquoFUNC1rsquoPERFORM form1 IN PROGRAM program
Help Functions Unit 49
Overview Standard F1 and F4 Functions
The Search Help Concept
Dialog for an Immediate Hit List
Dialog with Preselection
Dialog for Selecting a Search Help
Search Help Concepts
Search Helps
Defining the Dialog Fields
Defining the Data Selection
Collective Search Helps
Search Help Concepts
Linking Search Helps to Screen Fields
Search Help Concepts
Programmed Help Functions OverviewProgrammed F1 and F4 Help
The POH and POV Events Process
Function Modules for Data Transport
Field Transport to and from the Screen
Determining the Contents of Screen Fields ( POV POH )
Placing Values in Screen Fields ( POV )
Special F1 Functions
Displaying Input Values for a Table Field (POV)
Search Help Concepts
Overview Input Help Mechanisms
Migrating Existing Input Help
Assigning Number Range Numbers Unit 50
Objectives
Overview
Number Range Objects
Number Range Intervals
Sub-objects
Assigning Internal Numbers
Checking External Numbers
Number Range Information
Accessing Table NRIV 1 Without a Buffer Accessing Table NRIV 2 Without a Buffer
Buffering Number Ranges
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2734
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-27
Using Function Groups to Administer Number Ranges
Summary 1
Summary 2
Creating Change Documents Unit 51
ObjectivesOverview
Change Document Structure
Change Relevance
Change Document Objects
Generating Update Programs
INCLUDE Program Structure
Application Program
Change Document Objects and Internal Tables
Reading Change Documents
Using Function Groups to Edit Change Documents
Summary (1)
Summary (2)
Appendix Unit 52
Documentation ReferencesGlossary Index
I n t e r f a c e s f o r D a t a T r a n s f e r
Interfaces for Data Transfer Unit 53
Content
Data Transfer
Objectives
Data Transfer
Transferring Data Into the R3 System
Direct Data Transfer
Data Transfer Using Interfaces
Data Transfer Workbench
Data Analysis
Data Transfer
Analyzing the SAP Transaction
Assigning DataFormat Conversion
Transferring Legacy Data into the R3 System
Data Transfer Methods
Knowledge Tools
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer
Data Analysis and Formatting Unit 54
Data Analysis - Objectives
Data Analysis and Formatting
Standard Transfer Interfaces for Standard Transfer
Standard Transfer - Tasks
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2834
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-28
IMG Documentation
Data Transfer Workbench (DTW)
Documentation in the DTW
Data Analysis and Formatting
Record Layout Types
FB01 Record Layout StructureSample Data for Record Layouts
Generating Test Data in the DTW
Data Analysis and Formatting
Translating Data
Translating Data in the Legacy System
Generating SAP Structures in the DTW
Translating Data in the R3 System
Translating Data Types
Translating Data for Transaction FB01
Translating Data - Example
Translating Data Using EXCEL
Data Analysis and Formatting
Initializing Record Layouts
Initializing Record Layouts - Example
Filling Record Layouts
Structure of Transaction FB01
Mapping Data in Transaction FB01
Filling Record Layout BGR00 - Example
Data Analysis and Formatting
Additional Tasks
Converting Data
Converting Legacy System R3 System Data
Structure of a Conversion ProgramData Analysis - Summary
Exercises for Unit Data AnalysisSolutions to Unit Data Analysis
Files in the R3 System Unit 55
Objectives
Files in the R3 System
R3 Client Server Architecture
Transferring Files
Files in the R3 System
Processing FilesOpening Files
Opening Files - Options
Binary Mode and Text Mode
Transferring Data Records
Reading Data Records
Closing Deleting a Sequential File
Filling Record Layouts for Transaction FB01 (1)
Filling Record Layouts for Transaction FB01 (2)
Sequential Files - Summary
Files in the R3 System
DOWNLOAD and UPLOADFunction Module rsquoDOWNLOADrsquo
Example Program DOWNLOAD
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2934
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-29
Function Module rsquoUPLOADrsquo
Example Program UPLOAD
Summary
Exercises for Unit Files in the R3 SystemSolutions to Unit Files in the R3 System
Data Transfer Workbench Unit 56
Data Transfer - Objectives
Data Transfer Workbench
Preparing the Data Transfer
Testing and Executing the Data Transfer
Direct Input Management
Scheduling Direct Input
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer WorkbenchSolutions to Unit Data Transfer Workbench
Batch Input Sessions Unit 57
Objectives
Batch Input Sessions
Batch Input Processing
Batch Input Program
Format of a Batch Input Session
Creating Batch Input Sessions
Function Modules for Batch Input Programs
Structure of the BDC Table
Batch Input Processing
Batch Input Sessions
Batch Input Monitor - FunctionsSession Status
Processing Modes
Entering Data into Screens
Batch Input Processing
Session Statistics
Session Log
Summary
Exercises for Unit Batch Input SessionsSolutions to Unit Batch Input Sessions
Data Transfer Programs Unit 58Objectives
Data Transfer Programs
Customer Transfer Programs
Customer Transfer Program - Tasks
Data Transfer Programs
Batch Input Program Elements
Defining BDC Tables
Structure of the BDC Table
Determining Field Names
Determining Field Names with the Screen Painter
Structure DefinitionFunction Modules for a Batch Input Program
Function Module BDC_OPEN_GROUP
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3034
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-30
Function Module BDC_INSERT
Function Module BDC_CLOSE_GROUP
Structure of a Batch Input Program
Batch Input Program - Overview (I)
Batch Input Program - Overview (II)
Subroutine generate_bdc_dataProgram BDCRECXX (I)
Program BDCRECXX (II)
Program BDCRECXX (III)
Data Transfer Programs
Batch Input Recorder
Batch Input Recording
Recording the First Screen
Recording the Second Screen
Additional Screens Saving
Ending the Recording
Generating Sessions and Programs
Generating Batch Input Sessions
Structure of the Generated Program
Enhancing the Generated Program
Data Transfer Programs
Overview
Call Transaction Program
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (I)
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (II)
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (III)
Displaying the Messtab
Technical Implementation
Return Codes and System FieldsSystem Field Message Output
Generating Sessions When Errors Occur
Summary
Overview
Structure of a Data Transfer Program
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer ProgramSolutions to Unit Data Transfer Program
Additional Techniques Unit 59
ObjectivesAdditional Techniques - Overview
Changing Customers - Payment Transactions
Step Loop Field Names
Structure of the BDC Table
Filling BDC Tables in ABAP
Additional Techniques
Overview - Special Fields
Setting the Cursor in the Batch Input Session
Setting the Cursor in the ABAP Program
Additional Techniques
Successful Transaction EndAdditional Techniques
Processing Batch Input Sessions
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-31
Batch Input Flow
Additional Techniques
Program RSBDCSUB
Batch Input Authorizations
Service Programs
Summary Exercises for Unit Additional TechniquesSolutions for Unit Additional Techniques
Tips amp Tricks Unit 60
Tips and Tricks - Objectives
OSS Notes
Parallel Processing
Resetting Rollback Segments
Additional Tips and Information
Summary
Appendix Unit 61
Job Structure
Scheduling Jobs
Job Distribution
SAP-LUW Chronological Update
Update Principles
Asynchronous Update
Synchronous Update
Local Update
E n h a n c e m e n t s a n d M o d i f i c a t i o n s
Enhancements and Modifications Unit 62
Content
Introduction Contents
Course Overview Diagram
Main Business Scenario
Modifications Unit 63
Objectives
Modifications
What are modifications
Modifications and Upgrades
Modifications
Copying SAP Objects
Making Changes to SAP Copies (Modifications)
Registering Modifications in SSCR
Carrying Out a Registered Modification
Versions
Naming Conventions for Repository Objects
Modifications
Modifications Critical Success Factors (1)
Modifications Critical Success Factors (2)Modifications Critical Success Factors (3)
Documenting Modifications in Programs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-32
Modification Logs An Example
Modifications
Modification Adjustment SPDD and SPAU
Modification Adjustment Objects
Transaction SPAU (Process After Upgrade)
Transporting Adjustments between SystemsThe amount of work necessary at upgrade increases
Modifications Critical Repository Objects
Avoiding Adjustments
Modifications
User Exits
User Exits An Example
Using User Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Modifications
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Unit 64
Objectives
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Table Enhancements Overview
Append Structures
Append Structures at Upgrade
Customizing Includes
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Global Enhancements
Field Exits
Global and Local Field Exits
Creating Field Exits
Enhancements to Dictionary ElementsText Enhancements
Editing Text Enhancements
Keywords
Keyword Change Requirements
Keyword Changes and Release Upgrades
Restoring SAP Keywords
Enhanced Documentation for Data Elements
Customer Documentation
Summary Text Enhancements
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Solutions for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Enhancements using Customer Exits Unit 65
Objectives
Enhancements using Customer Exits
SAP Application Enhancements
Customer Enhancement Projects
SAP Enhancements and Customer Enhancement Projects
Enhancements using Customer Exits
The SAP Enhancement Creation Procedure
Implementing Enhancements in Customer SystemsCreating Customer Enhancement Projects
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-33
Editing Components
Activating Enhancement Projects
Transporting Projects
Summary Enhancement Management
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Function Module ExitsCalling and Creating Function Modules
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Organization of an X Function Group
Customer Source Code
Global Data SAP and the Customer
Subroutines Modules SAP and the Customer
Customer Screens
Customer Screens Modules
Summary Function Module Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Menu Exits
Menu Exit Requirements
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Menu Exits and Function Module Exits
Summary Menu Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Screen Exits
Subscreens in the R3 System
Calling Subscreens
Defining Screen Exits
Calling Customer Subscreens
Transporting Data to Subscreens
Transporting Data from SubscreensEditing Subscreens (1)
Editing Subscreens (2)
Summary Screen Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits Solutions for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits
Business Transaction Events Unit 66
Objectives
Business Transaction Events (BTE)
BTE Possible Scenarios (1)BTE Possible Scenarios (2)
Publish amp Subscribe vs Process Interfaces
Business Transaction Events SAP and the Customer
Finding Business Transaction Events
Creating a Publish amp Subscribe Interface
Differences between Customer Exits and BTEs
Summary
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3434
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-21
Objectives - Basics
Components of a Transaction
Writing a Transaction Process
Analyzing the Problem
User Dialogs in the R3 System
Advantages of ScreensComponents of a Screen
Static Screen Sequence
Creating a Screen Attributes
Creating a Screen Layout
Creating a Screen Field List
Writing the Flow Logic
Communictaion Between Screen and ABAP Program
Creating a Transaction Code
Summary Basic Dialog Programming
Screen Objects - List Unit 43
Screen Objects - Objectives
Screen Objects
Screen Objects General Attributes
Attributes of Screen Objects (Key)
Dynamically Modifiable Static Attributes
The System Table SCREEN
Modifying Attributes Dynamically Example
Object Attributes Modification Group
Modifying Attributes Dynamically Program
Screen Objects - Screen
Screen Object Screen
Defining and Managing ScreensScreen Attributes
Dynamic Next Screen Overview
Setting the Next Screen Dynamically
Inserting a Sequence of Screens Dynamically
Calling a Dialog Box Dynamically
Window Coordinates
Setting the Cursor Position Dynamically
Screen Objects - Title Bar
Screen Object Title Bar
Creating and Using Title Bars
Screen Objects - Text FieldScreen Object Text Field
Text Fields Attributes
Creating Text Fields
Hiding Texts Dynamically
Dynamically Modifiable Attributes Text Field
Dynamic Screen Modifications Program
Screen Objects - InputOutput Field
Screen Object InputOutput Field
InputOutput Fields Attributes
Creating InputOutput Fields
InputOutput Fields Automatic Field ChecksInputOutput Fields Default Values in SAP Memory
Defining SETGET Parameter Attributes
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-22
Programming Field Input Checks with an Error Dialog
Checking Groups of Fields
Controlling Error Dialogs
Dialog Message Categories
The FIELD Statement and Data Transport
Calling Modules Conditionally (1)Calling Modules Conditionally (2)
Screen Objects Status icon
Screen Objects Status Icons
Status Icons Attributes
Creating Status Icon Fields
Filling Status Icon Fields
Group Box
Screen Objects Group Boxes
Group Boxes Attributes
Screen Objects Radio Buttons
Screen Objects Radio Buttons and Checkboxes
Radio ButtonsCheckboxes Attributes
Creating a Radio Button Group
Creating a Checkbox
Screen Objects - Pushbutton
Screen Objects Pushbuttons
Pushbuttons Attributes
Creating Pushbuttons
Pushbuttons with Function Type E
Screen Objects - Subscreen
Screen Objects Subscreen (1)
Screen Objects Subscreen (2)
Subscreen AttributesCreating a Subscreen Area
Calling a Subscreen
Subscreens from External Programs
Subscreens Encapsulation in Function Groups
Subscreens in Function Groups Call Sequence
Subscreens in Function Groups Data Transport
Screen Objects - Tabstrip Control
Screen Object Tabstrip Control
Tabstrip Elements
Tab Page Technical View
Tabstrip Controls AttributesCreating a Tabstrip Control
Creating a Tabstrip Control Tabstrip Area
Creating a Tabstip Control Tab Title
Creating a Tabstrip Control Subscreens
Scrolling Locally in a Tabstrip Control
Scrolling Locally in a Tabstrip Control Coding
Scrolling in a Tabstrip Control
Scrolling in a Tabstrip Control Coding
Screen Objects - Table Control
Screen Object Table Control
ABAP Table Control (Functions)Table Control Table Settings
Actions in Table Controls
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-23
Creating Table Control Elements
Table Control Attributes
Creating a Table Control
Creating a Table Control Table Control Area
Creating a Table Control TC Fields (1)
Create Table Control TC Fields (2) Section ColumnTable Control Attributes at Runtime
Table Control Attributes (Structure)
Table Control Elements - Processing
Processing a Table Control (Principle 1)
Filling a Table Control
Changing the Contents of a Table Control
Table Control Applications (Principle)
Filling a Table Control Coding
Changing the Contents of a Table Control 4 Coding
Table Controls Field Transport in the PBO
Table Controls Field Transport in the PAI
Table Control Elements Further Techniques
Changing a Table Control
Changing the Attributes of a Table Control (1)
Changing the Attributes of a Table Control (2)
Table Control Modifying Field Attributes Temporarily
Sorting a Table Control (Example)
Scrolling Page by Page in a Table Control (Example)
Table Control Cursor Position (Example)
Screen Objects - GUI Status
Screen Object GUI Status
Status Technical View (1)
Status Technical View (2)Attributes of Functions
Function Key Settings
Menus and Menu Bars Attributes
Status Attributes
Standard Toolbar Functions and their Reserved function Keys
Creating a Status
Navigation - Targets
Navigation - Dialogs
Screen Objects - List
Screen Objects Lists
Displaying a List Within a TransactionLists in a Modal Dialog Box
Screen Objects - Selection Screen
Screen Object Selection Screen
Entering Value Ranges
Defining and Calling a Selection Screen
Summary Screen Objects
Uumlbung zu Kapitel Screen Objects Solutions Screen Objects Unit
Programming Database Changes Unit 44
Unit ObjectivesProgramming Database Changes
Statements for Database Dialogs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2434
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-24
SAP LUW
Database LUW
SAP R3 System 3-tier Architecture
System Architecture Implicit DB COMMIT
Objective Bundling the DB Changes in an SAP LUW
Programming Database ChangesBundling Techniques Overview
Bunding Using Delayed Inline Changes
Bundling Using Subroutines
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundline Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Techniques
Update Function modules
V1 and V2 Update Function Modules
Logging Records for Update
Deleting Update Entries Rollback in the Dialog Program
Rollback in the Update Program
Asynchronous Update
What Happens in a Commit Work
Comparison of Bundling Techniques
Programming Database Updates
Why Set Locks
Database Locks
SAP Locking Concept
Setting Logical Locks
SAP Lock ObjectsENQUEUE and DEQUEUE Function Modules
Calling the Function Modules
The Lock Table
Validity of Locks Scope = 2
Programming Database Updates
SAP Authorization Concept
Authorization Checks
User Master Record Authorizations
Authorization Checks for Transactions
Summary
Exercises Programming Database Updates Unit Solutions Programming Database Updates Unit
Complex Transactions Unit 45
Unit Objectives
Complex Transactions
Synchronous Calls Overview
Calling a Report Program
Calling a Transaction
Encapsulating Dialogs in Function Modules
Synchronous Program Calls Main Memory Contents
Complex TransactionsAsynchronous Calls
Calling Programs Asynchronously
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2534
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-25
Complex Transactions
Passing Data Overview
Passing Data Using the Interface of ABAP Programs
The WITH Addition in the SUBMIT Statement
Memory Areas Logical Model
ABAP MemoryPassing Parameters using the SAP Memory
Passing Parameters (SAP Memory)
Complex Transactions
Synchronous Program Calls SAP LUWs
Asynchronous Program Calls SAP LUWs
Program Calls Visible Data and LUWs
Complex Transactions
RFC Scenario R3 - R3
Enabling Function Modules for RFC
RFC Using ABAP Function Modules
Program Context of a Remote Function
RFC Calls System Exceptions
Complex Transactions
Remote Function Call Overview
Process Diagram Synchronous RFC
Process Diagram Asynchronous RFC
Process Diagram Transactional RFC
Transactional RFC (tRFC) Introduction
tRFC Properties
Complex Transactions
Lock Entries for Local Program Calls
Lock Entries for RFC Calls
Summary Exercises Complex Transactions Unit Solutions Complex Transactions Unit
Static Attributes in the Screen Painter Unit 46
Screen Attributes (1)
Screen Attributes (2)
General Attributes
Dictionary Attributes
Program Attributes
Display Attributes
Special Attributes for Subscreens and Tabstrip ControlsSpecial Attributes for Table Controls
Database Updates Further Information Unit 47
Objectives
Database Updates Further Information
Asynchronous Update
Synchronous Update
Local Update
SAP LUW Timescale of Updates
Database Updates Further Information
V1 and V2 Update Function ModulesV1 Update
V2 Update
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2634
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-26
Database Updates Further Information
Validity of Locks Scope = 1
Validity of Locks Scope = 2
Validity of Locks Scope = 3
ENQUEUE Function Modules Interface Parameters
Summary
Complex Transactions Further Information Unit 48
CALL TRANSACTION lsquoTA01rsquo and SUBMIT lsquoREP01rsquo AND RETURN
Implicit End of a Program or LEAVE PROGRAM
LEAVE TO TRANSACTION lsquoTA01rsquo
SUBMIT lsquoREP01rsquo
CALL FUNCTION lsquoFUNC1rsquoPERFORM form1 IN PROGRAM program
Help Functions Unit 49
Overview Standard F1 and F4 Functions
The Search Help Concept
Dialog for an Immediate Hit List
Dialog with Preselection
Dialog for Selecting a Search Help
Search Help Concepts
Search Helps
Defining the Dialog Fields
Defining the Data Selection
Collective Search Helps
Search Help Concepts
Linking Search Helps to Screen Fields
Search Help Concepts
Programmed Help Functions OverviewProgrammed F1 and F4 Help
The POH and POV Events Process
Function Modules for Data Transport
Field Transport to and from the Screen
Determining the Contents of Screen Fields ( POV POH )
Placing Values in Screen Fields ( POV )
Special F1 Functions
Displaying Input Values for a Table Field (POV)
Search Help Concepts
Overview Input Help Mechanisms
Migrating Existing Input Help
Assigning Number Range Numbers Unit 50
Objectives
Overview
Number Range Objects
Number Range Intervals
Sub-objects
Assigning Internal Numbers
Checking External Numbers
Number Range Information
Accessing Table NRIV 1 Without a Buffer Accessing Table NRIV 2 Without a Buffer
Buffering Number Ranges
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2734
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-27
Using Function Groups to Administer Number Ranges
Summary 1
Summary 2
Creating Change Documents Unit 51
ObjectivesOverview
Change Document Structure
Change Relevance
Change Document Objects
Generating Update Programs
INCLUDE Program Structure
Application Program
Change Document Objects and Internal Tables
Reading Change Documents
Using Function Groups to Edit Change Documents
Summary (1)
Summary (2)
Appendix Unit 52
Documentation ReferencesGlossary Index
I n t e r f a c e s f o r D a t a T r a n s f e r
Interfaces for Data Transfer Unit 53
Content
Data Transfer
Objectives
Data Transfer
Transferring Data Into the R3 System
Direct Data Transfer
Data Transfer Using Interfaces
Data Transfer Workbench
Data Analysis
Data Transfer
Analyzing the SAP Transaction
Assigning DataFormat Conversion
Transferring Legacy Data into the R3 System
Data Transfer Methods
Knowledge Tools
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer
Data Analysis and Formatting Unit 54
Data Analysis - Objectives
Data Analysis and Formatting
Standard Transfer Interfaces for Standard Transfer
Standard Transfer - Tasks
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2834
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-28
IMG Documentation
Data Transfer Workbench (DTW)
Documentation in the DTW
Data Analysis and Formatting
Record Layout Types
FB01 Record Layout StructureSample Data for Record Layouts
Generating Test Data in the DTW
Data Analysis and Formatting
Translating Data
Translating Data in the Legacy System
Generating SAP Structures in the DTW
Translating Data in the R3 System
Translating Data Types
Translating Data for Transaction FB01
Translating Data - Example
Translating Data Using EXCEL
Data Analysis and Formatting
Initializing Record Layouts
Initializing Record Layouts - Example
Filling Record Layouts
Structure of Transaction FB01
Mapping Data in Transaction FB01
Filling Record Layout BGR00 - Example
Data Analysis and Formatting
Additional Tasks
Converting Data
Converting Legacy System R3 System Data
Structure of a Conversion ProgramData Analysis - Summary
Exercises for Unit Data AnalysisSolutions to Unit Data Analysis
Files in the R3 System Unit 55
Objectives
Files in the R3 System
R3 Client Server Architecture
Transferring Files
Files in the R3 System
Processing FilesOpening Files
Opening Files - Options
Binary Mode and Text Mode
Transferring Data Records
Reading Data Records
Closing Deleting a Sequential File
Filling Record Layouts for Transaction FB01 (1)
Filling Record Layouts for Transaction FB01 (2)
Sequential Files - Summary
Files in the R3 System
DOWNLOAD and UPLOADFunction Module rsquoDOWNLOADrsquo
Example Program DOWNLOAD
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2934
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-29
Function Module rsquoUPLOADrsquo
Example Program UPLOAD
Summary
Exercises for Unit Files in the R3 SystemSolutions to Unit Files in the R3 System
Data Transfer Workbench Unit 56
Data Transfer - Objectives
Data Transfer Workbench
Preparing the Data Transfer
Testing and Executing the Data Transfer
Direct Input Management
Scheduling Direct Input
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer WorkbenchSolutions to Unit Data Transfer Workbench
Batch Input Sessions Unit 57
Objectives
Batch Input Sessions
Batch Input Processing
Batch Input Program
Format of a Batch Input Session
Creating Batch Input Sessions
Function Modules for Batch Input Programs
Structure of the BDC Table
Batch Input Processing
Batch Input Sessions
Batch Input Monitor - FunctionsSession Status
Processing Modes
Entering Data into Screens
Batch Input Processing
Session Statistics
Session Log
Summary
Exercises for Unit Batch Input SessionsSolutions to Unit Batch Input Sessions
Data Transfer Programs Unit 58Objectives
Data Transfer Programs
Customer Transfer Programs
Customer Transfer Program - Tasks
Data Transfer Programs
Batch Input Program Elements
Defining BDC Tables
Structure of the BDC Table
Determining Field Names
Determining Field Names with the Screen Painter
Structure DefinitionFunction Modules for a Batch Input Program
Function Module BDC_OPEN_GROUP
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3034
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-30
Function Module BDC_INSERT
Function Module BDC_CLOSE_GROUP
Structure of a Batch Input Program
Batch Input Program - Overview (I)
Batch Input Program - Overview (II)
Subroutine generate_bdc_dataProgram BDCRECXX (I)
Program BDCRECXX (II)
Program BDCRECXX (III)
Data Transfer Programs
Batch Input Recorder
Batch Input Recording
Recording the First Screen
Recording the Second Screen
Additional Screens Saving
Ending the Recording
Generating Sessions and Programs
Generating Batch Input Sessions
Structure of the Generated Program
Enhancing the Generated Program
Data Transfer Programs
Overview
Call Transaction Program
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (I)
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (II)
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (III)
Displaying the Messtab
Technical Implementation
Return Codes and System FieldsSystem Field Message Output
Generating Sessions When Errors Occur
Summary
Overview
Structure of a Data Transfer Program
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer ProgramSolutions to Unit Data Transfer Program
Additional Techniques Unit 59
ObjectivesAdditional Techniques - Overview
Changing Customers - Payment Transactions
Step Loop Field Names
Structure of the BDC Table
Filling BDC Tables in ABAP
Additional Techniques
Overview - Special Fields
Setting the Cursor in the Batch Input Session
Setting the Cursor in the ABAP Program
Additional Techniques
Successful Transaction EndAdditional Techniques
Processing Batch Input Sessions
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-31
Batch Input Flow
Additional Techniques
Program RSBDCSUB
Batch Input Authorizations
Service Programs
Summary Exercises for Unit Additional TechniquesSolutions for Unit Additional Techniques
Tips amp Tricks Unit 60
Tips and Tricks - Objectives
OSS Notes
Parallel Processing
Resetting Rollback Segments
Additional Tips and Information
Summary
Appendix Unit 61
Job Structure
Scheduling Jobs
Job Distribution
SAP-LUW Chronological Update
Update Principles
Asynchronous Update
Synchronous Update
Local Update
E n h a n c e m e n t s a n d M o d i f i c a t i o n s
Enhancements and Modifications Unit 62
Content
Introduction Contents
Course Overview Diagram
Main Business Scenario
Modifications Unit 63
Objectives
Modifications
What are modifications
Modifications and Upgrades
Modifications
Copying SAP Objects
Making Changes to SAP Copies (Modifications)
Registering Modifications in SSCR
Carrying Out a Registered Modification
Versions
Naming Conventions for Repository Objects
Modifications
Modifications Critical Success Factors (1)
Modifications Critical Success Factors (2)Modifications Critical Success Factors (3)
Documenting Modifications in Programs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-32
Modification Logs An Example
Modifications
Modification Adjustment SPDD and SPAU
Modification Adjustment Objects
Transaction SPAU (Process After Upgrade)
Transporting Adjustments between SystemsThe amount of work necessary at upgrade increases
Modifications Critical Repository Objects
Avoiding Adjustments
Modifications
User Exits
User Exits An Example
Using User Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Modifications
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Unit 64
Objectives
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Table Enhancements Overview
Append Structures
Append Structures at Upgrade
Customizing Includes
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Global Enhancements
Field Exits
Global and Local Field Exits
Creating Field Exits
Enhancements to Dictionary ElementsText Enhancements
Editing Text Enhancements
Keywords
Keyword Change Requirements
Keyword Changes and Release Upgrades
Restoring SAP Keywords
Enhanced Documentation for Data Elements
Customer Documentation
Summary Text Enhancements
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Solutions for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Enhancements using Customer Exits Unit 65
Objectives
Enhancements using Customer Exits
SAP Application Enhancements
Customer Enhancement Projects
SAP Enhancements and Customer Enhancement Projects
Enhancements using Customer Exits
The SAP Enhancement Creation Procedure
Implementing Enhancements in Customer SystemsCreating Customer Enhancement Projects
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-33
Editing Components
Activating Enhancement Projects
Transporting Projects
Summary Enhancement Management
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Function Module ExitsCalling and Creating Function Modules
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Organization of an X Function Group
Customer Source Code
Global Data SAP and the Customer
Subroutines Modules SAP and the Customer
Customer Screens
Customer Screens Modules
Summary Function Module Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Menu Exits
Menu Exit Requirements
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Menu Exits and Function Module Exits
Summary Menu Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Screen Exits
Subscreens in the R3 System
Calling Subscreens
Defining Screen Exits
Calling Customer Subscreens
Transporting Data to Subscreens
Transporting Data from SubscreensEditing Subscreens (1)
Editing Subscreens (2)
Summary Screen Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits Solutions for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits
Business Transaction Events Unit 66
Objectives
Business Transaction Events (BTE)
BTE Possible Scenarios (1)BTE Possible Scenarios (2)
Publish amp Subscribe vs Process Interfaces
Business Transaction Events SAP and the Customer
Finding Business Transaction Events
Creating a Publish amp Subscribe Interface
Differences between Customer Exits and BTEs
Summary
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3434
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-22
Programming Field Input Checks with an Error Dialog
Checking Groups of Fields
Controlling Error Dialogs
Dialog Message Categories
The FIELD Statement and Data Transport
Calling Modules Conditionally (1)Calling Modules Conditionally (2)
Screen Objects Status icon
Screen Objects Status Icons
Status Icons Attributes
Creating Status Icon Fields
Filling Status Icon Fields
Group Box
Screen Objects Group Boxes
Group Boxes Attributes
Screen Objects Radio Buttons
Screen Objects Radio Buttons and Checkboxes
Radio ButtonsCheckboxes Attributes
Creating a Radio Button Group
Creating a Checkbox
Screen Objects - Pushbutton
Screen Objects Pushbuttons
Pushbuttons Attributes
Creating Pushbuttons
Pushbuttons with Function Type E
Screen Objects - Subscreen
Screen Objects Subscreen (1)
Screen Objects Subscreen (2)
Subscreen AttributesCreating a Subscreen Area
Calling a Subscreen
Subscreens from External Programs
Subscreens Encapsulation in Function Groups
Subscreens in Function Groups Call Sequence
Subscreens in Function Groups Data Transport
Screen Objects - Tabstrip Control
Screen Object Tabstrip Control
Tabstrip Elements
Tab Page Technical View
Tabstrip Controls AttributesCreating a Tabstrip Control
Creating a Tabstrip Control Tabstrip Area
Creating a Tabstip Control Tab Title
Creating a Tabstrip Control Subscreens
Scrolling Locally in a Tabstrip Control
Scrolling Locally in a Tabstrip Control Coding
Scrolling in a Tabstrip Control
Scrolling in a Tabstrip Control Coding
Screen Objects - Table Control
Screen Object Table Control
ABAP Table Control (Functions)Table Control Table Settings
Actions in Table Controls
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-23
Creating Table Control Elements
Table Control Attributes
Creating a Table Control
Creating a Table Control Table Control Area
Creating a Table Control TC Fields (1)
Create Table Control TC Fields (2) Section ColumnTable Control Attributes at Runtime
Table Control Attributes (Structure)
Table Control Elements - Processing
Processing a Table Control (Principle 1)
Filling a Table Control
Changing the Contents of a Table Control
Table Control Applications (Principle)
Filling a Table Control Coding
Changing the Contents of a Table Control 4 Coding
Table Controls Field Transport in the PBO
Table Controls Field Transport in the PAI
Table Control Elements Further Techniques
Changing a Table Control
Changing the Attributes of a Table Control (1)
Changing the Attributes of a Table Control (2)
Table Control Modifying Field Attributes Temporarily
Sorting a Table Control (Example)
Scrolling Page by Page in a Table Control (Example)
Table Control Cursor Position (Example)
Screen Objects - GUI Status
Screen Object GUI Status
Status Technical View (1)
Status Technical View (2)Attributes of Functions
Function Key Settings
Menus and Menu Bars Attributes
Status Attributes
Standard Toolbar Functions and their Reserved function Keys
Creating a Status
Navigation - Targets
Navigation - Dialogs
Screen Objects - List
Screen Objects Lists
Displaying a List Within a TransactionLists in a Modal Dialog Box
Screen Objects - Selection Screen
Screen Object Selection Screen
Entering Value Ranges
Defining and Calling a Selection Screen
Summary Screen Objects
Uumlbung zu Kapitel Screen Objects Solutions Screen Objects Unit
Programming Database Changes Unit 44
Unit ObjectivesProgramming Database Changes
Statements for Database Dialogs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2434
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-24
SAP LUW
Database LUW
SAP R3 System 3-tier Architecture
System Architecture Implicit DB COMMIT
Objective Bundling the DB Changes in an SAP LUW
Programming Database ChangesBundling Techniques Overview
Bunding Using Delayed Inline Changes
Bundling Using Subroutines
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundline Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Techniques
Update Function modules
V1 and V2 Update Function Modules
Logging Records for Update
Deleting Update Entries Rollback in the Dialog Program
Rollback in the Update Program
Asynchronous Update
What Happens in a Commit Work
Comparison of Bundling Techniques
Programming Database Updates
Why Set Locks
Database Locks
SAP Locking Concept
Setting Logical Locks
SAP Lock ObjectsENQUEUE and DEQUEUE Function Modules
Calling the Function Modules
The Lock Table
Validity of Locks Scope = 2
Programming Database Updates
SAP Authorization Concept
Authorization Checks
User Master Record Authorizations
Authorization Checks for Transactions
Summary
Exercises Programming Database Updates Unit Solutions Programming Database Updates Unit
Complex Transactions Unit 45
Unit Objectives
Complex Transactions
Synchronous Calls Overview
Calling a Report Program
Calling a Transaction
Encapsulating Dialogs in Function Modules
Synchronous Program Calls Main Memory Contents
Complex TransactionsAsynchronous Calls
Calling Programs Asynchronously
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2534
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-25
Complex Transactions
Passing Data Overview
Passing Data Using the Interface of ABAP Programs
The WITH Addition in the SUBMIT Statement
Memory Areas Logical Model
ABAP MemoryPassing Parameters using the SAP Memory
Passing Parameters (SAP Memory)
Complex Transactions
Synchronous Program Calls SAP LUWs
Asynchronous Program Calls SAP LUWs
Program Calls Visible Data and LUWs
Complex Transactions
RFC Scenario R3 - R3
Enabling Function Modules for RFC
RFC Using ABAP Function Modules
Program Context of a Remote Function
RFC Calls System Exceptions
Complex Transactions
Remote Function Call Overview
Process Diagram Synchronous RFC
Process Diagram Asynchronous RFC
Process Diagram Transactional RFC
Transactional RFC (tRFC) Introduction
tRFC Properties
Complex Transactions
Lock Entries for Local Program Calls
Lock Entries for RFC Calls
Summary Exercises Complex Transactions Unit Solutions Complex Transactions Unit
Static Attributes in the Screen Painter Unit 46
Screen Attributes (1)
Screen Attributes (2)
General Attributes
Dictionary Attributes
Program Attributes
Display Attributes
Special Attributes for Subscreens and Tabstrip ControlsSpecial Attributes for Table Controls
Database Updates Further Information Unit 47
Objectives
Database Updates Further Information
Asynchronous Update
Synchronous Update
Local Update
SAP LUW Timescale of Updates
Database Updates Further Information
V1 and V2 Update Function ModulesV1 Update
V2 Update
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2634
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-26
Database Updates Further Information
Validity of Locks Scope = 1
Validity of Locks Scope = 2
Validity of Locks Scope = 3
ENQUEUE Function Modules Interface Parameters
Summary
Complex Transactions Further Information Unit 48
CALL TRANSACTION lsquoTA01rsquo and SUBMIT lsquoREP01rsquo AND RETURN
Implicit End of a Program or LEAVE PROGRAM
LEAVE TO TRANSACTION lsquoTA01rsquo
SUBMIT lsquoREP01rsquo
CALL FUNCTION lsquoFUNC1rsquoPERFORM form1 IN PROGRAM program
Help Functions Unit 49
Overview Standard F1 and F4 Functions
The Search Help Concept
Dialog for an Immediate Hit List
Dialog with Preselection
Dialog for Selecting a Search Help
Search Help Concepts
Search Helps
Defining the Dialog Fields
Defining the Data Selection
Collective Search Helps
Search Help Concepts
Linking Search Helps to Screen Fields
Search Help Concepts
Programmed Help Functions OverviewProgrammed F1 and F4 Help
The POH and POV Events Process
Function Modules for Data Transport
Field Transport to and from the Screen
Determining the Contents of Screen Fields ( POV POH )
Placing Values in Screen Fields ( POV )
Special F1 Functions
Displaying Input Values for a Table Field (POV)
Search Help Concepts
Overview Input Help Mechanisms
Migrating Existing Input Help
Assigning Number Range Numbers Unit 50
Objectives
Overview
Number Range Objects
Number Range Intervals
Sub-objects
Assigning Internal Numbers
Checking External Numbers
Number Range Information
Accessing Table NRIV 1 Without a Buffer Accessing Table NRIV 2 Without a Buffer
Buffering Number Ranges
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2734
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-27
Using Function Groups to Administer Number Ranges
Summary 1
Summary 2
Creating Change Documents Unit 51
ObjectivesOverview
Change Document Structure
Change Relevance
Change Document Objects
Generating Update Programs
INCLUDE Program Structure
Application Program
Change Document Objects and Internal Tables
Reading Change Documents
Using Function Groups to Edit Change Documents
Summary (1)
Summary (2)
Appendix Unit 52
Documentation ReferencesGlossary Index
I n t e r f a c e s f o r D a t a T r a n s f e r
Interfaces for Data Transfer Unit 53
Content
Data Transfer
Objectives
Data Transfer
Transferring Data Into the R3 System
Direct Data Transfer
Data Transfer Using Interfaces
Data Transfer Workbench
Data Analysis
Data Transfer
Analyzing the SAP Transaction
Assigning DataFormat Conversion
Transferring Legacy Data into the R3 System
Data Transfer Methods
Knowledge Tools
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer
Data Analysis and Formatting Unit 54
Data Analysis - Objectives
Data Analysis and Formatting
Standard Transfer Interfaces for Standard Transfer
Standard Transfer - Tasks
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2834
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-28
IMG Documentation
Data Transfer Workbench (DTW)
Documentation in the DTW
Data Analysis and Formatting
Record Layout Types
FB01 Record Layout StructureSample Data for Record Layouts
Generating Test Data in the DTW
Data Analysis and Formatting
Translating Data
Translating Data in the Legacy System
Generating SAP Structures in the DTW
Translating Data in the R3 System
Translating Data Types
Translating Data for Transaction FB01
Translating Data - Example
Translating Data Using EXCEL
Data Analysis and Formatting
Initializing Record Layouts
Initializing Record Layouts - Example
Filling Record Layouts
Structure of Transaction FB01
Mapping Data in Transaction FB01
Filling Record Layout BGR00 - Example
Data Analysis and Formatting
Additional Tasks
Converting Data
Converting Legacy System R3 System Data
Structure of a Conversion ProgramData Analysis - Summary
Exercises for Unit Data AnalysisSolutions to Unit Data Analysis
Files in the R3 System Unit 55
Objectives
Files in the R3 System
R3 Client Server Architecture
Transferring Files
Files in the R3 System
Processing FilesOpening Files
Opening Files - Options
Binary Mode and Text Mode
Transferring Data Records
Reading Data Records
Closing Deleting a Sequential File
Filling Record Layouts for Transaction FB01 (1)
Filling Record Layouts for Transaction FB01 (2)
Sequential Files - Summary
Files in the R3 System
DOWNLOAD and UPLOADFunction Module rsquoDOWNLOADrsquo
Example Program DOWNLOAD
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2934
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-29
Function Module rsquoUPLOADrsquo
Example Program UPLOAD
Summary
Exercises for Unit Files in the R3 SystemSolutions to Unit Files in the R3 System
Data Transfer Workbench Unit 56
Data Transfer - Objectives
Data Transfer Workbench
Preparing the Data Transfer
Testing and Executing the Data Transfer
Direct Input Management
Scheduling Direct Input
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer WorkbenchSolutions to Unit Data Transfer Workbench
Batch Input Sessions Unit 57
Objectives
Batch Input Sessions
Batch Input Processing
Batch Input Program
Format of a Batch Input Session
Creating Batch Input Sessions
Function Modules for Batch Input Programs
Structure of the BDC Table
Batch Input Processing
Batch Input Sessions
Batch Input Monitor - FunctionsSession Status
Processing Modes
Entering Data into Screens
Batch Input Processing
Session Statistics
Session Log
Summary
Exercises for Unit Batch Input SessionsSolutions to Unit Batch Input Sessions
Data Transfer Programs Unit 58Objectives
Data Transfer Programs
Customer Transfer Programs
Customer Transfer Program - Tasks
Data Transfer Programs
Batch Input Program Elements
Defining BDC Tables
Structure of the BDC Table
Determining Field Names
Determining Field Names with the Screen Painter
Structure DefinitionFunction Modules for a Batch Input Program
Function Module BDC_OPEN_GROUP
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3034
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-30
Function Module BDC_INSERT
Function Module BDC_CLOSE_GROUP
Structure of a Batch Input Program
Batch Input Program - Overview (I)
Batch Input Program - Overview (II)
Subroutine generate_bdc_dataProgram BDCRECXX (I)
Program BDCRECXX (II)
Program BDCRECXX (III)
Data Transfer Programs
Batch Input Recorder
Batch Input Recording
Recording the First Screen
Recording the Second Screen
Additional Screens Saving
Ending the Recording
Generating Sessions and Programs
Generating Batch Input Sessions
Structure of the Generated Program
Enhancing the Generated Program
Data Transfer Programs
Overview
Call Transaction Program
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (I)
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (II)
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (III)
Displaying the Messtab
Technical Implementation
Return Codes and System FieldsSystem Field Message Output
Generating Sessions When Errors Occur
Summary
Overview
Structure of a Data Transfer Program
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer ProgramSolutions to Unit Data Transfer Program
Additional Techniques Unit 59
ObjectivesAdditional Techniques - Overview
Changing Customers - Payment Transactions
Step Loop Field Names
Structure of the BDC Table
Filling BDC Tables in ABAP
Additional Techniques
Overview - Special Fields
Setting the Cursor in the Batch Input Session
Setting the Cursor in the ABAP Program
Additional Techniques
Successful Transaction EndAdditional Techniques
Processing Batch Input Sessions
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-31
Batch Input Flow
Additional Techniques
Program RSBDCSUB
Batch Input Authorizations
Service Programs
Summary Exercises for Unit Additional TechniquesSolutions for Unit Additional Techniques
Tips amp Tricks Unit 60
Tips and Tricks - Objectives
OSS Notes
Parallel Processing
Resetting Rollback Segments
Additional Tips and Information
Summary
Appendix Unit 61
Job Structure
Scheduling Jobs
Job Distribution
SAP-LUW Chronological Update
Update Principles
Asynchronous Update
Synchronous Update
Local Update
E n h a n c e m e n t s a n d M o d i f i c a t i o n s
Enhancements and Modifications Unit 62
Content
Introduction Contents
Course Overview Diagram
Main Business Scenario
Modifications Unit 63
Objectives
Modifications
What are modifications
Modifications and Upgrades
Modifications
Copying SAP Objects
Making Changes to SAP Copies (Modifications)
Registering Modifications in SSCR
Carrying Out a Registered Modification
Versions
Naming Conventions for Repository Objects
Modifications
Modifications Critical Success Factors (1)
Modifications Critical Success Factors (2)Modifications Critical Success Factors (3)
Documenting Modifications in Programs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-32
Modification Logs An Example
Modifications
Modification Adjustment SPDD and SPAU
Modification Adjustment Objects
Transaction SPAU (Process After Upgrade)
Transporting Adjustments between SystemsThe amount of work necessary at upgrade increases
Modifications Critical Repository Objects
Avoiding Adjustments
Modifications
User Exits
User Exits An Example
Using User Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Modifications
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Unit 64
Objectives
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Table Enhancements Overview
Append Structures
Append Structures at Upgrade
Customizing Includes
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Global Enhancements
Field Exits
Global and Local Field Exits
Creating Field Exits
Enhancements to Dictionary ElementsText Enhancements
Editing Text Enhancements
Keywords
Keyword Change Requirements
Keyword Changes and Release Upgrades
Restoring SAP Keywords
Enhanced Documentation for Data Elements
Customer Documentation
Summary Text Enhancements
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Solutions for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Enhancements using Customer Exits Unit 65
Objectives
Enhancements using Customer Exits
SAP Application Enhancements
Customer Enhancement Projects
SAP Enhancements and Customer Enhancement Projects
Enhancements using Customer Exits
The SAP Enhancement Creation Procedure
Implementing Enhancements in Customer SystemsCreating Customer Enhancement Projects
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-33
Editing Components
Activating Enhancement Projects
Transporting Projects
Summary Enhancement Management
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Function Module ExitsCalling and Creating Function Modules
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Organization of an X Function Group
Customer Source Code
Global Data SAP and the Customer
Subroutines Modules SAP and the Customer
Customer Screens
Customer Screens Modules
Summary Function Module Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Menu Exits
Menu Exit Requirements
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Menu Exits and Function Module Exits
Summary Menu Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Screen Exits
Subscreens in the R3 System
Calling Subscreens
Defining Screen Exits
Calling Customer Subscreens
Transporting Data to Subscreens
Transporting Data from SubscreensEditing Subscreens (1)
Editing Subscreens (2)
Summary Screen Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits Solutions for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits
Business Transaction Events Unit 66
Objectives
Business Transaction Events (BTE)
BTE Possible Scenarios (1)BTE Possible Scenarios (2)
Publish amp Subscribe vs Process Interfaces
Business Transaction Events SAP and the Customer
Finding Business Transaction Events
Creating a Publish amp Subscribe Interface
Differences between Customer Exits and BTEs
Summary
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3434
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-23
Creating Table Control Elements
Table Control Attributes
Creating a Table Control
Creating a Table Control Table Control Area
Creating a Table Control TC Fields (1)
Create Table Control TC Fields (2) Section ColumnTable Control Attributes at Runtime
Table Control Attributes (Structure)
Table Control Elements - Processing
Processing a Table Control (Principle 1)
Filling a Table Control
Changing the Contents of a Table Control
Table Control Applications (Principle)
Filling a Table Control Coding
Changing the Contents of a Table Control 4 Coding
Table Controls Field Transport in the PBO
Table Controls Field Transport in the PAI
Table Control Elements Further Techniques
Changing a Table Control
Changing the Attributes of a Table Control (1)
Changing the Attributes of a Table Control (2)
Table Control Modifying Field Attributes Temporarily
Sorting a Table Control (Example)
Scrolling Page by Page in a Table Control (Example)
Table Control Cursor Position (Example)
Screen Objects - GUI Status
Screen Object GUI Status
Status Technical View (1)
Status Technical View (2)Attributes of Functions
Function Key Settings
Menus and Menu Bars Attributes
Status Attributes
Standard Toolbar Functions and their Reserved function Keys
Creating a Status
Navigation - Targets
Navigation - Dialogs
Screen Objects - List
Screen Objects Lists
Displaying a List Within a TransactionLists in a Modal Dialog Box
Screen Objects - Selection Screen
Screen Object Selection Screen
Entering Value Ranges
Defining and Calling a Selection Screen
Summary Screen Objects
Uumlbung zu Kapitel Screen Objects Solutions Screen Objects Unit
Programming Database Changes Unit 44
Unit ObjectivesProgramming Database Changes
Statements for Database Dialogs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2434
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-24
SAP LUW
Database LUW
SAP R3 System 3-tier Architecture
System Architecture Implicit DB COMMIT
Objective Bundling the DB Changes in an SAP LUW
Programming Database ChangesBundling Techniques Overview
Bunding Using Delayed Inline Changes
Bundling Using Subroutines
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundline Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Techniques
Update Function modules
V1 and V2 Update Function Modules
Logging Records for Update
Deleting Update Entries Rollback in the Dialog Program
Rollback in the Update Program
Asynchronous Update
What Happens in a Commit Work
Comparison of Bundling Techniques
Programming Database Updates
Why Set Locks
Database Locks
SAP Locking Concept
Setting Logical Locks
SAP Lock ObjectsENQUEUE and DEQUEUE Function Modules
Calling the Function Modules
The Lock Table
Validity of Locks Scope = 2
Programming Database Updates
SAP Authorization Concept
Authorization Checks
User Master Record Authorizations
Authorization Checks for Transactions
Summary
Exercises Programming Database Updates Unit Solutions Programming Database Updates Unit
Complex Transactions Unit 45
Unit Objectives
Complex Transactions
Synchronous Calls Overview
Calling a Report Program
Calling a Transaction
Encapsulating Dialogs in Function Modules
Synchronous Program Calls Main Memory Contents
Complex TransactionsAsynchronous Calls
Calling Programs Asynchronously
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2534
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-25
Complex Transactions
Passing Data Overview
Passing Data Using the Interface of ABAP Programs
The WITH Addition in the SUBMIT Statement
Memory Areas Logical Model
ABAP MemoryPassing Parameters using the SAP Memory
Passing Parameters (SAP Memory)
Complex Transactions
Synchronous Program Calls SAP LUWs
Asynchronous Program Calls SAP LUWs
Program Calls Visible Data and LUWs
Complex Transactions
RFC Scenario R3 - R3
Enabling Function Modules for RFC
RFC Using ABAP Function Modules
Program Context of a Remote Function
RFC Calls System Exceptions
Complex Transactions
Remote Function Call Overview
Process Diagram Synchronous RFC
Process Diagram Asynchronous RFC
Process Diagram Transactional RFC
Transactional RFC (tRFC) Introduction
tRFC Properties
Complex Transactions
Lock Entries for Local Program Calls
Lock Entries for RFC Calls
Summary Exercises Complex Transactions Unit Solutions Complex Transactions Unit
Static Attributes in the Screen Painter Unit 46
Screen Attributes (1)
Screen Attributes (2)
General Attributes
Dictionary Attributes
Program Attributes
Display Attributes
Special Attributes for Subscreens and Tabstrip ControlsSpecial Attributes for Table Controls
Database Updates Further Information Unit 47
Objectives
Database Updates Further Information
Asynchronous Update
Synchronous Update
Local Update
SAP LUW Timescale of Updates
Database Updates Further Information
V1 and V2 Update Function ModulesV1 Update
V2 Update
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2634
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-26
Database Updates Further Information
Validity of Locks Scope = 1
Validity of Locks Scope = 2
Validity of Locks Scope = 3
ENQUEUE Function Modules Interface Parameters
Summary
Complex Transactions Further Information Unit 48
CALL TRANSACTION lsquoTA01rsquo and SUBMIT lsquoREP01rsquo AND RETURN
Implicit End of a Program or LEAVE PROGRAM
LEAVE TO TRANSACTION lsquoTA01rsquo
SUBMIT lsquoREP01rsquo
CALL FUNCTION lsquoFUNC1rsquoPERFORM form1 IN PROGRAM program
Help Functions Unit 49
Overview Standard F1 and F4 Functions
The Search Help Concept
Dialog for an Immediate Hit List
Dialog with Preselection
Dialog for Selecting a Search Help
Search Help Concepts
Search Helps
Defining the Dialog Fields
Defining the Data Selection
Collective Search Helps
Search Help Concepts
Linking Search Helps to Screen Fields
Search Help Concepts
Programmed Help Functions OverviewProgrammed F1 and F4 Help
The POH and POV Events Process
Function Modules for Data Transport
Field Transport to and from the Screen
Determining the Contents of Screen Fields ( POV POH )
Placing Values in Screen Fields ( POV )
Special F1 Functions
Displaying Input Values for a Table Field (POV)
Search Help Concepts
Overview Input Help Mechanisms
Migrating Existing Input Help
Assigning Number Range Numbers Unit 50
Objectives
Overview
Number Range Objects
Number Range Intervals
Sub-objects
Assigning Internal Numbers
Checking External Numbers
Number Range Information
Accessing Table NRIV 1 Without a Buffer Accessing Table NRIV 2 Without a Buffer
Buffering Number Ranges
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2734
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-27
Using Function Groups to Administer Number Ranges
Summary 1
Summary 2
Creating Change Documents Unit 51
ObjectivesOverview
Change Document Structure
Change Relevance
Change Document Objects
Generating Update Programs
INCLUDE Program Structure
Application Program
Change Document Objects and Internal Tables
Reading Change Documents
Using Function Groups to Edit Change Documents
Summary (1)
Summary (2)
Appendix Unit 52
Documentation ReferencesGlossary Index
I n t e r f a c e s f o r D a t a T r a n s f e r
Interfaces for Data Transfer Unit 53
Content
Data Transfer
Objectives
Data Transfer
Transferring Data Into the R3 System
Direct Data Transfer
Data Transfer Using Interfaces
Data Transfer Workbench
Data Analysis
Data Transfer
Analyzing the SAP Transaction
Assigning DataFormat Conversion
Transferring Legacy Data into the R3 System
Data Transfer Methods
Knowledge Tools
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer
Data Analysis and Formatting Unit 54
Data Analysis - Objectives
Data Analysis and Formatting
Standard Transfer Interfaces for Standard Transfer
Standard Transfer - Tasks
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2834
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-28
IMG Documentation
Data Transfer Workbench (DTW)
Documentation in the DTW
Data Analysis and Formatting
Record Layout Types
FB01 Record Layout StructureSample Data for Record Layouts
Generating Test Data in the DTW
Data Analysis and Formatting
Translating Data
Translating Data in the Legacy System
Generating SAP Structures in the DTW
Translating Data in the R3 System
Translating Data Types
Translating Data for Transaction FB01
Translating Data - Example
Translating Data Using EXCEL
Data Analysis and Formatting
Initializing Record Layouts
Initializing Record Layouts - Example
Filling Record Layouts
Structure of Transaction FB01
Mapping Data in Transaction FB01
Filling Record Layout BGR00 - Example
Data Analysis and Formatting
Additional Tasks
Converting Data
Converting Legacy System R3 System Data
Structure of a Conversion ProgramData Analysis - Summary
Exercises for Unit Data AnalysisSolutions to Unit Data Analysis
Files in the R3 System Unit 55
Objectives
Files in the R3 System
R3 Client Server Architecture
Transferring Files
Files in the R3 System
Processing FilesOpening Files
Opening Files - Options
Binary Mode and Text Mode
Transferring Data Records
Reading Data Records
Closing Deleting a Sequential File
Filling Record Layouts for Transaction FB01 (1)
Filling Record Layouts for Transaction FB01 (2)
Sequential Files - Summary
Files in the R3 System
DOWNLOAD and UPLOADFunction Module rsquoDOWNLOADrsquo
Example Program DOWNLOAD
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2934
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-29
Function Module rsquoUPLOADrsquo
Example Program UPLOAD
Summary
Exercises for Unit Files in the R3 SystemSolutions to Unit Files in the R3 System
Data Transfer Workbench Unit 56
Data Transfer - Objectives
Data Transfer Workbench
Preparing the Data Transfer
Testing and Executing the Data Transfer
Direct Input Management
Scheduling Direct Input
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer WorkbenchSolutions to Unit Data Transfer Workbench
Batch Input Sessions Unit 57
Objectives
Batch Input Sessions
Batch Input Processing
Batch Input Program
Format of a Batch Input Session
Creating Batch Input Sessions
Function Modules for Batch Input Programs
Structure of the BDC Table
Batch Input Processing
Batch Input Sessions
Batch Input Monitor - FunctionsSession Status
Processing Modes
Entering Data into Screens
Batch Input Processing
Session Statistics
Session Log
Summary
Exercises for Unit Batch Input SessionsSolutions to Unit Batch Input Sessions
Data Transfer Programs Unit 58Objectives
Data Transfer Programs
Customer Transfer Programs
Customer Transfer Program - Tasks
Data Transfer Programs
Batch Input Program Elements
Defining BDC Tables
Structure of the BDC Table
Determining Field Names
Determining Field Names with the Screen Painter
Structure DefinitionFunction Modules for a Batch Input Program
Function Module BDC_OPEN_GROUP
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3034
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-30
Function Module BDC_INSERT
Function Module BDC_CLOSE_GROUP
Structure of a Batch Input Program
Batch Input Program - Overview (I)
Batch Input Program - Overview (II)
Subroutine generate_bdc_dataProgram BDCRECXX (I)
Program BDCRECXX (II)
Program BDCRECXX (III)
Data Transfer Programs
Batch Input Recorder
Batch Input Recording
Recording the First Screen
Recording the Second Screen
Additional Screens Saving
Ending the Recording
Generating Sessions and Programs
Generating Batch Input Sessions
Structure of the Generated Program
Enhancing the Generated Program
Data Transfer Programs
Overview
Call Transaction Program
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (I)
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (II)
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (III)
Displaying the Messtab
Technical Implementation
Return Codes and System FieldsSystem Field Message Output
Generating Sessions When Errors Occur
Summary
Overview
Structure of a Data Transfer Program
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer ProgramSolutions to Unit Data Transfer Program
Additional Techniques Unit 59
ObjectivesAdditional Techniques - Overview
Changing Customers - Payment Transactions
Step Loop Field Names
Structure of the BDC Table
Filling BDC Tables in ABAP
Additional Techniques
Overview - Special Fields
Setting the Cursor in the Batch Input Session
Setting the Cursor in the ABAP Program
Additional Techniques
Successful Transaction EndAdditional Techniques
Processing Batch Input Sessions
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-31
Batch Input Flow
Additional Techniques
Program RSBDCSUB
Batch Input Authorizations
Service Programs
Summary Exercises for Unit Additional TechniquesSolutions for Unit Additional Techniques
Tips amp Tricks Unit 60
Tips and Tricks - Objectives
OSS Notes
Parallel Processing
Resetting Rollback Segments
Additional Tips and Information
Summary
Appendix Unit 61
Job Structure
Scheduling Jobs
Job Distribution
SAP-LUW Chronological Update
Update Principles
Asynchronous Update
Synchronous Update
Local Update
E n h a n c e m e n t s a n d M o d i f i c a t i o n s
Enhancements and Modifications Unit 62
Content
Introduction Contents
Course Overview Diagram
Main Business Scenario
Modifications Unit 63
Objectives
Modifications
What are modifications
Modifications and Upgrades
Modifications
Copying SAP Objects
Making Changes to SAP Copies (Modifications)
Registering Modifications in SSCR
Carrying Out a Registered Modification
Versions
Naming Conventions for Repository Objects
Modifications
Modifications Critical Success Factors (1)
Modifications Critical Success Factors (2)Modifications Critical Success Factors (3)
Documenting Modifications in Programs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-32
Modification Logs An Example
Modifications
Modification Adjustment SPDD and SPAU
Modification Adjustment Objects
Transaction SPAU (Process After Upgrade)
Transporting Adjustments between SystemsThe amount of work necessary at upgrade increases
Modifications Critical Repository Objects
Avoiding Adjustments
Modifications
User Exits
User Exits An Example
Using User Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Modifications
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Unit 64
Objectives
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Table Enhancements Overview
Append Structures
Append Structures at Upgrade
Customizing Includes
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Global Enhancements
Field Exits
Global and Local Field Exits
Creating Field Exits
Enhancements to Dictionary ElementsText Enhancements
Editing Text Enhancements
Keywords
Keyword Change Requirements
Keyword Changes and Release Upgrades
Restoring SAP Keywords
Enhanced Documentation for Data Elements
Customer Documentation
Summary Text Enhancements
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Solutions for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Enhancements using Customer Exits Unit 65
Objectives
Enhancements using Customer Exits
SAP Application Enhancements
Customer Enhancement Projects
SAP Enhancements and Customer Enhancement Projects
Enhancements using Customer Exits
The SAP Enhancement Creation Procedure
Implementing Enhancements in Customer SystemsCreating Customer Enhancement Projects
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-33
Editing Components
Activating Enhancement Projects
Transporting Projects
Summary Enhancement Management
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Function Module ExitsCalling and Creating Function Modules
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Organization of an X Function Group
Customer Source Code
Global Data SAP and the Customer
Subroutines Modules SAP and the Customer
Customer Screens
Customer Screens Modules
Summary Function Module Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Menu Exits
Menu Exit Requirements
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Menu Exits and Function Module Exits
Summary Menu Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Screen Exits
Subscreens in the R3 System
Calling Subscreens
Defining Screen Exits
Calling Customer Subscreens
Transporting Data to Subscreens
Transporting Data from SubscreensEditing Subscreens (1)
Editing Subscreens (2)
Summary Screen Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits Solutions for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits
Business Transaction Events Unit 66
Objectives
Business Transaction Events (BTE)
BTE Possible Scenarios (1)BTE Possible Scenarios (2)
Publish amp Subscribe vs Process Interfaces
Business Transaction Events SAP and the Customer
Finding Business Transaction Events
Creating a Publish amp Subscribe Interface
Differences between Customer Exits and BTEs
Summary
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3434
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2434
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-24
SAP LUW
Database LUW
SAP R3 System 3-tier Architecture
System Architecture Implicit DB COMMIT
Objective Bundling the DB Changes in an SAP LUW
Programming Database ChangesBundling Techniques Overview
Bunding Using Delayed Inline Changes
Bundling Using Subroutines
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Bundline Principle
Update Bundling Principle
Update Techniques
Update Function modules
V1 and V2 Update Function Modules
Logging Records for Update
Deleting Update Entries Rollback in the Dialog Program
Rollback in the Update Program
Asynchronous Update
What Happens in a Commit Work
Comparison of Bundling Techniques
Programming Database Updates
Why Set Locks
Database Locks
SAP Locking Concept
Setting Logical Locks
SAP Lock ObjectsENQUEUE and DEQUEUE Function Modules
Calling the Function Modules
The Lock Table
Validity of Locks Scope = 2
Programming Database Updates
SAP Authorization Concept
Authorization Checks
User Master Record Authorizations
Authorization Checks for Transactions
Summary
Exercises Programming Database Updates Unit Solutions Programming Database Updates Unit
Complex Transactions Unit 45
Unit Objectives
Complex Transactions
Synchronous Calls Overview
Calling a Report Program
Calling a Transaction
Encapsulating Dialogs in Function Modules
Synchronous Program Calls Main Memory Contents
Complex TransactionsAsynchronous Calls
Calling Programs Asynchronously
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2534
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-25
Complex Transactions
Passing Data Overview
Passing Data Using the Interface of ABAP Programs
The WITH Addition in the SUBMIT Statement
Memory Areas Logical Model
ABAP MemoryPassing Parameters using the SAP Memory
Passing Parameters (SAP Memory)
Complex Transactions
Synchronous Program Calls SAP LUWs
Asynchronous Program Calls SAP LUWs
Program Calls Visible Data and LUWs
Complex Transactions
RFC Scenario R3 - R3
Enabling Function Modules for RFC
RFC Using ABAP Function Modules
Program Context of a Remote Function
RFC Calls System Exceptions
Complex Transactions
Remote Function Call Overview
Process Diagram Synchronous RFC
Process Diagram Asynchronous RFC
Process Diagram Transactional RFC
Transactional RFC (tRFC) Introduction
tRFC Properties
Complex Transactions
Lock Entries for Local Program Calls
Lock Entries for RFC Calls
Summary Exercises Complex Transactions Unit Solutions Complex Transactions Unit
Static Attributes in the Screen Painter Unit 46
Screen Attributes (1)
Screen Attributes (2)
General Attributes
Dictionary Attributes
Program Attributes
Display Attributes
Special Attributes for Subscreens and Tabstrip ControlsSpecial Attributes for Table Controls
Database Updates Further Information Unit 47
Objectives
Database Updates Further Information
Asynchronous Update
Synchronous Update
Local Update
SAP LUW Timescale of Updates
Database Updates Further Information
V1 and V2 Update Function ModulesV1 Update
V2 Update
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2634
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-26
Database Updates Further Information
Validity of Locks Scope = 1
Validity of Locks Scope = 2
Validity of Locks Scope = 3
ENQUEUE Function Modules Interface Parameters
Summary
Complex Transactions Further Information Unit 48
CALL TRANSACTION lsquoTA01rsquo and SUBMIT lsquoREP01rsquo AND RETURN
Implicit End of a Program or LEAVE PROGRAM
LEAVE TO TRANSACTION lsquoTA01rsquo
SUBMIT lsquoREP01rsquo
CALL FUNCTION lsquoFUNC1rsquoPERFORM form1 IN PROGRAM program
Help Functions Unit 49
Overview Standard F1 and F4 Functions
The Search Help Concept
Dialog for an Immediate Hit List
Dialog with Preselection
Dialog for Selecting a Search Help
Search Help Concepts
Search Helps
Defining the Dialog Fields
Defining the Data Selection
Collective Search Helps
Search Help Concepts
Linking Search Helps to Screen Fields
Search Help Concepts
Programmed Help Functions OverviewProgrammed F1 and F4 Help
The POH and POV Events Process
Function Modules for Data Transport
Field Transport to and from the Screen
Determining the Contents of Screen Fields ( POV POH )
Placing Values in Screen Fields ( POV )
Special F1 Functions
Displaying Input Values for a Table Field (POV)
Search Help Concepts
Overview Input Help Mechanisms
Migrating Existing Input Help
Assigning Number Range Numbers Unit 50
Objectives
Overview
Number Range Objects
Number Range Intervals
Sub-objects
Assigning Internal Numbers
Checking External Numbers
Number Range Information
Accessing Table NRIV 1 Without a Buffer Accessing Table NRIV 2 Without a Buffer
Buffering Number Ranges
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2734
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-27
Using Function Groups to Administer Number Ranges
Summary 1
Summary 2
Creating Change Documents Unit 51
ObjectivesOverview
Change Document Structure
Change Relevance
Change Document Objects
Generating Update Programs
INCLUDE Program Structure
Application Program
Change Document Objects and Internal Tables
Reading Change Documents
Using Function Groups to Edit Change Documents
Summary (1)
Summary (2)
Appendix Unit 52
Documentation ReferencesGlossary Index
I n t e r f a c e s f o r D a t a T r a n s f e r
Interfaces for Data Transfer Unit 53
Content
Data Transfer
Objectives
Data Transfer
Transferring Data Into the R3 System
Direct Data Transfer
Data Transfer Using Interfaces
Data Transfer Workbench
Data Analysis
Data Transfer
Analyzing the SAP Transaction
Assigning DataFormat Conversion
Transferring Legacy Data into the R3 System
Data Transfer Methods
Knowledge Tools
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer
Data Analysis and Formatting Unit 54
Data Analysis - Objectives
Data Analysis and Formatting
Standard Transfer Interfaces for Standard Transfer
Standard Transfer - Tasks
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2834
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-28
IMG Documentation
Data Transfer Workbench (DTW)
Documentation in the DTW
Data Analysis and Formatting
Record Layout Types
FB01 Record Layout StructureSample Data for Record Layouts
Generating Test Data in the DTW
Data Analysis and Formatting
Translating Data
Translating Data in the Legacy System
Generating SAP Structures in the DTW
Translating Data in the R3 System
Translating Data Types
Translating Data for Transaction FB01
Translating Data - Example
Translating Data Using EXCEL
Data Analysis and Formatting
Initializing Record Layouts
Initializing Record Layouts - Example
Filling Record Layouts
Structure of Transaction FB01
Mapping Data in Transaction FB01
Filling Record Layout BGR00 - Example
Data Analysis and Formatting
Additional Tasks
Converting Data
Converting Legacy System R3 System Data
Structure of a Conversion ProgramData Analysis - Summary
Exercises for Unit Data AnalysisSolutions to Unit Data Analysis
Files in the R3 System Unit 55
Objectives
Files in the R3 System
R3 Client Server Architecture
Transferring Files
Files in the R3 System
Processing FilesOpening Files
Opening Files - Options
Binary Mode and Text Mode
Transferring Data Records
Reading Data Records
Closing Deleting a Sequential File
Filling Record Layouts for Transaction FB01 (1)
Filling Record Layouts for Transaction FB01 (2)
Sequential Files - Summary
Files in the R3 System
DOWNLOAD and UPLOADFunction Module rsquoDOWNLOADrsquo
Example Program DOWNLOAD
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2934
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-29
Function Module rsquoUPLOADrsquo
Example Program UPLOAD
Summary
Exercises for Unit Files in the R3 SystemSolutions to Unit Files in the R3 System
Data Transfer Workbench Unit 56
Data Transfer - Objectives
Data Transfer Workbench
Preparing the Data Transfer
Testing and Executing the Data Transfer
Direct Input Management
Scheduling Direct Input
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer WorkbenchSolutions to Unit Data Transfer Workbench
Batch Input Sessions Unit 57
Objectives
Batch Input Sessions
Batch Input Processing
Batch Input Program
Format of a Batch Input Session
Creating Batch Input Sessions
Function Modules for Batch Input Programs
Structure of the BDC Table
Batch Input Processing
Batch Input Sessions
Batch Input Monitor - FunctionsSession Status
Processing Modes
Entering Data into Screens
Batch Input Processing
Session Statistics
Session Log
Summary
Exercises for Unit Batch Input SessionsSolutions to Unit Batch Input Sessions
Data Transfer Programs Unit 58Objectives
Data Transfer Programs
Customer Transfer Programs
Customer Transfer Program - Tasks
Data Transfer Programs
Batch Input Program Elements
Defining BDC Tables
Structure of the BDC Table
Determining Field Names
Determining Field Names with the Screen Painter
Structure DefinitionFunction Modules for a Batch Input Program
Function Module BDC_OPEN_GROUP
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3034
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-30
Function Module BDC_INSERT
Function Module BDC_CLOSE_GROUP
Structure of a Batch Input Program
Batch Input Program - Overview (I)
Batch Input Program - Overview (II)
Subroutine generate_bdc_dataProgram BDCRECXX (I)
Program BDCRECXX (II)
Program BDCRECXX (III)
Data Transfer Programs
Batch Input Recorder
Batch Input Recording
Recording the First Screen
Recording the Second Screen
Additional Screens Saving
Ending the Recording
Generating Sessions and Programs
Generating Batch Input Sessions
Structure of the Generated Program
Enhancing the Generated Program
Data Transfer Programs
Overview
Call Transaction Program
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (I)
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (II)
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (III)
Displaying the Messtab
Technical Implementation
Return Codes and System FieldsSystem Field Message Output
Generating Sessions When Errors Occur
Summary
Overview
Structure of a Data Transfer Program
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer ProgramSolutions to Unit Data Transfer Program
Additional Techniques Unit 59
ObjectivesAdditional Techniques - Overview
Changing Customers - Payment Transactions
Step Loop Field Names
Structure of the BDC Table
Filling BDC Tables in ABAP
Additional Techniques
Overview - Special Fields
Setting the Cursor in the Batch Input Session
Setting the Cursor in the ABAP Program
Additional Techniques
Successful Transaction EndAdditional Techniques
Processing Batch Input Sessions
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-31
Batch Input Flow
Additional Techniques
Program RSBDCSUB
Batch Input Authorizations
Service Programs
Summary Exercises for Unit Additional TechniquesSolutions for Unit Additional Techniques
Tips amp Tricks Unit 60
Tips and Tricks - Objectives
OSS Notes
Parallel Processing
Resetting Rollback Segments
Additional Tips and Information
Summary
Appendix Unit 61
Job Structure
Scheduling Jobs
Job Distribution
SAP-LUW Chronological Update
Update Principles
Asynchronous Update
Synchronous Update
Local Update
E n h a n c e m e n t s a n d M o d i f i c a t i o n s
Enhancements and Modifications Unit 62
Content
Introduction Contents
Course Overview Diagram
Main Business Scenario
Modifications Unit 63
Objectives
Modifications
What are modifications
Modifications and Upgrades
Modifications
Copying SAP Objects
Making Changes to SAP Copies (Modifications)
Registering Modifications in SSCR
Carrying Out a Registered Modification
Versions
Naming Conventions for Repository Objects
Modifications
Modifications Critical Success Factors (1)
Modifications Critical Success Factors (2)Modifications Critical Success Factors (3)
Documenting Modifications in Programs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-32
Modification Logs An Example
Modifications
Modification Adjustment SPDD and SPAU
Modification Adjustment Objects
Transaction SPAU (Process After Upgrade)
Transporting Adjustments between SystemsThe amount of work necessary at upgrade increases
Modifications Critical Repository Objects
Avoiding Adjustments
Modifications
User Exits
User Exits An Example
Using User Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Modifications
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Unit 64
Objectives
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Table Enhancements Overview
Append Structures
Append Structures at Upgrade
Customizing Includes
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Global Enhancements
Field Exits
Global and Local Field Exits
Creating Field Exits
Enhancements to Dictionary ElementsText Enhancements
Editing Text Enhancements
Keywords
Keyword Change Requirements
Keyword Changes and Release Upgrades
Restoring SAP Keywords
Enhanced Documentation for Data Elements
Customer Documentation
Summary Text Enhancements
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Solutions for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Enhancements using Customer Exits Unit 65
Objectives
Enhancements using Customer Exits
SAP Application Enhancements
Customer Enhancement Projects
SAP Enhancements and Customer Enhancement Projects
Enhancements using Customer Exits
The SAP Enhancement Creation Procedure
Implementing Enhancements in Customer SystemsCreating Customer Enhancement Projects
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-33
Editing Components
Activating Enhancement Projects
Transporting Projects
Summary Enhancement Management
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Function Module ExitsCalling and Creating Function Modules
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Organization of an X Function Group
Customer Source Code
Global Data SAP and the Customer
Subroutines Modules SAP and the Customer
Customer Screens
Customer Screens Modules
Summary Function Module Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Menu Exits
Menu Exit Requirements
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Menu Exits and Function Module Exits
Summary Menu Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Screen Exits
Subscreens in the R3 System
Calling Subscreens
Defining Screen Exits
Calling Customer Subscreens
Transporting Data to Subscreens
Transporting Data from SubscreensEditing Subscreens (1)
Editing Subscreens (2)
Summary Screen Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits Solutions for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits
Business Transaction Events Unit 66
Objectives
Business Transaction Events (BTE)
BTE Possible Scenarios (1)BTE Possible Scenarios (2)
Publish amp Subscribe vs Process Interfaces
Business Transaction Events SAP and the Customer
Finding Business Transaction Events
Creating a Publish amp Subscribe Interface
Differences between Customer Exits and BTEs
Summary
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3434
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2534
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-25
Complex Transactions
Passing Data Overview
Passing Data Using the Interface of ABAP Programs
The WITH Addition in the SUBMIT Statement
Memory Areas Logical Model
ABAP MemoryPassing Parameters using the SAP Memory
Passing Parameters (SAP Memory)
Complex Transactions
Synchronous Program Calls SAP LUWs
Asynchronous Program Calls SAP LUWs
Program Calls Visible Data and LUWs
Complex Transactions
RFC Scenario R3 - R3
Enabling Function Modules for RFC
RFC Using ABAP Function Modules
Program Context of a Remote Function
RFC Calls System Exceptions
Complex Transactions
Remote Function Call Overview
Process Diagram Synchronous RFC
Process Diagram Asynchronous RFC
Process Diagram Transactional RFC
Transactional RFC (tRFC) Introduction
tRFC Properties
Complex Transactions
Lock Entries for Local Program Calls
Lock Entries for RFC Calls
Summary Exercises Complex Transactions Unit Solutions Complex Transactions Unit
Static Attributes in the Screen Painter Unit 46
Screen Attributes (1)
Screen Attributes (2)
General Attributes
Dictionary Attributes
Program Attributes
Display Attributes
Special Attributes for Subscreens and Tabstrip ControlsSpecial Attributes for Table Controls
Database Updates Further Information Unit 47
Objectives
Database Updates Further Information
Asynchronous Update
Synchronous Update
Local Update
SAP LUW Timescale of Updates
Database Updates Further Information
V1 and V2 Update Function ModulesV1 Update
V2 Update
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2634
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-26
Database Updates Further Information
Validity of Locks Scope = 1
Validity of Locks Scope = 2
Validity of Locks Scope = 3
ENQUEUE Function Modules Interface Parameters
Summary
Complex Transactions Further Information Unit 48
CALL TRANSACTION lsquoTA01rsquo and SUBMIT lsquoREP01rsquo AND RETURN
Implicit End of a Program or LEAVE PROGRAM
LEAVE TO TRANSACTION lsquoTA01rsquo
SUBMIT lsquoREP01rsquo
CALL FUNCTION lsquoFUNC1rsquoPERFORM form1 IN PROGRAM program
Help Functions Unit 49
Overview Standard F1 and F4 Functions
The Search Help Concept
Dialog for an Immediate Hit List
Dialog with Preselection
Dialog for Selecting a Search Help
Search Help Concepts
Search Helps
Defining the Dialog Fields
Defining the Data Selection
Collective Search Helps
Search Help Concepts
Linking Search Helps to Screen Fields
Search Help Concepts
Programmed Help Functions OverviewProgrammed F1 and F4 Help
The POH and POV Events Process
Function Modules for Data Transport
Field Transport to and from the Screen
Determining the Contents of Screen Fields ( POV POH )
Placing Values in Screen Fields ( POV )
Special F1 Functions
Displaying Input Values for a Table Field (POV)
Search Help Concepts
Overview Input Help Mechanisms
Migrating Existing Input Help
Assigning Number Range Numbers Unit 50
Objectives
Overview
Number Range Objects
Number Range Intervals
Sub-objects
Assigning Internal Numbers
Checking External Numbers
Number Range Information
Accessing Table NRIV 1 Without a Buffer Accessing Table NRIV 2 Without a Buffer
Buffering Number Ranges
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2734
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-27
Using Function Groups to Administer Number Ranges
Summary 1
Summary 2
Creating Change Documents Unit 51
ObjectivesOverview
Change Document Structure
Change Relevance
Change Document Objects
Generating Update Programs
INCLUDE Program Structure
Application Program
Change Document Objects and Internal Tables
Reading Change Documents
Using Function Groups to Edit Change Documents
Summary (1)
Summary (2)
Appendix Unit 52
Documentation ReferencesGlossary Index
I n t e r f a c e s f o r D a t a T r a n s f e r
Interfaces for Data Transfer Unit 53
Content
Data Transfer
Objectives
Data Transfer
Transferring Data Into the R3 System
Direct Data Transfer
Data Transfer Using Interfaces
Data Transfer Workbench
Data Analysis
Data Transfer
Analyzing the SAP Transaction
Assigning DataFormat Conversion
Transferring Legacy Data into the R3 System
Data Transfer Methods
Knowledge Tools
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer
Data Analysis and Formatting Unit 54
Data Analysis - Objectives
Data Analysis and Formatting
Standard Transfer Interfaces for Standard Transfer
Standard Transfer - Tasks
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2834
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-28
IMG Documentation
Data Transfer Workbench (DTW)
Documentation in the DTW
Data Analysis and Formatting
Record Layout Types
FB01 Record Layout StructureSample Data for Record Layouts
Generating Test Data in the DTW
Data Analysis and Formatting
Translating Data
Translating Data in the Legacy System
Generating SAP Structures in the DTW
Translating Data in the R3 System
Translating Data Types
Translating Data for Transaction FB01
Translating Data - Example
Translating Data Using EXCEL
Data Analysis and Formatting
Initializing Record Layouts
Initializing Record Layouts - Example
Filling Record Layouts
Structure of Transaction FB01
Mapping Data in Transaction FB01
Filling Record Layout BGR00 - Example
Data Analysis and Formatting
Additional Tasks
Converting Data
Converting Legacy System R3 System Data
Structure of a Conversion ProgramData Analysis - Summary
Exercises for Unit Data AnalysisSolutions to Unit Data Analysis
Files in the R3 System Unit 55
Objectives
Files in the R3 System
R3 Client Server Architecture
Transferring Files
Files in the R3 System
Processing FilesOpening Files
Opening Files - Options
Binary Mode and Text Mode
Transferring Data Records
Reading Data Records
Closing Deleting a Sequential File
Filling Record Layouts for Transaction FB01 (1)
Filling Record Layouts for Transaction FB01 (2)
Sequential Files - Summary
Files in the R3 System
DOWNLOAD and UPLOADFunction Module rsquoDOWNLOADrsquo
Example Program DOWNLOAD
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2934
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-29
Function Module rsquoUPLOADrsquo
Example Program UPLOAD
Summary
Exercises for Unit Files in the R3 SystemSolutions to Unit Files in the R3 System
Data Transfer Workbench Unit 56
Data Transfer - Objectives
Data Transfer Workbench
Preparing the Data Transfer
Testing and Executing the Data Transfer
Direct Input Management
Scheduling Direct Input
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer WorkbenchSolutions to Unit Data Transfer Workbench
Batch Input Sessions Unit 57
Objectives
Batch Input Sessions
Batch Input Processing
Batch Input Program
Format of a Batch Input Session
Creating Batch Input Sessions
Function Modules for Batch Input Programs
Structure of the BDC Table
Batch Input Processing
Batch Input Sessions
Batch Input Monitor - FunctionsSession Status
Processing Modes
Entering Data into Screens
Batch Input Processing
Session Statistics
Session Log
Summary
Exercises for Unit Batch Input SessionsSolutions to Unit Batch Input Sessions
Data Transfer Programs Unit 58Objectives
Data Transfer Programs
Customer Transfer Programs
Customer Transfer Program - Tasks
Data Transfer Programs
Batch Input Program Elements
Defining BDC Tables
Structure of the BDC Table
Determining Field Names
Determining Field Names with the Screen Painter
Structure DefinitionFunction Modules for a Batch Input Program
Function Module BDC_OPEN_GROUP
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3034
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-30
Function Module BDC_INSERT
Function Module BDC_CLOSE_GROUP
Structure of a Batch Input Program
Batch Input Program - Overview (I)
Batch Input Program - Overview (II)
Subroutine generate_bdc_dataProgram BDCRECXX (I)
Program BDCRECXX (II)
Program BDCRECXX (III)
Data Transfer Programs
Batch Input Recorder
Batch Input Recording
Recording the First Screen
Recording the Second Screen
Additional Screens Saving
Ending the Recording
Generating Sessions and Programs
Generating Batch Input Sessions
Structure of the Generated Program
Enhancing the Generated Program
Data Transfer Programs
Overview
Call Transaction Program
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (I)
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (II)
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (III)
Displaying the Messtab
Technical Implementation
Return Codes and System FieldsSystem Field Message Output
Generating Sessions When Errors Occur
Summary
Overview
Structure of a Data Transfer Program
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer ProgramSolutions to Unit Data Transfer Program
Additional Techniques Unit 59
ObjectivesAdditional Techniques - Overview
Changing Customers - Payment Transactions
Step Loop Field Names
Structure of the BDC Table
Filling BDC Tables in ABAP
Additional Techniques
Overview - Special Fields
Setting the Cursor in the Batch Input Session
Setting the Cursor in the ABAP Program
Additional Techniques
Successful Transaction EndAdditional Techniques
Processing Batch Input Sessions
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-31
Batch Input Flow
Additional Techniques
Program RSBDCSUB
Batch Input Authorizations
Service Programs
Summary Exercises for Unit Additional TechniquesSolutions for Unit Additional Techniques
Tips amp Tricks Unit 60
Tips and Tricks - Objectives
OSS Notes
Parallel Processing
Resetting Rollback Segments
Additional Tips and Information
Summary
Appendix Unit 61
Job Structure
Scheduling Jobs
Job Distribution
SAP-LUW Chronological Update
Update Principles
Asynchronous Update
Synchronous Update
Local Update
E n h a n c e m e n t s a n d M o d i f i c a t i o n s
Enhancements and Modifications Unit 62
Content
Introduction Contents
Course Overview Diagram
Main Business Scenario
Modifications Unit 63
Objectives
Modifications
What are modifications
Modifications and Upgrades
Modifications
Copying SAP Objects
Making Changes to SAP Copies (Modifications)
Registering Modifications in SSCR
Carrying Out a Registered Modification
Versions
Naming Conventions for Repository Objects
Modifications
Modifications Critical Success Factors (1)
Modifications Critical Success Factors (2)Modifications Critical Success Factors (3)
Documenting Modifications in Programs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-32
Modification Logs An Example
Modifications
Modification Adjustment SPDD and SPAU
Modification Adjustment Objects
Transaction SPAU (Process After Upgrade)
Transporting Adjustments between SystemsThe amount of work necessary at upgrade increases
Modifications Critical Repository Objects
Avoiding Adjustments
Modifications
User Exits
User Exits An Example
Using User Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Modifications
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Unit 64
Objectives
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Table Enhancements Overview
Append Structures
Append Structures at Upgrade
Customizing Includes
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Global Enhancements
Field Exits
Global and Local Field Exits
Creating Field Exits
Enhancements to Dictionary ElementsText Enhancements
Editing Text Enhancements
Keywords
Keyword Change Requirements
Keyword Changes and Release Upgrades
Restoring SAP Keywords
Enhanced Documentation for Data Elements
Customer Documentation
Summary Text Enhancements
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Solutions for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Enhancements using Customer Exits Unit 65
Objectives
Enhancements using Customer Exits
SAP Application Enhancements
Customer Enhancement Projects
SAP Enhancements and Customer Enhancement Projects
Enhancements using Customer Exits
The SAP Enhancement Creation Procedure
Implementing Enhancements in Customer SystemsCreating Customer Enhancement Projects
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-33
Editing Components
Activating Enhancement Projects
Transporting Projects
Summary Enhancement Management
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Function Module ExitsCalling and Creating Function Modules
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Organization of an X Function Group
Customer Source Code
Global Data SAP and the Customer
Subroutines Modules SAP and the Customer
Customer Screens
Customer Screens Modules
Summary Function Module Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Menu Exits
Menu Exit Requirements
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Menu Exits and Function Module Exits
Summary Menu Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Screen Exits
Subscreens in the R3 System
Calling Subscreens
Defining Screen Exits
Calling Customer Subscreens
Transporting Data to Subscreens
Transporting Data from SubscreensEditing Subscreens (1)
Editing Subscreens (2)
Summary Screen Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits Solutions for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits
Business Transaction Events Unit 66
Objectives
Business Transaction Events (BTE)
BTE Possible Scenarios (1)BTE Possible Scenarios (2)
Publish amp Subscribe vs Process Interfaces
Business Transaction Events SAP and the Customer
Finding Business Transaction Events
Creating a Publish amp Subscribe Interface
Differences between Customer Exits and BTEs
Summary
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3434
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2634
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-26
Database Updates Further Information
Validity of Locks Scope = 1
Validity of Locks Scope = 2
Validity of Locks Scope = 3
ENQUEUE Function Modules Interface Parameters
Summary
Complex Transactions Further Information Unit 48
CALL TRANSACTION lsquoTA01rsquo and SUBMIT lsquoREP01rsquo AND RETURN
Implicit End of a Program or LEAVE PROGRAM
LEAVE TO TRANSACTION lsquoTA01rsquo
SUBMIT lsquoREP01rsquo
CALL FUNCTION lsquoFUNC1rsquoPERFORM form1 IN PROGRAM program
Help Functions Unit 49
Overview Standard F1 and F4 Functions
The Search Help Concept
Dialog for an Immediate Hit List
Dialog with Preselection
Dialog for Selecting a Search Help
Search Help Concepts
Search Helps
Defining the Dialog Fields
Defining the Data Selection
Collective Search Helps
Search Help Concepts
Linking Search Helps to Screen Fields
Search Help Concepts
Programmed Help Functions OverviewProgrammed F1 and F4 Help
The POH and POV Events Process
Function Modules for Data Transport
Field Transport to and from the Screen
Determining the Contents of Screen Fields ( POV POH )
Placing Values in Screen Fields ( POV )
Special F1 Functions
Displaying Input Values for a Table Field (POV)
Search Help Concepts
Overview Input Help Mechanisms
Migrating Existing Input Help
Assigning Number Range Numbers Unit 50
Objectives
Overview
Number Range Objects
Number Range Intervals
Sub-objects
Assigning Internal Numbers
Checking External Numbers
Number Range Information
Accessing Table NRIV 1 Without a Buffer Accessing Table NRIV 2 Without a Buffer
Buffering Number Ranges
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2734
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-27
Using Function Groups to Administer Number Ranges
Summary 1
Summary 2
Creating Change Documents Unit 51
ObjectivesOverview
Change Document Structure
Change Relevance
Change Document Objects
Generating Update Programs
INCLUDE Program Structure
Application Program
Change Document Objects and Internal Tables
Reading Change Documents
Using Function Groups to Edit Change Documents
Summary (1)
Summary (2)
Appendix Unit 52
Documentation ReferencesGlossary Index
I n t e r f a c e s f o r D a t a T r a n s f e r
Interfaces for Data Transfer Unit 53
Content
Data Transfer
Objectives
Data Transfer
Transferring Data Into the R3 System
Direct Data Transfer
Data Transfer Using Interfaces
Data Transfer Workbench
Data Analysis
Data Transfer
Analyzing the SAP Transaction
Assigning DataFormat Conversion
Transferring Legacy Data into the R3 System
Data Transfer Methods
Knowledge Tools
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer
Data Analysis and Formatting Unit 54
Data Analysis - Objectives
Data Analysis and Formatting
Standard Transfer Interfaces for Standard Transfer
Standard Transfer - Tasks
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2834
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-28
IMG Documentation
Data Transfer Workbench (DTW)
Documentation in the DTW
Data Analysis and Formatting
Record Layout Types
FB01 Record Layout StructureSample Data for Record Layouts
Generating Test Data in the DTW
Data Analysis and Formatting
Translating Data
Translating Data in the Legacy System
Generating SAP Structures in the DTW
Translating Data in the R3 System
Translating Data Types
Translating Data for Transaction FB01
Translating Data - Example
Translating Data Using EXCEL
Data Analysis and Formatting
Initializing Record Layouts
Initializing Record Layouts - Example
Filling Record Layouts
Structure of Transaction FB01
Mapping Data in Transaction FB01
Filling Record Layout BGR00 - Example
Data Analysis and Formatting
Additional Tasks
Converting Data
Converting Legacy System R3 System Data
Structure of a Conversion ProgramData Analysis - Summary
Exercises for Unit Data AnalysisSolutions to Unit Data Analysis
Files in the R3 System Unit 55
Objectives
Files in the R3 System
R3 Client Server Architecture
Transferring Files
Files in the R3 System
Processing FilesOpening Files
Opening Files - Options
Binary Mode and Text Mode
Transferring Data Records
Reading Data Records
Closing Deleting a Sequential File
Filling Record Layouts for Transaction FB01 (1)
Filling Record Layouts for Transaction FB01 (2)
Sequential Files - Summary
Files in the R3 System
DOWNLOAD and UPLOADFunction Module rsquoDOWNLOADrsquo
Example Program DOWNLOAD
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2934
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-29
Function Module rsquoUPLOADrsquo
Example Program UPLOAD
Summary
Exercises for Unit Files in the R3 SystemSolutions to Unit Files in the R3 System
Data Transfer Workbench Unit 56
Data Transfer - Objectives
Data Transfer Workbench
Preparing the Data Transfer
Testing and Executing the Data Transfer
Direct Input Management
Scheduling Direct Input
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer WorkbenchSolutions to Unit Data Transfer Workbench
Batch Input Sessions Unit 57
Objectives
Batch Input Sessions
Batch Input Processing
Batch Input Program
Format of a Batch Input Session
Creating Batch Input Sessions
Function Modules for Batch Input Programs
Structure of the BDC Table
Batch Input Processing
Batch Input Sessions
Batch Input Monitor - FunctionsSession Status
Processing Modes
Entering Data into Screens
Batch Input Processing
Session Statistics
Session Log
Summary
Exercises for Unit Batch Input SessionsSolutions to Unit Batch Input Sessions
Data Transfer Programs Unit 58Objectives
Data Transfer Programs
Customer Transfer Programs
Customer Transfer Program - Tasks
Data Transfer Programs
Batch Input Program Elements
Defining BDC Tables
Structure of the BDC Table
Determining Field Names
Determining Field Names with the Screen Painter
Structure DefinitionFunction Modules for a Batch Input Program
Function Module BDC_OPEN_GROUP
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3034
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-30
Function Module BDC_INSERT
Function Module BDC_CLOSE_GROUP
Structure of a Batch Input Program
Batch Input Program - Overview (I)
Batch Input Program - Overview (II)
Subroutine generate_bdc_dataProgram BDCRECXX (I)
Program BDCRECXX (II)
Program BDCRECXX (III)
Data Transfer Programs
Batch Input Recorder
Batch Input Recording
Recording the First Screen
Recording the Second Screen
Additional Screens Saving
Ending the Recording
Generating Sessions and Programs
Generating Batch Input Sessions
Structure of the Generated Program
Enhancing the Generated Program
Data Transfer Programs
Overview
Call Transaction Program
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (I)
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (II)
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (III)
Displaying the Messtab
Technical Implementation
Return Codes and System FieldsSystem Field Message Output
Generating Sessions When Errors Occur
Summary
Overview
Structure of a Data Transfer Program
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer ProgramSolutions to Unit Data Transfer Program
Additional Techniques Unit 59
ObjectivesAdditional Techniques - Overview
Changing Customers - Payment Transactions
Step Loop Field Names
Structure of the BDC Table
Filling BDC Tables in ABAP
Additional Techniques
Overview - Special Fields
Setting the Cursor in the Batch Input Session
Setting the Cursor in the ABAP Program
Additional Techniques
Successful Transaction EndAdditional Techniques
Processing Batch Input Sessions
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-31
Batch Input Flow
Additional Techniques
Program RSBDCSUB
Batch Input Authorizations
Service Programs
Summary Exercises for Unit Additional TechniquesSolutions for Unit Additional Techniques
Tips amp Tricks Unit 60
Tips and Tricks - Objectives
OSS Notes
Parallel Processing
Resetting Rollback Segments
Additional Tips and Information
Summary
Appendix Unit 61
Job Structure
Scheduling Jobs
Job Distribution
SAP-LUW Chronological Update
Update Principles
Asynchronous Update
Synchronous Update
Local Update
E n h a n c e m e n t s a n d M o d i f i c a t i o n s
Enhancements and Modifications Unit 62
Content
Introduction Contents
Course Overview Diagram
Main Business Scenario
Modifications Unit 63
Objectives
Modifications
What are modifications
Modifications and Upgrades
Modifications
Copying SAP Objects
Making Changes to SAP Copies (Modifications)
Registering Modifications in SSCR
Carrying Out a Registered Modification
Versions
Naming Conventions for Repository Objects
Modifications
Modifications Critical Success Factors (1)
Modifications Critical Success Factors (2)Modifications Critical Success Factors (3)
Documenting Modifications in Programs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-32
Modification Logs An Example
Modifications
Modification Adjustment SPDD and SPAU
Modification Adjustment Objects
Transaction SPAU (Process After Upgrade)
Transporting Adjustments between SystemsThe amount of work necessary at upgrade increases
Modifications Critical Repository Objects
Avoiding Adjustments
Modifications
User Exits
User Exits An Example
Using User Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Modifications
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Unit 64
Objectives
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Table Enhancements Overview
Append Structures
Append Structures at Upgrade
Customizing Includes
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Global Enhancements
Field Exits
Global and Local Field Exits
Creating Field Exits
Enhancements to Dictionary ElementsText Enhancements
Editing Text Enhancements
Keywords
Keyword Change Requirements
Keyword Changes and Release Upgrades
Restoring SAP Keywords
Enhanced Documentation for Data Elements
Customer Documentation
Summary Text Enhancements
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Solutions for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Enhancements using Customer Exits Unit 65
Objectives
Enhancements using Customer Exits
SAP Application Enhancements
Customer Enhancement Projects
SAP Enhancements and Customer Enhancement Projects
Enhancements using Customer Exits
The SAP Enhancement Creation Procedure
Implementing Enhancements in Customer SystemsCreating Customer Enhancement Projects
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-33
Editing Components
Activating Enhancement Projects
Transporting Projects
Summary Enhancement Management
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Function Module ExitsCalling and Creating Function Modules
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Organization of an X Function Group
Customer Source Code
Global Data SAP and the Customer
Subroutines Modules SAP and the Customer
Customer Screens
Customer Screens Modules
Summary Function Module Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Menu Exits
Menu Exit Requirements
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Menu Exits and Function Module Exits
Summary Menu Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Screen Exits
Subscreens in the R3 System
Calling Subscreens
Defining Screen Exits
Calling Customer Subscreens
Transporting Data to Subscreens
Transporting Data from SubscreensEditing Subscreens (1)
Editing Subscreens (2)
Summary Screen Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits Solutions for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits
Business Transaction Events Unit 66
Objectives
Business Transaction Events (BTE)
BTE Possible Scenarios (1)BTE Possible Scenarios (2)
Publish amp Subscribe vs Process Interfaces
Business Transaction Events SAP and the Customer
Finding Business Transaction Events
Creating a Publish amp Subscribe Interface
Differences between Customer Exits and BTEs
Summary
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3434
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2734
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-27
Using Function Groups to Administer Number Ranges
Summary 1
Summary 2
Creating Change Documents Unit 51
ObjectivesOverview
Change Document Structure
Change Relevance
Change Document Objects
Generating Update Programs
INCLUDE Program Structure
Application Program
Change Document Objects and Internal Tables
Reading Change Documents
Using Function Groups to Edit Change Documents
Summary (1)
Summary (2)
Appendix Unit 52
Documentation ReferencesGlossary Index
I n t e r f a c e s f o r D a t a T r a n s f e r
Interfaces for Data Transfer Unit 53
Content
Data Transfer
Objectives
Data Transfer
Transferring Data Into the R3 System
Direct Data Transfer
Data Transfer Using Interfaces
Data Transfer Workbench
Data Analysis
Data Transfer
Analyzing the SAP Transaction
Assigning DataFormat Conversion
Transferring Legacy Data into the R3 System
Data Transfer Methods
Knowledge Tools
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer
Data Analysis and Formatting Unit 54
Data Analysis - Objectives
Data Analysis and Formatting
Standard Transfer Interfaces for Standard Transfer
Standard Transfer - Tasks
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2834
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-28
IMG Documentation
Data Transfer Workbench (DTW)
Documentation in the DTW
Data Analysis and Formatting
Record Layout Types
FB01 Record Layout StructureSample Data for Record Layouts
Generating Test Data in the DTW
Data Analysis and Formatting
Translating Data
Translating Data in the Legacy System
Generating SAP Structures in the DTW
Translating Data in the R3 System
Translating Data Types
Translating Data for Transaction FB01
Translating Data - Example
Translating Data Using EXCEL
Data Analysis and Formatting
Initializing Record Layouts
Initializing Record Layouts - Example
Filling Record Layouts
Structure of Transaction FB01
Mapping Data in Transaction FB01
Filling Record Layout BGR00 - Example
Data Analysis and Formatting
Additional Tasks
Converting Data
Converting Legacy System R3 System Data
Structure of a Conversion ProgramData Analysis - Summary
Exercises for Unit Data AnalysisSolutions to Unit Data Analysis
Files in the R3 System Unit 55
Objectives
Files in the R3 System
R3 Client Server Architecture
Transferring Files
Files in the R3 System
Processing FilesOpening Files
Opening Files - Options
Binary Mode and Text Mode
Transferring Data Records
Reading Data Records
Closing Deleting a Sequential File
Filling Record Layouts for Transaction FB01 (1)
Filling Record Layouts for Transaction FB01 (2)
Sequential Files - Summary
Files in the R3 System
DOWNLOAD and UPLOADFunction Module rsquoDOWNLOADrsquo
Example Program DOWNLOAD
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2934
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-29
Function Module rsquoUPLOADrsquo
Example Program UPLOAD
Summary
Exercises for Unit Files in the R3 SystemSolutions to Unit Files in the R3 System
Data Transfer Workbench Unit 56
Data Transfer - Objectives
Data Transfer Workbench
Preparing the Data Transfer
Testing and Executing the Data Transfer
Direct Input Management
Scheduling Direct Input
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer WorkbenchSolutions to Unit Data Transfer Workbench
Batch Input Sessions Unit 57
Objectives
Batch Input Sessions
Batch Input Processing
Batch Input Program
Format of a Batch Input Session
Creating Batch Input Sessions
Function Modules for Batch Input Programs
Structure of the BDC Table
Batch Input Processing
Batch Input Sessions
Batch Input Monitor - FunctionsSession Status
Processing Modes
Entering Data into Screens
Batch Input Processing
Session Statistics
Session Log
Summary
Exercises for Unit Batch Input SessionsSolutions to Unit Batch Input Sessions
Data Transfer Programs Unit 58Objectives
Data Transfer Programs
Customer Transfer Programs
Customer Transfer Program - Tasks
Data Transfer Programs
Batch Input Program Elements
Defining BDC Tables
Structure of the BDC Table
Determining Field Names
Determining Field Names with the Screen Painter
Structure DefinitionFunction Modules for a Batch Input Program
Function Module BDC_OPEN_GROUP
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3034
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-30
Function Module BDC_INSERT
Function Module BDC_CLOSE_GROUP
Structure of a Batch Input Program
Batch Input Program - Overview (I)
Batch Input Program - Overview (II)
Subroutine generate_bdc_dataProgram BDCRECXX (I)
Program BDCRECXX (II)
Program BDCRECXX (III)
Data Transfer Programs
Batch Input Recorder
Batch Input Recording
Recording the First Screen
Recording the Second Screen
Additional Screens Saving
Ending the Recording
Generating Sessions and Programs
Generating Batch Input Sessions
Structure of the Generated Program
Enhancing the Generated Program
Data Transfer Programs
Overview
Call Transaction Program
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (I)
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (II)
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (III)
Displaying the Messtab
Technical Implementation
Return Codes and System FieldsSystem Field Message Output
Generating Sessions When Errors Occur
Summary
Overview
Structure of a Data Transfer Program
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer ProgramSolutions to Unit Data Transfer Program
Additional Techniques Unit 59
ObjectivesAdditional Techniques - Overview
Changing Customers - Payment Transactions
Step Loop Field Names
Structure of the BDC Table
Filling BDC Tables in ABAP
Additional Techniques
Overview - Special Fields
Setting the Cursor in the Batch Input Session
Setting the Cursor in the ABAP Program
Additional Techniques
Successful Transaction EndAdditional Techniques
Processing Batch Input Sessions
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-31
Batch Input Flow
Additional Techniques
Program RSBDCSUB
Batch Input Authorizations
Service Programs
Summary Exercises for Unit Additional TechniquesSolutions for Unit Additional Techniques
Tips amp Tricks Unit 60
Tips and Tricks - Objectives
OSS Notes
Parallel Processing
Resetting Rollback Segments
Additional Tips and Information
Summary
Appendix Unit 61
Job Structure
Scheduling Jobs
Job Distribution
SAP-LUW Chronological Update
Update Principles
Asynchronous Update
Synchronous Update
Local Update
E n h a n c e m e n t s a n d M o d i f i c a t i o n s
Enhancements and Modifications Unit 62
Content
Introduction Contents
Course Overview Diagram
Main Business Scenario
Modifications Unit 63
Objectives
Modifications
What are modifications
Modifications and Upgrades
Modifications
Copying SAP Objects
Making Changes to SAP Copies (Modifications)
Registering Modifications in SSCR
Carrying Out a Registered Modification
Versions
Naming Conventions for Repository Objects
Modifications
Modifications Critical Success Factors (1)
Modifications Critical Success Factors (2)Modifications Critical Success Factors (3)
Documenting Modifications in Programs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-32
Modification Logs An Example
Modifications
Modification Adjustment SPDD and SPAU
Modification Adjustment Objects
Transaction SPAU (Process After Upgrade)
Transporting Adjustments between SystemsThe amount of work necessary at upgrade increases
Modifications Critical Repository Objects
Avoiding Adjustments
Modifications
User Exits
User Exits An Example
Using User Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Modifications
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Unit 64
Objectives
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Table Enhancements Overview
Append Structures
Append Structures at Upgrade
Customizing Includes
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Global Enhancements
Field Exits
Global and Local Field Exits
Creating Field Exits
Enhancements to Dictionary ElementsText Enhancements
Editing Text Enhancements
Keywords
Keyword Change Requirements
Keyword Changes and Release Upgrades
Restoring SAP Keywords
Enhanced Documentation for Data Elements
Customer Documentation
Summary Text Enhancements
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Solutions for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Enhancements using Customer Exits Unit 65
Objectives
Enhancements using Customer Exits
SAP Application Enhancements
Customer Enhancement Projects
SAP Enhancements and Customer Enhancement Projects
Enhancements using Customer Exits
The SAP Enhancement Creation Procedure
Implementing Enhancements in Customer SystemsCreating Customer Enhancement Projects
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-33
Editing Components
Activating Enhancement Projects
Transporting Projects
Summary Enhancement Management
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Function Module ExitsCalling and Creating Function Modules
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Organization of an X Function Group
Customer Source Code
Global Data SAP and the Customer
Subroutines Modules SAP and the Customer
Customer Screens
Customer Screens Modules
Summary Function Module Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Menu Exits
Menu Exit Requirements
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Menu Exits and Function Module Exits
Summary Menu Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Screen Exits
Subscreens in the R3 System
Calling Subscreens
Defining Screen Exits
Calling Customer Subscreens
Transporting Data to Subscreens
Transporting Data from SubscreensEditing Subscreens (1)
Editing Subscreens (2)
Summary Screen Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits Solutions for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits
Business Transaction Events Unit 66
Objectives
Business Transaction Events (BTE)
BTE Possible Scenarios (1)BTE Possible Scenarios (2)
Publish amp Subscribe vs Process Interfaces
Business Transaction Events SAP and the Customer
Finding Business Transaction Events
Creating a Publish amp Subscribe Interface
Differences between Customer Exits and BTEs
Summary
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3434
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2834
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-28
IMG Documentation
Data Transfer Workbench (DTW)
Documentation in the DTW
Data Analysis and Formatting
Record Layout Types
FB01 Record Layout StructureSample Data for Record Layouts
Generating Test Data in the DTW
Data Analysis and Formatting
Translating Data
Translating Data in the Legacy System
Generating SAP Structures in the DTW
Translating Data in the R3 System
Translating Data Types
Translating Data for Transaction FB01
Translating Data - Example
Translating Data Using EXCEL
Data Analysis and Formatting
Initializing Record Layouts
Initializing Record Layouts - Example
Filling Record Layouts
Structure of Transaction FB01
Mapping Data in Transaction FB01
Filling Record Layout BGR00 - Example
Data Analysis and Formatting
Additional Tasks
Converting Data
Converting Legacy System R3 System Data
Structure of a Conversion ProgramData Analysis - Summary
Exercises for Unit Data AnalysisSolutions to Unit Data Analysis
Files in the R3 System Unit 55
Objectives
Files in the R3 System
R3 Client Server Architecture
Transferring Files
Files in the R3 System
Processing FilesOpening Files
Opening Files - Options
Binary Mode and Text Mode
Transferring Data Records
Reading Data Records
Closing Deleting a Sequential File
Filling Record Layouts for Transaction FB01 (1)
Filling Record Layouts for Transaction FB01 (2)
Sequential Files - Summary
Files in the R3 System
DOWNLOAD and UPLOADFunction Module rsquoDOWNLOADrsquo
Example Program DOWNLOAD
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2934
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-29
Function Module rsquoUPLOADrsquo
Example Program UPLOAD
Summary
Exercises for Unit Files in the R3 SystemSolutions to Unit Files in the R3 System
Data Transfer Workbench Unit 56
Data Transfer - Objectives
Data Transfer Workbench
Preparing the Data Transfer
Testing and Executing the Data Transfer
Direct Input Management
Scheduling Direct Input
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer WorkbenchSolutions to Unit Data Transfer Workbench
Batch Input Sessions Unit 57
Objectives
Batch Input Sessions
Batch Input Processing
Batch Input Program
Format of a Batch Input Session
Creating Batch Input Sessions
Function Modules for Batch Input Programs
Structure of the BDC Table
Batch Input Processing
Batch Input Sessions
Batch Input Monitor - FunctionsSession Status
Processing Modes
Entering Data into Screens
Batch Input Processing
Session Statistics
Session Log
Summary
Exercises for Unit Batch Input SessionsSolutions to Unit Batch Input Sessions
Data Transfer Programs Unit 58Objectives
Data Transfer Programs
Customer Transfer Programs
Customer Transfer Program - Tasks
Data Transfer Programs
Batch Input Program Elements
Defining BDC Tables
Structure of the BDC Table
Determining Field Names
Determining Field Names with the Screen Painter
Structure DefinitionFunction Modules for a Batch Input Program
Function Module BDC_OPEN_GROUP
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3034
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-30
Function Module BDC_INSERT
Function Module BDC_CLOSE_GROUP
Structure of a Batch Input Program
Batch Input Program - Overview (I)
Batch Input Program - Overview (II)
Subroutine generate_bdc_dataProgram BDCRECXX (I)
Program BDCRECXX (II)
Program BDCRECXX (III)
Data Transfer Programs
Batch Input Recorder
Batch Input Recording
Recording the First Screen
Recording the Second Screen
Additional Screens Saving
Ending the Recording
Generating Sessions and Programs
Generating Batch Input Sessions
Structure of the Generated Program
Enhancing the Generated Program
Data Transfer Programs
Overview
Call Transaction Program
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (I)
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (II)
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (III)
Displaying the Messtab
Technical Implementation
Return Codes and System FieldsSystem Field Message Output
Generating Sessions When Errors Occur
Summary
Overview
Structure of a Data Transfer Program
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer ProgramSolutions to Unit Data Transfer Program
Additional Techniques Unit 59
ObjectivesAdditional Techniques - Overview
Changing Customers - Payment Transactions
Step Loop Field Names
Structure of the BDC Table
Filling BDC Tables in ABAP
Additional Techniques
Overview - Special Fields
Setting the Cursor in the Batch Input Session
Setting the Cursor in the ABAP Program
Additional Techniques
Successful Transaction EndAdditional Techniques
Processing Batch Input Sessions
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-31
Batch Input Flow
Additional Techniques
Program RSBDCSUB
Batch Input Authorizations
Service Programs
Summary Exercises for Unit Additional TechniquesSolutions for Unit Additional Techniques
Tips amp Tricks Unit 60
Tips and Tricks - Objectives
OSS Notes
Parallel Processing
Resetting Rollback Segments
Additional Tips and Information
Summary
Appendix Unit 61
Job Structure
Scheduling Jobs
Job Distribution
SAP-LUW Chronological Update
Update Principles
Asynchronous Update
Synchronous Update
Local Update
E n h a n c e m e n t s a n d M o d i f i c a t i o n s
Enhancements and Modifications Unit 62
Content
Introduction Contents
Course Overview Diagram
Main Business Scenario
Modifications Unit 63
Objectives
Modifications
What are modifications
Modifications and Upgrades
Modifications
Copying SAP Objects
Making Changes to SAP Copies (Modifications)
Registering Modifications in SSCR
Carrying Out a Registered Modification
Versions
Naming Conventions for Repository Objects
Modifications
Modifications Critical Success Factors (1)
Modifications Critical Success Factors (2)Modifications Critical Success Factors (3)
Documenting Modifications in Programs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-32
Modification Logs An Example
Modifications
Modification Adjustment SPDD and SPAU
Modification Adjustment Objects
Transaction SPAU (Process After Upgrade)
Transporting Adjustments between SystemsThe amount of work necessary at upgrade increases
Modifications Critical Repository Objects
Avoiding Adjustments
Modifications
User Exits
User Exits An Example
Using User Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Modifications
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Unit 64
Objectives
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Table Enhancements Overview
Append Structures
Append Structures at Upgrade
Customizing Includes
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Global Enhancements
Field Exits
Global and Local Field Exits
Creating Field Exits
Enhancements to Dictionary ElementsText Enhancements
Editing Text Enhancements
Keywords
Keyword Change Requirements
Keyword Changes and Release Upgrades
Restoring SAP Keywords
Enhanced Documentation for Data Elements
Customer Documentation
Summary Text Enhancements
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Solutions for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Enhancements using Customer Exits Unit 65
Objectives
Enhancements using Customer Exits
SAP Application Enhancements
Customer Enhancement Projects
SAP Enhancements and Customer Enhancement Projects
Enhancements using Customer Exits
The SAP Enhancement Creation Procedure
Implementing Enhancements in Customer SystemsCreating Customer Enhancement Projects
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-33
Editing Components
Activating Enhancement Projects
Transporting Projects
Summary Enhancement Management
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Function Module ExitsCalling and Creating Function Modules
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Organization of an X Function Group
Customer Source Code
Global Data SAP and the Customer
Subroutines Modules SAP and the Customer
Customer Screens
Customer Screens Modules
Summary Function Module Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Menu Exits
Menu Exit Requirements
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Menu Exits and Function Module Exits
Summary Menu Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Screen Exits
Subscreens in the R3 System
Calling Subscreens
Defining Screen Exits
Calling Customer Subscreens
Transporting Data to Subscreens
Transporting Data from SubscreensEditing Subscreens (1)
Editing Subscreens (2)
Summary Screen Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits Solutions for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits
Business Transaction Events Unit 66
Objectives
Business Transaction Events (BTE)
BTE Possible Scenarios (1)BTE Possible Scenarios (2)
Publish amp Subscribe vs Process Interfaces
Business Transaction Events SAP and the Customer
Finding Business Transaction Events
Creating a Publish amp Subscribe Interface
Differences between Customer Exits and BTEs
Summary
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3434
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 2934
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-29
Function Module rsquoUPLOADrsquo
Example Program UPLOAD
Summary
Exercises for Unit Files in the R3 SystemSolutions to Unit Files in the R3 System
Data Transfer Workbench Unit 56
Data Transfer - Objectives
Data Transfer Workbench
Preparing the Data Transfer
Testing and Executing the Data Transfer
Direct Input Management
Scheduling Direct Input
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer WorkbenchSolutions to Unit Data Transfer Workbench
Batch Input Sessions Unit 57
Objectives
Batch Input Sessions
Batch Input Processing
Batch Input Program
Format of a Batch Input Session
Creating Batch Input Sessions
Function Modules for Batch Input Programs
Structure of the BDC Table
Batch Input Processing
Batch Input Sessions
Batch Input Monitor - FunctionsSession Status
Processing Modes
Entering Data into Screens
Batch Input Processing
Session Statistics
Session Log
Summary
Exercises for Unit Batch Input SessionsSolutions to Unit Batch Input Sessions
Data Transfer Programs Unit 58Objectives
Data Transfer Programs
Customer Transfer Programs
Customer Transfer Program - Tasks
Data Transfer Programs
Batch Input Program Elements
Defining BDC Tables
Structure of the BDC Table
Determining Field Names
Determining Field Names with the Screen Painter
Structure DefinitionFunction Modules for a Batch Input Program
Function Module BDC_OPEN_GROUP
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3034
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-30
Function Module BDC_INSERT
Function Module BDC_CLOSE_GROUP
Structure of a Batch Input Program
Batch Input Program - Overview (I)
Batch Input Program - Overview (II)
Subroutine generate_bdc_dataProgram BDCRECXX (I)
Program BDCRECXX (II)
Program BDCRECXX (III)
Data Transfer Programs
Batch Input Recorder
Batch Input Recording
Recording the First Screen
Recording the Second Screen
Additional Screens Saving
Ending the Recording
Generating Sessions and Programs
Generating Batch Input Sessions
Structure of the Generated Program
Enhancing the Generated Program
Data Transfer Programs
Overview
Call Transaction Program
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (I)
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (II)
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (III)
Displaying the Messtab
Technical Implementation
Return Codes and System FieldsSystem Field Message Output
Generating Sessions When Errors Occur
Summary
Overview
Structure of a Data Transfer Program
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer ProgramSolutions to Unit Data Transfer Program
Additional Techniques Unit 59
ObjectivesAdditional Techniques - Overview
Changing Customers - Payment Transactions
Step Loop Field Names
Structure of the BDC Table
Filling BDC Tables in ABAP
Additional Techniques
Overview - Special Fields
Setting the Cursor in the Batch Input Session
Setting the Cursor in the ABAP Program
Additional Techniques
Successful Transaction EndAdditional Techniques
Processing Batch Input Sessions
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-31
Batch Input Flow
Additional Techniques
Program RSBDCSUB
Batch Input Authorizations
Service Programs
Summary Exercises for Unit Additional TechniquesSolutions for Unit Additional Techniques
Tips amp Tricks Unit 60
Tips and Tricks - Objectives
OSS Notes
Parallel Processing
Resetting Rollback Segments
Additional Tips and Information
Summary
Appendix Unit 61
Job Structure
Scheduling Jobs
Job Distribution
SAP-LUW Chronological Update
Update Principles
Asynchronous Update
Synchronous Update
Local Update
E n h a n c e m e n t s a n d M o d i f i c a t i o n s
Enhancements and Modifications Unit 62
Content
Introduction Contents
Course Overview Diagram
Main Business Scenario
Modifications Unit 63
Objectives
Modifications
What are modifications
Modifications and Upgrades
Modifications
Copying SAP Objects
Making Changes to SAP Copies (Modifications)
Registering Modifications in SSCR
Carrying Out a Registered Modification
Versions
Naming Conventions for Repository Objects
Modifications
Modifications Critical Success Factors (1)
Modifications Critical Success Factors (2)Modifications Critical Success Factors (3)
Documenting Modifications in Programs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-32
Modification Logs An Example
Modifications
Modification Adjustment SPDD and SPAU
Modification Adjustment Objects
Transaction SPAU (Process After Upgrade)
Transporting Adjustments between SystemsThe amount of work necessary at upgrade increases
Modifications Critical Repository Objects
Avoiding Adjustments
Modifications
User Exits
User Exits An Example
Using User Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Modifications
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Unit 64
Objectives
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Table Enhancements Overview
Append Structures
Append Structures at Upgrade
Customizing Includes
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Global Enhancements
Field Exits
Global and Local Field Exits
Creating Field Exits
Enhancements to Dictionary ElementsText Enhancements
Editing Text Enhancements
Keywords
Keyword Change Requirements
Keyword Changes and Release Upgrades
Restoring SAP Keywords
Enhanced Documentation for Data Elements
Customer Documentation
Summary Text Enhancements
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Solutions for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Enhancements using Customer Exits Unit 65
Objectives
Enhancements using Customer Exits
SAP Application Enhancements
Customer Enhancement Projects
SAP Enhancements and Customer Enhancement Projects
Enhancements using Customer Exits
The SAP Enhancement Creation Procedure
Implementing Enhancements in Customer SystemsCreating Customer Enhancement Projects
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-33
Editing Components
Activating Enhancement Projects
Transporting Projects
Summary Enhancement Management
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Function Module ExitsCalling and Creating Function Modules
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Organization of an X Function Group
Customer Source Code
Global Data SAP and the Customer
Subroutines Modules SAP and the Customer
Customer Screens
Customer Screens Modules
Summary Function Module Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Menu Exits
Menu Exit Requirements
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Menu Exits and Function Module Exits
Summary Menu Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Screen Exits
Subscreens in the R3 System
Calling Subscreens
Defining Screen Exits
Calling Customer Subscreens
Transporting Data to Subscreens
Transporting Data from SubscreensEditing Subscreens (1)
Editing Subscreens (2)
Summary Screen Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits Solutions for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits
Business Transaction Events Unit 66
Objectives
Business Transaction Events (BTE)
BTE Possible Scenarios (1)BTE Possible Scenarios (2)
Publish amp Subscribe vs Process Interfaces
Business Transaction Events SAP and the Customer
Finding Business Transaction Events
Creating a Publish amp Subscribe Interface
Differences between Customer Exits and BTEs
Summary
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3434
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3034
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-30
Function Module BDC_INSERT
Function Module BDC_CLOSE_GROUP
Structure of a Batch Input Program
Batch Input Program - Overview (I)
Batch Input Program - Overview (II)
Subroutine generate_bdc_dataProgram BDCRECXX (I)
Program BDCRECXX (II)
Program BDCRECXX (III)
Data Transfer Programs
Batch Input Recorder
Batch Input Recording
Recording the First Screen
Recording the Second Screen
Additional Screens Saving
Ending the Recording
Generating Sessions and Programs
Generating Batch Input Sessions
Structure of the Generated Program
Enhancing the Generated Program
Data Transfer Programs
Overview
Call Transaction Program
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (I)
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (II)
CALL TRANSACTION Statement (III)
Displaying the Messtab
Technical Implementation
Return Codes and System FieldsSystem Field Message Output
Generating Sessions When Errors Occur
Summary
Overview
Structure of a Data Transfer Program
Summary
Exercises for Unit Data Transfer ProgramSolutions to Unit Data Transfer Program
Additional Techniques Unit 59
ObjectivesAdditional Techniques - Overview
Changing Customers - Payment Transactions
Step Loop Field Names
Structure of the BDC Table
Filling BDC Tables in ABAP
Additional Techniques
Overview - Special Fields
Setting the Cursor in the Batch Input Session
Setting the Cursor in the ABAP Program
Additional Techniques
Successful Transaction EndAdditional Techniques
Processing Batch Input Sessions
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-31
Batch Input Flow
Additional Techniques
Program RSBDCSUB
Batch Input Authorizations
Service Programs
Summary Exercises for Unit Additional TechniquesSolutions for Unit Additional Techniques
Tips amp Tricks Unit 60
Tips and Tricks - Objectives
OSS Notes
Parallel Processing
Resetting Rollback Segments
Additional Tips and Information
Summary
Appendix Unit 61
Job Structure
Scheduling Jobs
Job Distribution
SAP-LUW Chronological Update
Update Principles
Asynchronous Update
Synchronous Update
Local Update
E n h a n c e m e n t s a n d M o d i f i c a t i o n s
Enhancements and Modifications Unit 62
Content
Introduction Contents
Course Overview Diagram
Main Business Scenario
Modifications Unit 63
Objectives
Modifications
What are modifications
Modifications and Upgrades
Modifications
Copying SAP Objects
Making Changes to SAP Copies (Modifications)
Registering Modifications in SSCR
Carrying Out a Registered Modification
Versions
Naming Conventions for Repository Objects
Modifications
Modifications Critical Success Factors (1)
Modifications Critical Success Factors (2)Modifications Critical Success Factors (3)
Documenting Modifications in Programs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-32
Modification Logs An Example
Modifications
Modification Adjustment SPDD and SPAU
Modification Adjustment Objects
Transaction SPAU (Process After Upgrade)
Transporting Adjustments between SystemsThe amount of work necessary at upgrade increases
Modifications Critical Repository Objects
Avoiding Adjustments
Modifications
User Exits
User Exits An Example
Using User Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Modifications
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Unit 64
Objectives
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Table Enhancements Overview
Append Structures
Append Structures at Upgrade
Customizing Includes
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Global Enhancements
Field Exits
Global and Local Field Exits
Creating Field Exits
Enhancements to Dictionary ElementsText Enhancements
Editing Text Enhancements
Keywords
Keyword Change Requirements
Keyword Changes and Release Upgrades
Restoring SAP Keywords
Enhanced Documentation for Data Elements
Customer Documentation
Summary Text Enhancements
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Solutions for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Enhancements using Customer Exits Unit 65
Objectives
Enhancements using Customer Exits
SAP Application Enhancements
Customer Enhancement Projects
SAP Enhancements and Customer Enhancement Projects
Enhancements using Customer Exits
The SAP Enhancement Creation Procedure
Implementing Enhancements in Customer SystemsCreating Customer Enhancement Projects
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-33
Editing Components
Activating Enhancement Projects
Transporting Projects
Summary Enhancement Management
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Function Module ExitsCalling and Creating Function Modules
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Organization of an X Function Group
Customer Source Code
Global Data SAP and the Customer
Subroutines Modules SAP and the Customer
Customer Screens
Customer Screens Modules
Summary Function Module Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Menu Exits
Menu Exit Requirements
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Menu Exits and Function Module Exits
Summary Menu Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Screen Exits
Subscreens in the R3 System
Calling Subscreens
Defining Screen Exits
Calling Customer Subscreens
Transporting Data to Subscreens
Transporting Data from SubscreensEditing Subscreens (1)
Editing Subscreens (2)
Summary Screen Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits Solutions for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits
Business Transaction Events Unit 66
Objectives
Business Transaction Events (BTE)
BTE Possible Scenarios (1)BTE Possible Scenarios (2)
Publish amp Subscribe vs Process Interfaces
Business Transaction Events SAP and the Customer
Finding Business Transaction Events
Creating a Publish amp Subscribe Interface
Differences between Customer Exits and BTEs
Summary
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3434
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3134
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-31
Batch Input Flow
Additional Techniques
Program RSBDCSUB
Batch Input Authorizations
Service Programs
Summary Exercises for Unit Additional TechniquesSolutions for Unit Additional Techniques
Tips amp Tricks Unit 60
Tips and Tricks - Objectives
OSS Notes
Parallel Processing
Resetting Rollback Segments
Additional Tips and Information
Summary
Appendix Unit 61
Job Structure
Scheduling Jobs
Job Distribution
SAP-LUW Chronological Update
Update Principles
Asynchronous Update
Synchronous Update
Local Update
E n h a n c e m e n t s a n d M o d i f i c a t i o n s
Enhancements and Modifications Unit 62
Content
Introduction Contents
Course Overview Diagram
Main Business Scenario
Modifications Unit 63
Objectives
Modifications
What are modifications
Modifications and Upgrades
Modifications
Copying SAP Objects
Making Changes to SAP Copies (Modifications)
Registering Modifications in SSCR
Carrying Out a Registered Modification
Versions
Naming Conventions for Repository Objects
Modifications
Modifications Critical Success Factors (1)
Modifications Critical Success Factors (2)Modifications Critical Success Factors (3)
Documenting Modifications in Programs
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-32
Modification Logs An Example
Modifications
Modification Adjustment SPDD and SPAU
Modification Adjustment Objects
Transaction SPAU (Process After Upgrade)
Transporting Adjustments between SystemsThe amount of work necessary at upgrade increases
Modifications Critical Repository Objects
Avoiding Adjustments
Modifications
User Exits
User Exits An Example
Using User Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Modifications
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Unit 64
Objectives
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Table Enhancements Overview
Append Structures
Append Structures at Upgrade
Customizing Includes
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Global Enhancements
Field Exits
Global and Local Field Exits
Creating Field Exits
Enhancements to Dictionary ElementsText Enhancements
Editing Text Enhancements
Keywords
Keyword Change Requirements
Keyword Changes and Release Upgrades
Restoring SAP Keywords
Enhanced Documentation for Data Elements
Customer Documentation
Summary Text Enhancements
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Solutions for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Enhancements using Customer Exits Unit 65
Objectives
Enhancements using Customer Exits
SAP Application Enhancements
Customer Enhancement Projects
SAP Enhancements and Customer Enhancement Projects
Enhancements using Customer Exits
The SAP Enhancement Creation Procedure
Implementing Enhancements in Customer SystemsCreating Customer Enhancement Projects
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-33
Editing Components
Activating Enhancement Projects
Transporting Projects
Summary Enhancement Management
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Function Module ExitsCalling and Creating Function Modules
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Organization of an X Function Group
Customer Source Code
Global Data SAP and the Customer
Subroutines Modules SAP and the Customer
Customer Screens
Customer Screens Modules
Summary Function Module Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Menu Exits
Menu Exit Requirements
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Menu Exits and Function Module Exits
Summary Menu Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Screen Exits
Subscreens in the R3 System
Calling Subscreens
Defining Screen Exits
Calling Customer Subscreens
Transporting Data to Subscreens
Transporting Data from SubscreensEditing Subscreens (1)
Editing Subscreens (2)
Summary Screen Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits Solutions for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits
Business Transaction Events Unit 66
Objectives
Business Transaction Events (BTE)
BTE Possible Scenarios (1)BTE Possible Scenarios (2)
Publish amp Subscribe vs Process Interfaces
Business Transaction Events SAP and the Customer
Finding Business Transaction Events
Creating a Publish amp Subscribe Interface
Differences between Customer Exits and BTEs
Summary
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3434
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3234
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-32
Modification Logs An Example
Modifications
Modification Adjustment SPDD and SPAU
Modification Adjustment Objects
Transaction SPAU (Process After Upgrade)
Transporting Adjustments between SystemsThe amount of work necessary at upgrade increases
Modifications Critical Repository Objects
Avoiding Adjustments
Modifications
User Exits
User Exits An Example
Using User Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Modifications
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Unit 64
Objectives
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Table Enhancements Overview
Append Structures
Append Structures at Upgrade
Customizing Includes
Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Global Enhancements
Field Exits
Global and Local Field Exits
Creating Field Exits
Enhancements to Dictionary ElementsText Enhancements
Editing Text Enhancements
Keywords
Keyword Change Requirements
Keyword Changes and Release Upgrades
Restoring SAP Keywords
Enhanced Documentation for Data Elements
Customer Documentation
Summary Text Enhancements
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements Solutions for Unit Enhancements to Dictionary Elements
Enhancements using Customer Exits Unit 65
Objectives
Enhancements using Customer Exits
SAP Application Enhancements
Customer Enhancement Projects
SAP Enhancements and Customer Enhancement Projects
Enhancements using Customer Exits
The SAP Enhancement Creation Procedure
Implementing Enhancements in Customer SystemsCreating Customer Enhancement Projects
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-33
Editing Components
Activating Enhancement Projects
Transporting Projects
Summary Enhancement Management
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Function Module ExitsCalling and Creating Function Modules
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Organization of an X Function Group
Customer Source Code
Global Data SAP and the Customer
Subroutines Modules SAP and the Customer
Customer Screens
Customer Screens Modules
Summary Function Module Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Menu Exits
Menu Exit Requirements
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Menu Exits and Function Module Exits
Summary Menu Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Screen Exits
Subscreens in the R3 System
Calling Subscreens
Defining Screen Exits
Calling Customer Subscreens
Transporting Data to Subscreens
Transporting Data from SubscreensEditing Subscreens (1)
Editing Subscreens (2)
Summary Screen Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits Solutions for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits
Business Transaction Events Unit 66
Objectives
Business Transaction Events (BTE)
BTE Possible Scenarios (1)BTE Possible Scenarios (2)
Publish amp Subscribe vs Process Interfaces
Business Transaction Events SAP and the Customer
Finding Business Transaction Events
Creating a Publish amp Subscribe Interface
Differences between Customer Exits and BTEs
Summary
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3434
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3334
copy SAP AG TABC40 40A ABAP Workbench 0-33
Editing Components
Activating Enhancement Projects
Transporting Projects
Summary Enhancement Management
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Function Module ExitsCalling and Creating Function Modules
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Organization of an X Function Group
Customer Source Code
Global Data SAP and the Customer
Subroutines Modules SAP and the Customer
Customer Screens
Customer Screens Modules
Summary Function Module Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Menu Exits
Menu Exit Requirements
Assigning SAP Enhancements to Customer Projects
Menu Exits and Function Module Exits
Summary Menu Exits
Enhancements using Customer Exits
Screen Exits
Subscreens in the R3 System
Calling Subscreens
Defining Screen Exits
Calling Customer Subscreens
Transporting Data to Subscreens
Transporting Data from SubscreensEditing Subscreens (1)
Editing Subscreens (2)
Summary Screen Exits
Summary
Exercises for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits Solutions for Unit Enhancements using Customer Exits
Business Transaction Events Unit 66
Objectives
Business Transaction Events (BTE)
BTE Possible Scenarios (1)BTE Possible Scenarios (2)
Publish amp Subscribe vs Process Interfaces
Business Transaction Events SAP and the Customer
Finding Business Transaction Events
Creating a Publish amp Subscribe Interface
Differences between Customer Exits and BTEs
Summary
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3434
7252019 Print 00
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullprint-00 3434